Sie sind auf Seite 1von 601

G104/G160/G161 SERVICE MANUAL

002111MIU

G104/G160/G161 SERVICE MANUAL

G104/G160/G161 SERVICE MANUAL

002111MIU

It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION. All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered trademarks or the property of their respective companies. They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricoh products.

2006 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information regarding service techniques, procedures, processes and spare parts of office equipment distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program. Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury, damage to property or loss of warranty protection. Ricoh Corporation

LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE G104 G160 G161 GESTETNER P7425dn C7526dn C7531dn COMPANY LANIER RICOH LP126cn Aficio CL4000DN LP226cn Aficio SP C410DN LP231cn Aficio SP C411DN SAVIN CLP26DN CLP27DN CLP31DN

DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. * 1 DATE 11/2004 05/2006 COMMENTS Original Printing G160/G161 Addition

G104/G160/G161
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTALLATION
1. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1 1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................1-1 1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................1-1 1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT.................................................1-2 1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-2 1.2 MACHINE INSTALLATION........................................................................1-3 1.2.1 UNPACKING ....................................................................................1-3 1.2.2 INSTALLING THE TONER BOTTLE ................................................1-5 1.2.3 LOADING PAPER ............................................................................1-7 1.2.4 CONNECTING THE POWER CORD ...............................................1-9 1.2.5 SELECTING THE PANEL DISPLAY LANGUAGE..........................1-10 1.2.6 PRINTING THE TEST PAGE .........................................................1-10 1.3 OPTIONAL UNIT INSTALLATION...........................................................1-11 1.4 METER CHARGE....................................................................................1-12 1.5 TRAY HEATER .......................................................................................1-13

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-1
2.1 USER REPLACEABLE ITEMS..................................................................2-1 2.2 SERVICE MAINTENANCE........................................................................2-2 2.2.1 RECOMMENDED CLEANING PROCEDURE..................................2-2

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1
3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ................................................3-1 3.1.1 TOOLS .............................................................................................3-1 3.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..................................................................3-2 3.2.1 ELECTRICAL BOARD UNIT ............................................................3-2 3.2.2 IOB (INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD) ........................................................3-4 3.2.3 CONTROLLER BOARD ...................................................................3-4 3.2.4 PSU (POWER SUPPLY UNIT) BOARD ...........................................3-5 3.2.5 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY BOARD 1 ................................3-5 3.2.6 EGB (ENGINE BOARD) AND HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY BOARD 2...........................................................................3-6 3.2.7 LCD PANEL......................................................................................3-6 3.3 LASER OPTICS ........................................................................................3-7
SM i G104/G160/G161

3.3.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS .......................................................3-7 3.3.2 LD UNIT............................................................................................3-8 Color registration adjustment ................................................................3-8 3.3.3 LDB.................................................................................................3-10 3.3.4 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR ........................................................3-10 3.3.5 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS ........................3-11 3.3.6 LDU SHUTTER MOTOR UNIT AND SENSOR ..............................3-11 3.4 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................3-12 3.4.1 PAPER FEED ROLLER..................................................................3-12 3.4.2 PAPER FRICTION PAD .................................................................3-13 3.4.3 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR ..................................................3-13 3.4.4 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER, FRICTION PAD ...................................3-14 3.4.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR.............................................................3-15 3.4.6 0PAPER VOLUME SENSOR, END SENSOR AND PAPER WIDTH SENSOR............................................................................3-15 3.4.6 PAPER VOLUME SENSOR, END SENSOR AND PAPER WIDTH SENSOR............................................................................3-16 3.4.7 PAPER SIZE SENSOR AND TEMPERATURE/ HUMIDITY SENSOR ........................................................................................3-17 3.4.8 PAPER FEED MOTOR...................................................................3-18 3.4.9 PAPER REGISTRATION CLUTCH, PAPER FEED CLUTCH AND BY-PASS CLUTCH................................................................3-19 3.5 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................3-20 3.5.1 COLOR DEVELOPMENT MOTOR, COLOR OPC MOTOR AND BLACK OPC/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR ................................3-20 3.5.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH .............................................................3-20 3.5.3 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT MOTOR..........................................3-21 3.5.4 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR..............................................................3-21 3.5.5 TRANSFER ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR ....................................3-22 3.5.6 ID SENSORS .................................................................................3-23 3.6 DRIVE .....................................................................................................3-23 3.6.1 DRIVE UNIT ...................................................................................3-23 3.7 DUPLEX ..................................................................................................3-24 3.7.1 DUPLEX JAM SENSOR .................................................................3-24 3.7.2 INVERTER SENSOR .....................................................................3-24 3.7.3 DUPLEX MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR .................................3-25 3.8 FUSING ...................................................................................................3-26 3.8.1 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................3-26 3.8.2 THERMISTOR AND THERMOSTAT..............................................3-26 3.8.3 FUSING LAMP ...............................................................................3-27 3.8.4 FUSING EXIT SENSOR AND PAPER EXIT SENSOR ..................3-28 3.8.5 FUSING REGISTRATION SENSOR ..............................................3-28 Fan Direction ......................................................................................3-29 3.9 ADJUSTMENTS ......................................................................................3-30 3.9.1 GAMMA ADJUSTMENT .................................................................3-30

G104/G160/G161

ii

SM

TROUBLESHOOTING
4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1
4.1 PROCESS CONTROL RESULT ...............................................................4-1 4.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................4-2 4.2.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................4-2 4.2.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................4-3 Engine SC.............................................................................................4-3 Controller Error ...................................................................................4-14 4.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ................................................................4-21 4.3.1 BLANK PRINT ................................................................................4-21 4.3.2 ALL-BLACK PRINT.........................................................................4-21 4.3.3 MISSING CMY COLOR..................................................................4-22 4.3.4 LIGHT PRINT .................................................................................4-22 4.3.5 REPEATED SPOTS OR LINES ON PRINTS .................................4-23 4.3.6 DARK VERTICAL LINE IN PRINT ..................................................4-23 4.3.7 WHITE HORIZONTAL LINES OR BANDS .....................................4-24 4.3.8 MISSING PARTS OF IMAGES.......................................................4-24 4.3.9 DIRTY BACKGROUND ..................................................................4-24 4.3.10 PARTIAL CMY COLOR DOTS .....................................................4-24 4.3.11 DARK IRREGULAR STREAKS ON PRINTS................................4-24 4.3.12 CMY COLOR IRREGULAR STREAKS ........................................4-25 4.3.13 GHOSTING ..................................................................................4-25 4.3.14 UNFUSED OR PARTIALLY FUSED PRINTS ..............................4-25 4.3.15 IMAGE SKEW ..............................................................................4-25 4.3.16 BACKGROUND STAIN ................................................................4-26 4.3.17 NO PRINTING ON PAPER EDGE................................................4-26 4.3.18 IMAGE NOT CENTERED WHEN IT SHOULD BE .......................4-26 4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................4-27 4.4.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................4-27 4.5 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................4-29 Power supply unit ...............................................................................4-29 IOB......................................................................................................4-29 4.6 LEDS ........................................................................................................4-29

SERVICE TABLES
5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1 5.1.1 SERVICE MODE OPERATION ........................................................5-1 Entering the Service Mode....................................................................5-1 Accessing the Required Program .........................................................5-2 Inputting a Value or Setting for a Service Program ...............................5-2 Exiting Service Mode ............................................................................5-2 5.1.2 REMARKS........................................................................................5-3 Display on the Control Panel Screen ....................................................5-3 Others ...................................................................................................5-4
SM iii G104/G160/G161

5.2 SERVICE MODE TABLE...........................................................................5-5 5.2.1 CONTROLLER SERVICE MODE.....................................................5-5 5.2.2 BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING ........................................................5-9 5.2.3 ENGINE SERVICE MODE .............................................................5-10 SP1-XXX (Feed) .................................................................................5-10 SP2-XXX (Drum).................................................................................5-21 SP3-XXX (Process) ............................................................................5-47 SP5-XXX (Mode) ................................................................................5-57 SP7-XXX (Data Log)...........................................................................5-71 SP8-XXX (Data Log 2)........................................................................5-82 SP9-XXX.............................................................................................5-92 5.2.4 INPUT CHECK TABLE ...................................................................5-96 5.2.5 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE ...............................................................5-98 5.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE ...........................................................................5-100 5.3.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE..................................................................5-100 5.3.2 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................5-100 Handling SD Cards ...........................................................................5-100 Upload or Download .........................................................................5-100 Network Connection..........................................................................5-100 5.3.3 FILE ARRANGEMENT .................................................................5-101 How the Program Works...................................................................5-101 Example............................................................................................5-101 5.3.4 UPDATING ...................................................................................5-102 Procedure .........................................................................................5-102 Error Handling...................................................................................5-103 Power Failure....................................................................................5-103 5.3.5 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................5-104 Uploading NVRAM Data ...................................................................5-104 Downloading NVRAM Data...............................................................5-105 5.3.6 ERROR CODE TABLE .................................................................5-106 5.4 SD CARD APPLI MOVE........................................................................5-107 5.4.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-107 5.4.2 MOVE EXEC ................................................................................5-108 5.4.3 UNDO EXEC ................................................................................5-109 Keeping the SD card.........................................................................5-109

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS


6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1 6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................................6-1 6.1.2 PAPER PATH ...................................................................................6-2 6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-3 6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE......................................................................6-4 Descriptions ..........................................................................................6-5 6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS ......................................................................6-6

G104/G160/G161

iv

SM

6.2 PROCESS CONTROL ..............................................................................6-8 6.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................6-8 6.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL ...................................................................6-9 Overview...............................................................................................6-9 Process Control Self-check...................................................................6-9 6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK PROCEDURE ....................6-11 Step 1: VSG Adjustment .....................................................................6-11 Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation .......................................6-11 Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection .......................................................6-11 Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation ......................................................6-11 Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment .........................6-12 6.2.4 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL .........................................................6-12 Toner Supply Control Modes ..............................................................6-12 Low Image Coverage..........................................................................6-13 6.2.5 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION ............................6-14 Introduction .........................................................................................6-14 Toner Near End Detection ..................................................................6-15 Toner End Detection ...........................................................................6-15 Toner End Recovery ...........................................................................6-15 6.2.6 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION ......................................................6-16 6.3 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................6-17 6.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-17 6.3.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE .....................................................................6-18 6.3.3 PAPER TRAY .................................................................................6-19 Paper Lift ............................................................................................6-19 Paper Size Detection ..........................................................................6-20 Paper Size Detection ..........................................................................6-20 Paper Near End/End Detection...........................................................6-21 Near-end detection .............................................................................6-21 End detection......................................................................................6-21 Paper width sensor .............................................................................6-21 By-pass Tray Feed and Size Detection...............................................6-22 6.3.4 DUPLEX .........................................................................................6-23 Drive ...................................................................................................6-24 Interleaving .........................................................................................6-25 6.4 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................6-26 6.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-26 6.4.2 OPTICAL PATH..............................................................................6-27 6.4.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR ........................................6-28 Overview.............................................................................................6-28 Main Scan Start Detection ..................................................................6-28 6.4.4 LD SAFETY SWITCH .....................................................................6-29 6.4.5 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ..............................6-30 Overview.............................................................................................6-30 Summary of Each Adjustment ............................................................6-31 Main Scan Skew Adjustment ..............................................................6-34 LDU Shutter ........................................................................................6-35 6.5 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT ...................................................................6-36 6.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-36
SM v G104/G160/G161

6.5.2 DRIVE AND DRIVE GEAR POSITION SENSOR ...........................6-37 Mechanism .........................................................................................6-37 Initialization Process and SC Codes ...................................................6-38 6.5.3 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING .............................................6-39 6.5.4 DRUM CLEANING..........................................................................6-40 6.5.5 WASTE TONER COLLECTION .....................................................6-41 6.5.6 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION AND SET DETECTION...................................................................................6-42 6.5.7 PCU DETECTION (DEVELOPMENT UNIT DETECTION) .............6-43 Unit Set Detection Pins .......................................................................6-43 New Unit Detection .............................................................................6-43 Error Message ....................................................................................6-44 6.6 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................6-45 6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-45 6.6.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-46 6.6.3 DEVELOPER MIXING ....................................................................6-47 6.6.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS ...................................................................6-48 6.6.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM .....................................................6-49 Overview.............................................................................................6-49 Toner Near End Detection ..................................................................6-49 6.6.6 TONER BOTTLE DETECTION ......................................................6-49 6.7 IMAGE TRANSFER.................................................................................6-50 6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-50 Transfer Unit Detection and New Unit Detection ................................6-51 Transfer belt unit detection .................................................................6-51 New transfer belt unit detection ..........................................................6-51 6.7.2 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE AND TRANSFER BELT ROLLER VOLTAGE.................................................................................................6-52 Transfer belt contact ...........................................................................6-53 Transfer belt cleaning .........................................................................6-54 6.7.3 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT............................................................6-55 Transfer from the belt..........................................................................6-55 Image transfer.....................................................................................6-55 Discharge............................................................................................6-56 Transfer roller contact .........................................................................6-57 6.8 FUSING ...................................................................................................6-58 6.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-58 6.8.2 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL............................................6-59 Machine ready temperature: [B]..........................................................6-60 Print ready temperature: [C]................................................................6-60 Target printing temperature: [D]..........................................................6-60 First print temperature: [G]..................................................................6-60 Corrections for Small Paper Sizes (less than A5) ...............................6-61 Overheat Protection ............................................................................6-61 6.8.3 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-62 6.9 CONTROLLER ........................................................................................6-63 6.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-63 6.9.2 BOARD LAYOUT ............................................................................6-65

G104/G160/G161

vi

SM

SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................7-1 2. SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES......................................................................7-3 3. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES .....................................................................7-4 3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS ............................................................................7-4 3.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE ..........................................................................7-4 4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION .....................................................................7-5 5. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ...........................................................................7-6

G160/G161 SECTION
SEE SECTION G160/G161 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 4000 (G392)


SEE SECTION G392 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

SM

vii

G104/G160/G161

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES


PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY 1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the printer and peripherals, make sure that the printer power cord is unplugged. 2. The wall outlet should be near the printer and easily accessible. 3. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components. 4. The printer drives some of its components when it completes the warm-up period. Be careful to keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components as the printer starts operation. 5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the printer is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands. HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Immediately wash eyes with plenty of water. If unsuccessful, get medical attention. OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS The printer and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer service representative who has completed the training course on those models. LITHIUM BATTERIES Incorrect replacement of lithium battery(s) on the EGB may pose risk of explosion. Replace only with the same type or with an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL 1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an open flame. 2. Dispose of used toner, the maintenance unit which includes developer or the organic photoconductor in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.) 3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations. 4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.

LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.

WARNING
Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

WARNING
WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Optics Housing Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes. CAUTION MARKING:

Trademarks Microsoft, Windows, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and /or other countries. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated. PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.

Symbols and Abbreviations


This manual uses the symbols and abbreviations shown below.
Symbol SEF LEF Meaning Refer to section number Clip ring Screw Connector Clamp Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed

Short Edge Feed (SEF)

Long Edge Feed (LEF)

IMPORTANT NOTE REGARDING THIS SERVICE MANUAL This service manual is a combination manual. It contains information pertaining to the G160/G161 models, as well as the previous G104 model. The G104 model is used as a basis for this service manual. Information specific to the G160/G161 models are located at the rear section of this manual. Unless otherwise indicated, the information contained in this service manual pertains to the G104, G160 and G161 models. Where differences between the models are indicated, refer to the G160/G161 section of the service manual for information and procedures specific to the those models.

G392 PAPER TRAY UNIT

TAB POSITION 8

G160/G161 SECTION

TAB POSITION 7

SPECIFICATIONS

TAB POSITION 6

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

TAB POSITION 5

SERVICE TABLES

TAB POSITION 4

TROUBLESHOOTING

TAB POSITION 3

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

TAB POSITION 2

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

TAB POSITION 1

INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS


1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 10C to 32C (50F to 89.6F) 2. Humidity Range: 4. Ventilation: 15% to 80% RH 3 times/hr/person 3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 2,000 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight) 5. Do not put the machine in areas that get sudden temperature changes. This includes: 1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner. 2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater. 6. Do not put the machine in areas that get exposed to corrosive gas. 7. Do not install the machine at locations over 2,500 m (8,125 ft.) above sea level. 8. Put the machine on a strong, level bottom. (Inclination on any side must be no more than 5 mm.) 9. Do not put the machine in areas with strong vibrations.

1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL


Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level

SM

1-1

G104

Installation

1. INSTALLATION

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT


Put the machine near the power source with these clearances: Left side: Rear: Right side: Front: Over 50 cm (19.7") Over 10 cm (4") Over 10 cm (4") Over 70 cm (27.6")

1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS


CAUTION 1. Make sure that the plug is tightly in the outlet. 2. Avoid multi-wiring. 3. Make sure that you ground the machine. 1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 11 A (for North America) 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 6 A (for Europe/ Asia)

2. Permitted voltage fluctuation: 10% 3. Do not set anything on the power cord.

G104

1-2

SM

MACHINE INSTALLATION

1.2.1 UNPACKING
1. Open the left cover [A] of the printer.

[A]

G105I903.WMF

2. Turn the green levers counterclockwise . Then slowly open the drum positioning plate .

3. Remove the end of the tape from the printer. 4. Slowly pull out the eight pieces of tape protruding from PCU in a horizontal direction. 5. Close the drum positioning plate. Push to lock the drum the green lever positioning plate. Then turn it clockwise .

G105I901.WMF

G105I902.WMF

6. Close the left cover.

SM

1-3

G104

Installation

1.2 MACHINE INSTALLATION

MACHINE INSTALLATION

7. Open the top cover by grasping the handles on the left and right sides.

G105I900.WMF

8. Remove the clip that prevents damage to the mouth of the toner hopper (one clip for each of the four toner hoppers).

9. Close the top cover. 10. Put labels 1 on the front of the paper tray.

G105I906.WMF

G105I908.WMF

11. Attach the supplied sticker (stating you cannot use paper for an ink-jet printer with this printer) at the front of the machine.

G105I907.WMF

G104

1-4

SM

MACHINE INSTALLATION

1. Open the top cover [A].

G105I900.WMF

2. Remove the toner bottles from the box.

G105I914.WMF

3. Shake the toner bottle up and down seven or eight times.

G105I915.WMF

SM

1-5

G104

Installation

1.2.2 INSTALLING THE TONER BOTTLE

MACHINE INSTALLATION

4. Remove the tape from the toner bottle.

5. Install the yellow toner bottle first. Hold the toner bottle in the horizontal position with the locking lever on the top side. Install the toner bottle bottom first. Then move the locking lever to the triangular mark position .

G105I916.WMF

6. Turn the fixing lever to adjust it to the position of the circular mark. Continue to press the fixing lever toward the printer until it rotates smoothly into its position. NOTE: Do not insert and remove toner bottles again and again. This causes toner leakage. 7. Do the same procedures again to insert the other three bottles: cyan (C), magenta (M), and black (K). 8. Close the top cover. NOTE: Do not turn off the power switch at the time Loading Toner shows on the display. This prevents malfunction.

G105I917.WMF

G105I918.WMF

G104

1-6

SM

MACHINE INSTALLATION

CAUTION: Be careful not to pull the paper tray with too much force when you remove it from the machine. This can let the tray fall and cause personal injury. 1. Pull the paper tray [A] out of the printer until it stops. Then tilt slightly, and pull it out. Put it on a flat surface. NOTE: You cannot pull tray 1 out if the by-pass tray is open.

[A]
G105I909.WMF

2. Adjust the green clips of the side guide and the end guide to the paper size you want.

G105I910.WMF

3. Move the green switch on the front of the tray to match the type of paper you want to load. Move the switch to the left when you load thick paper of 75 g/m2 or more.

G105I911.WMF

SM

1-7

G104

Installation

1.2.3 LOADING PAPER

MACHINE INSTALLATION

4. Arrange and load a stack of new paper into the tray with the print side up. Make sure that there is no gap between the paper and the paper guides. Adjust the paper guides to close gaps if necessary.

G105I912.WMF

5. Lift the front of the paper tray. Then slowly move the paper tray to the rear until it stops. Set the tray firmly in place to avoid paper jams.

G105I913.WMF

G104

1-8

SM

MACHINE INSTALLATION

CAUTION 1. Do not touch the plug with wet hands. This causes electrical shock. 2. When you pull the plug out of the socket, grip the plug, not the cord, to avoid damaging the cord and causing a fire or an electric shock.

NOTE: 1) Make sure to firmly connect the power plug to the socket outlet. 2) The printer must be off when you connect or disconnect the power cord. 1. Make sure that the power switch is turned off.

2. Plug in the power cord. 3. Turn the power switch on.

G105I904.WMF

NOTE: It can take a few minutes after the main power comes on before you can use the machine.

G105I905.WMF

SM

1-9

G104

Installation

1.2.4 CONNECTING THE POWER CORD

MACHINE INSTALLATION

1.2.5 SELECTING THE PANEL DISPLAY LANGUAGE


NOTE: 1) You can select one of these languages (the default is English): English, German, French, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, Norwegian, Danish, Spanish, Finnish, Portuguese, Czech, Polish or Hungarian. 2) You do not have to do this procedure if you use English. Do this procedure if you want to use a different language. 1. Turn on the printer. NOTE: Ready shows on the panel display after the machine warms up. 2. Press the Menu key. NOTE: Menu shows on the panel display. 3. Press the or 5. Press the or key to show Language. key to get the language you want. 4. Press the Enter key. Language: English shows on the panel display. 6. Press the Enter key. Menu shows on the panel display. 7. Press the On Line key. Ready shows on the panel display.

1.2.6 PRINTING A TEST PAGE


NOTE: You can check if the printer works correctly by printing a test page such as the configuration page. However, you cannot check the connection between the printer and the computer by printing the test page. 1. Turn on the printer. NOTE: Ready shows on the panel display after the machine warms up. 2. Press the Menu key. 3. Press the or key to get List/Test Print. 4. Press the Enter key. List/Test Print Config. Page shows on the panel display. 5. Make sure that Config. Page is on the display. Then press the Enter key. 6. The test printing starts shortly after. 7. Press the On Line key. Ready shows on the panel display. 8. Turn off the printer's power switch.

G104

1-10

SM

OPTIONAL UNIT INSTALLATION

These options are available for this machine. Refer to the Operating Instructions for how to install these options: Paper Tray Unit (G392). Hard disk for G104 (G395) IEEE802.11b interface (Wireless LAN: G813) IEEE1394 interface (B581) IEEE 1284 interface (B679) Bluetooth interface (B736) 128 MB DIMM (B584) 256 MB DIMM (G818) NVRAM (User account enhancement: G395)

SM

1-11

G104

Installation

1.3 OPTIONAL UNIT INSTALLATION

METER CHARGE

1.4 METER CHARGE


Change these SP modes settings if the customer has a service contract. The settings depend on the contract type.
Item Meter charge SP No. SP 5930 1 Function Specifies whether the meter charge mode is enabled or disabled. Meter charge mode enabled: The Counter menu shows immediately after the Menu key is pressed. The counter type selected by the counting method (SP5-045-1) can be displayed with the Counter menu. The counter values can also be printed with the Counter menu. The PM warning is not shown when the replacement time arrives. Meter charge mode disabled: The Counter menu is not shown. Specifies whether the counting method used in meter charge mode is based on developments or prints. Programs the service station fax number. The number is printed on the counter list when the meter charge mode is selected. This lets the user fax the counter data to the service station. Default Off

Counting method Fax No. Setting

SP 5045 1 SP 5812 2

Prints

NOTE: 1) The default setting for this machine is meter-charge mode off. 2) You cannot reset the meter-charge counter.

G104

1-12

SM

TRAY HEATER

1. Electrical boards unit [A] 2. Rear cover [B] 3. Rear cover piece [C] for the power supply connector 4. Decal [D] 5. Decal [E] [D]

[B]

[E] [A] 6. Harness [F] ( x 2, x 3) 7. Tray heater switch [G] 8. Tray heater [H] ( x 2, x 1) NOTE: You can adjust the tray heater switch setting as the below table shows with SP5953-001.
G105I101.WMF

[C] [G]

[F]

[H]
Tray heater switch On Off On Off When the Main Power turns on No power supply No power supply Power supply No power supply

G105I102.WMF

SP5953-001 0: Off 1: On

When the printer is in energy saver mode Power supply No power supply Power supply No power supply

SM

1-13

G104

Installation

1.5 TRAY HEATER

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

USER REPLACEABLE ITEMS

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 USER REPLACEABLE ITEMS
The user replaces these items if the service contract requires that the user does some of the PM.
Item PCU Transfer Belt Unit Waste Toner Bottle Maintenance Kit - Fusing Unit - Transfer Roller - Paper Feed Roller x 3 - Friction Pad x 3 - Dust Filter x 2 Remarks 50 K (YMC, BK) 100 K 50 K
Preventive Maintenance G104

100 K

Chart: Letter, 5% Mode: Continuously Printing Environment: Recommended temperature and humidity Yield changes depend on circumstances and print conditions An error message shows when a maintenance counter reaches the value in the PM table when the machines default settings are used. It is not necessary to reset counters for each part if the technician does the PM. The machine detects new components automatically and resets the necessary counters.

SM

2-1

SERVICE MAINTENANCE

2.2 SERVICE MAINTENANCE


2.2.1 RECOMMENDED CLEANING PROCEDURE
1. Turn off the main switch. 2. Remove the waste toner bottle. 3. Remove the PCUs. 4. Remove the transfer belt unit. Do not touch the transfer belt surface. 5. Remove the fusing unit. 6. Remove the standard paper tray. 7. Clean the paper path. 8. Clean all printer rollers with dry cloth only. Do not clean the transfer roller. 9. Use a blower brush to clean the laser unit windows. 10. Vacuum the interior of the printer. 11. Carefully clean the area around the transfer roller.

G104

2-2

SM

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before you do the procedures in this section. Important: Remove these before you do the procedures in this section: 4 toner bottles (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) Waste toner bottle Standard paper tray

3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS


3.1.1 TOOLS
Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 Part Number G0219350 A0299387 B6455010 B6456700 B6456800 C4019503 Description Loop Back Connector: Parallel: Bi-direct Digital Multimeter FLUKE87 SD Card PCMCIA Card Adapter USB Reader/ Writer 20X Magnification Scope Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1

SM

3-1

G104

Replacement Adjustment

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS


3.2.1 ELECTRICAL BOARD UNIT
1. Front door 2. Top cover 3. Right cover [A] ( x 1)

[A]
105R101.WMF

4. Color development motor unit [B] ( x 3, x 1)

[B]
105R102.WMF

5. Side bar [C] ( x 4) and 3 wire clamps 6. IOB (Input/Output Board) [D] ( x 2, x 3) 7. [E] x 1 CN220 (IOB)

[D] (EGB)

[C]
G105R103.WMF

[E]

G104

3-2

SM

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

8. Left cover [A] 9. Drum positioning plate [B] 10. Drum positioning plate belt [C] ( x 1) 11. [D] x 3, [E] x 1 [D] [C] [E]

[A]

[B]

G105R104.WMF

12. Electrical board unit [D] ( x 4, x 2)

G105R105.WMF

[D]

SM

3-3

G104

Replacement Adjustment

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.2.2 IOB (INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD)


1. Front door 2. Top cover 3. Right cover ( 4. Side bar ( 3.2.1) 3.2.1) [A]

5. IOB [A] ( x 2, x all)

G105R133.WMF

3.2.3 CONTROLLER BOARD


1. Controller unit [A] ( x 3) [A]

G105R111.WMF

2. Controller unit cover [B] ( x 4) 3. Controller board [C] ( x 7) NOTE: Remove the NVRAM from the old board. Then install it on the new board.

[B]

[C]
G105R135.WMF

G104

3-4

SM

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.2.4 PSU (POWER SUPPLY UNIT) BOARD


1. Electrical boards unit ( 3.2.1) [A] 2. PSU board [A] ( x 6, x 5)

G105R136.WMF

3.2.5 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY BOARD 1


1. Electrical boards unit ( 2. PSU board ( 3.2.4) 3.2.1) [A]

3. Electrical board unit flame [A] ( x 4) 4. High voltage terminal plate [B] ( x 1) 5. High voltage power supply board 1 [C] ( x 4, x 4, stand offs x 2) NOTE: Make sure that each high voltage terminal is connected securely after you replace this board.

[B]

[C]
G105R137.WMF

SM

3-5

G104

Replacement Adjustment

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.2.6 EGB (ENGINE BOARD) AND HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY BOARD 2
1. Electrical board unit ( 3.2.1) [A] [B] 2. EGB shield [A] ( x 3, x 1) 3. EGB [B] ( x 4, x 4) NOTE: Make sure that each high voltage terminal is connected securely after you replace this board. 4. High voltage terminal plate [C] ( x 1) 5. High voltage power supply board 2 [D] ( x 3, x 2) NOTE: Make sure that each high [C] G105R138.WMF voltage terminal is connected securely after you replace this board. NOTE: Remove the NVRAM from the old board. Then install it on the new board.

[D]

3.2.7 LCD PANEL


1. LCD panel [A] ( x 1)

[A]

G105R115.WMF

G104

3-6

SM

LASER OPTICS

3.3 LASER OPTICS WARNING


Turn off the main power switch and unplug the printer before you do the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.

3.3.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS


Caution decal is attached as shown below

G105R927.WMF

G105R901.WMF

WARNING
Make sure to turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet before you do any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit. This printer uses a class 3B laser beam with a wavelength of 655 nm and an output of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.

SM

3-7

G104

Replacement Adjustment

LASER OPTICS

3.3.2 LD UNIT
1. Electrical boards unit ( 3.2.1) 2. LDU [A] NOTE: Print the SMC report with SP 5990-002 before you replace the LDU.

[A]
G105R106.WMF

Color registration adjustment NOTE: You must manually perform the color registration adjustment after you install a new LDU. Perform these steps: NOTE: When the polygon mirror motor or Laser Diode Board (LDB) unit is defective, only replace the defective parts. At this time, it is not necessary to do this adjustment procedure.
1. Print the SMC report with SP 5990 2 before you replace the LDU. ( 5.1.1) Find the values for SP 2181 1, SP 2181 11, 2181 21, and 2181 31, and make a note of them. 2. Execute SP 2111 2 (Pro. Position Adj > Execute) to roughly adjust the line position after you install the new LDU. Result = OK shows on the LCD if this is done correctly. If not, do it again until you get OK. 3. Execute SP2111 3 (Skew Adjust. > Execute) to measure the skew values for each color. Result = OK shows on the LCD if this is done correctly. If not, do it again until you get OK. 4. Check the skew values with SP 2181 and write down the values. (You can also check these values if you print the SMC report again with SP 5990 2. The values will probably be different from the values on the report that you printed in step 1.) SP 2181 1 for black skew SP 2181 11 for magenta skew SP 2181 21 for cyan skew SP 2181 31 for yellow skew NOTE: The new skew values for magenta, cyan, yellow and black must all be the same as the original skew value for magenta that was recorded in step 1. The magenta color is used as a reference point.
G104 3-8 SM

LASER OPTICS

5. Open the left cover


6.

Adjust the skew adjustment cam [A] for each color with a screwdriver. You must adjust the skew values for each color until they are all the same as the original value for magenta that you [A] found in step 1, before you replaced the LDU. Example, if the new value for K (after step 4) is 300 and the old value for magenta (in step 1) is 250, you must adjust the skew for K until it is 250.
G105R902.WMF Adjustment Procedure: Turn the cam as shown in the Cam Rotation Direction (table below) to increase the skew value. Turn in the opposite direction to decrease the skew value. Adjustment value shows the change when you turn the cam one click.

Color Yellow Cyan Magenta Black

Cam Rotation Direction CW CW CCW CCW

Adjustment value 14 m 8 m 7 m 10 m

NOTE: The adjustment values in the table are not exact values. These are approximate values. CW: Clockwise, CCW: Counter-clockwise The diagram to the right shows the effect on line skew [B] when you turn the cam in a counter clockwise direction. 7. Close the left cover. Then measure the skew values again with SP 2111 3. (To do this, repeat step 3.) If these are close to the value for magenta that you found in step 1 (within one click in the above table), go to the next step. If not, do SP 2111 3 again until you get a good result. 8. Do SP 2111 1 to finely adjust the line position for each color. Try SP 2111 2 if Result = OK does not show. 9. When you get Result = OK, this adjustment is completed.
SM 3-9

Y C M K

C M
[B]

G105R903.WMF

G104

Replacement Adjustment

LASER OPTICS

3.3.3 LDB
1. LDU ( 3.3.2) [A]

[B]

2. LDB [A] ( x 2) NOTE: Make sure that the spring plate [B] holds the LDB unit.

G105R107.WMF

3.3.4 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR


1. LDU ( 3.3.2) [A]

2. Top cover [A] ( x 5, tabs x 4) NOTE: Do not touch the mirrors. Clean with an optics cloth if you touch the mirrors.

[E] 3. Polygon motor cover [B] ( x 3), shading plate [C], sponge [D] 4. Polygon mirror motor [E] ( x 4), drive board [F] ( x 2, x 1, 1 flat cable) [D]

[C]

[B]

G105R108.WMF

[F]
G105R109.WMF

G104

3-10

SM

LASER OPTICS

3.3.5 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS


1. LDU ( 3.3.2)

2. Top cover 3. Synchronizing detector board unit [A] ( x 1) 4. Synchronizing detector board [B] ( x 1, x 1) NOTE: Do not touch the mirrors. Clean with an optics cloth if you touch the mirrors. [A]
G105R110.WMF

[B]

3.3.6 LDU SHUTTER MOTOR UNIT AND SENSOR


1. Electrical boards unit ( 3.2.1) 2. LDU ( 3.3.2) 3. LDU shutter motor unit [A] ( x 2, x 2, x 1) 4. Remove the gear [B] ( x1). NOTE: To do this, turn the projection [E] of the gear to the position as shown in the diagram below. The worm gear [F] must turn to adjust the position of the projection. 5. LDU shutter sensor [C] 6. LDU shutter motor [D] ( x 2, x 1) [A]
G105R155.WMFF

[D]

[B]

[C]

[F]

[E]
G105R929.WMF

SM

3-11

G104

Replacement Adjustment

PAPER FEED

3.4 PAPER FEED


3.4.1 PAPER FEED ROLLER
1. Standard tray [A] [A]

G105R904.WMF

2. Slide the side roller holder [B] to the right. 3. Paper feed roller [C]

[B]

[C]
G105R149.WMF

G104

3-12

SM

PAPER FEED

3.4.2 PAPER FRICTION PAD


1. Standard tray ( 3.4.1)

2. Paper friction pad [A] NOTE: Make sure that the paper friction pad stick is put through the spring when you reassemble it.

[A]
Replacement Adjustment

G105R150.WMFF

3.4.3 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR


1. By-pass tray cover [A] 2. By-pass paper size sensor [B] ( x 1) [B]

[A]

G105R112.WMF

SM

3-13

G104

PAPER FEED

3.4.4 BY-PASS FEED ROLLER, FRICTION PAD


1. By-pass tray cover [A] 2. By-pass tray [B] ( x 2, x 1) and the harness cover [C] [B]

[A] 3. By-pass feed shaft cover [D] 4. Move the holding roller left [E] 5. By-pass feed roller [F]

G105R113.WMF

[C] [D]

[E] [F] 6. By-pass friction pad [G] 1) Pull up the edge of the by-pass friction pad ( ). 2) Pull the by-pass friction pad forward. When you do this, hold down the edge where its shaft is located ( ). Reassembling the by-pass friction pad 1. Place the spring [H] on the projection [I] of the by-pass tray. [I] [H]

G105R114.WMF

[G]
1

[J]
3 2 3

G105R156.WMF

2. Hold down the by-pass friction pad after you put the spring on the projection of pads reverse side ( ). 3. Release the by-pass tray friction pad when it passes through the bushing [J]. 4. Pull up the shaft of the by-pass friction pad to the busing until it clicks.

G104

3-14

SM

PAPER FEED

3.4.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR


1. Front Door 2. Fusing unit ( 3.8.1) [A] 3. Registration guide [A] 4. Registration sensor [B] ( x 1)

[B]

G105R139.WMF

SM

3-15

G104

Replacement Adjustment

PAPER FEED

3.4.6 PAPER VOLUME SENSOR, END SENSOR AND PAPER WIDTH SENSOR
1. Standard tray ( 2. Front door 3. Fusing unit ( 3.8.1) [A] 4. Harness cover [A] ( x 1) 5. Front door cover [B] ( x 1, x 2) 3.4.1)

[B]
G105R121.WMF

6. Registration guide (

3.4.5)

7. Paper dust case holder [C]

[C]
G105R140.WMF

8. Tray paper sensor box [D] ( x 2)

G105R141.WMF

[D]

G104

3-16

SM

PAPER FEED

9. Tray paper sensor box cover [A] ( x 1,) 10. Paper height sensor [B] ( x 1) 11. Paper height sensor [C] ( x 1) 12. Paper end sensor [D] ( x 1) [C] 13. Paper width sensor [E] ( x 1) NOTE: Each sensor and each cable have a number written on them. Make sure to connect the correct cables to each sensor. [B]

[A] [E]

[D]
Replacement Adjustment

G105R142.WMF

3.4.7 PAPER SIZE SENSOR AND TEMPERATURE/ HUMIDITY SENSOR


1. Standard tray ( 2. Rear cover [A] 3. Paper size sensor [B] ( x 1) 4. Temperature/Humidity sensor [C] ( x 1, x 1) [B] 3.4.1) [C]

[A]
G105R147.WMFF

SM

3-17

G104

PAPER FEED

3.4.8 PAPER FEED MOTOR


[A] 1. Front door cover ( 2. Right cover ( x 1) 3. Side bar ( 3.2.1) [B] 4. Harness guide [A] ( x 1, x 3) 5. Front support unit [B] ( x 3) 3.4.6)

G105R128.WMF

6. Paper feed motor [C] ( x 4, x 1)

[C]

G105R131.WMF

G104

3-18

SM

PAPER FEED

3.4.9 PAPER REGISTRATION CLUTCH, PAPER FEED CLUTCH AND BY-PASS CLUTCH
1. Front door 2. Front door cover ( 3. Right cover ( 4. Side bar ( 3.2.1) 3.7.3) 3.2.1) [A] 3.2.1)

5. Harness cover (

6. Paper registration clutch [A] ( x 1, x1) 8. Front support unit ( 3.4.8) [B] [D] [C]
G105R129.WMF

9. Paper feed clutch support [C] ( x 1) 10. Paper feed clutch [D] ( x 1)

SM

3-19

G104

Replacement Adjustment

7. By-pass clutch [B] ( x 1, x 1)

DEVELOPMENT

3.5 DEVELOPMENT
3.5.1 COLOR DEVELOPMENT MOTOR, COLOR OPC MOTOR AND BLACK OPC/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR
1. Front door 2. Right cover ( 3.2.1) [C] 3. Color development motor [A] ( x 4, x 1) 4. Color OPC motor [B] ( x 4, x 1) 5. Black OPC/development motor [C] ( x 4, x 1) [B]
1 2

G105R134.WMF

[A]

3.5.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH


1. Front door 2. Top cover 3. Right cover ( 3.2.1) [A] 4. Development clutch plate [A] ( x 2) 5. Development clutch [B] (metal pin x 1, x 1)

[B]

G105R130.WMF

G104

3-20

SM

DEVELOPMENT

3.5.3 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT MOTOR


1. Front door 2. Top cover 3. Right cover ( 3.2.1) 4. Transfer belt contact motor unit [A] ( x 2, x 1)

[A]
Replacement Adjustment

G105R127.WMF

3.5.4 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR


1. Front cover 2. Top cover 3. Right cover ( 3.2.1) 4. Toner supply motor unit [A] ( x 2, x 1) 5. Toner supply motor [B] ( x 2) [A]

G105R132.WMF

[B]

SM

3-21

G104

DEVELOPMENT

3.5.5 TRANSFER ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR


1. Front door 2. Left cover 3. Front door support unit [A] ( x 2, x 1) [A]

G105R143.WMF

4. Inner cover [B] ( x 2)

[B]

G105R144.WMF

5. Transfer roller contact motor unit [C] ( x 2, x 1) 6. Transfer roller contact motor [D] ( x 2)

[D]

[C]
G105R145.WMF

G104

3-22

SM

DRIVE

3.5.6 ID SENSORS
1. Front door 2. Fusing unit ( 3.8.1) [A] 3. ID sensor cover [A] ( x 1) 4. ID sensor bracket [B] ( x 3, x 1) NOTE: Do SP 2111 4 to adjust the ID sensors after you replace the ID sensor.

[B]

G105R146.WMF

3.6 DRIVE
3.6.1 DRIVE UNIT
1. Top cover 2. Front door 3. Left cover 4. Transfer belt unit 5. PCU x 4 6. Toner bottle x 4 7. Toner supply motor unit x 4 ( 3.5.4) NOTE: Clean the toner hopper and toner transport path before you remove the toner supply motor unit. If not, toner scattering can occur. 8. Right cover ( 3.2.1) [C] 9. Top frame [A] ( x 5) 10. Fusing unit fan [B] ( x 1) 11. Harness guide [C] ( x 2) 12. Drive unit [D] ( x 6, x 16) [A]

[B]
G105R151.WMFF

[D]
G105R152.WMF

SM

3-23

G104

Replacement Adjustment

DUPLEX

3.7 DUPLEX
3.7.1 DUPLEX JAM SENSOR
1. Front door cover ( 3.4.6) [B] [A]

2. Duplex jam sensor 1 [A] ( x 1) 3. Duplex jam sensor 2 [B] ( x 1)

G105R117.WMF

3.7.2 INVERTER SENSOR


1. Front door 2. Duplex paper guide plate [A] ( x 6) 3. Inverter sensor board [B] 4. Inverter sensor [C] ( x 1)

[C]

[B]

G105R119.WMF

[A]

G104

3-24

SM

DUPLEX

3.7.3 DUPLEX MOTOR AND INVERTER MOTOR


1. Front door 2. Front door cover ( 3.4.6) [B] 3. Duplex paper guide plate [A] ( x 6) 4. Harness cover [B] ( x 2) [A]

G105R153.WMF

5. Inverter motor [C] ( x 2, x 1) 6. Harness [D] 7. Harness cover [E] 8. Duplex roller unit [F] ( x 4) 9. Duplex motor [G] ( x 2, x 1)

[G]

[D]

[E] [C]

[F]
G105R154.WMF

SM

3-25

G104

Replacement Adjustment

FUSING

3.8 FUSING
CAUTION
1. Make sure that the fusing unit is cool before you touch it. The fusing unit can be very hot. 2. Make sure to restore the insulators, shields, etc after you service the fusing unit.

3.8.1 FUSING UNIT


1. Front door 2. Fusing unit [A]

[A]

G105R122.WMF

3.8.2 THERMISTOR AND THERMOSTAT


1. Front door 2. Fusing unit ( 3.8.1) 3. Fusing unit upper cover [A] ( x 4) 4. Fusing unit lower cover [B] ( x 6) [A]

[B]
G105R126.WMF

G104

3-26

SM

FUSING

5. Fusing supporter right [A] ( x 2) and left plate [B] ( x 2)

[B]

G105R124.WMF

[A]
Replacement Adjustment

6. Thermistor [C] ( x 1, x 1) 7. Thermostat [D] x 2 ( x 3) NOTE: Do not recycle a thermostat that is already opened. Safety is not guaranteed if you do this.

[D]

[C]

G105R123.WMF

3.8.3 FUSING LAMP


1. Fusing unit 2. Fusing unit upper and lower cover ( 3.8.2) 3. Fusing supporter right and left plate ( 3.8.2) 4. Fusing lamp supporter right [A] ( x 1) and left plate [B] ( x 1) 5. Fusing lamp [C] ( x 2)
G105R125.WMF

[B]

[C] [A]

SM

3-27

G104

FUSING

3.8.4 FUSING EXIT SENSOR AND PAPER EXIT SENSOR


1. Front door 2. Paper exit unit ( x 3) 3. Sensor board [A] ( x 1, x 2) 4. Fusing exit senor [B] 5. Paper exit sensor [C] [C]

[A]

[B]
G105R116.WMF

3.8.5 FUSING REGISTRATION SENSOR


1. Front door 2. Paper guide [A] ( x 2, x 1) 3. Fusing registration sensor [B] [B] [A]

G105R118.WMF

G104

3-28

SM

FUSING

Fan Direction

G105V204.WMF

NOTE: You must reinstall the cooling fans in the original orientations. Do not reinstall the cooling fans opposite to the original orientations, or the air will blow in the wrong directions.

SM

3-29

G104

Replacement Adjustment

ADJUSTMENTS

3.9 ADJUSTMENTS
3.9.1 GAMMA ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: Clean and/or replace related parts first to solve any color quality problems. Perform these procedures if adjustments are necessary:

Summary
To adjust the printer gamma: Select the print mode you want to calibrate Print a color calibration test sheet Make the gradation scales on the printout smooth from the lowest to the highest density. Adjust the CMY gradation scale at the top of the chart by balancing the density of the C, M, and Y gradation scales the CMY gray scale should change smoothly from minimum to maximum. There should be no coloration. Example:

[C] [B] [A]

G105R913.JPG

G104

3-30

SM

ADJUSTMENTS

You can adjust 15 points for each color: (example [A]) between 0 (lowest density) [B] and 255 (highest density) [C]. For each point, you can adjust the density within 0 and 255. The gradation scales marked Default are printed according to the default gamma settings in the flash ROM in the controller. The gamma adjustment changes the densities at the adjustable points in the gradation scale. The gradation scale marked Current shows the current settings. Compare the Current gradation scale with the Default at the time you perform the adjustment procedure. Select the density for each of the 15 adjustable points, excluding points 0 and 255, from the Default gradation scale. The NVRAM holds three sets of controller gamma settings: Those saved this time: Controller SP 1101 ToneCtlSet - Tone (Current) Those saved in the previous adjustment: Controller SP 1101 ToneCtlSet Tone (Prev) The factory settings: Controller SP 1101 ToneCtlSet - Tone (Factory).

Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter the controller service mode. ( 5.1.1) 2. Use the down arrow key to select Controller SP 1102 ToneCtlSet. Then press the Enter key. 3. Use the up/down key to select the mode you want to calibrate, Then press the Escape key until you get back to the controller service mode menu. 4. Use the down arrow key to select Controller SP 1103 PrnColorSheet. Then press the Enter key. 5. Use the up/down key to select Controller SP 1103 001 ToneCtlSheet (normally this is displayed by default). Then press the Enter key. 6. Press the Enter key to print out the color calibration test sheet. When Execute? shows. 7. Press the Escape key 2 times to exit from the menu. (You return to Controller SP 1103 PrnColorSheet in the controller service menu.) 8. Use the down arrow key to select Controller SP 1104 ToneCtlValue. Then press the enter key.

SM

3-31

G104

Replacement Adjustment

ADJUSTMENTS

9. Use the up/down arrow key to select the setting you want to adjust. Then press the enter key. The three digits in the display (example 016) indicate a position on the color calibration test sheet.
Operation Panel Display Set Black 1 Set Black 2 Set Black 3 : : Set Black 13 Set Black 14 Set Black 15 Set Cyan 1 ~ 15 Set Magenta 1 ~ 15 Set Yellow 1 ~ 15 Color Calibration Test Sheet Default Value 16 Default Value 32 Default Value 48 : : Default Value 208 Default Value 224 Default Value 240 See Set Black 1 ~ 15 See Set Black 1 ~ 15 See Set Black 1 ~ 15

Adjust the color density at each of the 15 points for each of the four colors. NOTE: 1) Execute these to decide what density value to input: 2) Look at the color adjustment sheet. 3) Look at the gradation scale entitled Default for the color you want to adjust. 4) Go along the scale until you reach the density you want to input. 5) Read off the value on the scale and store it in the machine. a) Use the up/down key to move the cursor along the three-digit display. Then press the Enter key. b) Use the up/down key to change the digit at the cursor. Then press the Enter key. c) Press the Escape key to exit from the menu. 6) Execute the same for all 15 points. 10. When the density setting is complete for all colors, print out a color adjustment sheet again and make sure that the gradation scale for each printed color is smooth and that the CMY gradation scale is gray. Do the adjustment again if there is an anomaly (normally, repeat this procedure 3 to 5 times). 11. Execute these when the adjustment results are satisfactory: 1) Use Controller SP 1105 ToneCtlSave in the controller service menu, to store the new settings in the controller. 2) Reset the controller (press the [Reset] key when the machine is off line) to use the new settings. NOTE: You must reset the controller to keep the new settings in the controller NVRAM.

G104

3-32

SM

TROUBLESHOOTING

PROCESS CONTROL RESULT

4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 PROCESS CONTROL RESULT
Result Success ID sensor correction error ID sensor: LED adjustment error Charge bias correction error High Vmin (Bk), High K2 (Color) error Low K2 (Color) error High K5 error Low K5 error High development gamma Low development gamma Development bias adjustment error Development bias adjustment error No process control Not successful Notes No error SC 400 SC 418 SC 300 to 307 SP3145 NOTE SP3146 NOTE SP3147 NOTE SP3147 NOTE
> 5.0, < 0.5, NOTE NOTE

The table below lists the process control results shown in SP 3821.
Number 10 21 22 31 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 90 99

NOTE: This error code does not usually occur. Although an error code may be displayed, if no problem is observed with image density and/or development gamma, nothing needs to be done. If an image problem such as low image density is observed, check the following points: Transfer belt / PCU / ID sensor / Toner Bottle The 8 numbers on the LCD in SP 3821 indicate the process control result for each color. There are two numbers for each color. The numbers are shown from left to right on the display as follows: Black, Magenta, Cyan, Yellow. For example, if process control for each color is successful: 10101010 10 (Black), 10 (Magenta), 10 (Cyan), 10 (Yellow) If a problem is detected during process control: 10515110 10 (Black), 51 (Magenta), 51 (Cyan), 10 (Yellow)

SM

4-1

G104

Troubleshooting

Vk >150V NOTE Vk < -150V NOTE Interrupt during the process control (e.g. Door open)

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


4.2.1 SUMMARY
1. All SCs are logged. 2. If a PCB is suspected to be the cause of a problem, first disconnect, then reconnect the connectors before you replace them. 3. If a motor is suspected to be the cause of a problem, first check the mechanical load before you replace motors or sensors due to a motor lock. There are 4 levels of service call conditions.
Level A B Definition To prevent damage to the machine, the main machine cannot be operated until a service representative has reset the SC. SCs that disable only the features that use the defective item. Although these SCs are not shown to the user under normal conditions, they are displayed on the operation panel only when the defective feature is selected. The SC history is updated. The machine can be operated as usual. Turning the main switch off then on resets SCs displayed on the operation panel. These are redisplayed if the error occurs again. Reset Procedure Execute SP 5810, and then turn the main power switch off and on. Turn the operation switch or main switch off and on.

C D

The SC will not be displayed. Only the SC history is updated. Turn the operation switch off and on.

G104

4-2

SM

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4.2.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS


NOTE: If the EGB or controller board is replaced, remove the NVRAM from the old board and install it on the new one. The SC level is indicated under SC number in the table below. The symbol that is in the Possible Cause/Required Action column indicates the possible cause. The figure 1,etc. that is in the Possible Cause/Required Action column indicates the required action.

Engine SC
SC
[Level]

195 [D]

202 [D]

203 [D]

204 [D]

205 [D]

SM

4-3

G104

Troubleshooting

Symptom Incorrect serial number When checking the registered product number, it does not match the printers product number.

Item Possible Cause/Required Action

Registered product number does not match the printers product number. 1. Try again to input the correct product number with SP5811-001. Polygon motor error: Time out with the polygon motor activated After the polygon motor Disconnected cable from the polygon motor drive turns on or changes the board or defective connection speed, the SCRDY_N is not Defective polygon motor or drive board active within 10 seconds. Polygon motor error: Time out with the polygon motor inactivated After the polygon motor Disconnected cable from the polygon motor drive turns off or changes the board or defective connection speed, the SCRDY_N is not Defective polygon motor or drive board inactive within 10 seconds. Polygon motor error: XSCRDY signal error PMRDY_N signal Disconnected cable from the polygon motor drive consecutively detects that board or defective connection the polygon motor is an Defective polygon motor or drive board inactive state while LDB unit 1. Check the connectors. scans. 2. Replace the polygon motor. 3. Replace the polygon motor drive board. Polygon motor error: XSCRDY signal not stable PMRDY_N signal Disconnected cable from the polygon motor drive consecutively detects that board or defective connection the polygon motor is an Defective polygon motor or drive board. inactive state while the 1. Check the connectors. polygon motor turns on or 2. Replace the polygon motor. changes the speed. 3. Replace the polygon motor drive board.

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


SC
[Level]

210 [C]

211 [C]

212 [C]

213 [C]

220 [D]

Item Symptom Possible Cause/Required Action Trailing edge laser detection error: [K] The laser synchronizing Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection signal for LDB [K] detection unit or defective connection of the trailing edge is not Defective laser synchronizing detector detected for one second Defective LDB after the LDB unit turned on Defective EGB when detecting the main 1. Check the connectors. scan magnification. 2. Replace the laser-synchronizing detector. 3. Replace the LDB. 4. Replace the EGB. Trailing edge laser detection error: [Y] Same as SC 210 The laser synchronizing detection signal for LDB [Y] of the trailing edge is not detected for one second after the LDB unit turned on when detecting the main scan magnification. Trailing edge laser detection error: [M] Same as SC 210 The laser synchronizing detection signal for LDB [M] of the trailing edge is not detected for one second after the LDB unit turned on when detecting the main scan magnification. Trailing edge laser detection error: [C] Same as SC 210 The laser synchronizing detection signal for LDB [C] of the trailing edge is not detected for one second after the LDB unit turned on when detecting the main scan magnification. Laser Synchronizing Detection Error: LDB of the leading edge [K] The laser synchronizing Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection signal for LDB [K] detection unit or defective connection of the leading edge is not Defective laser synchronizing detector output for two seconds after Defective LDB LDB unit turns on while the Defective EGB polygon motor is rotating 1. Check the connectors. normally. 2. Replace the laser-synchronizing detector. 3. Replace the LDB. 4. Replace the EGB.

G104

4-4

SM

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


SC
[Level]

222 [D]

224 [D]

226 [D]

230 [C]

231 [C]

232 [C]

Item Symptom Possible Cause/Required Action Leading edge laser detection error: [Y] Same as SC 221 The laser synchronizing detection signal for LDB [Y] of the leading edge is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally. Leading edge laser detection error: [M] Same as SC 221 The laser synchronizing detection signal for LDB [M] of the leading edge is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally. Leading edge laser detection error: [C] Same as SC 221 The laser synchronizing detection signal for LDB [C] of the leading edge is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally. FGATE: On error [K] The PFGATE ON signal Defective connection between the controller does not assert within 5 board and EGB seconds after processing Defective cable between the EGB and LDB the image in normal job or 1. Check the connectors. MUSIC for [K] starts. 2. Replace the LDB. 3. Replace the EGB. FGATE: Off error [K] 1. The PFGATE ON signal Defective connection between the controller still asserts within 5 board and EGB seconds after Defective cable between the EGB and LDB processing the image in 1. Check the connectors. normal job or MUSIC 2. Replace the LDB. for [K] ends. 3. Replace the EGB. 2. The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts. FGATE: On error [Y] Same as SC 230 The PFGATE register of GAVD does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for [Y] started.

SM

4-5

G104

Troubleshooting

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


SC
[Level]

233 [C]

234 [C]

235 [C]

236 [C]

237 [C]

240 [D]

Symptom FGATE: Off error [Y] 1. The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for [K] ends. 2. The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts. FGATE: On error [M] The PFGATE register of GAVD does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for [M] started. FGATE: Off error [M] 1. The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for [M] ends. 2. The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts. FGATE: On error [C] The PFGATE register of GAVD does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for [C] started. FGATE: Off error [C] 1. The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for [C] ends. 2. The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts. LDB error [K] The EGB detects LDB error a few times consecutively when LDB unit turns on after LDB initialisation.

Item Possible Cause/Required Action

Same as SC 231

Same as SC 230

Same as SC 231

Same as SC 230

Same as SC 231

Defective LDB 1. Replace the LDB.

G104

4-6

SM

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


SC
[Level]

241 [D]

242 [D]

243 [D]

270 [D]

300 [D]

301 [D]

302 [D]

Item Symptom Possible Cause/Required Action LDB error [Y] The EGB detects LDB error Same as SC240 a few times consecutively when LDB unit turns on after LDB initialisation. LDB error [M] The EGB detects LDB error Same as SC240 a few times consecutively when LDB unit turns on after LDB initialisation. LDB error [C] The EGB detects LDB error Same as SC240 a few times consecutively when LDB unit turns on after LDB initialisation. LDU shutter error Sensor output does not Sensor defective or LDU shutter motor defective change even if 1 second 1. Replace the LDU shutter sensor or shutter motor. passes after the LDU shutter motor is on. High voltage power board: Charge voltage output error [K] The measured voltage is Defective charge roller not proper when EGB Defective connectors measures the charge output Disconnected harness for each color. Defective high voltage power 1 1. Check the connectors. 2. Replace the PCU for black. 3. Replace the drum positioning plate. 4. Replace the high voltage power 1. High voltage power board: Charge voltage output error [M] The measured voltage is Defective charge roller not proper when EGB Defective connectors measures the charge output Disconnected harness for each color. Defective high voltage power 1 1. Check the connectors. 2. Replace the PCU for magenta. 3. Replace the drum positioning plate. 4. Replace the high voltage power 1. High voltage power board: Charge voltage output error [C] The measured voltage is Defective charge roller not proper when EGB Defective connectors measures the charge output Disconnected harness for each color. Defective high voltage power 1 1. Check the connectors. 2. Replace the PCU for cyan. 3. Replace the drum positioning plate. 4. Replace the high voltage power 1.

SM

4-7

G104

Troubleshooting

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


SC
[Level]

303 [D]

304 [D]

305 [D]

306 [D]

307 [D]

Item Symptom Possible Cause/Required Action High voltage power board: Charge voltage output error [Y] The measured voltage is Defective charge roller not proper when EGB Defective connectors measures the charge output Disconnected harness for each color. Defective high voltage power 1 1. Check the connectors. 2. Replace the PCU for yellow. 3. Replace the drum positioning plate. 4. Replace the high voltage power 1. Charge AC bias error [K] The charge current less Defective charge roller than 200 A is detected. Defective connectors Disconnected harness Defective high voltage power 1 1. Check the connectors. 2. Replace the PCU for black. 3. Replace the drum positioning plate. 4. Replace the high voltage power 1. Charge AC bias error [M] The charge current less Defective charge roller than 200 A is detected. Defective connectors Disconnected harness Defective high voltage power 1 1. Check the connectors. 2. Replace the PCU for magenta. 3. Replace the drum positioning plate. 4. Replace the high voltage power 1. Charge AC bias error [C] The charge current less Defective charge roller than 200 A is detected. Defective connectors Disconnected harness Defective high voltage power 1 1. Check the connectors. 2. Replace the PCU for cyan. 3. Replace the drum positioning plate. 4. Replace the high voltage power 1. Charge AC bias error [Y] The charge current less Defective charge roller than 200 A is detected. Defective connectors Disconnected harness Defective high voltage power 1 1. Check the connectors. 2. Replace the PCU for yellow. 3. Replace the drum positioning plate. 4. Replace the high voltage power 1.

G104

4-8

SM

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


SC
[Level]

325 [D]

360 [D]

365 [D] 366 [D] 367 [D] 368 [D]

369 [D] 370 [D] 371 [D]

SM

4-9

G104

Troubleshooting

361 [D] 362 [D] 363 [D] 364 [D]

Item Symptom Possible Cause/Required Action Color development motor error 1. LOCK signal is not Color development motor slip due to the increase detected for more than of the load torque two seconds while the 1. Adjust the load torque properly by replacing or motor START signal is cleaning the development unit. on. 2. Replace or repair the development motor if the 2. LOCK signal is not load torque is normal. cancelled within two seconds after the motor is off. TD sensor: Output maximum error [K] Vt is more than the Defective connector connection maximum value (4.5) for Increasing toner density three times consecutively. 1. Replace the PCU. TD sensor: Output maximum error [M] Same as SC 360 TD sensor: Output maximum error [C] Same as SC 360 TD sensor: Output maximum error [Y] Same as SC 360 TD sensor: Output minimum error [K] Vt is less than the minimum Defective connector connection value (0.5) for three times Decreasing toner density consecutively. 1. Replace the PCU. TD sensor Output minimum error [M] Same as SC 364 TD sensor: Output minimum error [C] Same as SC 364 TD sensor: Output minimum error [Y] Same as SC 364 TD sensor: Initial control voltage error [K] 1. Vt is less than 1 V even Defective connector connection though the control Defective TD sensor power voltage is The toner density in the developer is different adjusted to the from the initial condition. maximum. 1. Replace the PCU. 2. Vt is more than 1 V even though the control power voltage is adjusted to the minimum. TD sensor: Initial control voltage error [M] Same as SC 368 TD sensor: Initial control voltage error [C] Same as SC 368 TD sensor: Initial control voltage error [Y] Same as SC 368

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


SC
[Level]

372 [D]

373 [D]

374 [D]

375 [D]

380 [C]

396 [D]

397 [D]

400 [D]

418 [D]

Item Symptom Possible Cause/Required Action TD sensor: Initial adjustment error [K] Defective connector connection Vt is not (A 0.2) when initial setting for TD sensor Defective TD sensor is executed. The toner density in the developer is different A = SP3011-001 for [K] from the initial condition. 1. Replace the PCU. TD sensor: Initial adjustment error [M] Same as 372 Vt is not (A 0.2) when initial setting for TD sensor is executed. A = SP3011-002 for [M] TD sensor: Initial adjustment error [C]: same as 372 Same as 372 Vt is not (A 0.2) when initial setting for TD sensor is executed. A = SP3011-003 for [C] TD sensor: Initial adjustment error [Y]: same as 372 Same as 372 Vt is not (A 0.2) when initial setting for TD sensor is executed. A = SP3011-004 for [Y] Drum gear position sensor error When receiving the input Unclean or defective drum gear position sensor signal of drum gear position 1 Clean the drum gear position sensor. sensor is not correctly 2 Replace the drive unit. done, SC380 is logged. Drum motor error [K] The LOCK signal is not OPC motor slip due to the excessive load detected for 2 seconds 1. Clean the PCU. more while the start signal 2. Check the cable from the Black OPC/ of the drum motor for black Development motor. Replace it if necessary. PCU is output. 3. Replace the EGB. 4. Replace the Black OPC/ Development motor. Drum motor error [CMY] Same as SC 396 The LOCK signal is not detected for 2 seconds more while the start signal of the drum motor for color PCU is output. ID sensor correction error Defective ID sensors Regular Vsp is not (4 0.5 V) when ID sensor Dirty ID sensors or transfer belt correction is executed. ID sensor life is over. 1. Replace the ID sensors. ID sensor: LED adjustment error LED PWM adjustment is Defective ID sensors not [A] for three times Dirty ID sensors or transfer belt consecutively. ID sensor life is over. [A] = 50 < [A] < 400 1. Replace the ID sensors. 4-10 SM

G104

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


SC
[Level]

442 [D]

Symptom Transfer belt contact error The transfer belt contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at the sensor while the polygon motor rotates.

Item Possible Cause/Required Action

Dirty transfer belt contact sensor Defective transfer belt contact motor Disconnected connector of transfer belt contact sensor or motor Disconnected cable 1. Replace the transfer belt contact sensor. 2. Replace the transfer belt contact motor.

452 [D]

Transfer roller contact error The transfer roller contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at the sensor while the polygon motor rotates.

490 [D]

491 [D]

531 [D]

Defective transfer roller contact sensor Defective transfer roller contact motor Defective IOB 1. Replace the transfer roller contact sensor. 2. Replace the transfer roller contact motor. 3. Replace the IOB. High Voltage Power 1: High voltage output error Error signal is detected for One of the DC bias outputs for each PCU is 10 times consecutively. shorted or one of the transfer belt bias outputs for [Y], [M] and [C]. Power leaking Defective connection Disconnected cable Defective PCU Defective High Voltage Power 1 1. Replace the High Voltage Power 1. 2. Reset the cables and components. 3. Replace the PCU. High Voltage Power 2: High voltage output error Error signal is detected for One of the separation bias output, development 10 times consecutively. bias output and transfer belt cleaning bias output is shorted or one of the transfer belt bias output for [K] and transfer roller bias output is shorted. Power leaking Defective connection Defective PCU Defective High Voltage Power 2 1. Replace the High Voltage Power 2. 2. Reset the cables and components. 3. Replace the PCU. Paper feed / Fusing motor error 1. LOCK signal is not Defective paper feed/ fusing motor detected for more than 1. Replace the paper feed/ fusing motor. two seconds while the motor START signal is on. 2. LOCK signal is not cancelled within two seconds after the motor is off.
4-11 G104

SM

Troubleshooting

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


SC
[Level]

532 [D]

541 [A]

542 [A]

543 [A]

544 [A]

545 [A]

Item Symptom Possible Cause/Required Action Fan motor error The fan motor On signal is Defective fan motor not detected for the 1. If the error occurs again, one of the fans is components below after the defective. Remove the covers, find the defective drum motor for black is set fan and replace it. to On. PSU fan Fusing unit fan Polygon motor fan Drive unit fan Exit paper fan Thermistor error The thermistor output is Disconnected thermistor less than 0C for six Defective connector connection seconds. Print ready temperature error 1. The heating roller Defective thermistor temperature increase Thermistor coming off that is less than 67 Incorrect power supply input at the main power degrees for 9 seconds socket is detected five times Defective fusing lamp consecutively. 2. The fusing temperature does not reach the print ready temperature within 15 seconds after the fusing lamp was controlled. High temperature detection: Software The thermistor detects Defective thermistor 230C for 0.2 seconds. Defective I/O board Defective EGB High temperature detection: Hard The thermistor detects Defective thermistor 250C. Defective I/O board Defective EGB Defective fusing unit, PSU, or EGB 1. Replace the fusing unit. 2. Replace the PSU. Heating lamp error The fusing lamp is full Deformed thermistor powered for 8 seconds after Thermistor coming off the heating roller reaches Defective fusing lamp the print ready temperature.

G104

4-12

SM

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


SC
[Level]

547 [D]

557 [C]

670 [D]

687 [D]

690 [D]

Symptom Zero cross error 1. The zero cross signal is detected three times even though the heater relay is off when turning 1. on the main power. 2. 2. The zero cross signal is not detected for three seconds even though the heater relay is on after turning on the main power or closing the front door. 3. The detection error occurs twice or more in the ten zero cross signal detections. This error is defined when the detected zero cross signal is less than 17 for 200 ms. Zero cross frequency error The detection error occurs ten times in a row in ten 1. zero cross signal detections. This error is defined when the detected zero cross signal is more than 28 for 200 ms. This SC is only logged. In this case, the power frequency is defined as 60 Hz. Engine start-up error The ready signal from the engine board is not 1. detected. Controller board command error A command from the controller board is not received. 1. 2. 3. EGB data error The data transfer in the EGB is interrupted by some 1. incident (e.g. cover open etc.) during the data transfer.

Item Possible Cause/Required Action

Defective fusing lamp relay Defective fusing lamp relay circuit Unstable power supply Check the power supply source. Replace the PSU.

Noise (High frequency) Check the power supply source.

Defective engine board. Replace the engine board.

Loose connection Defective controller board Defective EGB Check the connection of the controller board. Replace the controller board. Replace the EGB Defective EGB Replace the EGB.

SM

4-13

G104

Troubleshooting

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

Controller Error
The following table shows the controller error codes. These codes show at the following times if an error occurs: Power-on After the power-on self diagnostic test Important: Always try turning the main switch off and on to check if the problem persists.
SC Item Symptom Possible Cause/Required Action [00FF] Watch-dog error While the system program Defective controller is running, other processes 1. Replace the controller if it occurs frequently. do not operate at all. [0696e] Kernel stop: Process error System completely down Defective RAM DIMM Defective SD card in slot 1 Defective controller Software error 1. Check and/or replace the RAM DIMM. 2. Check and/or replace the SD card in slot 1. 3. Replace the controller. 4. See NOTE at the end of the SC table.

818 [D]

819 [D]

[0766d] Kernel stop: VM full error Unexpected system Defective RAM DIMM memory size Defective SD card in slot 1 Defective controller Software error 1. Check and/or replace the RAM DIMM. 2. Check and/or replace the SD card in slot 1. 3. Replace the controller. 4. See NOTE at the end of the SC table.

[4361] Kernel stop: Cache error Cache error in the CPU Defective CPU 1. Replace the controller board.

[----] Kernel stop: The others Error in OS 1.

Defective memory Defective flash memory Defective CPU Replace the controller board.

G104

4-14

SM

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


SC Item Symptom Possible Cause/Required Action [0001-0015] [000A-000D] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code During the boot monitor Defective CPU device program and self Defective boot monitor program or self-diagnostic diagnostic, any exception or program cut-in are not supposed to 1. Replace the controller board. happen. If these happen, it 2. Reinstall the system firmware. is defined as SC. [00FF] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code Cache access error in the Defective CPU CPU Defective local bus 1. Turn the main switch off and on. 2. Reinstall the system program. 3. Replace the controller board. [0601, 0602, 0605, 0606, 0607, 0609] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code Exceptional command does Defective CPU devices not operate even though it 1. Replace the controller board is executed on purpose. [060A-060E] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code Cut-in command does not Defective CPU devices operate when it is executed. Defective ASIC devices 1. Replace the controller board [0610] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code Timer cut-in does not Defective CPU devices operate even though it is 1. Replace the controller board set. [0612] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code Cut-in in ASIC occurs. Defective ASIC Defective devices in which ASIC detects cut-in. 1. Replace the controller board. [06FF] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code The pipeline clock Defective CPU devices frequency rate is different Mode bit data error, which is used for initialising from the prescribed value. CPU 1. Replace the controller board [0702] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code The result when the Insufficient CPU cache program is executed in the Insufficient memory process speed command cache is different 1. Replace the controller board. from desirable value. 2. Replace the RAM DIMM. [0709, 070A] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code Even you write the data in Defective CPU devices the only cache of memory, Incorrect SPD the data is actually written Boot mode setting error in another area of memory. 1. Replace the controller board. 2. Replace the RAM DIMM.

820 [D]

SM

4-15

G104

Troubleshooting

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


SC Item Symptom Possible Cause/Required Action [0801, 0804, 0807, 0808, 0809, 80A] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code An error occurs when Defective CPU devices checking the TLB. 1. Replace the controller board. [4002-4005] Self-diagnostic error CPU: Detailed error code The calculation error in the Defective CPU CPU occurs. 1. Replace the CPU. [0B00] Self-diagnostic error - ASIC ASIC and CPU timer error Defective controller detected during self1. Replace the controller if the error is frequent. diagnostic. [0D05] Self-diagnostic error ASIC The CPU checks if the System firmware problem ASIC timer works properly Defective RAM-DIMM compared with the CPU Defective controller timer. If the ASIC timer 1. Reinstall the controller system firmware. does not function in the 2. Replace the RAM-DIMM. specified range, this SC 3. Replace the controller board. code is displayed.

821 [D]

822 [B]

823 [B]

[3003] Self-diagnostic error HDD: Time out error When the main switch is Loose connection turned on or starting the Defective HDD self-diagnostic, the HDD Defective controller stays busy for the specified 1. Check that the HDD is properly connected to the time or more. controller. 2. Replace the HDD. 3. Replace the controller. [3004] Self-diagnostic error HDD: Command error When the main switch is Defective HDD turned on or starting the 1. Replace the HDD. self-diagnostic, the diagnostic error from HDD occurs. [6101] Self-diagnostic error NIC: MAC address check sum error The result of the MAC Defective controller address check sum does 1. Replace the controller. not match the check sum stored in ROM. [6104] Self-diagnostic error NIC: PHY IC error Same as [6101] The PHY IC on the controller cannot be properly recognized. [6105] Self-diagnostic error NIC: PHY IC loop back error Same as [6101] An error occurred during the loop-back test for the PHY IC on the controller.

G104

4-16

SM

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


SC Item Symptom Possible Cause/Required Action [1401] Self-diagnostic error NVRAM The controller cannot Loose connection recognize the standard Defective standard NVRAM NVRAM installed or detects Defective controller that the NVRAM is 1. Check the standard NVRAM is firmly inserted into defective. the socket. 2. Replace the NVRAM. 3. Replace the controller. [0201] Self-diagnostic error RAM: Verification error Error detected during a Loose connection write/verify check for the Defective RAM DIMM standard RAM (SRAM Defective controller DIMM). 1. Replace the RAM DIMM. 2. Replace the controller. [0101] Self-diagnostic error ROM: Check sum error 1 The boot monitor and OS Defective SD card in slot 1 program stored in the ROM Defective controller DIMM is checked. If the 1. Replace the SD card in slot 1. check sum of the program 2. Replace the controller. is incorrect, this SC code is displayed. [0104] Self-diagnostic error ROM: Check sum error 2 All areas of the ROM DIMM Same as [0101] are checked. If the check sum of all programs stored in the ROM DIMM is incorrect, this SC code is displayed. [0302] Self-diagnostic error RAM: Composition error (Slot 0) The result of checking the Not specified RAM DIMM installed composition data of the Defective RAM DIMM RAM in Slot 0 (CN5) on the 1. Replace the RAM DIMM. controller is incorrect. 2. Replace the controller board. [0401] Self-diagnostic error RAM: Verification error (Slot 1) The data stored in the RAM Same as SC 829 [0302] in Slot 1 does not match the data when reading. [0402] Self-diagnostic error RAM: Composition error (Slot 1) Same as SC 829 [0302] The result of checking the composition data of the RAM in Slot 1 (CN6) on the controller is incorrect. Network interface error The network is unusable. Defective controller 1. Replace the controller.

824 [D]

827 [D]

828 [D]

829 [B]

850 [B]

SM

4-17

G104

Troubleshooting

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


SC Item Possible Cause/Required Action

851 [B]

Symptom IEEE1394 interface error The 1394 interface is unusable.

853 [B]

854 [B]

855 [B]

856 [B]

857 [B]

860 [B]

861 [D]

1. 2. Wireless LAN card not detected The wireless LAN card is not detected before 1. communication is established, though the wireless LAN board is detected. Wireless LAN card not detected The wireless LAN card is not detected after 1. communication is established, though the wireless LAN board is detected. Wireless LAN card error An error is detected in the wireless LAN card. 1. 2. Wireless LAN card error An error is detected in the wireless LAN board. 1. 2. USB interface error The USB interface cannot be used due to a driver error. 1. 2. HDD: Initialization error The controller detects that the hard disk fails. 1. 2. HDD: Reboot error The HDD does not become ready within 30 seconds after the power is supplied to the HDD. 1.

Defective IEEE1394 Defective controller. Replace the IEEE1394 interface board. Replace the controller. Loose connection Check the connection.

Loose connection Check the connection.

Loose connection Defective wireless LAN card Check the connection. Replace the wireless LAN card. Defective wireless LAN board Loose connection Check the connection. Replace the wireless LAN board. Defective USB driver Loose connection Check the connection. Replace the controller. HDD not initialized Defective HDD Reformat the HDD. (SP5832) Replace the HDD.

Loose connection Defective cables Defective HDD Defective controller Check the connection between the HDD and controller. 2. Check and replace the cables. 3. Replace the HDD. 4. Replace the controller.
4-18 SM

G104

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


SC Item Possible Cause/Required Action

863 [D]

Symptom HDD: Read error The data stored in the HDD cannot be read correctly.

1. 2.

Defective HDD Defective controller Replace the HDD. Replace the controller.

864 [D]

865 [D] 866 [B] 867 [D] 868 [D]

870 [B]

900 [D]

920 [B]

HDD: CRC error While reading data from the Defective HDD HDD or storing data in the 1. Replace the HDD. HDD, data transmission fails. HDD: Access error An error is detected while Defective HDD operating the HDD. 1. Replace the HDD. SD card authentication error A correct license is not SD-card data is corrupted. found in the SD card. 1. Store correct data in the SD card. SD card error The SD card is ejected from The SD card is ejected from the slot. the slot. 1. Install the SD card. SD card access error [243-253: File system error, 254 or blank: Device error] SD card error occurs when Defective SD card SD card is activated. Defective SD card controller 1. For a file system error, format the SD card on your PC. 2. For a device error, turn the mains switch off and on. 3. Replace the SD card. 4. Replace the controller. Address data error An error is detected in the Defective software program data copied to the address Defective HDD book over a network. Incorrect path to the sever 1. Initialize the address book data (SP 5846 50). 2. Initialize the user information (format the hard disk with SP5832). 3. Replace the HDD. Electric counter error Abnormal data is stored in Defective NVRAM the counters. Defective controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on. 2. Check the connection between the NVRAM and controller. 3. Replace the NVRAM. 4. Replace the controller. Printer function error The error that causes the Turn the main switch off/on, or install Printer malfunction in the software Application firmware application is detected. Unexpected hardware structure (insufficient memory or hard disk space.)

SM

4-19

G104

Troubleshooting

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


SC Item Symptom Possible Cause/Required Action Printer font error No font is detected in the Install the System, Printer Application, NIB, and machines that have the font Web System firmware. in the SD card when the printer application is run. Software performance error 1 The software makes an Defective software unexpected operation. Defective controller Software error 1. Reinstall the controller and/or engine main firmware. 2. See NOTE 1 at the end of the SC table. Software performance error 2 Unexpected software error The machine does not stop and the SC code is not displayed. The machine automatically recovers. detected, which does not affect operation of the However, the SC code is logged in the engine machine summary sheet (SMC). SC not defined SC that is not controlled in Defective system software the system occurs. Application start error No applications start within Loose connection of RAM-DIMM, SD card in slot 60 seconds after the power is 1 turned on. Defective controller Software problem 1. Check if the RAM-DIMM and SD card in slot 1 are properly connected. 2. Reinstall the controller system firmware. 3. Replace the controller.

921 [B]

990 [D]

991 [C]

992 [D] 998 [D]

NOTE 1: If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file), the problem may be caused by a software error. In this case, the following data and information needs to be sent back to your product specialist. Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken Summary sheet (SP mode 1 Service/Printer SP, SP 1004 [Print Summary]) SMC - All (SP 5990 2) SMC - Logging (SP 5990 4) Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the problem is logged.) Image file which causes the problem, if possible

G104

4-20

SM

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

4.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE


NOTE: When replacing the engine control board, remove the NVRAM from the original engine control board and install it on the new one. SYMPTOM

4.3.1 BLANK PRINT


Symptom No image is printed. Possible cause Defective LDU Defective PCU Defective transfer belt unit Incorrect action of transfer roller Defective high voltage supply board Defective engine board (EGB) Necessary actions Replace the LDU. Replace the PCU. Replace the transfer belt unit. Check the guide and the transfer roller. Replace high voltage supply board 1 or 2. Replace the engine board (EGB).

Symptom All the paper is black.

Possible cause Incorrectly installed PCU Defective PCU Defective high voltage supply board Defective LDU Defective engine board (EGB) Defective main board

Necessary actions Install the PCU correctly. Replace the PCU. Replace high voltage supply board 1 or 2. Replace the LDU. Replace the engine board (EGB). Replace the main board.

SM

4-21

G104

Troubleshooting

4.3.2 ALL-BLACK PRINT

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

4.3.3 MISSING CMY COLOR


Symptom C, M, or Y is missing. Possible cause Defective PCU Loose connection between printer cartridge and engine board (EGB) Transfer belt not contacting PCU Defective the color OPC motor Defective engine board (EGB) Necessary actions Replace the PCU. Replace the drum positioning cover. ( 3.2.1) Check the belt tension unit. Replace the color OPC motor. Replace the engine board (EGB).

4.3.4 LIGHT PRINT


Symptom Possible cause Printed images are too weak. Loose connection between transfer roller and high voltage supply unit Dust in the laser beam path Transfer belt not contacting PCU Defective PCU Defective transfer roller Defective fusing unit Defective engine board (EGB) Necessary actions Check the connection between the transfer roller and the high voltage supply unit. Clean the laser beam path. Check the transfer unit. Replace the PCU. Repair the transfer roller. Replace the fusing unit. Replace the engine board (EGB).

G104

4-22

SM

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

4.3.5 REPEATED SPOTS OR LINES ON PRINTS


Symptom The same spots or lines appear at regular intervals. At intervals of 35.0 mm (1.38 inches) At intervals of 35.8 mm (1.41 inches) At intervals of 40.5 mm (1.59 inches) At intervals of 41.1 mm (1.62 inches) At intervals of 47.1 mm (1.86 inches) At intervals of 56.5 mm (2.23 inches) At intervals of 72.8 mm (2.87 inches) At intervals of 82.2 mm (3.24 inches) At intervals of 82.5 mm (3.25 inches) At intervals of 94.2 mm (3.71 inches) At intervals of 141.4 mm (5.57 inches) Possible cause Necessary actions

Defective charge roller Defective OPC cleaning brush roller Defective belt entrance roller Defective belt transfer roller Defective toner mixing auger Defective development roller Defective belt tension roller Defective transfer belt drive roller Defective transfer roller Defective OPC drum or pressure roller Defective fusing belt

Replace the PCU. Replace the PCU. Replace the transfer belt unit. Replace the transfer belt unit. Replace the PCU. Replace the PCU Replace the transfer belt unit. Replace the transfer belt unit. Replace the transfer roller. Replace the PCU or the fusing unit Replace the fusing unit.

4.3.6 DARK VERTICAL LINE IN PRINT


Symptom A dark line appears. The line is parallel to the paper feed direction. Of one CMY color Of any color (not C, M, or Y) Possible cause Necessary actions

Defective PCU Dust in the laser beam path Defective transfer belt unit Defective fusing unit

Replace the PCU. Clean the laser beam path. Replace the transfer belt unit. Replace the fusing unit.

SM

4-23

G104

Troubleshooting

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

4.3.7 WHITE HORIZONTAL LINES OR BANDS


Symptom White lines or bands appear in images of all toner colors. Possible cause Defective PCU Defective transfer belt unit Defective transfer roller Necessary actions Replace the PCU. Replace the transfer belt unit. Replace the transfer roller.

4.3.8 MISSING PARTS OF IMAGES


Symptom Some parts of images are missing. Possible cause Defective PCU Defective transfer belt unit Defective transfer roller Defective fusing unit Necessary actions Replace the PCU. Replace the transfer belt unit. Replace the transfer roller. Replace the fusing unit.

4.3.9 DIRTY BACKGROUND


Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Backgrounds are too dense. Of one CMYK color Defective PCU Replace the PCU. Of more than one CMYK Defective high voltage supply Replace the high voltage color board supply board (1 or 2).

4.3.10 PARTIAL CMY COLOR DOTS


Symptom Unexpected dots of the same color appear at irregular intervals. Possible cause Defective PCU Defective transfer belt unit Defective fusing unit Necessary actions Replace the PCU. Replace the transfer belt unit. Replace the fusing unit.

4.3.11 DARK IRREGULAR STREAKS ON PRINTS


Symptom Unexpected streaks appear at irregular intervals. Possible cause Defective transfer belt Necessary actions Replace the transfer belt unit.

G104

4-24

SM

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

4.3.12 CMY COLOR IRREGULAR STREAKS


Symptom Unexpected streaks of the same color appear at irregular intervals. Possible cause Defective PCU Defective transfer belt unit Necessary actions Replace the PCU. Replace the transfer belt unit.

4.3.13 GHOSTING
Symptom The same or similar image appears two or more times. They get weaker and weaker. Possible cause Defective PCU Defective transfer unit Necessary actions Replace the PCU. Replace the transfer unit.

4.3.14 UNFUSED OR PARTIALLY FUSED PRINTS


Troubleshooting

Symptom Some parts of images are not fused very well.

Possible cause Non-standard paper in use Incorrect media type mode Defective fusing unit

Necessary actions Use recommended paper. Select an appropriate media mode. Replace the fusing unit.

4.3.15 IMAGE SKEW


Symptom Images are skewed Possible cause Incorrect installation of paper Incorrect paper guide position Defective registration roller Incorrect action of transfer roller Defective engine board (EGB) Unclean separation pad Defective spring Necessary actions Install the paper correctly. Adjust the paper guide correctly. Repair the paper feed unit. Check the transfer roller. Replace the engine board (EGB). Clean the separation pad. Replace the spring for the friction pad.

SM

4-25

G104

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

4.3.16 BACKSIDE STAIN


Symptom The reverse side of the paper is not clean. Possible cause Unclean transfer roller Unclean paper path Unclean registration roller Unclean fusing unit exit Defective fusing unit Necessary actions Clean the transfer roller. Clean the paper path. Clean the registration roller. Clean the fusing unit exit. Replace the fusing unit.

4.3.17 NO PRINTING ON PAPER EDGE


Symptom Images are not printed in the areas around the paper edges. Possible cause Defective PCU Defective toner cartridge Defective transfer belt unit Transfer belt not contacting PCU Necessary actions Replace the PCU. Replace the toner cartridge. Replace the transfer belt unit. Check the transfer unit.

4.3.18 IMAGE NOT CENTERED WHEN IT SHOULD BE


Symptom Images do not come to the center. Possible cause Incorrect installation of paper Incorrect paper guide position Incorrect margin setting Defective engine control board Necessary actions Install the paper correctly. Adjust the paper guide correctly. Adjust the margin setting. Replace the engine control board.

G104

4-26

SM

ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS


4.4.1 SENSORS
No. 1 2 Sensor Name/ Sensor Board Name Color Drum Gear Position Sensor Black Drum Gear Position Sensor Toner End Sensor (K) Toner End Sensor (M) Toner End Sensor (C) Toner End Sensor (Y) Transfer Belt Contact Sensor Transfer Roller Contact Sensor TD Sensor (K) TD Sensor (M) TD Sensor (C) TD Sensor (Y) Transfer Belt Rotation
Active

CN No./ Pin No. CN222/2 CN222/5 CN222/8 CN230/13 CN230/26 CN230/29 CN222/11 CN222/14 CN222/20 CN225/4 CN230/4 CN230/20 CN222/27

Condition

Symptom SC380 SC380 Toner end cannot be detected. Toner end is detected even if the there is enough toner. SC442 SC452 SC368 (K) SC369 (M) SC370 (C) SC371 (Y) Automatic line position adjustment error: Transfer belt unit speed cannot be detected, causing the image skew. Close Front/Left Cover is displayed. The front cover open cannot be detected. Waste Toner near full is indicated. Waste toner full cannot be detected even if the waste toner bottle is full. Close Front/Left Cover is displayed. The left cover open cannot be detected. Printed image is wrong such as rough image, dirty background or weak image. Paper size error Paper jam is not detected even if there is a paper Paper jam is detected even if the there is no paper. Paper jam is not detected even if there is a paper Paper jam is detected even if the there is no paper. G104

H H

Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open

4 5

H L

10

Front Door Sensor

CN206/1

Shorted Open

11

Waste Toner Overflow Sensor

CN230/10

Shorted Open

12

Left Cover Sensor

C230/15

Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open

13

Temperature/Humidity Sensor

A A

CN231/1 CN231/3 CN214/17 CN214/15 CN214/14 CN214/13 CN213/6

14

Paper Size Sensor

15

Fusing Entrance Sensor

Shorted Open

16

Duplex Jam Sensor 1

CN213/1

Shorted

SM

4-27

Troubleshooting

ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS


No. Sensor Name/ Sensor Board Name Duplex Jam Sensor 2
Active

CN No./ Pin No. CN213/3

Condition

Symptom Paper jam is not detected even if there is a paper Paper jam is detected even if the there is no paper. Paper is not detected on the by-pass tray Paper is detected even if there is no paper on the by-pass tray. Paper size error

Open 17 L Short Open 18 By-pass Paper Detection Sensor L CN211/22 Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open

19

By-pass Paper Size Sensor Inverter Sensor Fusing Exit Sensor

CN211/17 CN211/16 CN211/20 CN211/19 CN211/2 CN210/13

20 21

L L

Paper jam Z Paper Jam A The paper overflow message is not displayed even when a paper overflow condition exists, causing paper jam. The paper overflow message is displayed. Paper Jam A SC400/418 SC541 Reset Fusing Unit correctly is displayed. Close Top Cover is displayed. The top cover open cannot be detected. SC270 Paper Jam A Always, small paper is detects, causing printing speed down. Small paper size does not detect. Remaining paper volume is wrong on Web Image Monitor. The paper end detects even if paper is placed in the paper tray. The paper end does not detect even if there is no paper in the paper tray, causing paper jam.

22

Paper Overflow Sensor

CN210/10 Shorted

23 24 25 26

Paper Exit Sensor ID Sensors Fusing Thermistor Fusing Set Sensor

L A A L L H

CN210/7 CN209 CN209/1 CN209/3 CN209/4 CN208/2

Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted

27

Top Cover Sensor

28 29

LDU Shutter Sensor


Registration Sensor

H L

CN207/17 CN207/14

30

Paper Width Sensor Paper Height Sensor 1/2

CN207/11 CN207/5 CN207/8

31

32

Paper End Sensor

CN2072

G104

4-28

SM

BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

4.5 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS


Power supply unit
Fuse FU1 FU2 FU3 FU4 FU5 FU6 115V 15A/125V 8A/125V 1A/250V 4A/250V 6.3A/250V 6.3A/250V Rating 220V-240V 8A/250V 4A/250V 1A/250V 4A/250V 6.3A/250V 6.3A/250V Symptom when turning on the main switch No response. No response. Tray Heater does not turn on. No display. SC270 is displayed. SC270 is displayed.

IOB
Fuse FU897 FU898 FU899 Rating 3.15A 2.0A 1.6A Symptom when turning on the main switch Optional Paper Tray Unit dose not work. Toners are not supplied. SC270 is displayed.
Troubleshooting 4-29 G104

4.6 LEDS
No LEDs are used for this model (except for the Network Interface).

SM

SERVICE TABLES

SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
CAUTION
Before accessing the service menu, do the following: Confirm that there is no print data in the printer buffer (the Data In LED must not be lit or blinking). If there is some data in the buffer, wait until all data has been printed.

5.1.1 SERVICE MODE OPERATION


NOTE: The Service Program Mode is for use by technical professionals only, so

that they can properly maintain product quality. If this mode is used by anyone other than the technical professional for any reason, data might be deleted or settings might be changed. In such case, product quality cannot be guaranteed.

From Feed
Online Menu Alert Escape Enter

Job Reset
Power

G105S902.WMF

Entering the Service Mode


There are two ways to enter the service mode.

Method 1: Turn the machine on while pressing the On Line key and Escape key together until SYSTEMver x.xx/ 1. Service shows on the display. NOTE: If you switch the machine off, any jobs stored on the hard disk using the sample print and protected print features will be deleted. Check first with the user tools to see if there are any jobs stored with these features (Menu key - Sample Print, or Protected Print). If so, you may use method 2 to enter service mode. Method 2: Press the Up/Down arrow keys together for about 5 seconds, then press the Enter key. The SYSTEMver x.xx/ 1. Service appears on the display. NOTE: The machine automatically goes off line when you enter the service mode.

SM

5-1

G104

Service Tables

Data In

SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

Accessing the Required Program


Use the Up/Down arrow keys to scroll through the menu listing. 1. Service Menu: Controller service modes Bit Switch 1001 through 1107 ( 5.2.2) 2. Engine Maintenance: Engine service modes (Feed) SP1 001 through SP1 917 (Drum) SP2 101 through SP2 930 (Process) SP3 001 through SP3 821 (Mode) SP5 024 through SP5 990 (Data Log) SP7 002 through SP7 936 (Data Log 2) SP8 001 through SP8 941 (Etc.) SP9 001 through SP9 914

3. End: Exit service mode To select an item, press the Enter key. Then the sub-menu will appear. Scroll through the sub menu items using the Up/Down arrow keys. To go back to a higher level, press the Escape key.

Inputting a Value or Setting for a Service Program


Enter the required program mode as explained above. The setting appearing on the display is the current setting. Select the required setting using the Up/Down arrow keys, then press the Enter key. The previous value remains if the Enter key is not pressed.

Exiting Service Mode


Select 3. End from the service mode main menu, then press the Enter key. NOTE: To make some settings effective, turn the main switch off and on after exiting service mode.

G104

5-2

SM

SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

5.1.2 REMARKS
Display on the Control Panel Screen
Since the maximum number of characters which can be displayed on the control panel screen is limited (14 or 16 characters), the description of SP modes displayed on the screen needs to be abbreviated. The following are the major abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full description is over 14 or 16 characters. Paper Type N: Plain paper 1, N2 or Normal 2: Plain paper 2 (plain & recycled) TC: Thick paper, Thick 1: Thick paper 1, Thick 2: Thick paper 2 TN: Thin paper SP: Special paper Color Mode [Color] [K]: Black in B&W mode [Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode [YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan [FC], [Cl]: Full Color mode [FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full color mode Process Speed LS: Low speed xx RS: Regular speed xxx HS: High speed xxx As shown in the following table, the process speed (mm/s) depends on the print mode (B&W or Color), resolution, and/or type of paper selected. Some SP mode settings depend on the process speed.
Mode B/W Resolution (dpi) 600 x 600 1,200 x 600 1,200 x 1,200 600 x 600 1,200 x 600 1,200 x 1,200 600 x 600 1,200 x 600 1,200 x 1,200 Line speed (mm/s) 155 77.5 155 77.5 77.5 Print speed (ppm) 25 12.5 25 12.5 12.5

Color

OHP/Thick

Count Unit R: Rotation S: Sheet

SM

5-3

G104

Service Tables

SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

Environment LL: Low temperature and Low humidity ML: Medium temperature and Low humidity MM: Medium temperature and Medium humidity MH: Medium temperature and High humidity HH: High temperature and High humidity

Others
The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables. FA: Factory setting (Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory setting sheets enclosed, which is located underneath the jammed paper removal decal.) DFU: Design/Factory Use only Do not touch the SP mode in the field. P in the right hand side of the mode number column means that this SP mode relates to the Printer Controller. If P is not in the column, this SP mode relates to the Printer Engine. A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change. An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this mode is stored in the NVRAM (Engine and Printer Controller). If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to the default value. EGB, CTL and NV indicate which NVRAM contains the data. EGB: NVRAM on the EGB board CTL: NVRAM on the controller board NV: NVRAM on the NVRAM expansion board (user account enhancement kit) The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP table in the following manner. [ Adjustable range / Default setting / Step ] Alphanumeric NOTE: If Alphanumeric is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the setting of the SP mode is displayed on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead of only numbers. However, the settings in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers.

G104

5-4

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE

5.2 SERVICE MODE TABLE


5.2.1 CONTROLLER SERVICE MODE
1001 1001 001 1001 002 [Bit Switch] Bit Switch 1 Bit Switch 2 *CTL *CTL Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU Bit 0 to 2: Not used. Do not change settings. Bit 3: Changing print language (PCL <-> PS) 0: Enabled 1: Disabled (No change) 1001 003 Bit Switch 3 *CTL Bit 4 to 7: Not used. Do not change settings. Bit 0: PostScript3 Euro glyph 0: Disabled 1: Enabled (Even if there is no Euro Glyph in ROM, it is possible to load the Euro Glyph data.) Bit 1: Not used. Do not change setting. Bit 2:PCL5e/5c (HP4000/HP8000) The left space command is set to 0, the machine is changed to 1 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Bit 3: PCL5e/GL2: pen # of PW 0: Normal 1: Patch Bit 4: Tray selecting 0: Select tray is determined auto tray selecting 1: Like HP/SV 1001 004 1001 005 Bit Switch 4 Bit Switch 5 *CTL *CTL Bit 5 to 7: Not used. Do not change settings. Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU Bit 0 to 2: Not used. Do not change settings. Bit 3: Enabled the %% command of the PostScript detection condition for the auto print language selection function. 0: Enabled 1: Disabled 1001 006 1001 007 1001 008 1001 009 1001 010 1001 011 1001 012 1001 013 1001 014 Bit Switch 6 Bit Switch 7 Bit Switch 8 Bit Switch 9 Bit Switch A Bit Switch B Bit Switch C Bit Switch D Bit Switch E *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL Bit 4 to 7: Not used. Do not change settings. Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU
Service Tables

SM

5-5

G104

SERVICE MODE TABLE


1001 015 1001 016 1003 1003 001 1003 003 1004 1004 001 1004 002 Bit Switch F Bit Switch G [Clear Setting] Init. System Delete Program [Print Summary] Print Summary 1 Print Summary 2 *CTL *CTL

Initializes settings in the System menu of the user mode. DFU

Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings). Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings and debug information).

1005

[Disp. Version] Displays the version of the controller firmware. [ToneCtlSet] Tone (Factory) Tone (Prev.) Tone (Current)

1101 1101 001 1101 002 1101 003 1102

*CTL *CTL *CTL

Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b) the previous setting, or c) the current setting.

*CTL [ToneCtlSet] Sets the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment. The asterisk (*) shows which mode is set. *1200x1200Photo 600x600Text 1200x600Text 600x600Photo 1200x600Photo [PrnColorSheet] ToneCtlSheet ColorChart

1103 1103 001 1103 002

Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma adjustment.

G104

5-6

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE


1104 1104 001 1104 021 1104 041 1104 061 1104 002 1104 022 1104 042 1104 062 1104 003 1104 023 1104 043 1104 063 1104 004 1104 024 1104 044 1104 064 1104 005 1104 025 1104 045 1104 065 1104 006 1104 026 1104 046 1104 066 1104 007 1104 027 1104 047 1104 067 1104 008 1104 028 1104 048 1104 068 1104 009 1104 029 1104 049 1104 069 1104 010 1104 030 1104 050 1104 070 1104 011 1104 031 1104 051 1104 071 1104 012 1104 032 1104 052
SM

[ToneCtlValue] Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the Mode Selection menu. Set Black 1 *CTL [0 to 255 / 16 / 1/step] Set Cyan 1 *CTL Set Magenta 1 *CTL Set Yellow 1 *CTL Set Black 2 *CTL [0 to 255 / 32 / 1/step] Set Cyan 2 *CTL Set Magenta 2 *CTL Set Yellow 2 *CTL Set Black 3 *CTL [0 to 255 / 48 / 1/step] Set Cyan 3 *CTL Set Magenta 3 *CTL Set Yellow 3 *CTL Set Black 4 *CTL [0 to 255 / 64 / 1/step] Set Cyan 4 *CTL Set Magenta 4 *CTL Set Yellow 4 *CTL Set Black 5 *CTL [0 to 255 / 80 / 1/step] Set Cyan 5 *CTL Set Magenta 5 *CTL Set Yellow 5 *CTL Set Black 6 *CTL [0 to 255 / 96 / 1/step] Set Cyan 6 *CTL Set Magenta 6 *CTL Set Yellow 6 *CTL Set Black 7 *CTL [0 to 255 / 112 / 1/step] Set Cyan 7 *CTL Set Magenta 7 *CTL Set Yellow 7 *CTL Set Black 8 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step] Set Cyan 8 *CTL Set Magenta 8 *CTL Set Yellow 8 *CTL Set Black 9 *CTL [0 to 255 / 144 / 1/step] Set Cyan 9 *CTL Set Magenta 9 *CTL Set Yellow 9 *CTL Set Black 10 *CTL [0 to 255 / 160 / 1/step] Set Cyan 10 *CTL Set Magenta 10 *CTL Set Yellow 10 *CTL Set Black 11 *CTL [0 to 255 / 176 / 1/step] Set Cyan 11 *CTL Set Magenta 11 *CTL Set Yellow 11 *CTL Set Black 12 *CTL [0 to 255 / 192 / 1/step] Set Cyan 12 *CTL Set Magenta 12 *CTL
5-7 G104

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE


1104 072 1104 013 1104 033 1104 053 1104 073 1104 014 1104 034 1104 054 1104 074 1104 015 1104 035 1104 055 1104 075 1105 Set Yellow 12 Set Black 13 Set Cyan 13 Set Magenta 13 Set Yellow 13 Set Black 14 Set Cyan 14 Set Magenta 14 Set Yellow 14 Set Black 15 Set Cyan 15 Set Magenta 15 Set Yellow 15 *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL

[0 to 255 / 208 / 1/step]

[0 to 255 / 224 / 1/step]

[0 to 255 / 240 / 1/step]

[ToneCtlSave] Saves the print gamma (adjusted with the Gamma Adj.) as the new Current Setting. Before the machine stores the new current setting, it moves the data stored as the current setting to the previous setting memory-storage location. [Toner Limit] Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development. TonerLimitPhot *CTL [100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step] TonerLimitText *CTL [100 to 400 / 200 / 1 %/step] [FactoryTestPrt] Prints the test page to check the color balance before transportation (600 x 600 2 bit). DFU [Ext. Toner Save] Mode 1: Text Mode 2: Text Mode 1: Image Mode 2: Image Mode 1: Line Mode 2: Line Mode 1: paint Mode 2: Paint

1106 1106 001 1106 002 1107

1108 1108 001 1108 002 1108 003 1108 004 1108 005 1108 006 1108 007 1108 008

DFU

G104

5-8

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE

5.2.2 BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING


Do not change the bit switches unless you are told to do this by the manufacturer. 1. Start the SP mode. The Service menu is shown. 2. Press the enter key two times. 3. To select a bit switch, press the up arrow key or the down arrow key. 4. Push the enter key. 5. Set the value with these keys: [Up] [Down]:Moves the cursor to one of the adjacent bits. [Escape]: Goes out of the program without saving changes. [Enter]: Goes out of the program and saves changes. NOTE: The digit at the left [A] is bit 7 and the digit at Sw#1 the right [B] is bit 0. bit0 6. Push the escape key one or more times until the menu Service is shown. 7. Select End and push the enter key.

[A] 00000000 _

[B]

SM

5-9

G104

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE

5.2.3 ENGINE SERVICE MODE


SP1-XXX (Feed)
[Lead Edge Reg.] Leading Edge Registration (Tray or By-pass, Paper Type, Process Speed) Paper Type ->N: Plain paper 1, N2 or Normal 2: Plain paper 2, Thick2: Thick paper 2 (see the Specifications table for details on these paper weights) Process Speed: LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed Adjusts the leading edge registration. This SP changes the registration clutch operation timing for each mode. +value sets the registration start timing earlier. -value sets the registration start timing later. NOTE: The value of the normal paper in RS is the standard value. The values of papers other than normal are added to the value of the normal paper in RS. Tray 1: Normal: LS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 1: Normal: RS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / -3.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 1: Thick *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 1: OHP *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 2: Normal: LS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 2: Normal: RS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / -3.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 2: Thick *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 2: OHP *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 3: Normal: LS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 3: Normal: RS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / -3.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 3: Thick *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 3: OHP *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] By-pass: N: LS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] By-pass: N: RS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / -3.0 / 0.1 mm/step] By-pass: Thick *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] By-pass: OHP *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Duplex: Normal: LS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Duplex: Normal: RS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / -3.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Duplex: Thick *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Duplex: N2: LS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Duplex: N2: RS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 1: Normal 2: LS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 1: Normal 2: RS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 1: Thick 2 *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 1: Thin: LS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 1: Thin: RS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 1: Special *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 2: Normal 2: LS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 2: Normal 2: RS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 2: Thick 2 *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 2: Thin: LS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 2: Thin: RS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 2: Special *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 3: Normal 2: LS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 3: Normal 2: RS *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
5-10 SM

1001

1001 001 1001 002 1001 003 1001 004 1001 005 1001 006 1001 007 1001 008 1001 009 1001 010 1001 011 1001 012 1001 013 1001 014 1001 015 1001 016 1001 017 1001 018 1001 019 1001 020 1001 021 1001 022 1001 023 1001 024 1001 025 1001 026 1001 027 1001 028 1001 029 1001 030 1001 031 1001 032 1001 033 1001 034 1001 035
G104

SERVICE MODE TABLE


1001 036 1001 037 1001 038 1001 039 1001 040 1001 041 1001 042 1001 043 1001 044 1001 045 1002 1002 001 1002 002 1002 003 1002 004 1002 005 1003 Tray 3: Thick 2 Tray 3: Thin: LS Tray 3: Thin: RS Tray 3: Special By-pass: N2: LS By-pass: N2: RS By-pass: Thick 2 By-pass: Thin: LS By-pass: Thin: RS By-pass: Special *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]

[S-to-S Reg.] Side-to-Side Registration By-pass Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Duplex *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each mode. This SP changes the laser main scan start position. [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

1003 001 1003 002 1003 003 1003 004 1003 005 1003 006 1003 007 1003 008 1003 009 1003 010 1003 011 1003 012 1003 013 1003 014 1003 015 1003 016 1003 017 1003 018 1003 019 1003 020 1003 021 1003 022 1003 023 1003 024 1003 025
SM

Tray 2: Normal: LS Tray 2: Normal: RS Tray 2: Thick Tray 2: OHP Tray 3: Normal: LS Tray 3: Normal: RS Tray 3: Thick Tray 3: OHP By-pass: N:LS By-pass: N:RS By-pass: Thick By-pass: OHP Duplex: Normal: LS Duplex: Normal: RS Duplex: Thick Duplex: N2: LS Duplex: N2: RS Tray 1: Normal 2: LS Tray 1: Normal 2: RS Tray 1: Thick 2 Tray 1: Thin: LS

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB
5-11 G104

Service Tables

[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle (Tray or By-pass, Paper Type, Process Speed) Paper Type ->N: Plain paper 1, N2 or Normal 2: Plain paper 2, Thick2: Thick paper 2 (see the Specifications table for details on these paper weights) Process Speed-> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed Tray 1: Normal: LS *EGB Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller for each mode. This SP Tray 1: Normal: RS *EGB changes the paper feed timing. Tray 1: Thick *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray 1: OHP *EGB

SERVICE MODE TABLE


1003 026 1003 027 1003 028 1003 029 1003 030 1003 031 1003 032 1003 033 1003 034 1003 035 1003 036 1003 037 1003 038 1003 039 1003 040 1003 041 1003 042 1003 043 1003 044 1003 045 1004 Tray 1: Thin: RS Tray 1: Special Tray 2: Normal 2: LS Tray 2: Normal 2: RS Tray 2: Thick 2 Tray 2: Thin: LS Tray 2: Thin: RS Tray 2: Special Tray 3: Normal 2: LS Tray 3: Normal 2: RS Tray 3: Thick 2 Tray 3: Thin: LS Tray 3: Thin: RS Tray 3: Special By-pass: N2: LS By-pass: N2: RS By-pass: Thick 2 By-pass: Thin: LS By-pass: Thin: RS By-pass: Special *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

1004 001 1004 002 1004 003 1004 004 1004 005 1004 006 1004 007 1004 008 1004 009 1004 010 1004 011 1004 012 1004 013 1004 014 1004 015 1004 016 1004 017 1004 018

[Mt Speed] Drive Motor Speed DFU (Unit, Process Speed, Paper Type) Paper Type ->N: Plain paper 1, N2 or Normal 2: Plain paper 2, Thick2: Thick paper 2 (see the Specifications table for details on these paper weights) Process Speed-> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed CW: Clockwise, CCW: Counterclockwise PFU: Optional paper tray unit DEV / OPC [K]: LS *EGB Adjusts the black development and OPC motor speed. DEV / OPC [K]: RS *EGB [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01 %/step] DEV [CMY]: LS *EGB Adjusts the color development motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] DEV [CMY]: RS *EGB OPC [CMY]: LS *EGB Adjusts the color OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] OPC [CMY]: RS *EGB Fusing: LS *EGB Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor speed. Fusing: RS *EGB [-4.00 to 4.00 / 1.4 / 0.01%/step] Transfer Belt: LS *EGB Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Transfer Belt: RS *EGB PFU: LS *EGB Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in the optional paper tray unit. PFU: RS *EGB [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step] Duplex: LS: Add *EGB Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Duplex: RS: Add *EGB Duplex: LS *EGB Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step] Duplex: RS *EGB Reverse: LS: CW *EGB Adjusts the inverter motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 1.4 / 0.01%/step] Reverse: RS: CW *EGB

G104

5-12

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE


1004 019 1004 020 1004 021 1004 022 1004 023 1004 024 1004 025 1004 026 1004 027 1004 028 1004 029 1004 030 1004 031 1004 032 1004 033 1004 034 1004 035 1004 036 1004 037 1004 038 1004 039 1004 040 1004 041 Reverse: LS: CCW Reverse: RS: CCW DEV / OPC [K]: LS: N2 DEV / OPC [K]: RS: N2 DEV [CMY]: LS: N2 DEV [CMY]: RS: N2 OPC [CMY]: LS: N2 OPC [CMY]: RS: N2 Fusing: LS: N2 Fusing: RS: N2 Trans. Belt: LS: N2 Trans. Belt: RS: N2 PFU: LS: Normal 2 PFU: RS: Normal 2 Duplex: LS: Add: N2 Duplex: RS: Add: N2 Duplex: LS: N2 Duplex: RS: N2 Reverse: LS: CW: N2 Reverse: RS: CW: N2 Rever.: LS: CCW: N2 Rever.: RS: CCW: N2 DEV / OPC [K]: LS: TC *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the inverter motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the black development and OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color development motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in the optional paper tray unit. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.14 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the inverter motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the inverter motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the black development and OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color development motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in the optional paper tray unit. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.14 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the inverter motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the inverter motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step]

1004 042 1004 043 1004 044

DEV [CMY]: LS: TC OPC [CMY]: LS: TC Fusing: LS: Thick

*EGB *EGB *EGB

1004 045 1004 046

Trans. Belt: LS: TC PFU: LS: Thick

*EGB *EGB

1004 047 1004 048 1004 049 1004 050

Duplex: LS: Add: TC Duplex: LS: Thick Reverse: LS: CW: TC Rever.: LS: CCW: TC

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

SM

5-13

G104

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE


1004 051 DEV / OPC [K] LS:TC2 *EGB Adjusts the black development and OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color development motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in the optional paper tray unit. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.14 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the black development and OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color development motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in the optional paper tray unit. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.14 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the black development and OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01 %/step] Adjusts the color development motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 1.4 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in the optional paper tray unit. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step]
SM

1004 052 1004 053 1004 054

DEV [CMY]: LS: TC2 OPC [CMY]: LS: TC2 Fusing: LS: TC 2

*EGB *EGB *EGB

1004 055 1004 056

T. Belt: LS: TC 2 PFU: LS: Thick 2

*EGB *EGB

1004 057 1004 058

Duplex: LS: Thick 2 DEV / OPC [K]: LS: SP

*EGB *EGB

1004 059 1004 060 1004 061

DEV [CMY]: LS: SP OPC [CMY]: LS: SP Fusing: LS: SP

*EGB *EGB *EGB

1004 062 1004 063 1004 064 1004 065 1004 066 1004 067 1004 068 1004 069 1004 070 1004 071 1004 072 1004 073 1004 074 1004 075 1004 076 1004 077 1004 078
G104

Trans. Belt: LS: SP PFU: LS: SP Duplex: LS: SP DEV / OPC [K]: LS: TN DEV / OPC [K]: RS: TN DEV [CMY]: LS: Thin DEV [CMY]: RS: Thin OPC [CMY]: LS: Thin OPC [CMY]: RS: Thin Fusing: LS: Thin Fusing: RS: Thin Trans. Belt: LS: TN Trans. Belt: RS: TN PFU: LS: Thin PFU: RS: Thin Duplex: LS: Thin Duplex: RS: Thin

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

5-14

SERVICE MODE TABLE


1004 079 DEV / OPC [K]: LS: OHP DEV [CMY]: LS: OHP OPC [CMY]: LS: OHP Fusing: LS: OHP *EGB Adjusts the black development and OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01 %/step] Adjusts the color development motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in the optional paper tray unit. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.14 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step]

1004 080 1004 081 1004 082

*EGB *EGB *EGB

1004 083 1004 084 1004 085

T.Belt: LS: OHP PFU: LS: OHP Duplex: LS: OHP

*EGB *EGB *EGB

1006 1006 001

[Phase Adjust.] Phase Adjustment Angle *EGB Adjusts the phase angle between the K drum and the CMY drums. [-180 to 180 / 0 / 1/step] DFU [Fusing Cont.] Fusing Control Control Method *EGB [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric Selects the fusing control method. 0: ON/OFF Control 1: PID Control (Phase control) Max. Wait Time *EGB [0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the maximum waiting time for the target printing temperature of fusing unit. After this interval, printing will start if the temperature did not get to the target. Paper Feed. Temp. *EGB [0 to 30 / 5 / 1/step] Adjusts the increase in the temperature of the fusing unit between the ready condition and the start of paper feed at the start of a new job. 1st Add Time: LS [0 to 50 / 0 / 0.1 sec/step] For print jobs at low speed. If the interval between jobs is less than this setting, then the temperature change (1104 025) for the first page of a new job is not applied. 1st Add Temp. *EGB [0 to 20 / 0 / 1C/step] Adds this value to the basic fusing temperature, for the first page of a new job. This extra temperature is necessary because when the printer starts the first page, the fusing unit is not warm enough. 1st Temp. Maint. *EGB [0 to 50 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the time for maintaining the temperature change that is set with 1104 025. 1st Print Inter. *EGB [0 to 100 / 0.2 / 0.1 sec/step] For print jobs at regular speed. If the interval between jobs is less than this setting, then the temperature change (1104 025) for the first page of a new job is not applied.

1104 1104 001

1104 022

1104 023

1104 024

1104 025

1104 026

1104 027

SM

5-15

G104

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE

1105

1105 022 1105 025 1105 026 1105 027 1105 028 1105 029 1105 031 1105 033 1105 034 1105 035 1105 036 1105 037 1105 039 1105 040 1105 042 1105 043

[Fusing Temp.] Fusing Temperature (Paper Type, Mode, Color, Process Speed) Paper Type -> N: Plain paper 1, N2: Plain paper 2, TC: Thick, TN: Thin, SP: Special, OHP Mode -> Simple [one-sided] or Duplex Color -> K: Black only, FC: Full color Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed Reload: Print ready, between jobs Adjusts the fusing unit temperature for each mode. Reload Temp. *EGB [100 to 200 / 160 / 1C/step] TC1: Simple: [K] *EGB [120 to 180 / 160 / 1C/step] TC1: Duplex: [K] *EGB TC1: Simple: [FC] *EGB TC1: Duplex: [FC] *EGB TC2: Simple: [K] *EGB TC2: Simple: [FC] *EGB N: Simple: [K]: LS *EGB [120 to 180 / 145 / 1C/step] N: Simple: [K]: RS *EGB [120 to 180 / 160 / 1C/step] N: Duplex: [K]: LS *EGB [120 to 180 / 145 / 1C/step] N: Duplex: [K]: RS *EGB [120 to 180 / 160 / 1C/step] N: Simple: [FC]: LS *EGB [120 to 180 / 145 / 1C/step] N: Simple: [FC]: RS *EGB [120 to 180 / 160 / 1C/step] N: Duplex: [FC]: LS *EGB [120 to 180 / 145 / 1C/step] N: Duplex: [FC]: RS *EGB [120 to 180 / 160 / 1C/step] Check Temp. Time *EGB [0 to 10 / 2.0 / 0.1 sec/step] Adjusts the rotation time before checking the fusing unit temperature. If the main switch is turned on and off for a short time, it might be possible that the checked temperature is high even though the whole of the fusing unit is not high enough for printing condition. N2: Simple: [K]: LS *EGB [120 to 180 / 150 / 1C/step] N2: Simple: [K]: RS *EGB [120 to 180 / 165 / 1C/step] N2: Duplex: [K]: LS *EGB [120 to 180 / 150 / 1C/step] N2: Duplex: [K]: RS *EGB [120 to 180 / 165 / 1C/step] N2: Simple: [FC] LS *EGB [120 to 180 / 150 / 1C/step] N2: Simple: [FC] RS *EGB [120 to 180 / 165 / 1C/step] N2: Duplex: [FC] LS *EGB [120 to 180 / 150 / 1C/step] N2: Duplex: [FC] RS *EGB [120 to 180 / 165 / 1C/step] TN: Simple: [K]: LS *EGB [120 to 180 / 135 / 1C/step] TN: Simple: [K]: RS *EGB [120 to 180 / 150 / 1C/step] TN: Duplex: [K]: LS *EGB [120 to 180 / 135 / 1C/step] TN: Duplex: [K] RS *EGB [120 to 180 / 150 / 1C/step] TN: Simple: [FC] LS *EGB [120 to 180 / 135 / 1C/step] TN: Simple: [FC] RS *EGB [120 to 180 / 150 / 1C/step] TN: Duplex: [FC] LS *EGB [120 to 180 / 135 / 1C/step] TN: Duplex: [FC] RS *EGB [120 to 180 / 150 / 1C/step] SP1: Simple: [K] LS *EGB [120 to 180 / 165 / 1C/step] SP1: Duplex: [K] LS *EGB [120 to 180 / 165 / 1C/step]
5-16 SM

1105 049 1105 050 1105 051 1105 052 1105 053 1105 054 1105 055 1105 056 1105 057 1105 058 1105 059 1105 060 1105 061 1105 062 1105 063 1105 064 1105 065 1105 067

G104

SERVICE MODE TABLE


1105 069 1105 071 1105 089 1105 090 SP1: Simp.: [FC] LS SP1: Dupl.: [FC] LS OHP: [K]: LS OHP: [FC]: LS *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [120 to 180 / 165 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 165 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 160 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 160 / 1C/step]

1106 1106 002

[Fusing Temp.] Fusing Temperature H. Roller: Heat Roller H. Roller Temp. Displays the heating roller temperature at this time. [0 to 230 / 0 / 1C/step]

1911

1911 001 1911 002 1911 003

1911 004

1911 006 1911 008 1911 014

1911 016 1911 018 1911 021

1911 022 1911 023

1911 024 1911 025

1911 026 1911 027

[Print Speed Ctl] Print Speed Control for small paper sizes (A5 or smaller) (Sheets of paper, Interval time or Temperature, Process Speed) Simple [one-sided] or Duplex Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed See section 6 for more about these SPs. PPM Down: RS: S *EGB The print speed (PPM) is reduced after the machine has printed this number of pages PPM Down: LS: S *EGB continuously. [0 to 99 / 15 / 1 sheet/step] PPM Down Inter. *EGB The print speed goes back to the normal speed after this interval. [0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step] S-size Temp. 1 *EGB The temperature is decreased by this amount to prevent overheating the fusing unit for small size paper. [0 to 200 / 2 / 1C/step] S-size Temp. 2 *EGB [0 to 200 / 5 / 1C/step] S-size Temp. 3 *EGB S-size Temp.: S1 *EGB These SPs control when the above temperature reductions are done. [0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sheet/step] S-size Temp.: S2 *EGB [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step] S-size Temp.: S3 *EGB [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step] Simple Temp. 1 *EGB Adjusts the temperature reduction for onesided printing. [0 to 200 / 2 / 1C/step] Simple Temp. 2 *EGB [0 to 200 / 5 / 1C/step] Simple Temp.:S1 *EGB These SPs control when the above temperature reductions are done. [0 to 500 / 100 / 1 sheet/step] Simple Temp.:S2 *EGB [0 to 500 / 30 / 1 sheet/step] Duplex Temp. 1 *EGB Adjusts the temperature reduction for duplex printing. [0 to 200 / 2 / 1C/step] Duplex Temp. 2 *EGB [0 to 200 / 5 / 1C/step] Duplex Temp.: S1 *EGB These SPs control when the above temperature reductions are done. [0 to 500 / 80 / 1 sheet/step]
5-17 G104

SM

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE


1911 028 Duplex Temp.: S2 *EGB [0 to 500 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]

1912 1912 001

1912 002

1912 003

1912 004 1912 005 1912 006 1912 007

1912 008 1912 010 1912 011 1912 012 1912 013

[Fusing Rotat.] Fusing Unit Roller Rotation Control Paper Type -> TC1: Thick paper 1, TC2: Thick paper 2, OHP, SP: Special Rotation *EGB [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off 1: On. When the printer is in the ready condition, the nip between the hot roller and pressure roller is in the same position. This may cause deformation of the rollers. Therefore, a temporary rotation prevents this problem. SP 1912 001 turns this feature on or off. SP1912-003 and 004 control this rotation. Pre-rotation: Fusing idling Prerotat. Speed *EGB [0 to 2 / 2 / -] Adjusts the speed of the fusing-unit rollers during fusing idling. 0: 1/3 regular speed, 1: Low speed, 2: Regular speed Rotation Freque. *EGB [1 to 24 / 4 / 1 hour/step] Adjusts the frequency of the fusing-unit roller rotation if the machine is in the ready condition for a very long interval. Rotation Inter. *EGB [0 to 25 / 0.1/ 0.1 sec/step] Adjusts the duration of the fusing-unit roller rotation Prerotat. Temp. *EGB [0 to 200 / 100 / 1C/step] Fusing idling is not done if the fusing unit temperature is above this value. Prerotat. Inter. *EGB [0 to 180 / 1 / 1 min/step] Adjusts the duration of fusing idling immediately after the power is turned on. Ex. Rotation Time *EGB [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the time for extra rotation of the fusing unit rollers at the end of a job. If the fusing motor stops before the fusing lamp turns off, the temperature can become very high. Prerotat. Ext. *EGB [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the additional time for pre-rotation of the fusing rollers. TC1: Rotat. Ext. *EGB [0 to 255 / 10 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the additional time of the fusing roller pre-rotation for thick paper 1. TC2 Rotat. Ext. *EGB [0 to 255 / 15 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the additional time of the fusing roller pre-rotation for thick paper 2. OHP: Rotat. Ext. *EGB [0 to 255 / 15 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the additional time of the fusing roller pre-rotation for OHP. SP: Rotat. Ext. *EGB [0 to 255 / 15 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the additional time of the fusing roller pre-rotation for special paper. [Heating Roller] Heating Roller Control Stand-by Temp. *EGB [0 to 200 / 150 / 1C/step] Adjusts the heating roller temperature when the machine is in the ready condition.

1913 1913 002

G104

5-18

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE


1916 1916 001 [Nip Measure] Fusing Nip Width Measurement DFU Nip Measure Exe. [0 or 1 / 0 /-] 0: Not execute, 1: Execute Performs the nip width measurement. Prerotation Time *EGB [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the rotation time of the fusing unit rollers before the nip measurement. [Environ. Adapt.] Fusing Idling: Environment Correction The machine automatically adjusts the duration of fusing idling, depending on room temperature measured by the temperature/humidity sensor (Paper Type, Temperature Environment, Value of Temperature/ Rotation Time) Paper Type ->N1: Plain paper 1, N2: Plain paper 2, T1: Thick paper 1, T2: Thick paper 2, SP: Special (see the Specifications table for details on these paper weights) Temperature Environment -> H: High temperature, L: Low temperature Value of Temperature/ Time: Dec.: Decrease, Inc.: Increase H: Rotat. Time Dec. *EGB Adjusts the rotation time decrease at high temperature. [-120 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step] N1: H: Temp. Dec. *EGB Adjusts the temperature decrease for plain paper 1 at high temperature. [-50 to 0 / 0 / 1C/step] N1: L: Temp. Inc. *EGB Adjusts the temperature increase for plain paper 1 at low temperature. [0 to 30 / 7 / 1C/step] L: Rotat. Time Inc. *EGB Adjusts the rotation time increase at low temperature. [0 to 120 / 0 / 1 sec/step] H: Standard Temp. *EGB Sets the threshold temperature detected as high temperature. [25 to 40 / 30 / 1C/step] L: Standard Temp. *EGB Sets the threshold temperature detected as low temperature. [-15 to 30 / 18 / 1C/step] L: Rotation Dec. *EGB Adjusts the rotation time decrease at low temperature. [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 sec/step] N2: H: Temp. Dec. *EGB Adjusts the temperature decrease for plain paper 2 at high temperature. [-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step] N2: L: Temp. Inc. *EGB Adjusts the temperature increase for plain paper 2 at low temperature. [0 to 30 / 10 / 1C/step] TN: H: Temp. Dec. *EGB Adjusts the temperature decrease for thin paper at high temperature. [-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step] TN: L: Temp. Inc. *EGB Adjusts the temperature increase for thin paper at low temperature. [0 to 30 / 7 / 1C/step]

1916 002

1917

1917 003

1917 004

1917 005

1917 006

1917 007

1917 008

1917 009

1917 010

1917 011

1917 012

1917 013

SM

5-19

G104

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE


1917 014 TC1: H: Temp. Dec. *EGB Adjusts the temperature decrease for thick paper 1 at high temperature. [-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the temperature increase for thick paper 1 at low temperature. [0 to 30 / 7 / 1C/step] Adjusts the temperature decrease for thick paper 2 at high temperature. [-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the temperature increase for thick paper 2 at low temperature. [0 to 30 / 7 / 1C/step] Adjusts the temperature decrease for OHP at high temperature. [-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the temperature increase for OHP at low temperature. [0 to 30 / 7 / 1C/step] Adjusts the temperature decrease for special paper at high temperature. [-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the temperature increase for special paper at low temperature. [0 to 30 / 7 / 1C/step]

1917 015

TC1: L: Temp. Inc.

*EGB

1917 016

TC2: H: Temp. Dec.

*EGB

1917 017

TC2: L: Temp. Inc.

*EGB

1917 018

OHP: H: Temp. Dec.

*EGB

1917 019

OHP: L: Temp. Inc.

*EGB

1917 020

SP: H: Temp. Dec.

*EGB

1917 021

SP: L: Temp. Inc.

*EGB

G104

5-20

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE

SP2-XXX (Drum)
[Color Regist.] Color Registration Correction ([Color], M: Main scan, S: Sub scan) You can adjust these SPs if the color registration is not good after the Line Position Adjustment (also known as MUSIC) is done. The [K] value (-001) is the standard value in the main scan adjustment. The values other than [k] value are added to [K] value. So, [K] value normally does not need to be adjusted in the main scan adjustment. [K]: M Regist. Dot *EGB Adjusts the side edge registration by a dot for each mode. [M]: M Regist. Dot *EGB [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step] [C]: M Regist. Dot *EGB [Y]: M Regist. Dot *EGB [K]: M Reg. SubD *EGB Adjusts the side edge registration by 1/16 dot. [K-M]: M Reg. SubD *EGB [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1/16dot/step] [K-C]: M Reg. SubD *EGB [K-Y]: M Reg. SubD *EGB [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 line/step] [K-M]: S Reg. 600 *EGB [K-C]: S Reg. 600 *EGB [K-Y]: S Reg. 600 *EGB [K-M]: S Reg. 1200 *EGB [K-C]: S Reg. 1200 *EGB [K-Y]: S Reg. 1200 *EGB [Trim Adjust.] Erase Margin Adjustment Lead Ed: Leading Edge, Trail. Ed: Trailing Edge, Left/Right Ed: Left/ Right Edge Lead Ed. Width *EGB Adds this value to the leading edge erase margin position in the sub scan direction. [-127 to 127 / 71 / 1 line/step] Trail. Ed. Width *EGB Adds this value to the trailing edge erase margin position in the sub scan direction. [-127 to 127 / 71 / 1 line/step] Left Ed. Width *EGB Adds this value to the left edge erase margin position in the main scan direction. [-127 to 127 / 47 / 1 dot/step] Right Ed. Width *EGB Adds this value to the right edge erase margin position in the main scan direction. [-127 to 127 / 47 / 1 dot/step] [Magnifi. Adj.] Magnification Adjustment ([Color], Main Scan Magnification) [K]: M Magnifi. *EGB Adjusts the main scan magnification. [-1.00 to 1.00 / 0.00 / 0.01%/step] [M]: M Magnifi. *EGB [C]: M Magnifi. *EGB [Y]: M Magnifi. *EGB

2101

2101 001 2101 002 2101 003 2101 004 2101 005 2101 006 2101 007 2101 008 2101 013 2101 014 2101 015 2101 016 2101 017 2101 018

2103 2103 001

2103 002

2103 003

2103 004

2104 2104 001 2104 002 2104 003 2104 004

SM

5-21

G104

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE


[LD Power Cont.] LD Power Control ([Color], Process Speed) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed [K] 0 *EGB Adjusts the LD power. [10 to 200 / 100 / 1%/step] DFU [M] 0 *EGB [C] 0 *EGB [Y] 0 *EGB [K] 0: LS *EGB Adjusts the LD power at low speed. [10 to 200 / 100 / 1%/step] DFU [M] 0: LS *EGB [C] 0: LS *EGB [Y] 0: LS *EGB [LD BeamPattern] LD Beam Pattern Picture Addition Adds the picture to the LD beam pattern. [0 or 1 / 0 /-] 0: Not execute, 1: Execute Pattern Select Selects the LD beam pattern. [0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step] Color Select Selects the color for the LD beam pattern. [0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step] [Manual Execut.] Manual Execution Position Adjust. Performs the line position adjustment. Pro. Position Adj. Performs an approximate line position adjustment. Skew Adjust. Performs the skew adjustment. ID S. Adjust. Tests the ID sensor. [LD Off Check] Displays the LD off check state. [ID S. Display] ID Sensor Display The ID sensor assembly has three sensors: Left, Center, Right Displays the PWM value for each sensor. PWM: Left *EGB [0 to 512 / 0 / 1/step] PWM: Center *EGB PWM: Right *EGB Avg: Left *EGB Displays the average output from each sensor. Avg: Center *EGB [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 volt/step] Avg: Right *EGB Max: Left *EGB Displays the maximum output from each sensor. Max: Center *EGB [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 volt/step] Max: Right *EGB Min: Left *EGB Displays the minimum output from each sensor. Min: Center *EGB [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 volt/step] Min: Right *EGB Max2: Left *EGB Displays the maximum 2 output from each sensor. Max2: Center *EGB

2105 2105 001 2105 002 2105 003 2105 004 2105 009 2105 010 2105 011 2105 012 2109 2109 001

2109 002 2109 004

2111 2111 001 2111 002 2111 003 2111 004 2120

2143 2143 001 2143 002 2143 003 2143 004 2143 005 2143 006 2143 007 2143 008 2143 009 2143 010 2143 011 2143 012 2143 013 2143 014

G104

5-22

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE


2143 015 2143 016 2143 017 2143 018 Max2: Right Min2: Left Min2: Center Min2: Right *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 volt/step] Displays the maximum 2 output from each sensor. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 volt/step]

2150 2150 001 2150 002 2150 003 2150 004 2150 005 2150 006 2150 007 2150 008 2150 009 2150 010 2150 011 2150 012 2150 013 2150 014 2150 015 2150 016 2150 017 2150 018 2150 019 2150 020 2150 021 2150 022 2150 023 2150 024 2150 025 2150 026 2150 027 2150 028 2150 029 2150 030 2150 031 2150 032 2150 033 2150 034 2150 035 2150 036 2150 037 2150 038 2150 039 2150 040 2150 041

[Area Magni. Cor] Area Magnification Correction ([Color], Area) [K]: Area 1 *EGB Adjusts the magnification correction for each area. [K]: Area 2 *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] [K]: Area 3 *EGB [K]: Area 4 *EGB [K]: Area 5 *EGB [K]: Area 6 *EGB [K]: Area 7 *EGB [K]: Area 8 *EGB [K]: Area 9 *EGB [K]: Area 10 *EGB [K]: Area 11 *EGB [K]: Area 12 *EGB [M]: Area 1 *EGB Adjusts the magnification correction for each area. [M]: Area 2 *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] [M]: Area 3 *EGB [M]: Area 4 *EGB [M]: Area 5 *EGB [M]: Area 6 *EGB [M]: Area 7 *EGB [M]: Area 8 *EGB [M]: Area 9 *EGB [M]: Area 10 *EGB [M]: Area 11 *EGB [M]: Area 12 *EGB [C]: Area 1 *EGB Adjusts the magnification correction for each area. [C]: Area 2 *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] [C]: Area 3 *EGB [C]: Area 4 *EGB [C]: Area 5 *EGB [C]: Area 6 *EGB [C]: Area 7 *EGB [C]: Area 8 *EGB [C]: Area 9 *EGB [C]: Area 10 *EGB [C]: Area 11 *EGB [C]: Area 12 *EGB [Y]: Area 1 *EGB Adjusts the magnification correction for each area. [Y]: Area 2 *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] [Y]: Area 3 *EGB [Y]: Area 4 *EGB [Y]: Area 5 *EGB

SM

5-23

G104

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE


2150 042 2150 043 2150 044 2150 045 2150 046 2150 047 2150 048 [Y]: Area 6 [Y]: Area 7 [Y]: Area 8 [Y]: Area 9 [Y]: Area 10 [Y]: Area 11 [Y]: Area 12 *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

2151 2151 001 2151 002 2151 003 2151 004 2151 005 2151 006 2151 007 2151 008 2151 009 2151 010 2151 011 2151 012 2151 013 2151 014 2151 015 2151 016 2151 017 2151 018 2151 019 2151 020 2151 021 2151 022 2151 023 2151 024 2151 025 2151 026 2151 027 2151 028 2151 029 2151 030 2151 031 2151 032 2151 033 2151 034 2151 035 2151 036 2151 037 2151 038

[Area Width] Area Width Correction ([Color], Area) [K]: Area 1 *EGB [0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step] [K]: Area 2 *EGB [K]: Area 3 *EGB [0 to 1024 / 472 / 1 dot/step] [K]: Area 4 *EGB [K]: Area 5 *EGB [K]: Area 6 *EGB [K]: Area 7 *EGB [K]: Area 8 *EGB [K]: Area 9 *EGB [K]: Area 10 *EGB [K]: Area 11 *EGB [0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step] [K]: Area 12 *EGB [M]: Area 1 *EGB [0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step] [M]: Area 2 *EGB [M]: Area 3 *EGB [0 to 1024 / 472 / 1 dot/step] [M]: Area 4 *EGB [M]: Area 5 *EGB [M]: Area 6 *EGB [M]: Area 7 *EGB [M]: Area 8 *EGB [M]: Area 9 *EGB [M]: Area 10 *EGB [M]: Area 11 *EGB [0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step] [M]: Area 12 *EGB [C]: Area 1 *EGB [0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step] [C]: Area 2 *EGB [C]: Area 3 *EGB [0 to 1024 / 472 / 1 dot/step] [C]: Area 4 *EGB [C]: Area 5 *EGB [C]: Area 6 *EGB [C]: Area 7 *EGB [C]: Area 8 *EGB [C]: Area 9 *EGB [C]: Area 10 *EGB [C]: Area 11 *EGB [0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step] [C]: Area 12 *EGB [Y]: Area 1 *EGB [0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step] [Y]: Area 2 *EGB

G104

5-24

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE


2151 039 2151 040 2151 041 2151 042 2151 043 2151 044 2151 045 2151 046 2151 047 2151 048 [Y]: Area 3 [Y]: Area 4 [Y]: Area 5 [Y]: Area 6 [Y]: Area 7 [Y]: Area 8 [Y]: Area 9 [Y]: Area 10 [Y]: Area 11 [Y]: Area 12 *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1024 / 472 / 1 dot/step]

[0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step]

2152 2152 006 2152 007 2152 008 2152 009 2152 010 2152 011 2152 012 2152 013 2152 014 2152 015 2152 016 2152 017 2152 018 2152 019 2152 020 2152 021 2152 022 2152 023 2152 024 2152 025 2152 026 2152 027 2152 028 2152 029 2152 030 2152 031 2152 032 2152 033 2152 034 2152 035 2152 036 2152 037 2152 038 2152 039 2152 040

[Area Shading] Area Shading Correction Setting ([Color], Area) [K]: Area 0 *EGB [0.10 to 2.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step] [K]: Area 1 *EGB [K]: Area 2 *EGB [K]: Area 3 *EGB [K]: Area 4 *EGB [K]: Area 5 *EGB [K]: Area 6 *EGB [K]: Area 7 *EGB [K]: Area 8 *EGB [K]: Area 9 *EGB [K]: Area 10 *EGB [M]: Area 0 *EGB [0.10 to 2.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step] [M]: Area 1 *EGB [M]: Area 2 *EGB [M]: Area 3 *EGB [M]: Area 4 *EGB [M]: Area 5 *EGB [M]: Area 6 *EGB [M]: Area 7 *EGB [M]: Area 8 *EGB [M]: Area 9 *EGB [M]: Area 10 *EGB [C]: Area 0 *EGB [0.10 to 2.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step] [C]: Area 1 *EGB [C]: Area 2 *EGB [C]: Area 3 *EGB [C]: Area 4 *EGB [C]: Area 5 *EGB [C]: Area 6 *EGB [C]: Area 7 *EGB [C]: Area 8 *EGB [C]: Area 9 *EGB [C]: Area 10 *EGB [Y]: Area 0 *EGB [0.10 to 2.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step] [Y]: Area 1 *EGB

SM

5-25

G104

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE


2152 041 2152 042 2152 043 2152 044 2152 045 2152 046 2152 047 2152 048 2152 049 2153 2153 001 [Y]: Area 2 [Y]: Area 3 [Y]: Area 4 [Y]: Area 5 [Y]: Area 6 [Y]: Area 7 [Y]: Area 8 [Y]: Area 9 [Y]: Area 10 *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

2153 002

2153 003

2153 004

2153 005

2153 006

2153 008

[MUSIC Setting] Timing for Automatic Line Position Adjustment (MUSIC) Auto Execution *EGB Enables or disables the automatic line position adjustment. If this SP is 0, the adjustment is never done. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: On Process Control *EGB Enables or disables the adjustment after process control is done. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: On Initialization *EGB Enables or disables the adjustment immediately after the power is turned on or when recovering from energy save mode. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: On Data In *EGB Enables or disables the adjustment immediately after the machine starts to receive print job data. The adjustment is done if one of the conditions set with SP2153-012, -013 and 015 is satisfied. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: On Cut In *EGB Enables or disables the adjustment during printing. The adjustment is done if one of the conditions set with SP2153-012, -013 and 015 is satisfied. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric 0: No, 1: Yes Job End *EGB Enables or disables the adjustment after printing. [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: On Trans. Belt Speed 2 *EGB Enables or disables the transfer belt speed correction during the adjustment. The transfer belt speed is affected by changes in temperature. A change of the transfer belt speed during the adjustment causes color registration errors. This SP keeps the transfer belt at a constant speed. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: On

G104

5-26

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE


2153 010 Manual Cut In *EGB If this number of pages was printed after the previous adjustment was done, then the adjustment is done again. The number of sheets is counted in SP7806-003 and 004. [10 to 999 / 190 / 1 page/step] If the room temperature changes by this amount or more after the previous adjustment was done, then the adjustment is done again. [2 to 30 / 5 / 1C/step] If this amount of time has passed after the previous adjustment was done, then the adjustment is done again. [0 to 1440 / 360 / 1 min/step] Sets the threshold (magnification error) from previous MUSIC for executing MUSIC. [0 to 10 / 1 / 0.1%/step]

2153 012

MUSIC Temp.

*EGB

2153 013

Passage Time

*EGB

2153 015

Maginificat. Error

*EGB

2181

2181 001 2181 002 2181 003 2181 004 2181 005 2181 006 2181 007 2181 008 2181 011 2181 012 2181 013 2181 014 2181 015 2181 016 2181 017 2181 018 2181 021 2181 022 2181 023 2181 024 2181 025 2181 026 2181 027 2181 028 2181 031 2181 032
SM

[MUSIC Result] Result of Automatic Line Position Adjustment ([Color],Value, Unit) Value-> Skew, Bent, M. Scan Erro.: Main Scan Error, S. Scan Erro.: Sub Scan Error, M. Cor: Main Scan Correction, S. Cor: Sub Scan Correction Unit-> Dot, SubD.: Sub Dot, 600/ 1200 dpi The following SPs display the result of MUSIC for each mode. [K]: Skew *EGB [-5000 to 5000 / 0 / 1 um/step] [K]: Bent *EGB [K]: M. Scan Erro. *EGB [K]: S. Scan Erro. *EGB [K]: M Cor.: Dot *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step] [K]: M Cor.: SubD. *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] [K]: S Cor.: 600 *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 line/step] [K]: S Cor.: 1200 *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1/step] [M]: Skew *EGB [-5000 to 5000 / 0 / 1 um/step] [M]: Bent *EGB [M]: M. Scan Erro. *EGB [M]: S. Scan Erro. *EGB [M]: M Cor.: Dot *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step] [M]: M Cor.: SubD.. *EGB [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] [M]: S Cor.: 600 *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 line/step] [M]: S Cor.: 1200 *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1/step] [C]: Skew *EGB [-5000 to 5000 / 0 / 1 um/step] [C]: Bent *EGB [C]: M. Scan Erro. *EGB [C]: S. Scan Erro. *EGB [C]: M Cor.: Dot *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step] [C]: M Cor.: SubD.. *EGB [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] [C]: S Cor.: 600 *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 line/step] [C]: S Cor.: 1200 *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1/step] [Y]: Skew *EGB [-999 to 999 / 0 / 1 um/step] [Y]: Bent *EGB
5-27 G104

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE


2181 033 2181 034 2181 035 2181 036 2181 037 2181 038 [Y]: M. Scan Erro. [Y]: S. Scan Erro. [Y]: M Cor.: Dot [Y]: M Cor.: SubD.. [Y]: S Cor.: 600 [Y]: S Cor.: 1200 *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step] [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 line/step] [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1/step]

2186 2186 001 2186 002 2186 003 2186 004 2186 005 2186 006 2186 007 2186 008 2186 009

[MUSIC Record] Automatic Line Position Adjustment Record The following SPs display the MUSIC record. Year *EGB [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 y/step] Month *EGB [1 to 12 / 1 / 1 m/step] Date *EGB [1 to 31 / 1 / 1 d/step] Time *EGB [0 to 23 / 0 / 1 h/step] Minute *EGB [0 to 59 / 0 / 1 y/step] Temperature *EGB [0 to 100 / 0 / 1C/step] Result *EGB [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 /step] Execution *EGB [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step] Failure *EGB [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step] [Charge Bias: DC] Charge Roller Voltage: DC (Process Speed, [Color]) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed These SPs adjust the DC voltage of the drum charge roller. These are used only when SP3-501-001 is set to 1. RS: [K] *EGB [200 to 999 / 585 / 1 V/step] RS: [M] *EGB RS: [C] *EGB RS: [Y] *EGB LS: [K] *EGB LS: [M] *EGB LS: [C] *EGB LS: [Y] *EGB [Charge Bias: AC] Charge Roller Voltage: AC (Process Speed, [Color]) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed These SPs adjust the AC voltage of the drum charge roller. These are used only when SP2-202-011 is set to 1. RS: [K] *EGB [0 to 3000 / 2000 / 1 V/step] RS: [M] *EGB RS: [C] *EGB RS: [Y] *EGB LS: [K] *EGB LS: [M] *EGB LS: [C] *EGB LS: [Y] *EGB Output Control *EGB [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Process Control, 1: Setting

2201 2201 001 2201 002 2201 003 2201 004 2201 006 2201 007 2201 008 2201 009

2202 2202 001 2202 002 2202 003 2202 004 2202 006 2202 007 2202 008 2202 009 2202 011

G104

5-28

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE


[Charge Bias: AC] Charge Roller Voltage: AC/I (Process Speed, [Color]) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed These SPs adjust the AC/I bias of the drum charge roller. These are used only when SP3-501-001 is set to 1. RS: [K] *EGB [0 to 1.5 / 0.49 / 0.01 mA/step] RS: [M] *EGB [0 to 1.5 / 0.48 / 0.01 mA/step] RS: [C] *EGB [0 to 1.5 / 0.49 / 0.01 mA/step] RS: [Y] *EGB [0 to 1.5 / 0.48 / 0.01 mA/step] [Charge Bias] Charge Roller Voltage: Corrections for humidity (Environmental correction, [Color]) For more about the humidity conditions, see SP 2304. Environ. : HH: [K] Environ. : HH: [M] Environ. : HH: [C] Environ. : HH: [Y] Environ. : H: [K] Environ. : H: [M] Environ. : H: [C] Environ. : H: [Y] Environ. : MM: [K] Environ. : MM: [M] Environ. : MM: [C] Environ. : MM: [Y] Environ. : L: [K] Environ. : L: [M] Environ. : L: [C] Environ. : L: [Y] Environ. : LL: [K] Environ. : LL: [M] Environ. : LL: [C] Environ. : LL: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 255 / 109 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / 107 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / 104 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / 106 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / 106 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / 106 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / 106 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / 104 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / 101 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / 100 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / 105 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / 104 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / 103 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / 105 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / 110 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / 109 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / 110 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / 109 / 1%/step]

2203 2203 001 2203 002 2203 003 2203 004

2204 2204 001 2204 002 2204 003 2204 004 2204 006 2204 007 2204 008 2204 009 2204 011 2204 012 2204 013 2204 014 2204 016 2204 017 2204 018 2204 019 2204 021 2204 022 2204 023 2204 024

2212 2212 001 2212 002 2212 003 2212 004 2212 005 2212 006 2212 007 2212 008

[Dev. Bias: DC] Development Bias: DC (Process Speed, [Color]) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed, LS: Low speed These SPs adjust the development bias. These are used only when SP3-501001 is set to 1. RS: [K] *EGB [50 to 800 / 350 / 1 V/step] RS: [M] *EGB RS: [C] *EGB RS: [Y] *EGB LS: [K] *EGB LS: [M] *EGB LS: [C] *EGB LS: [Y] *EGB

SM

5-29

G104

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE


2251 2251 001 2251 002 2251 003 2251 004 2302 2302 001 2302 002 2302 003 2302 004 [Manual Toner] Forced Toner Supply [K] Manually executes toner supply for each color. [M] [C] [Y] [Temp./Humidity] Temperature / Humidity Display Temperature Displays the temperature. [-128 to 127 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step] Relative Humidity Display the relative humidity. [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1%RH/step] Absolute Humidity Display the absolute humidity. [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 g/m3/step] Current Environ. Display the current environment. [0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step] 0: LL, 1: ML, 2: MM, 3: MH, 4: HH [Envir. Correct.] Environment Correction Manual Correct. *EGB Manually sets the environment. [0 to 5 / 0 / 1/step] 0: OFF, 1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH [EC Threshold] Environment Correction Threshold (Humidity, Environment) A. Humidity: Absolute Humidity These SPs adjust the thresholds (absolute humidity) for each environment. A. Humidity: LL-MM *EGB [0 to 100 / 5.0 / 0.1 g/m3/step] A. Humidity: ML-MM *EGB [0 to 100 / 8.0 / 0.1 g/m3/step] A. Humidity: MM-MH *EGB [0 to 100 / 16.0 / 0.1 g/m3/step] A. Humidity: MH-HH *EGB [0 to 100 / 26.0 / 0.1 g/m3/step] [Vd Link Corre.] Vd Link Correction Setting *EGB Sets the Vd link correction. [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Execute, 1: Not execute Correction Coef. *EGB Adjusts the Vd link correction coefficient. [1.00 to 2.50 / 1.00 / 0.01/step] [Trans.Belt Bias] Transfer Belt Current at Process Control Process Cont. [K] *EGB Adjusts the transfer belt current at process control for [K]. [0 to 60 / 15.0 / 0.1 A/step] Process Cont. [M] *EGB Adjusts the transfer belt current at process control for [M, C, Y]. Process Cont. [C] *EGB [0 to 60 / 12.5 / 0.1 A/step] Process Cont. [Y] *EGB

2303 2303 001

2304 2304 001 2304 002 2304 003 2304 004 2306 2306 001

2306 002

2314 2314 011

2314 012 2314 013 2314 014

G104

5-30

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE


[T.Roll2 Clean.] Transfer Roller Cleaning (Positive or Negative Bias, Process Speed) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed, LS: Low speed Posi. Bias: RS *EGB Adjusts the positive voltage for transfer roller cleaning. Posi. Bias: LS *EGB [0 to 2 / 2.0 / 0.1 KV/step] Nega. Bias: RS *EGB Adjusts the negative voltage for transfer roller cleaning. Nega. Bias: LS *EGB [0 to 60 / 60.0 / 0.1V/step] [Trans.Belt Bias] Transfer Belt Current ([Color], Process Speed) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed [K]: RS Adjusts the current that is applied to the transfer belt. [0 to 60 / 15.0 / 0.1 A/step] [Trans.Belt Bias] Transfer Belt Current ([Color], Process Speed) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed [K]: LS *EGB Adjusts the current that is applied to the transfer belt. [0 to 60 / 6.0 / 0.1 A/step] [Trans.Belt Bias] Transfer Belt Current ([Color], Process Speed) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed [FC/ K]: RS *EGB Adjusts the current that is applied to the transfer belt. [0 to 60 / 15.0 / 0.1 A/step] [FC/ M]: RS *EGB [0 to 60 / 12.5 / 0.1 A/step] [FC/ C]: RS *EGB [FC/ Y]: RS *EGB [Trans.Belt Bias] Transfer Belt Current ([Color], Process Speed) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed [FC/ K]: LS *EGB Adjusts the current that is applied to the transfer belt. [FC/ M]: LS *EGB [0 to 60 / 6.0 / 0.1 A/step] [FC/ C]: LS *EGB [FC/ Y]: LS *EGB [Normal: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, plain paper 1, black toner (Process Speed, Paper Side, Unit) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation) RS: 1st: T. Roll2 *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 25.0 / 0.1 -A/step] RS: 1st: Separa. *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
5-31 G104

2326 2326 002 2326 003 2326 005 2326 006

2352 2352 001

2353 2353 001

2357 2357 001

2357 002 2357 003 2357 004

2358 2358 001 2358 002 2358 003 2358 004

2402

2402 007 2402 008

SM

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE


2402 012 2402 013 RS: 2nd: T. Roll2 RS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB *EGB [0 to 60 / 12.5 / 0.1 -A/step] [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

2403 2403 007 2403 008 2403 012 2403 013

[Normal: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, plain paper 1, black toner (Process Speed, Paper Side) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd LS: 1st: T. Roll2 *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 15.0 / 0.1 -A/step] LS: 1st: Separa. *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] LS: 2nd: T. Roll2 *EGB [0 to 60 / 10.0 / 0.1 -A/step] LS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [Normal: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, plain paper 1, CMY toner (Process Speed, Paper Side) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd RS: 1st: T. Roll2 *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 20.0 / 0.1 -A/step] RS: 1st: Separa. *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] RS: 2nd: T. Roll2 *EGB [0 to 60 / 32.5 / 0.1 -A/step] RS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [Normal: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, plain paper 1, CMY toner (Process Speed, Paper Side) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd LS: 1st: T. Roll2 *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 17.5 / 0.1 -A/step] LS: 1st: Separa. *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] LS: 2nd: T. Roll2 *EGB [0 to 60 / 22.5 / 0.1 -A/step] LS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [Normal:[K]:LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the leading edge area, plain paper 1, black toner Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separation: Discharge plate (paper separation) [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Separation *EGB T.Roll2: 1st *EGB T.Roll2: 2nd *EGB

2407 2407 013 2407 014 2407 021 2407 022

2408 2408 013 2408 014 2408 021 2408 022

2421 2421 003 2421 007 2421 012

G104

5-32

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE


[Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, plain paper 1 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> N: Normal LE: Leading Edge T. Roll 2: N: LE *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] Separation: N: LE *EGB [0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step] [Normal: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the trailing edge area, plain paper 1, black toner Paper side: 1st or 2nd Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separation: Discharge plate (paper separation) [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Separation *EGB T. Roll 2: 1st *EGB T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB [Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, plain paper 1 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> N: Normal, Edge ->TE: Trailing Edge T. Roll 2: N: TE *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] Separation: N: TE *EGB [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step] [Normal: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the leading edge area, plain paper 1, CMY toner Paper side: 1st or 2nd [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Separation *EGB T. Roll 2: 1st *EGB T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB [Normal: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the trailing edge area, plain paper 1, CMY toner [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Separation *EGB T. Roll 2: 1st *EGB T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB [Normal2: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, plain paper 2, black toner (Process Speed, Paper Side, Unit) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation) RS: 1st: T. Roll 2 *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 20.0 / 0.1 -A/step] RS: 1st: Separa. *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] RS: 2nd: T. Roll 2 *EGB [0 to 60 / 10.0 / 0.1 -A/step] RS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
Service Tables

2422 2422 002 2422 003

2423 2423 003 2423 007 2423 012

2424 2424 002 2424 003

2426 2426 003 2426 007 2426 012

2428 2428 003 2428 007 2428 012

2432

2432 007 2432 008 2432 012 2432 013

SM

5-33

G104

SERVICE MODE TABLE


[Normal2: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, plain paper 2, black toner (Process Speed, Paper Side) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd LS: 1st: T. Roll 2 *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 10.0 / 0.1 -A/step] LS: 1st: Separa. *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] LS: 2nd: T. Roll 2 *EGB [0 to 60 / 7.5 / 0.1 -A/step] LS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [Normal2: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, plain paper 2, CMY toner (Process Speed, Paper Side) RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd RS: 1st: T. Roll 2 *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 20.0 / 0.1 -A/step] RS: 1st: Separa. *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] RS: 2nd: T. Roll 2 *EGB [0 to 60 / 20.0 / 0.1 -A/step] RS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [Normal2: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, plain paper 2, CMY toner (Process Speed, Paper Side) LS: Low Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd LS: 1st: T. Roll 2 *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 10.0 / 0.1 -A/step] LS: 1st: Separa. *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] LS: 2nd: T. Roll 2 *EGB [0 to 60 / 15.0 / 0.1 -A/step] LS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [Normal2:[K]:LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the leading edge area, plain paper 2, black toner Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separation: Discharge plate (paper separation) [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Separation *EGB Trans.Roll2: 1st *EGB Trans.Roll2: 2nd *EGB [Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, plain paper 2 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> N: Normal, LE: Leading Edge T. Roll 2: N2: LE *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] Separation: N2: LE *EGB [0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step]

2433 2433 007 2433 008 2433 012 2433 013

2437 2437 013 2437 014 2437 021 2437 022

2438 2438 013 2438 014 2438 021 2438 022

2451 2451 003 2451 007 2451 012

2452 2452 002 2452 003

G104

5-34

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE


[Normal2: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the trailing edge area, plain paper 2, black toner Paper side: 1st or 2nd Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separation: Discharge plate (paper separation) [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Separation *EGB T. Roll 2: 1st *EGB T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB [Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, plain paper 2 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> N: Normal, TE: Trailing Edge T. Roll 2: N2: TE *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] Separation: N2: TE *EGB [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step] [Normal2:[FC]:LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the leading edge area, plain paper 2, CMY toner Paper Side: 1st or 2nd [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Separation *EGB T. Roll 2: 1st *EGB T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB [Normal2:[FC]:TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the trailing edge area, plain paper 2, CMY toner Paper Side: 1st or 2nd [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Separation *EGB T. Roll 2: 1st *EGB T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB [Thick: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, thick paper 1, black toner Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation) T. Roll 2: 1st *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 7.5 / 0.1 -A/step] Separation: 1st *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB [0 to 60 / 7.5 / 0.1 -A/step] Separation: 2nd *EGB [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

2453 2453 003 2453 007 2453012

2454 2454 002 2454 003

2456 2456 003 2456 007 2456 012

2458 2458 003 2458 007 2458 012

2501 2501 007 2501 008 2501 012 2501 013

SM

5-35

G104

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE


[Thick: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, thick paper 1, CMY toner Paper Side: 1st or 2nd T. Roll 2: 1st *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 10.0 / 0.1 -A/step] Separation: 1st *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB [0 to 60 / 15.0 / 0.1 -A/step] Separation: 2nd *EGB [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [Thick: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the leading edge area, thick paper 1, black toner Paper Side: 1st or 2nd [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Separation *EGB T. Roll 2: 1st *EGB T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB [Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, thick paper 1 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TC: Thick, LE: Leading Edge T. Roll 2: Thick: LE *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] Separation: TC: LE *EGB [0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step] [Thick: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the trailing edge area, thick paper 1, black toner Paper Side: 1st or 2nd [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Separation *EGB T. Roll 2: 1st *EGB T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB [Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, thick paper 1 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TC: Thick, TE: Trailing Edge T. Roll 2: Thick: TE *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] Separation: TC: TE *EGB [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step] [Thick: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the leading edge area, thick paper 1, CMY toner Paper Side: 1st or 2nd [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Separation *EGB T. Roll 2: 1st *EGB T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB

2506 2506 013 2506 014 2506 021 2506 022

2521 2521 003 2521 007 2521 012

2522 2522 002 2522 003

2523 2523 003 2523 007 2523 012

2524 2524 002 2524 003

2526 2526 003 2526 007 2526 012

G104

5-36

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE


[Thick: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the trailing edge area, thick paper 1, CMY toner Paper Side: 1st or 2nd [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Separation *EGB T. Roll 2: 1st *EGB T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB [Thick2: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, thick paper 2, black toner Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation) Transfer Roller 2 *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 7.5 / 0.1 -A/step] Separation *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [Thick2: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, thick paper 2, CMY toner Transfer Roller 2 *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 10.0 / 0.1 -A/step] Separation *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [Thick2: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the leading edge area, thick paper 2, black toner Separation *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Transfer Roller2 *EGB [Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, thick paper 2 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TC2: Thick 2, LE: Leading Edge T. Roll 2: TC2: LE *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] Separa.: TC2: LE *EGB [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step] [Thick2: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the trailing edge area, thick paper 2, black toner Separation *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Transfer Roller2 *EGB [Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, thick paper 2 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TC2: Thick 2, TE: Trailing Edge T. Roll 2: TC2: TE *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] Separa.: TC2: TE *EGB [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step]

2528 2528 003 2528 007 2528 012

2531 2531 007 2531 008

2536 2536 013 2536 014

2551 2551 003 2551 007

2552 2552 002 2552 003

2553 2553 003 2553 007

2554 2554 002 2554 003

SM

5-37

G104

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE


[Thick2: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the leading edge area, thick paper 2, CMY toner Separation *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Transfer Roller2 *EGB [Thick2: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the trailing edge area, thick paper 2, CMY toner Separation *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Transfer Roller2 *EGB [OHP: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, OHP, black toner Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation) Transfer Roller2 *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 15.0 / 0.1 -A/step] Separation *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [OHP: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, OHP, CMY toner Transfer Roller2 *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 15 / 0.1 -A/step Separation *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -KV/step] [OHP: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the leading edge area, OHP, black toner Transfer Roller2 *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Separation *EGB [Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, OHP (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> OHP, LE: Leading Edge T. Roll 2: OHP: LE *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] Separa.: OHP: LE *EGB [0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step] [OHP: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the trailing edge area, OHP, black toner Transfer Roller2 *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Separation *EGB [Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, OHP (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> OHP, TE: Trailing Edge T. Roll 2: OHP: TE *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] Separa.: OHP: TE *EGB [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step]

2556 2556 003 2556 007

2558 2558 003 2558 007

2601 2601 002 2601 003

2606 2606 005 2606 006

2621 2621 002 2621 003

2622 2622 002 2622 003

2623 2623 002 2623 003

2624 2624 002 2624 003

G104

5-38

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE


2626 2626 002 2626 003 [OHP: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the leading edge area, OHP, CMY toner Transfer Roller2 *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Separation *EGB [OHP: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the trailing edge area, OHP, CMY toner Transfer Roller2 *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Separation *EGB [Thin: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, thin paper, black toner Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation) Transfer Roller 2 *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 30.0 / 0.1 -A/step] Separation *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [Thin: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, thin paper, black toner Process Speed -> LS: Low Speed T.Roll 2: LS *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 15.0 / 0.5 -A/step] Separation: LS *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [Thin: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, thin paper, CMY toner Transfer Roller 2 *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 25.0 / 0.1 -A/step] Separation *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [Thin: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, thin paper, CMY toner Process Speed -> LS: Low Speed T.Roll 2: LS *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 17.5 / 0.1 -A/step] Separation: LS *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [Thin: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the leading edge area, thin paper, black toner Separation *EGB [0 to 400 / 200 / 5%/step] Transfer Roller2 *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
Service Tables

2628 2628 002 2628 003

2631 2631 007 2631 008

2633 2633 007 2633 008

2636 2636 013 2636 014

2638 2638 013 2638 014

2651 2651 003 2651 007

SM

5-39

G104

SERVICE MODE TABLE


2652 2652 002 2652 003 [Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, thin paper (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TN: Thin, LE: Leading Edge T. Roll 2: Thin: LE *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] Separation: TN: LE *EGB [0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step] [Thin: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the trailing edge area, thin paper, black toner Separation *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Transfer Roller2 *EGB [Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, thin paper (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TN: Thin, TE: Trailing Edge T. Roll 2: Thin: TE *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] Separation: TN: TE *EGB [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step] [Thin: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the leading edge area, thin paper, CMY toner Separation *EGB [0 to 400 / 200/ 5%/step] Transfer Roller2 *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] [Thin: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the trailing edge area, thin paper, CMY toner Separation *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] Transfer Roller2 *EGB [Special: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, special paper, black toner Paper Side: 1st or 2nd T.Roll 2: 1st *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 5.0 / 0.1 -A/step] Separation: 1st *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [Special: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area, special paper, CMY toner Paper Side: 1st or 2nd T.Roll 2: 1st *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 5.0 / 0.1 -A/step] Separation: 1st *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

2653 2653 003 2653 007

2654 2654 002 2654 003

2656 2656 003 2656 007

2658 2658 003 2658 007

2751 2751 007 2751 008

2756 2756 013 2756 014

G104

5-40

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE


[Special: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the leading edge area, special paper, black toner Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Separation *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] T.Roll 2: 1st *EGB [Special: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the trailing edge area, special paper, black toner Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Separation *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] T.Roll 2: 1st *EGB [SP: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the leading edge area, special paper, CMY toner Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Separation *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] T.Roll 2: 1st *EGB [SP: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the trailing edge area, special paper, CMY toner Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Separation *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] T.Roll 2: 1st *EGB [T2: N: Size 4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Plain paper 1, Paper width between A5 and A6 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd LL: RS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step] LL: RS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 350 / 5%/step] LL: RS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step] LL: RS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 170 / 5%/step] LL: LS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] LL: LS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 280 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 120 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 170 / 5%/step] MM: RS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 80 / 5%/step] MM: RS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 480 / 5%/step] MM: RS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step] MM: RS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 190 / 5%/step] MM: LS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step] MM: LS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step] MM: LS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step] MM: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 180 / 5%/step] HH: RS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step] HH: RS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 220 / 5%/step]
Service Tables

2771 2771 003 2771 007

2773 2773 003 2773 007

2776 2776 003 2776 007

2778 2778 003 2778 007

2901 2901 001 2901 002 2901 003 2901 004 2901 005 2901 006 2901 007 2901 008 2901 009 2901 010 2901 011 2901 012 2901 013 2901 014 2901 015 2901 016 2901 017 2901 018

SM

5-41

G104

SERVICE MODE TABLE


2901 019 2901 020 2901 021 2901 022 2901 023 2901 024 HH: RS [FC]: 1st HH: RS [FC]: 2nd HH: LS [K]: 1st HH: LS [K]: 2nd HH: LS [FC]: 1st HH: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / 110 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 170 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 60 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 110 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 70 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 120 / 5%/step]

2902 2902 001 2902 002 2902 003 2902 004 2902 005 2902 006 2902 007 2902 008 2902 009 2902 010 2902 011 2902 012 2902 013 2902 014 2902 015 2902 016 2902 017 2902 018 2902 019 2902 020 2902 021 2902 022 2902 023 2902 024

[T2: N: Size 5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Plain paper 1, Paper width A6 or less (Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd LL: RS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] LL: RS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step] LL: RS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] LL: RS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 190 / 5%/step] LL: LS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] LL: LS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 160 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 240 / 5%/step] MM: RS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 120 / 5%/step] MM: RS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 480 / 5%/step] MM: RS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] MM: RS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 190 / 5%/step] MM: LS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 170 / 5%/step] MM: LS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 500 / 5%/step] MM: LS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 140 / 5%/step] MM: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 220 / 5%/step] HH: RS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step] HH: RS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 220 / 5%/step] HH: RS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] HH: RS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] HH: LS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step] HH: LS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 140 / 5%/step] HH: LS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 110 / 5%/step] HH: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] [T2: N2: Size 4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Plain paper 2 Paper width between A5 and A6 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd LL: RS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step] LL: RS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 440 / 5%/step] LL: RS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step] LL: RS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 230 / 5%/step] LL: LS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] LL: LS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 280 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 120 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 210 / 5%/step]

2903 2903 001 2903 002 2903 003 2903 004 2903 005 2903 006 2903 007 2903 008

G104

5-42

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE


2903 009 2903 010 2903 011 2903 012 2903 013 2903 014 2903 015 2903 016 2903 017 2903 018 2903 019 2903 020 2903 021 2903 022 2903 023 2903 024 MM: RS [K]: 1st MM: RS [K]: 2nd MM: RS [FC]: 1st MM: RS [FC]: 2nd MM: LS [K]: 1st MM: LS [K]: 2nd MM: LS [FC]: 1st MM: LS [FC]: 2nd HH: RS [K]: 1st HH: RS [K]: 2nd HH: RS [FC]: 1st HH: RS [FC]: 2nd HH: LS [K]: 1st HH: LS [K]: 2nd HH: LS [FC]: 1st HH: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 600 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 300 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 530 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 120 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 110 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 220 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 80 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 180 / 5%/step]

2904 2904 001 2904 002 2904 003 2904 004 2904 005 2904 006 2904 007 2904 008 2904 009 2904 010 2904 011 2904 012 2904 013 2904 014 2904 015 2904 016 2904 017 2904 018 2904 019 2904 020 2904 021 2904 022 2904 023 2904 024

[T2: N2: Size 5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Plain paper 2, Paper width A6 or less (Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd LL: RS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 190 / 5%/step] LL: RS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 500 / 5%/step] LL: RS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] LL: RS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step] LL: LS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step] LL: LS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 160 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 300 / 5%/step] MM: RS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] MM: RS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 600 / 5%/step] MM: RS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] MM: RS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 300 / 5%/step] MM: LS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 250 / 5%/step] MM: LS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 670 / 5%/step] MM: LS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 250 / 5%/step] MM: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 330 / 5%/step] HH: RS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 160 / 5%/step] HH: RS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step] HH: RS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] HH: RS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 240 / 5%/step] HH: LS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 120 / 5%/step] HH: LS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 180 / 5%/step] HH: LS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step] HH: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 250 / 5%/step]

SM

5-43

G104

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE


[T2: Thin: Size4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thin Paper, Paper width between A5 and A6 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed LL: RS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 80 / 5%/step] LL: RS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step] LL: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 120 / 5%/step] MM: RS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 70 / 5%/step] MM: RS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 80 / 5%/step] MM: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step] MM: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step] HH: RS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step] HH: RS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step] HH: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 60 / 5%/step] HH: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step] [T2: Thin: Size5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thin paper, Paper width A6 or less (Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed LL: RS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step] LL: RS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] LL: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 160 / 5%/step] MM: RS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step] MM: RS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 120 / 5%/step] MM: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 170 / 5%/step] MM: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 140 / 5%/step] HH: RS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 110 / 5%/step] HH: RS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 180 / 5%/step] HH: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step] HH: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] [T2: TC: Size4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thick Paper 1, Paper width between A5 and A6 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd LL: LS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] LL: LS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step] MM: LS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step] MM: LS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 530 / 5%/step] MM: LS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] MM: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step] HH: LS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step] HH: LS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 110 / 5%/step] HH: LS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 120 / 5%/step] HH: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 110 / 5%/step]

2905 2905 001 2905 002 2905 003 2905 004 2905 005 2905 006 2905 007 2905 008 2905 009 2905 010 2905 011 2905 012

2906 2906 001 2906 002 2906 003 2906 004 2906 005 2906 006 2906 007 2906 008 2906 009 2906 010 2906 011 2906 012

2907 2907 001 2907 002 2907 003 2907 004 2907 005 2907 006 2907 007 2907 008 2907 009 2907 010 2907 011 2907 012

G104

5-44

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE


[T2: TC: Size5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thick paper 1, Paper width A6 or less (Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd LL: LS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] LL: LS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step] MM: LS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step] MM: LS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 530 / 5%/step] MM: LS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] MM: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step] HH: LS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step] HH: LS [K]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 170 / 5%/step] HH: LS [FC]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / 160 / 5%/step] HH: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB [0 to 1275 / 170 / 5%/step] [T2: TC2: Size4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thick Paper 2, Paper width between A5 and A6 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed LL: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] MM: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step] MM: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] HH: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step] HH: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 120 / 5%/step] [T2: TC2: Size5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thick paper 2, Paper width A6 or less (Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed LL: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] MM: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step] MM: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] HH: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step] HH: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 160 / 5%/step] [T2: SP Size4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Special paper, Paper width between A5 and A6 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed LL: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] MM: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step] MM: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step] HH: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] HH: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
Service Tables

2908 2908 001 2908 002 2908 003 2908 004 2908 005 2908 006 2908 007 2908 008 2908 009 2908 010 2908 011 2908 012

2909 2909 001 2909 002 2909 003 2909 004 2909 005 2909 006

2910 2910 001 2910 002 2910 003 2910 004 2910 005 2910 006

2911 2911 001 2911 002 2911 003 2911 004 2911 005 2911 006

SM

5-45

G104

SERVICE MODE TABLE


[T2: SP: Size5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Special paper, Paper width A6 or less (Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed LL: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] LL: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] MM: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step] MM: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step] HH: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] HH: LS [FC] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] [S: HH SP: 1st] Smaller than A5 HH Special paper, 1st side T2 Switch Timing *EGB [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 mm/step] T2 Correction *EGB [0 to 1275 / 20 / 5%/step] [S: HH SP: 2nd] Smaller than A5 HH Special paper, 2nd side T2 Switch Timing *EGB [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 mm/step] T2 Correction *EGB [0 to 1275 / 0 / 5%/step] [Separa. : LE: HH] Separation Voltage: Correction for HH Humidity at the Leading Edge (Paper Type, Process Speed, [Color]) Paper Type -> Normal, Thin Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed [0 to 400 / 200 / 5%/step] Normal: RS: [K] *EGB Normal: RS: [FC] *EGB Normal: LS: [K] *EGB Normal: LS: [FC] *EGB Normal 2: RS: [K] *EGB Normal 2: RS: [FC] *EGB Normal 2: LS: [K] *EGB Normal 2: LS: [FC] *EGB Thin: RS: [K] *EGB Thin: RS: [FC] *EGB Thin: LS: [K] *EGB Thin: LS: [FC] *EGB

2912 2912 001 2912 002 2912 003 2912 004 2912 005 2912 006 2920 2920 001 2920 002 2921 2921 001 2921 002

2930 2930 001 2930 002 2930 003 2930 004 2930 005 2930 006 2930 007 2930 008 2930 009 2930 010 2930 011 2930 012

G104

5-46

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE

SP3-XXX (Process)
3001 3001 001 3001 002 3001 003 3001 004 3002 3002 001 3002 002 3002 003 3002 004 3002 005 3002 006 3002 007 3002 008 3003 3003 001 3003 002 3003 003 3003 004 3003 005 3003 006 3003 007 3003 008 [Vt Display] Vt Display ([Color]) [K] *EGB [M] *EGB [C] *EGB [Y] *EGB Displays the output voltage of TD sensor for each color. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.01 / 0.01 V/step]

[Vcnt Current] Current Vcnt Display ([Color]) [K] *EGB Displays the current Vcnt for each color. [0.00 to 5.00 / 3.00 / 0.01 V/step] [M] *EGB [C] *EGB [Y] *EGB [Vcnt Initial] Initial Vcnt Display ([Color]) Displays the initial Vcnt for each color. [K] *EGB [0.00 to 5.00 / 3.00 / 0.01 V/step] [M] *EGB [C] *EGB [Y] *EGB [Vtref Current] Current Vtref Display ([Color]) [K] *EGB Displays the current Vtref for each color. [0.00 to 5.00 / 3.00 / 0.01 V/step] [M] *EGB [C] *EGB [Y] *EGB [Vtref Initial] Initial Vtref Display ([Color]) [K] *EGB Displays the initial Vtref for each color. [0.00 to 5.00 / 3.00 / 0.01 V/step] [M] *EGB [C] *EGB [Y] *EGB [T. Sensor Init.] Toner Density Sensor Initial Setting (Agitation Time, TS Target: Toner Sensor Target Value, [Color]) Agitation: [K] *EGB Adjusts the agitation time for the developer for each color. Agitation: [M] *EGB [0 to 300 / 65 / 1 sec/step] Agitation: [C] *EGB Agitation: [Y] *EGB TD Target: [K] *EGB Adjusts the TS initial target voltage for each color. TD Target: [M] *EGB [0.00 to 5.00 / 2.50 / 0.01 V/step] TD Target: [C] *EGB TD Target: [Y] *EGB [Vt Shift] Vt Shift Setting ([Color]) [K] *EGB Adjusts the Vt shift rate for each color. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.75 / 0.01 V/step] [M] *EGB [C] *EGB [Y] *EGB

3011 3011 001 3011 002 3011 003 3011 004 3011 005 3011 006 3011 007 3011 008 3021 3021 001 3021 002 3021 003 3021 004

SM

5-47

G104

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE

3041 3041 001 3041 002 3041 003 3041 004 3041 005 3041 006 3041 007 3041 008 3042 3042 001

[Vtref] Vtref Setting ([Color]) Lower Limit: [K] *EGB Lower Limit: [M] *EGB Lower Limit: [C] *EGB Lower Limit: [Y] *EGB Upper Limit: [K] *EGB Upper Limit: [M] *EGB Upper Limit: [C] *EGB Upper Limit: [Y] *EGB

Sets the lower limit Vtref voltage for each color. [0.10 to 5.00 / 1.50 / 0.01 V/step] DFU Sets the maximum limit Vtref voltage for each color. [0.10 to 5.00 / 3.70 / 0.01 V/step]

3042 002 3042 003 3042 004 3042 005 3042 014 3042 015 3042 016 3042 017 3101 3101 001 3101 002 3101 003 3101 004 3111 3111 001 3111 002

[Vtref] Vtref Correction Setting ([Color]) DFU Mode *EGB Sets the Vtref correction. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric 0: On, 1: Off Step [K] *EGB Adjusts the Vtref correction step for each color. Step [M] *EGB [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.10 / 0.01 V/step] Step [C] *EGB Step [Y] *EGB Change Step: [K] *EGB Adjusts the density change rate of the ID sensor pattern for each color. Change Step: [M] *EGB [0 to 100 / 10 / 1%/step] Change Step: [C] *EGB Change Step: [Y] *EGB [P. Sensor Patt.] ID Sensor Pattern Density Setting ([Color]) Change Value: [K] *EGB Displays the density change rate of the ID sensor pattern for each color. Change Value: [M] *EGB [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1%/step] Change Value: [C] *EGB Change Value: [Y] *EGB [Voff Display] Vsp-offset Display Regular *EGB Displays the Vsp-offset regular voltage. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step] Diffusion *EGB Displays the Vsp-offset diffusion voltage. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step] [Vsg Display] Vsg Display Regular *EGB Diffusion

3121 3121 001 3121 002

Displays the Vsp regular voltage. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step] Displays the Vsp diffusion voltage. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step]

3131 3131 001

[Lps Display] Ips Display Lps *EGB

Displays the Ips. [0 to 511 / 0 / 1/step]

G104

5-48

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE

3141 3141 001 3141 005 3142 3142 001

[Vmin Display] [K] [Cl] [Kx Display] Min

*EGB *EGB

Displays the Vmin voltage for each color. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step]

*EGB

Displays the minimum Kx. [0.0000 to 1.0000 / 0.0000 / 0.0001/step]

3143 3143 002 3143 003 3143 004 3145 3145 001

[K5 Display] ([Color]) [M] [C] [Y] [Vmin] Upper Limit

*EGB *EGB *EGB

Displays the P.sensor K5 for each color. [0.0000 to 5.0000 / 1.2500 / 0.0001/step]

*EGB

DFU Adjusts the maximum Vmin. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.05 / 0.01 V/step]

3146 3146 001

[K2] Upper Limit

*EGB

3146 002

Lower Limit

*EGB

3147 3147 001

[K5] Upper Limit

*EGB

3147 002

Lower Limit

*EGB

DFU Adjusts the upper limit. [0.0000 to 5.0000 / 2.5000 / 0.0001/step] DFU Adjusts the lower limit. [0.0000 to 5.0000 / 0.7500 / 0.0001/step]

3148 3148 001

[P sensor Prm.] ID sensor Parameter setting *EGB DFU [0 to 8.0000 / 4.600 / 0.001/step] [Vsg Display] ([Color]) Regular: [K] Regular: [M] Regular: [C] Regular: [Y]

3151 3151 001 3151 002 3151 003 3151 004

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

Displays the Vsg output from ID sensor for each mode. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step]

SM

5-49

G104

Service Tables

DFU Adjusts the upper limit. [0.0000 to 1.0000 / 0.1500 / 0.0001/step] DFU Adjusts the lower limit. [0.0000 to 1.0000 / 0.0500 / 0.0001/step]

SERVICE MODE TABLE


3151 005 3151 006 3151 007 3151 008 3161 3161 001 3161 002 3161 003 3161 004 3171 3171 001 3171 002 Diffusion: [K] Diffusion: [M] Diffusion: [C] Diffusion: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the Vsg output from ID sensor for each mode. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step]

[P. Pattern] ID Sensor Pattern Setting ([Color]) DFU Target Value: [K] *EGB Adjusts the target voltage of ID sensor pattern for each mode. Target Value: [M] *EGB [0 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] Target Value: [C] *EGB Target Value: [Y] *EGB [P. Pattern] ID Sensor Pattern Setting ([Color]) DFU Interval: [K] *EGB Adjusts the interval of making the ID sensor pattern. Interval: [MCY] *EGB [0 to 200 / 60/ 1 sheet/step] [Toner Near End] Toner Near End ([Color]) DFU Sensor: [K] Displays the output from the toner end sensor. Sensor: [M] [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 V/step] Sensor: [C] Sensor: [Y] [Toner Near End] Toner Near End ([Color]) Counter: [K] *EGB Displays the counter of the toner near end for each mode. Counter: [M] *EGB [0 to 30 / 0 / 1/step] Counter: [C] *EGB Counter: [Y] *EGB [Toner Mode] Toner Supply Control ([Color]) [K] *EGB Selects the method of the toner suppy for each mode. [M] *EGB [0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step] [C] *EGB 0: Fixed, 1: Coefficient (Pixel), [Y] *EGB 2: Coefficient (TD sensor), 3: Hybrid 6.2.5 [Toner Mode] Toner Supply Control ([Color]) Fixed Rate: [K] *EGB Adjusts the toner supply rate for each mode. These SPs are enabled only when SP3301 Fixed Rate: [M] *EGB for each color is set to 0. Fixed Rate: [C] *EGB [0 to 100 / 5 / 1%/step] Fixed Rate: [Y] *EGB [Toner Mode] Toner Supply Control ([Color]) T. Supply Rate: [K] *EGB Displays the toner supply rate for each

3201 3201 001 3201 002 3201 003 3201 004 3202 3202 001 3202 002 3202 003 3202 004 3301 3301 001 3301 002 3301 003 3301 004

3302 3302 001 3302 002 3302 003 3302 004 3303 3303 001

G104

5-50

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE


3303 002 3303 003 3303 004 3304 3304 001 3304 002 3304 003 3304 004 3304 005 3304 006 3304 007 3304 008 3306 3306 001 3306 002 3306 003 3306 004 3306 005 3306 006 3306 007 3306 008 3306 009 3306 010 3306 011 3306 012 3306 013 3306 014 3306 015 3306 016 3306 017 3306 018 3306 019 3306 020 3401 3401 001 T. Supply Rate: [M] T. Supply Rate: [C] T. Supply Rate: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB mode. [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%/step]

[Toner Mode] Toner Supply Control ([Color]) Upper Limit: [K] *EGB Adjusts the upper limit of toner supply rate for each mode. Upper Limit: [M] *EGB [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step] Upper Limit: [C] *EGB Upper Limit: [Y] *EGB Lower Limit: [K] *EGB Adjusts the lower limit of toner supply rate for each mode. Lower Limit: [M] *EGB [0 to 800/ 100/ 10 msec/step] Lower Limit: [C] *EGB Lower Limit: [Y] *EGB [Toner Mode] Toner Supply Control ([Color]) Coefficient 1: [K] *EGB Adjusts the time of the toner supply in proportional control mode (Pixel). Coefficient 1: [M] *EGB [0.10 to 5.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step] Coefficient 1: [C] *EGB Coefficient 1: [Y] *EGB Coefficient 2: [K] *EGB Adjusts the time of the toner supply in proportional control mode (TD sensor). Coefficient 2: [M] *EGB [0.10 to 5.00 / 0.3 / 0.01/step] Coefficient 2: [C] *EGB Coefficient 2: [Y] *EGB Coefficient 3: [K] *EGB Adjusts the time of the toner supply in hybrid control mode. Coefficient 3: [M] *EGB [0.10 to 5.00 / 0.4 / 0.01/step] Coefficient 3: [C] *EGB Coefficient 3: [Y] *EGB Coefficient 4: [K] *EGB Adjusts the time of the toner supply in hybrid control mode. Coefficient 4: [M] *EGB [0.10 to 5.00 / 0.1 / 0.01/step] Coefficient 4: [C] *EGB Coefficient 4: [Y] *EGB Coefficient 5: [K] *EGB Adjusts the time of the toner supply in hybrid control mode. Coefficient 5: [M] *EGB [0.10 to 5.00 / 0.80/ 0.01/step] Coefficient 5: [C] *EGB Coefficient 5: [Y] *EGB [Toner End Detec] Toner End Detection *EGB [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Detect, 1: Not detect [Toner Near End] ([Color]) DFU Min. Print: [K] *EGB Min. Print: [Cl] *EGB Max. Print: [K] *EGB

3411 3411 001 3411 002 3411 003

Minimum: This is the minimum number of prints after the toner end sensor detects toner end. M i F l i

SM

5-51

G104

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE


3411 004 Max. Print: [Cl] *EGB Maximum: For low image coverage, more sheets can be printed. This sets the maximum that can be printed after toner end is detected. [0 to 750 / 0 / 1/step] DFU Adjusts the number of sheets (A4), which the pixel area is converted into for the toner end after detecting the toner near end. [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

3411 005 3411 006

Pixel: [K] Pixel: [Cl]

*EGB *EGB

3501 3501 001

[Process Cont.] Process Control ON/ OFF *EGB Sets the method of the process control. [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Auto, 1: Fixed 2: Auto + LS, 3: Auto (Table fixed) Do not use settings 2 and 3. [Pntr. Display] Process Control Table Display ([Color]) [K] *EGB Displays the current process control table for each mode. [M] *EGB [1 to 30 / 15 / 1/step] [C] *EGB [Y] *EGB [M/A Target] ([Color]) [K]

3511 3511 001 3511 002 3511 003 3511 004 3531 3531 001

*EGB

3531 002 3531 003 3531 004 3541 3541 001

[M] [C] [Y]

*EGB *EGB *EGB

Adjusts the maximum toner target M/A for each mode. [0.000 to 1.000 / 0.53 / 0.001 mg/step] [0.000 to 1.000 / 0.500 / 0.001 mg/step]

[TD Setting] Toner Density Adjustment Setting *EGB [ 0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: On, 1: Off [PC SelfChk] Process Control Self-check Job End 1: [K] *EGB At the end of a job, process control is done after the interval of time that is set with SP Job End 1: [Cl] *EGB 3555 001, if this number of pages was printed after the previous process control. [0 to 2000 / 210 / 1 page/step] Job End 2: [K] *EGB At the end of a job, process control is done immediately, if this number of pages was Job End 2: [Cl] *EGB printed after the previous process control. [0 to 2000 / 300 / 1 page/step] Job End 3: [K] *EGB In the middle of a job, printing stops and

3551 3551 001 3551 002

3551 003 3551 004 3551 005

G104

5-52

SM

SERVICE MODE TABLE


3551 006 Job End 3: [Cl] *EGB process control is done if the number of pages in the job gets to this number. [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]

3554 3554 001

3554 002

3554 003

3554 004

[Pow. ON SelfChk] Power On Self-check Time *EGB Adjusts the threshold (Time) of the process control from turning the power on. [0 to 24 / 6.0 / 0.1 H/step] Temp./ Humidity *EGB Adjusts the threshold (Temperature/ Humidity) of the process control. [0 to 100 / 6 / 0.1 g/m3/step] Time 2 *EGB Adjusts the threshold (Time) for developer mixing after turning the power on. [0 to 200.0 / 36.0 / 0.1 H/step] Temp./ Humidity 2 *EGB Adjusts the threshold (Temperature/ Humidity) for developer mixing after turning the power on. [0 to 100 / 6.0 / 0.1 g/m3/step] [S.Chk Stand-by] Self-check Stand-by Time *EGB [0 to 30 / 0 / 1 /step] [Image Process.] Image Processing Time (Year) *EGB [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 year/step] Time (Month) *EGB [1 to 12 / 1 / 1 month/step] Time (Date) *EGB [1 to 31 / 1 / 1 day/step] Time (Hour) *EGB [0 to 23 / 0 / 1 hour/step] Time (Minute) *EGB [0 to 59 / 0 / 1 minute/step] [Image Process.] Image Processing Temperature *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0.0 / 0.1C/step] Humidity *EGB [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1% RH/step] A. Humidity *EGB [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 g/m3/step]/step] [No Use SelfChk] No Use Self-check Maximum Repeat *EGB Adjusts the maximum repeat times of the process control. [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 time/step] [Dev g Display] Development gamma Display ([Color]) [K] *EGB Displays the development gamma measured during the process control self-check. [M] *EGB [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01/step] [C] *EGB [Y] *EGB

3555 3555 001 3556 3556 001 3556 002 3556 003 3556 004 3556 005 3557 3557 001 3557 002 3557 003 3558 3558 001

3561 3561 001 3561 002 3561 003 3561 004

SM

5-53

G104

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE


3562 3562 001 3562 002 3562 003 3562 004 3573 3573 001 3573 002 3573 003 3573 004 3574 3574 001 3574 002 3574 003 3574 004 [Vk Display] ([Color]) [K] [M] [C] [Y] [Vd Display] ([Color]) [K] [M] [C] [Y] [Vl Display] ([Color]) [K] [M] [C] [Y]

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

Displays the current Vk value. [-300 to 300 / 0 / 1 V/step]

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

Displays the current Vd value. [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 V/step]

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

Displays the current Vl value. [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 V/step]

3575 3575 001 3575 002 3575 003 3575 004 3575 005 3575 006 3575 007 3575 008

[Vb Display] (Process Speed,[Color]) RS: Regular speed, LS: Low speed RS: [K] *EGB Displays the current Vb value for each mode. [0 to 800 / 350 / 1 V/step] RS: [M] *EGB RS: [C] *EGB RS: [Y] *EGB LS: [K] *EGB LS: [M] *EGB LS: [C] *EGB LS: [Y] *EGB [Charge Bias] Charge Roller Bias (DC, Process Speed,[Color]) RS: Regular speed, LS: Low speed DC: RS: [K] *EGB Displays the current charge roller DC bias of the development unit for each mode. DC: RS: [M] *EGB [0 to 999 / 585 / 1 V/step] DC: RS: [C] *EGB DC: RS: [Y] *EGB DC: LS: [K] *EGB DC: LS: [M] *EGB DC: LS: [C] *EGB DC: LS: [Y] *EGB [Charge Bias] Charge Roller Bias (AC, Process Speed,[Color]) RS: Regular speed, LS: Low speed AC: RS: [K] *EGB Displays the current charge roller AC bias of the development unit for each mode. AC: RS: [M] *EGB [0.0 to 3.0 / 1.9 / 0.001 kV/step] AC: RS: [C] *EGB AC: RS: [Y] *EGB
5-54 SM

3576 3576 001 3576 002 3576 003 3576 004 3576 005 3576 006 3576 007 3576 008

3577 3577 001 3577 002 3577 003 3577 004


G104

SERVICE MODE TABLE


3577 005 3577 006 3577 007 3577 008 AC: LS: [K] AC: LS: [M] AC: LS: [C] AC: LS: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

3581 3581 001 3581 002 3581 003 3581 004 3581 005 3581 006 3581 007 3581 008

[LD Control] LD Power Control Displays the current LD power rate for each mode. LD: RS: [K] *EGB [10 to 200 / 100 / 1%/step] LD: RS: [M] *EGB LD: RS: [C] *EGB LD: RS: [Y] *EGB LD: LS: [K] *EGB LD: LS: [M] *EGB LD: LS: [C] *EGB LD: LS: [Y] *EGB [Low Resolution] (Threshold, [Color]) SP 3701-001 controls if the pixel count is used in hybrid toner supply mode or not. If this SP is on, it is used if the image coverage ratio for the page is below a threshold value (if the coverage is above this ratio, then the TD sensor is used). If this SP is off, then the TD sensor is always used. SP3701-002 to 005 control the threshold values for the image coverage ratio. *EGB [0 to 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On Threshold: [K] *EGB [0 to 100 / 1 / 1%/step] Threshold: [M] *EGB Threshold: [C] *EGB Threshold: [Y] *EGB [Low Resolution] Toner Refresh Mode Setting in Low Image Coverage Ratio Toner Refresh Mode Enables or disables the toner refresh mode. [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: On. 1: Off S: Toner Refresh Toner refresh mode is done if the percentage of pages that have low image coverage is larger than this threshold value. [0 to 50 / 20 / 1%/step] [TD Initial] TD sensor Initialization ([Color]) DFU Initializes the developer for each mode. [All] Press the Enter key to execute the [Cl] initialization after the machine asks [K] Execute? [M] [C] [Y]

3701

3701 001 3701 002 3701 003 3701 004 3701 005 3721 3721 001

3721 002

3801 3801 001 3801 002 3801 003 3801 004 3801 005 3801 006

SM

5-55

G104

Service Tables

SERVICE MODE TABLE


3811 3811 001 3820 3820 001 [Developer] Developer Initialization All Initializes all the developers. [Process Cont.] Process Control Executes the process control. Press the Enter key to execute the initialization after the machine asks Execute? [P Ctl Result] Process Control Result Displays each logged process control result. 1 *EGB The ten most recent ones are shown. 3821 2 *EGB 001 is the most recent. 3 *EGB 4.1 4 *EGB 5 6 7 8 9 10 *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

3821 3821 001 3821 002 3821 003 3821 004 3821 005 3821 006 3821 007 3821 008 3821 009 3821 010

G104

5-56

SM

Rev. 08/2005

ENGINE SERVICE MODE

SP5-XXX (Mode)
5024 5024 001 [mm / inch Display] *CTL Sets units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes. [0 or 1 / 1 /-] 0: mm (EU/AS), 1: inch (NA)

5040 5040 001 5040 002 5040 003 5040 004 5041 5041 001 5041 002 5041 003 5041 004
5045 5045 001

[Free Size main] Free Size Main Scan DFU By-pass *CTL Displays the width of the custom paper size that is set by the user. Tray1 *CTL [0.0 to 297.0 / 215.9 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray2 *CTL Tray3 *CTL [Free Size Sub] Free Size Sub Scan DFU By-pass *CTL Displays the length of the custom paper size that is set by the user. Tray1 *CTL [0.0 to 297.0 / 279.4 / 0.1 mm/step] Tray2 *CTL Tray3 *CTL
[Accounting count] Counter Method

*CTL

Selects the counting method if the meter charge mode is enabled with SP5-930-001. You can change the setting only one time. [0 to 1 / 1 / -] 0: Developments, 1: Pages
Service Tables G104

5051 5051 001

[Toner Refill Displ] Toner Refill Display *CTL Enable or disable the toner refill display. [0 to 1 / 0 / -] 0: enable, 1: disable

5055 5055 001

[Display IP Address] IP Address Display *CTL Displays the IP address on the second line of the operation panel when the printer is in the Ready condition. [0 to 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On
NOTE: This SP Mode requires: Websys v1.05 or later (P/N G1045235C) Controller v1.07.2 or later (P/N G1045239F) Printer v1.07.2 or later (P/N G1045243F)

5150 5801 001

[Bypass Length Se] By-pass Length Setting Lets or does not let the by-pass tray feed extra long paper (up to 1260 mm). [0 to 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: On

SM

5-57

ENGINE SERVICE MODE

Rev. 08/2005

5302 5302 002

[Set Time] Time difference

*CTL#

Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone. [-1440 to 1440 / NA, EU, CH / 1 minute/step] NA: -300, EU: 60, CH: 480

5307 5307 001

[Summer Time] Setting

5307 003 5307 004 5404 5404 001 5501 5501 001

Rule Set(Start) Rule Set(End)

Enables or disables the summer time mode. [0 to 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: On Specifies the start of the daylight saving time. Specifies the end of the daylight saving time.

[UcodeCtrClr] User Code Counter Clear UcodeCtrClr Clears all counters for users. [PM Alarm] PM Alarm Level *CTL

Sets the PM alarm level. A PM alarm is made when this condition occurs: PA x 1000 = or > PC, where PA is the value set in SP5501 and PC is the value in the PM counter. [0 to 9999 / 0 / -] The alert is sent to the e-mail address that is specified for the system administrator using a browser and the built-in web server (Web Image Monitor). 0: Disables the PM alarm When SP5-866-001 is set to 1, this SP is enabled.

5504 5504 001

[Jam Alarm] *CTL Sets the jam alarm level. If a paper jam occurs, the jam alarm counter increases by +1. If no paper jam occurs while the set number of paper is output, the jam alarm counter decreases by -1. The jam alarm occurs when the jam alarm counter gets to +10. [0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step] 0: Disables the jam alarm 1: 1.5K, 2: 3K, 3: 6K The alert is sent to the e-mail address that is specified for the system administrator using a browser and the built-in web server (Web Image Monitor). When SP5-866-001 is set to 1, this SP is enabled.

G104

5-58

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


5505 5505 001 [Error Alarm] *CTL Sets the error alarm level. If an SC code occurs, the error alarm counter increases by +1. If no SC code occurs while the set number of paper is output, the jam alarm counter decreases by -1. The error alarm occurs when the error alarm counter reaches +5. [0 to 255 / 30 / 1/step] 0: Disables the PM alarm The alert is sent to the e-mail address that is specified for the system administrator using a browser and the built-in web server (Web Image Monitor). When SP5-866-001 is set to 1, this SP is enabled.

5507 5507 001 5507 003 5507 128 5507 133 5507 134 5507 142 5507 164 5507 166 5507 172

[Supply Alarm] Paper Supply Ala Toner Supply Ala Interval: Others Interval: A4 Interval: A5 Interval: B5 Interval: LG Interval: LT Interval: HLT

*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL

Enables or disables the supply alarm. [0 to 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: On Sets the paper supply alarm level. A paper supply alarm counter increases by +1 when a sheet of the related size is used. The paper supply alarm occurs when one of the paper supply alarm counters gets to the set value. [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1/step] The alert is sent to the e-mail address that is specified for the system administrator using a browser and the built-in web server (Web Image Monitor). When SP5-866-001 is set to 1, this SP is enabled.

5801 5801 001 5801 002 5801 003 5801 004 5801 005 5801 008 5801 010 5801 011

[Memory Clear] All Engine SCS IMH MCS PRT Web Service NCS

*CTL *CTL

5801 014

DCS Setting

*CTL

Resets the SP5801-002 through 016 except the security related data in 003, 010, 011and 015. These cannot be reset with SP mode. Resets or deletes the engine-related data. Clears the system settings. Clears IMH data. DFU Clears MCS data. DFU Clears the printer application settings. Clears the web service data and the network application data. Initializes the system default and interface settings (IP address also), SmartNetMonitor for Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings. Resets or deletes the DCS-related data.

SM

5-59

G104

Service Tables

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


5801 015 5801 016 5801 017 Clear UCS Setting MIRS Setting CCS *CTL Resets or deletes the UCS-related data. Resets or deletes the MIRS-related data. Resets or deletes the CSS-related data. FA

5802 5802 001

[Engine Free Run] Performs a free run on the printer engine. NOTE: 1) The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence of A4/LT printing from the 1st tray. Therefore, paper should be loaded in the 1st tray, but paper is not fed. 2) The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode for a test. [Input Check] 5.2.4 [Output Check] 5.2.5 [Destin. / Model] Destination Code / Model Destination Code *EGB [0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric 0: DOM, 1: OTHER, 2: ASIA 3: ERP. 4: USA Model *EGB [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Pla (G104), 1: Plb (G105) [Destination] Destination Code Display Destin. Code Disp *EGB Displays the destination code. [0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric 0: DOM, 1: OTHER, 2: ASIA 3: ERP. 4: USA [Fusing SC Reset] Resets a type A service call condition. Turn the main power switch off and on after resetting the SC code. [Serial No.] Machine Serial No. Setting Setting *EGB Sets the machine serial number. Display *EGB Displays the machine serial number. ID 2 Code Display *CTL Displays the ID 2 Code. FA

5803

5804

5807 5807 001

5807 002

5808 5808 001

5810 5810 001

5811 5811 001 5811 002 5811 003

FA

G104

5-60

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


5812 5812 001 [Tel. No. Setting] Service

*CTL

5812 002

FAX TEL No.

*CTL

Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on the Counter List, which can be printed with the users Counter menu. This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input). Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on the Counter List, which can be printed with the users Counter menu if the Meter Charge mode is selected with SP5930-1. This can be up to 13 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input).

5813 5813 001

[Power Freqency] Displays the power frequency. [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 Hz/step] Not used

5814 5814 001

[Power Voltage] Detected Voltage

Displays the detected power voltage. [0 to 400 / 0 / 1 V/step] Not used

5816 5816 001

[Remote Service] I/F Setting

*CTL

5816 002 5816 003

CE Call Function Flag

*CTL *CTL

5816 006

Device Informati

*CTL

5816 007 5816 008

SSL Disable RCG Connect Time

*CTL *CTL

5816 009

RCG Write Timeou

*CTL

[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: CSS 2: Network (The remote service function is on.) [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0: Start, 1: End [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Off (The remote service function is disabled.) 1: On (The remote service function is enabled.) Shows or does not show the device information in the User Tools. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Not displayed, 1: Displayed [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: On, 1: Off Sets the timeout counter for the remote connection. [1 to 90 / 10 / 1 second/step] Sets the timeout counter for writing processing. [0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second/step]

SM

5-61

G104

Service Tables

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


5816 010 RCG Read Timeout *CTL Sets the timeout counter for reading processing. [0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second/step] Enables or disables access to the SOAP method via port 80. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Disables, 1: Enables

5816 011

Port 80 Enable

*CTL

5821 5821 001 5821 002

[Remote Service Address] CSS-PI Device Co *CTL RCG IP Address *CTL

[0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step] DFU Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote Communication Gate). [00000000h to FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1/step]

5824 5824 001

[NV-RAM Data Upload] # Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial number) from the NVRAM to an SD card.

5825 5825 001

[NV-RAM Data Download] #

Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card to the NVRAM.

5828 5828 050

5828 052

5828 065

5828 066

[Network] Job spool settings/ Interface selection for Ethernet and wireless LAN 1284 Compatible *CTL Switches Centronics IEEE1284 compatibility on/off for the network. [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled NOTE: Selecting 0 disables bi-directional data transmission. ECP *CTL Switches the ECP setting for Centronics off/on. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled NOTE: With 1 selected, SP5-828-050 must be enabled for 1284 mode compatibility. Job Spool *CTL Switches the job spool on/off. [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled HD job Clear *CTL Selects the treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at power on. [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0: Data is cleared, 1: Automatically printed

G104

5-62

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


5828 069 Job Spool (Protocol) *CTL Switches job spooling off or on and enables settings for job spooling protocols. [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0: Off, 1: On Bit switch: Bit 0: LPR Bit 1: FPT Bit 2: IPP Bit 3: SMB Bit 4: BMLinkS Bit 5: DIPRINT Bits 6 and 7: Reserved Prints a list of NCS related parameters. displays the IP interface. [0 to 3 / -] 0: No IP device, 1: DHCP 2: Static IP address 3: DHCP and Static IP address Enables or disables Telnet. [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Enables or disables the Web monitor. [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

5828 084 5828 085

Print Settings List IP Interface

5828 090

TELNET

*CTL

5828 091

Web

*CTL

5832 5832 001

[HDD Init.] HDD Initialization #

5839 5839 004 5839 007 5839 008

[IEEE 1394] Host Name Cycle Master BCR mode

*CTL *CTL *CTL

5839 009 5839 010 5839 011 5839 012 5839 013

IRM 1394a Check Unique ID Logout Login Login MAX

*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL

Displays the host name. [0 or 1 / 1 /-] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: On [0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step] Alphanumeric 0: Standard, 1: IRM Color Copy 2: Reserved, 3: Always Effective [0 or 1 / 0 /-] 0: Off, 1: On [0 or 1 / 1 /-] 0: Off, 1: On [0 or 1 / 1 /-] 0: Off, 1: On [0 or 1 / 0 /-] 0: Off, 1: On [0 to 63 / 8 / 1/step]]

SM

5-63

G104

Service Tables

Prepares the hard disk. Use this SP mode only when there is a hard disk error.

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


5840 5840 006 [IEEE 802.11b] Channel Max

*CTL

5840 007

Channel Min

*CTL

5840 011

WEP key number

*CTL

Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings are set for the maximum end of the range for each area. Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels. EU: [1 to 13 / 13 / 1/step] NA/ AS: [1 to 11 / 11 / 1/step] Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels. EU: [1 to 13 / 1 / 1/step] NA/ AS: [1 to 11 / 1 / 1/step] Selects the WEP key. [00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary] 00: Key #1 01: Key #2 (Reserved) 10: Key #3 (Reserved) 11: Key #4 (Reserved)

5842 5842 001

[NFA analisis] Net File Application Analysis *CTL Prints or does not print the module log for each bit. [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0: Prints, 1: Not print Bit switch: Bit 0: System or other related application. Bit 1: Captured related application Bit 2: Certification related application Bit 3: Address related application Bit 4: Control devices or transmission logs related application Bit 5: Output (print, fax or transmission) related application Bit 6: Documents related application In the Bit 7, 0: Not print, 1: Print Bit 7: MSB related application

G104

5-64

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


5844 5844 001 [USB] Transfer Rate

*CTL

5844 002 5844 003 5844 004 5845 5845 003 5845 004

Vendor ID Product ID Dev Release Num

*CTL *CTL *CTL

Adjusts the USB transfer rate. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric 0: Auto Change, 1: Full speed Displays the vendor ID. Displays the product ID. Displays the device release version number.

[Delivery Srv] Delivery Server Retry Interval *CTL


No. of Retries

*CTL

Specifies the retry interval. [60 to 900 / 300 / 1 second/step] Specifies the maximum number of retries. [0 to 99 / 3 / 1/step]

5846 5846 003 5846 050 5846 098 5846 099 5848 5848 004

[UCS Setting] Maximum Entries Init All Dir Bit SW 2 Bit SW [Web Service] ac: ud

*CTL *CTL *CTL

Displays the number of maximum entries. Initializes all address information data except the administration account. FA FA

*CTL

5848 011

ac: dm

*CTL

Enables or disables the udirectory access limitation. 0000: Disabled, 0001: Enabled Enables or disables the devicemanagement access limitation. 0000: Disabled, 0001: Enabled

5856 5856 002

[Remote Update] Local Port

Allows the technician to updade the firmware using a parallel cable. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Disable, 1: Enable

5857 5857 001

[Save Debug Log] On/ Off

*CTL

5857 002

Target

*CTL

5857 005 5857 006

Save to HDD Save to SD

*CTL *CTL

Enables or disables the debug log saving function. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric 0: On, 1: On Sets the storage location for the debug log. [2 to 3 / 2 / 1/step] 2: HDD, 3: SD Sets the key number of the debug log. Sets the key number of the debug log.

SM

5-65

G104

Service Tables

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


5857 009 5857 010 5857 011 5857 012 5857 013 5857 014 5857 015 5857 016 5857 017 HDD to SD (4MB) HDD to SD (Any) Erase HDD Log Erase SD Log Free Space on SD SD to SD (4MB) SD to SD (Any) Make HDD Log File Make SD Log File *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL Copies the most recent 4 MB of the debug log from the hard disk to the SD card. Sets the key number of the debug log copied from the hard disk to the SD card. Deletes the debug log from the hard disk. Deletes the debug log from the SD card. Shows the free space on the SD card. Copies the most recent 4 MB of the debug log from an SD card to a different SD card. Sets the key number of the debug log copied from an SD card to a different SD card. Makes a log file on the HDD to save debug logs. To save debug logs, the controller makes a log file first, then writes data in the file. This procedure can use much time. The user can switch off the main power switch before the log is written in the file. To prevent this possible problem, you can prepare a log file in advance. If you do this, the controller uses less time to save logs because the log file is prepared.

5858 5858 001

[Debug Save When] Engine SC Error

*CTL

5858 002

System SC Error

*CTL

5858 003 5858 004

Any SC Error Jam

*CTL *CTL

Collects debug logs when an engine-related SC code occurs. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: OFF, 1: ON Collects debug logs when a controller-related SC code occurs. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: OFF, 1: ON Sets the SC code whose logs are collected. [00000 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] Collects debug logs when a paper jam occurs. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: OFF, 1: ON

5859 5859 001 5859 002 5859 003 5859 004 5859 005 5859 006 5859 007 5859 008 5859 009 5859 010

[Log Save Key No.] Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key 7 Key 8 Key 9 Key 10

*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL

Sets the key number of a specific event ( NOTE) whose logs are saved in the specified storage ( NOTE). When multiple key numbers are assigned, the logs are collected in this order: Key 1, Key 2, ..., Key 9, Key 10. NOTE: The event is set with SP5-857-2. The storage is set with SP5-858. [0000000 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]

G104

5-66

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


5860 5860 002 [SMTP/ POP3/ IMAP] SMTP Server Port No.

*CTL *CTL

5860 003

SMTP Auth.

5860 006

SMTP Auth. Encryp

*CTL

5860 007

POP before SMTP

*CTL

5860 008

POP to SMTP Wait

*CTL

5860 009

Rev Protocol

*CTL *CTL

5860 013

POP Auth. Encryption

5860 014 5860 015 5860 017 5860 019

POP Server Port No. IMAP Srv Port No Receive Interval Mail Keep Sett.

*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL

5860 020

Part. Mail Rcv Tm

*CTL

5860 021 5860 022

MDN Res RFC2298 SMTP From Replace

*CTL *CTL

Adjusts the number of the SMTP server ports. [1 to 65535 / 25 / 1/step] Enables or disables the SMTP authentication for mail transfers. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Disable, 1: Enable Encrypts or does not encrypt passwords for POP3/IMAP4 authentications. [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Automatic, 1: Not encrypt, 2: Encrypt Enables or disables the authentication that is executed on the POP server before the communication is established with the SMTP server to transfer mails. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Disable, 1: Enable Adjusts the waiting time to access the SMTP server after the authentication on the POP server. [0 to 10000 / 300 / 1 ms/step] Sets the protocol of receiving e-mail. [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Not receive, 1: POP3, 2: IMAP4 Encrypts or does not encrypt passwords for POP3/IMAP4 authentications. [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Automatic, 1: Not encrypt, 2: Encrypt Adjusts the port number of the POP server. [1 to 65535 / 110 / 1/step] Adjusts the port number of the IMAP4 server. [1 to 65535 / 143 / 1/step] Adjusts the interval of receiving an e-mail. [2 to 1440 / 3 / 1 minute/step] Sets the way of keeping the e-mail in the server. [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Not keeping 1: Keeping All 2: Keeping the only error e-mail Adjusts the time for keeping the partial emails. If the partial e-mails are not received during the set time, these are deleted. [1 to 168 / 72 / 1 h/step] [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated account after the SMTP server is validated. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: No. From item not switched, 1: Yes. From item switched.
G104

SM

5-67

Service Tables

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


5860 025 SMTP Auth Direct

*CTL

Selects directly the way of SMTP authentication if all SMTP authentications fail due to the error in the SP5860-006. This SP is activated only when SP5860-003 is set to Enable. Bit switch 0: LOGIN Bit switch 1: PLAIN Bit switch 2: CRAM MD5 Bit switch 3: DIGEST MD Bit switch 4 - 7: Not used

5866 5866 001

[E-Mail Alert] Notice Func E-Ma

*CTL

5866 005

Add Date Field

*CTL

Enables or disables the alert notice function by e-mail. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Off, 1: On Enables or disables to add the date field on the alert notice e-mail. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Off, 1: On

5869 5869 001

[RAM Disk Setting] Mail Function

*CTL#

Enables or disables the e-mail transfer function. This SP sets the RAM disk size for the e-mail transfer function. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: On, 1: Off

5870 5870 001 5870 003

[Common Key Info W] Common Key Information Writting Writing Writes the authentication data (used for NRS) in the memory. Initialize Initializes the authentication data in the memory. [SD Card Appli Move] Move Exec Undo Exec

5873 5873 1 5873 2

5.4 5.4

G104

5-68

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


5907 5907 001 [Plug/ Play] Plug/ Play Name Selection *CTL [0 to 8 / 0 / 1/step]
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MFG RICOH RICOH SAVIN Gestetner NRG NRG infotec infotec LANIER MDL Aficio CL4000DN Aficio CL4000HDN CLP26DN C7425dn C7425dn C7425hdn IPC 2525 IPC 2525e LP125cx/LP126cn

5930 5930 001

[Meter Click Ch.] Meter Click Charge *EGB Enables or disables the Meter Charge mode. When enabling the Meter Charge mode, the Counter menu is added to the user menu. [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric 0: OFF, 1: ON [Factory Default] *EGB Enables the first initial setting. This SP is set to 1 in the factory. This SP is cleared after first turning the main power on. [0 or 1 / 0 / -] FA 0: Disables, 1: Enables

5950 5950 001

5952 5952 001 5953 5953 001

[Under F. Adjust] Under Factory Adjustment *EGB [0 or 1 / 0 / -] FA [dehumidifier] Tray heater Switch Setting *EGB Enables or disables the tray heater on/off switch when the main power switch is on. [0 to 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: On [Debug Serial] Debug Serial Port Setting *CTL DFU

5970

SM

5-69

G104

Service Tables

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


5990 5990 001 5990 002 5990 004 5990 005 5990 006 5990 007 [SP print mode] All (Data List) SP (Mode Data List) Logging Data Diagnosic Report Non-Default NIB Summary

Does SP5-990-002, 004, 005, 006, and 007. Prints an SMC report on all SP modes. Prints an SMC report on the SPs that save logs. Prints the Self-Diagnosis Report. Prints an SMC report on the SPs that have settings, which are different from the defaults. Prints the network configuration report.

G104

5-70

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE

SP7-XXX (Data Log)


7002 7002 001 7002 002 7401 7401 001 [Total Counter] Color Counter Black Counter [SC Counter] *CTL Displays the number of SC codes detected. [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step] *EGB *EGB Displays the value of the counters. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/sheet]

7403 7403 001 7403 002 7403 003 7403 004 7403 005 7403 006 7403 007 7403 008 7403 009 7403 010 7502 7502 001

[Latest10SClog] Latest Latest 1 Latest 2 Latest 3 Latest 4 Latest 5 Latest 6 Latest 7 Latest 8 Latest 9 [Total Jam]

*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL

Logs the SC codes detected. The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but can be seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.

*CTL

Displays the total number of jams detected. [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]


Service Tables G104

7504

7504 001 7504 003 7504 004 7504 005 7504 006 7504 008 7504 009 7504 010 7504 011 7504 012 7504 013 7504 015 7504 061 7504 063 7504 065 7504 066 7504 070 7504 071
SM

[Jam Location] Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected. Main 001 *CTL Not used Main 003 *CTL Tray 1: ON Main 004 *CTL Tray 2: ON Main 005 *CTL Tray 3/LCT: ON Main 006 *CTL Tray 4: ON Main 008 *CTL Registration: ON Main 009 *CTL External Tray: ON Main 010 *CTL Internal Tray: ON Main 011 *CTL Duplex: ON Main 012 *CTL Duplex Exit 1: ON Main 013 *CTL Duplex Exit 2: ON Main 015 *CTL Optional paper tray unit feed: ON Main 061 *CTL Registration: OFF Main 063 *CTL External Tray: OFF Main 065 *CTL Duplex: OFF Main 066 *CTL Duplex Exit 1: OFF Main 070 *CTL Not used Main 071 *CTL Not used
5-71

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


7506 7506 133 7506 134 7506 142 7506 164 7506 166 7506 172 7506 255 7507 7507 001 7507 002 7507 003 7507 004 7507 005 7507 006 7507 007 7507 008 7507 009 7507 010 [Jam Paper Size] A4 SEF A5 SEF B5 SEF LG SEF LT SEF HLT SEF Others [Jam History] Latest Latest 1 Latest 2 Latest 3 Latest 4 Latest 5 Latest 6 Latest 7 Latest 8 Latest 9

*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL

Displays the number of jams according to the paper size. [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL

Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.

7803 7803 001 7803 002 7803 003 7803 004 7803 005 7803 009 7803 010 7803 011 7803 012 7803 013 7803 014 7803 015

[PM Counter Displ] Preventive Maintenance Counter Display (Sheets or Rotations (%), Unit, [Color]) Trans Belt Unit: Transfer Belt Unit T. Roll 2: Transfer Roller 2, Waste Toner: Waste Toner Bottles Displays the PM counter for each unit. Paper *EGB Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit. When a unit S: PCU: [K] *EGB is replaced, the machine automatically S: PCU: [M] *EGB detects that the new unit is installed. Then, S: PCU: [C] *EGB the current PM counter value is automatically S: PCU: [Y] *EGB moved to the PM Counter - Previous (SP7S: Transfer Belt Unit *EGB 906-1 to 10) and is reset to 0. S: T. Roll 2 *EGB The total number of sheets printed with the S: Fusing Unit *EGB last unit replaced can be checked with SP7S: By-pass *EGB 906-1 to 10. S: Tray 1 *EGB SP7-803-001: This shows the number of pages printed. S: Tray 2 *EGB [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] S: Tray 3 *EGB

G104

5-72

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


7803 017 7803 018 7803 019 7803 020 7803 025 7803 026 7803 027 R: PCU: [K] R: PCU: [M] R: PCU: [C] R: PCU: [Y] R: Trans Belt Unit R: T. Roll 2 R: Fusing Unit *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current maintenance unit. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step] When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM Counter Previous (SP7-906-11 to 20) and is reset to 0. The total number of revolutions made with the last unit replaced can be checked with SP7-906-11 to 20. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 rotation/step] Displays the number of sheets printed until the waste toner bottle becomes full or toner runs out. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step] Displays the value given by the following formula: (Current revolution Target revolution) 100, where Current revolution is the current value for the counter of the part, and Target revolution is the values of SP7-803-17 through 27. This shows how much of the units expected lifetime has been used up. The R% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the print count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the R% counter is still less than 100%. [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 rotation%/step]

7803 033 7803 034 7803 035 7803 036 7803 037 7803 038 7803 039 7803 040 7803 045 7803 046 7803 047

Toner Supply: [K] Toner Supply: [M] Toner Supply: [C] Toner Supply: [Y] R%: PCU: [K] R%: PCU: [M] R%: PCU: [C] R%: PCU: [Y] R%: Trans Belt Unit R%: T. Roll 2 R%: Fusing Unit

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

7804

7804 002 7804 003 7804 004 7804 005 7804 009 7804 010 7804 011 7804 012 7804 013 7804 014 7804 015 7804 017 7804 018
SM

[PM Count. Reset] Preventive Maintenance Counter Reset (Sheets, Unit, [Color]) Trans Belt Unit: Transfer Belt Unit, T. Roll 2: Transfer Roller 2, Waste Toner: Waste Toner Bottle, Toner: Toner Bottles Clears the PM counter for each unit. Clears the PM counter. PCU: [K] Press the Enter key after the machine asks PCU: [M] Execute?. PCU: [C] When a unit is replaced, the machine PCU: [Y] automatically detects that the new unit is Trans Belt Unit installed. Then, the current PM counter value Transfer Roller 2 is automatically moved to the PM CounterFusing Unit Previous (SP7-906-1 to 40) and is reset to S: By-pass 0. S: Tray 1 S: Tray 2 S: Tray 3 S: Toner: [K] S: Toner: [M] 5-73 G104

Service Tables

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


7804 019 7804 020 7804 021 7804 022 7804 023 7804 024 7804 050 7806 7806 001 7806 002 7806 003 7806 004 S: Toner: [C] S: Toner: [Y] Toner Supply: [K] Toner Supply: [M] Toner Supply: [C] Toner Supply: [Y] All -

7806 005 7806 006 7806 007 7806 008 7806 009 7806 010 7807 7807 001

[Procon Counter] Process Control Counter ([Color]) [K] *EGB [0 to 2000 / 0 / 1/step] [Cl] *EGB [MUSIC Counter] ([Color]) [K] *EGB Counts the paper printed after previous MUSIC. [Cl] *EGB [0 to 999 / 0 / 1/step] [P. Pattern Coun.] P. Sensor Pattern Counter ([Color]) [K] *EGB [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step] [Cl] *EGB [Low Resolution] Low Resolution Counter ([Color]) Sheets: [K] *EGB [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step] Sheets: [M] *EGB Sheets: [C] *EGB Sheets: [Y] *EGB [SC/ Jam Clear] SC/ Jam Counter Clear All Clear Clears the all counters related to SC codes and paper jams. [Engine Cnt Reset] Engine Counter Reset All Clear Clears the all Engine counters other than the total counter (SP7812). [Total Cnt. Rst.] Total Counter Reset Color Counter Clears the total color counter. Black Counter Clears the total black counter. All Reset Clears the total all counter. [Rep. Cnter Reset] Replacement Counter Reset (Sheets, Unit, [Color]) Trans Belt Unit: Transfer Belt unit, Waste Toner: Waste Toner Bottle, Toner: Toner Bottle PCU: [K] Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the black PCU. PCU: [M] Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the magenta PCU. PCU: [C] Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the cyan PCU.

7810 7810 001

7812 7812 001 7812 002 7812 100

7815 7815 001 7815 002 7815 003

G104

5-74

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


7815 004 7815 005 7815 006 7815 007 7815 008 7815 009 7815 010 7815 011 7815 029 7815 030 7815 031 7815 032 7815 100 PCU: [Y] Trans Belt Unit Transfer Roller 2 Fusing Unit S: By-pass S: Tray 1 S: Tray 2 S: Tray 3 Toner: [K] Toner: [M] Toner: [C] Toner: [Y] All Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the yellow PCU. Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the Transfer belt unit. Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the Transfer Roller. Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the Fusing unit. Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the Paper pick up roller at by-pass. Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the Paper pick up roller at tray 1. Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the Paper pick up roller at tray 2. Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the Paper pick up roller at tray 3. Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the black toner bottle Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the magenta toner bottle Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the cyan toner bottle Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the yellow toner bottle Clears the all replacement and the previous unit counters.

7817 7817 001 7832 7832 001

[Rep Cnter Reset] Replacement Counter Reset All Cloear Clears the all adjustment counters. [Diag. Result] Diagnostic Result -

Displays the result of the diagnostics. To scroll the return codes, press the up-arrow key or the down-arrow key.

7834 7834 001 7836 7836 001


SM

[Cov. Counter] Coverage Counter All Clear Clears the all coverage counters. [Total Memory Size] Shows the total storage size.
5-75 G104

Service Tables

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


[Rep. Count. Disp] Replacement Counter Display (Sheets, Unit, [Color]) Trans Belt Unit: Transfer Belt unit, Waste Toner: Waste Toner Bottle, Toner: Toner Bottle PCU: [K] *EGB Displays the replacement counter for each unit. PCU: [M] *EGB [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] PCU: [C] *EGB PCU: [Y] *EGB Trans Belt Unit *EGB Transfer Roller 2 *EGB Fusing Unit *EGB S: By-pass *EGB S: Tray 1 *EGB S: Tray 2 *EGB S: Tray 3 *EGB Waste Toner *EGB [Assert Info] File Name # of Lines Location

7853 7853 002 7853 003 7853 004 7853 005 7853 009 7853 010 7853 011 7853 012 7853 013 7853 014 7853 015 7853 028 7901 7901 001 7901 002 7901 003 7906

*CTL *CTL *CTL

Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data stored in this SP is used for problem analysis.

7906 001 7906 002 7906 003 7906 004 7906 008 7906 009 7906 010 7906 011 7906 012 7906 013 7906 014 7906 018 7906 019 7906 020 7906 026 7906 027 7906 028 7906 029

[PM Counter-PREV] Previous Preventive Maintenance Counter Display (Sheets or Rotation (%),Unit, [Color]) Trans Belt Unit: Transfer Belt Unit, T. Roll 2: Transfer Roller 2, Waste Toner: Waste Toner Bottle, Toner: Toner Bottles S: PCU: [K] *EGB Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units. S: PCU: [M] *EGB [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] S: PCU: [C] *EGB S: PCU: [Y] *EGB S: Trans Belt Unit *EGB S: T. Roll 2 *EGB S: Fusing Unit *EGB R: PCU: [K] *EGB Displays the number of revolutions for each unit in the previous maintenance units. R: PCU: [M] *EGB [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step] R: PCU: [C] *EGB R: PCU: [Y] *EGB R: Trans Belt Unit *EGB R: T. Roll 2 *EGB R: Fusing Unit *EGB Toner Supply: [K] *EGB Displays the toner supply time for each color in the previous toner bottles. Toner Supply: [M] *EGB [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] Toner Supply: [C] *EGB Toner Supply: [Y] *EGB

G104

5-76

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


7906 030 7906 031 7906 032 7906 033 7906 034 7906 035 7906 036 7906 037 7906 038 7906 039 7906 040 7910 7910 001 7910 002 7910 018 7910 131 7910 150 7910 151 7910 152 7910 153 7910 154 7910 155 7910 156 7910 157 7910 158 7910 159 7911 7911 001 7911 002 7911 018 7911 131 7911 150 7911 151 7911 152 7911 153 7911 154 7911 155 7911 156 7911 157 7911 158 7911 159 R%: PCU: [K] R%: PCU: [M] R%: PCU: [C] R%: PCU: [Y] R%: Trans Belt Unit R%: T. Roll 2 R%: Fusing Unit S: By-pass S: Tray 1 S: Tray 2 S: Tray 3 *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the value given by the following formula: (Current count Yield count) x 100, where Current count is the current values in the counter for the part, and Yield count is the recommended yield. [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 %/step] Displays the number of sheets fed with the previous maintenance unit. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]

[Firmware Ver.] Firmware Version Displays the firmware version. System 7911 160 Engine 7911 161 NIB 7911 162 Bluetooth 7911 163 RPCS 7911 180 PS 7911 181 RPDL 7911 182 R98 7911 183 R16 7911 200 RPGL 7911 202 R55 7911 204 RTIFF 7911 209 PCL 7911 210 PCLXL 7911 211

MSIS MSIS (OPTION) PDF BMLinkS FONT FONT 1 FONT 2 FONT 3 Factory Net File Printer Test Suite MIB WebSystem

SM

5-77

G104

Service Tables

[ROM No] Displays the ROM number for each component. System 7910 160 MSIS Engine 7910 161 MSIS (OPTION) NIB 7910 162 PDF Bluetooth 7910 163 BMLinkS RPCS 7910 180 FONT PS 7910 181 FONT 1 RPDL 7910 182 FONT 2 R98 7910 183 FONT 3 R16 7910 200 Factory RPGL 7910 202 Net File R55 7910 204 Printer RTIFF 7910 209 Test Suite PCL 7910 210 MIB PCLXL 7910 211 WebSystem

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


7931 7931 001 7931 002 7931 003 7931 004 7931 005 7931 006 7931 007 7931 008 7931 009 7931 010 7931 011 7931 012 7931 013 7931 014 7931 015 7931 016 7931 017 7931 018 7931 019 7931 020 7931 021 [Toner Info [K]] Toner Bottle Information [K] (R: Replacement or E: End) Model ID *EGB Displays the information number for each category. Cartridge Ver *EGB Brand ID *EGB Area ID *EGB Production ID *EGB Color ID *EGB Maintenance ID *EGB New *EGB Recycle Count *EGB Prod. Date *EGB Serial No. *EGB Remaining Toner *EGB Displays the remaining toner rate. [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step] Toner End *EGB Displays the toner end record. Refill Flag *EGB Displays the refilling record. R: Total Counter *EGB Displays the total number of sheets when replacing the new toner bottle for the b/w R: Color Counter *EGB mode or the full color mode. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] E: Total Counter *EGB Displays the total number of sheets when detecting the toner end for the b/w mode or E: Color Counter *EGB the full color mode. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] Near End *EGB Displays the toner near end record. [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step] Install Date *EGB Displays the date of the install the toner bottle. Toner End Date *EGB Displays the date of the toner end. [Toner Info [M]] Toner Bottle Information [M] (R: Replacement or E: End) Model ID *EGB Displays the information number for each category. Cartridge Ver *EGB Brand ID *EGB Area ID *EGB Production ID *EGB Color ID *EGB Maintenance ID *EGB New *EGB Recycle Count *EGB Prod. Date *EGB Serial No. *EGB Remaining Toner *EGB Displays the remaining toner rate. [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step] Toner End *EGB Displays the toner end record. Refill Flag *EGB Displays the refilling record. R: Total Counter *EGB Displays the total number of sheets when

7932 7932 001 7932 002 7932 003 7932 004 7932 005 7932 006 7932 007 7932 008 7932 009 7932 010 7932 011 7932 012 7932 013 7932 014 7932 015

G104

5-78

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


7932 016 R: Color Counter *EGB replacing the new toner bottle for the b/w mode or the full color mode. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the total number of sheets when detecting the toner end for the b/w mode or the full color mode. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the toner near end record. [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the date of the install the toner bottle. Displays the date of the toner end.

7932 017 7932 018 7932 019 7932 020 7932 021

E: Total Counter E: Color Counter Near End Install Date Toner End Date

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

7933 7933 001 7933 002 7933 003 7933 004 7933 005 7933 006 7933 007 7933 008 7933 009 7933 010 7933 011 7933 012 7933 013 7933 014 7933 015 7933 016 7933 017 7933 018 7933 019 7933 020 7933 021

[Toner Info [C]] Toner Bottle Information [C] (R: Replacement or E: End) Model ID *EGB Displays the information number for each category. Cartridge Ver *EGB Brand ID *EGB Area ID *EGB Production ID *EGB Color ID *EGB Maintenance ID *EGB New *EGB Recycle Count *EGB Prod. Date *EGB Serial No. *EGB Remaining Toner *EGB Displays the remaining toner rate. [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step] Toner End *EGB Displays the toner end record. Refill Flag *EGB Displays the refilling record. R: Total Counter *EGB Displays the total number of sheets when replacing the new toner bottle for the b/w R: Color Counter *EGB mode or the full color mode. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] E: Total Counter *EGB Displays the total number of sheets when detecting the toner end for the b/w mode or E: Color Counter *EGB the full color mode. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] Near End *EGB Displays the toner near end record. [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step] Install Date *EGB Displays the date of the install the toner bottle. Toner End Date *EGB Displays the date of the toner end. [Toner Info [Y]] Toner Bottle Information [Y] (R: Replacement or E: End times) Model ID *EGB Displays the information number for each category. Cartridge Ver *EGB Brand ID *EGB

7934 7934 001 7934 002 7934 003

SM

5-79

G104

Service Tables

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


7934 004 7934 005 7934 006 7934 007 7934 008 7934 009 7934 010 7934 011 7934 012 7934 013 7934 014 7934 015 7934 016 7934 017 7934 018 7934 019 7934 020 7934 021 Area ID Production ID Color ID Maintenance ID New Recycle Count Prod. Date Serial No. Remaining Toner Toner End Refill Flag R: Total Counter R: Color Counter E: Total Counter E: Color Counter Near End Install Date Toner End Date *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

Displays the remaining toner rate. [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step] Displays the toner end record. Displays the refilling record. Displays the total number of sheets when replacing the new toner bottle for the b/w mode or the full color mode. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the total number of sheets when detecting the toner end for the b/w mode or the full color mode. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the toner near end record. [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the date of the install the toner bottle. Displays the date of the toner end.

7935 7935 001

7935 002

7935 003 7935 004 7935 005 7935 006

[PM Interval] Preventive Maintenance Interval (Sheets or Rotations, Unit) S: PCU *EGB Adjusts the interval (the number of sheets) of the PM setting. [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 K/step] R: PCU *EGB Adjusts the interval (the rotations) of the PM setting. [0 to 100.00 / 54.26 / 0.01 Km/step] S: Trans. Belt *EGB [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 K/step] R: Trans. Belt *EGB [0 to 500.00 / 108.52 / 0.01 Km/step] S: Fusing *EGB [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 K/step] R: Fusing *EGB [0 to 200.00 / 103.79 / 0.01 Km/step]

G104

5-80

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


7936 [PM Count. Reset] Preventive Maintenance Counter Reset 7936 001 All Resets the following SP counters. SP3251-001 to -004 SP3303-001 to -004 SP3821-001 to -010 SP7931-001 to -021 SP7932-001 to -021 SP7933-001 to -021 SP7934-001 to -021 SP9001-001 to -024 SP9001-029 to -032 SP9001-059 to -061 SP9001-075 to -077 SP9901-001, 002 SP9914-005 to -006

SM

5-81

G104

Service Tables

ENGINE SERVICE MODE

SP8-XXX (Data Log 2)


The counters in Data Log 2 are commonly used in multiple machines. Data Log 2 includes the counters of the functions or units that are not supported by Model GP1a and P1b. The counters in Data Log 2 are cleared by SP5-801 (Memory Clear) or SP7-808 (Counter Reset). Keys and abbreviations in Data Log 2
Program-related keys and abbreviations T: The grand total of the counters of all application programs P: The counter of the printer application program excluding the events related to the document server O: The counter of other application programs including remote application programs 8001 8004 [T: 1-0-01] *CTL Total jobs [P: 1-0-01] *CTL The number of times the application program starts a job [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

The jobs interrupted by paper jams or some other errors are also counted. The jobs executed by SPs are not counted.
8021 8024 8027 Print job [T: 1-0-03] *CTL / Local storage; document server [P: 1-0-03] *CTL [O: 1-0-03] *CTL The number of times the application program stores data on the document server [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
8031 8034 8037 [T: 1-0-04] *CTL Print job/ Designated application program [P: 1-0-04] *CTL [O: 1-0-04] *CTL The number of times the application program retrieves data from the document server [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the counter of the application program that executes the print job increases.

G104

5-82

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


8061 8064 8067 [T: 1-0-07] *CTL Finish, post-print processing jobs [P: 1-0-07] *CTL [O: 1-0-07] *CTL The number of times the application program uses the finisher [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] Sort The number of times the application program starts the sort mode Stack The number of times the application program starts the tack mode Staple The number of times the application program starts the staple mode Booklet The number of times the application program starts the booklet mode NOTE: The counter of the staple mode (003) can also increase. Z-Fold The number of times the application program starts the Z-fold mode NOTE: The booklet mode is not included. Punch The number of times the application program starts the punch mode NOTE: The counter of the printer application program (P:) can also increase. Other (Reserved) [T: 1-0-08] *CTL Jobs/ Pages [P: 1-0-08] *CTL [O: 1-0-08] *CTL The number of jobs that try to output a specific number of pages [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] 1 Page -008 21~50 Pages 2 Pages -009 51~100 Pages 3 Pages -010 101~300 Pages 4 Pages -011 301~500 Pages 5 Pages -012 501~700 Pages 6~10 Pages -013 701~1000 Pages 11~20 Pages -014 1001~ Pages

001 002 003 004

005

006

007 8071 8074 8077

-001 -002 -003 -004 -005 -006 -007

The jobs interrupted by paper jams or some other errors are also counted. If a job is suspended and restarted later, the job is seen as one job.

SM

5-83

G104

Service Tables

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


8381 8384 8387 [T: 2-2-01] *CTL Total print pages [P: 2-2-01] *CTL [O: 2-2-01] *CTL The number of sheets that the application program tries to print (excluding the pages printed in the SP mode) [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

The following pages are not counted as printed pages: Blank pages in a duplex printing job Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets Reports printed to confirm counts All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.) Test prints for machine image adjustment Error notification reports Partially printed pages as the result of a printer jam
8391 [T: 2-2-02] Large size print pages

*CTL

The number of sheets printed on A3/DLT and larger sizes [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

8411

[T: 2-2-04] Prints/Duplex

*CTL

The number of sheets used in duplex printing [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

The counter increases by +1 when both sides (front/back) are printed. The counter does not increase when one of the two sides is not printed (e.g., the last page of the documents that have three pages, five pages, seven pages, and so on).

G104

5-84

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


8421 8424 8427 [T: 2-2-05] *CTL Print pages/ Duplex printing combine [P: 2-2-05] *CTL [O: 2-2-05] *CTL The number of sheets used in binding and combining [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] Simplex> Duplex *CTL Simplex Combine *CTL Duplex Combine *CTL 2> *CTL 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up) 4> *CTL 4 pages on 1 side (4-Up) 6> *CTL 6 pages on 1 side (6-Up) 8> *CTL 8 pages on 1 side (8-Up) 9> *CTL 9 pages on 1 side (9-Up) 16> *CTL 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up) Booklet *CTL Magazine *CTL

001 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013

These counters are useful for the users who want to know how much paper they have saved. Partially printed sheets are also counted as 1 page (e.g, the last page in the 4-Up mode is only partially printed when the documents have 5, 6, or 7 pages, 9, 10, or 11 pages, 13, 14, or 15 pages, and so on.). Here is a summary of how the counters work in the booklet and magazine modes.
Booklet Original Pages 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8431 8434 8437 Count 1 2 2 2 3 4 4 4 Magazine Original Pages 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Count 1 2 2 2 4 4 4 4

001

002 003

[T: 2-2-06] *CTL Print pages/ Image editing performed on the [P: 2-2-06] *CTL original with the copier GUI [O: 2-2-06] *CTL The number of pages that the application program handles in a specific way [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] Cover/Slip Sheet *CTL The number of cover sheets or slip sheets inserted NOTE: A duplex-printed cover is counted as two. Series/Book *CTL The number of pages printed in series (one side) or in the booklet mode User Stamp *CTL The number of pages where stamps were applied (including page numbering and date stamping)

SM

5-85

G104

Service Tables

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


8441 8444 8447 [T: 2-2-07] *CTL Print pages/ Paper size [P: 2-2-07] *CTL [O: 2-2-07] *CTL The number of sheets of a specific paper size that the application program uses [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] A3 007 LG A4 008 LT A5 009 HLT B4 010 Full Bleed B5 254 Other (Standard) DLT 255 Other (Custom)

001 002 003 004 005 006

These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.


8451 [2-2-08] *CTL Print pages/ Paper tray The number of sheets fed from a specific tray [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] Bypass Tray *CTL By-pass Tray Tray 1 *CTL Printer Tray 2 *CTL Paper Tray Unit/LCT (Optional) Tray 3 *CTL Paper Tray Unit (Optional) Tray 4 *CTL (Not used) Tray 5 *CTL (Not used) Tray 6 *CTL (Not used) Tray 7 *CTL (Not used) Tray 8 *CTL (Not used) Tray 9 *CTL (Not used) [T: 2-2-09] *CTL Print pages/ Paper type [P: 2-2-09] *CTL The number of sheets of specific paper types [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] Normal 005 Normal (Back) Recycled 006 Thick (Back) Special 007 OHP Thick 008 Other

8451 001 8451 002 8451 003 8451 004 8451 005 8451 006 8451 007 8451 008 8451 009 8451 010 8461 8464

001 002 003 004

These counters increase when the paper is output. On the other hand, the PM counter increases (to measure the service life of each feed roller) when the paper is fed. Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted. During duplex printing, a sheet printed on two sides and a sheet printed on one side are both counted as 1.

G104

5-86

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


8471 [2-2-10] *CTL Print pages/ Magnification The number of pages magnified or reduced [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] ~49% 8471 004 101%~200% 50%~99% 8471 005 201% ~ 100%

8471 001 8471 002 8471 003

Some application programs (on the computer) can specify the magnification setting of the printer driver (e.g., MS Excel). In a case like this, SP8-471 recognizes the setting and increases the corresponding counter. Other application programs can magnify or reduce the print images on their own. In a case like this, SP8-471 does not recognize the magnification setting of the application programs and increase the counter of 100%. Magnification adjustment conducted on the document server is not counted. Blank cover sheets and slip sheets are regarded as 100%.
8481 8484 [T: 2-2-11] *CTL Print pages/ Toner save [P: 2-2-11] *CTL The number of pages printed with the toner save feature activated [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These counters display the same result.


8501 8504 [T: 2-2-12] *CTL Print pages/ Color mode [P: 2-2-13] *CTL The number of pages printed in a specific color mode [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] B/W 003 Full Color Single Color [T: 2-2-14] *CTL Print pages/ Emulation [P: 2-2-14] *CTL The number of pages printed by the printer emulation mode [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] RPCS 008 RTIFF RPDL 009 PDF PS3 010 PCL5e/5c R98 011 PCL XL R16 012 IPDL-C GL/GL2 013 BM-Links (for local models only) R55 014 Other

001 002 8511 8514

001 002 003 004 005 006 007

These counters display the same result.

SM

5-87

G104

Service Tables

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


8521 8524 [T: 2-2-15] *CTL Print pages/ Finish post-print processing [P: 2-2-15] *CTL The number of pages processed by the finisher [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] Sort 005 Z-Fold Stack 006 Punch Staple 007 Other Booklet

001 002 003 004

Even if the pages are too many for the finisher to staple, all pages are counted (including unstapled pages). The counter of stapling (003) increases by +1 when the paper is transported from the printer to the tray of the finisher. Even if a paper jam occurs on this path, the counter (003) increases. If the same job is retried, the counter (003) increases once again.
8531 [T: 2-2-16] The number of staples [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] *CTL Staples

8581

001 002 003 004 005 008 009 8584

[T: 2-2-23] *CTL Total counter The number of outputs in a specific color mode [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] Total 010 Total: Color Total: Full Colo 011 Total: B/W B&W/Single Color 012 Full Colour: A3 Development: CMY 013 Full Colour: ~B4 Development: K 014 Full Colour Prin Print: Color 015 Mono Colour Prin Print: B/W [P: 2-2-23] *CTL Print counter The number of outputs in a specific color mode [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] B/W 8584 003 Full Color Single Color [O: 2-2-23] *CTL Other counter The number of A3/DLT, duplex printing, or staples [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] A3/DLT 8591 001 Staple Duplex

8584 001 8584 002 8591

8591 001 8591 001

Note that these counters are not for the printer application program.

G104

5-88

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


8771 [3-0-01] *CTL Development counter The number of rotations of the development rollers [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] Total 8771 004 M K 8771 005 C Y [TonerBotolInfo] Toner Bottle Information Last [BK] *EGB The number of toner bottles (bottles) already replaced Last [Y] *EGB [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] Last [M] *EGB Last [C] *EGB [3-0-05] K Y M C *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL Toner remain The percentage of the remaining toner [0~100/ 0 / 1]

8771 001 8771 002 8771 003 8781 8781 001 8781 002 8781 003 8781 004 8801 8801 001 8801 001 8801 001 8801 001

8831 8831 001 8831 002 8831 003 8831 004

SP8-831 displays the image coverage ratio for each color of the last output. This SP mode displays the coverage ratio of the output, i.e. the ratio of the total pixel area of the image data to the total printable area on the paper. Note that this value is not directly proportional to the amount of toner consumed, although of course it is one factor that affects this amount. The other major factors involved include: the type, total image area and image density of the original, toner concentration and developer potential.
8841 8841 001 8841 002 8841 003 8841 004 [Coverage] Coverage Display (Last Page, [Color]) L: Last Page Last: [K] *EGB The coverage of the latest print [0~100/ 0 / 0.01] Last: [Y] *EGB Last: [M] *EGB Last: [C] *EGB

SM

5-89

G104

Service Tables

[Coverage] Coverage Display (Average, [Color]) Average: [K] *EGB Average: [Y] *EGB Average: [M] *EGB Average: [C] *EGB

The average coverage [0~100/ 0 / 0.01]

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


[Coverage: 0-10%] Coverage Display (Sheets, [Color]) S: Sheets S: [K] *EGB [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] S: [Y] *EGB S: [M] *EGB S: [C] *EGB [Coverage: 11-20%] Coverage Display (Sheets, [Color]) S: Sheets [Coverage: 21-30%] Coverage Display (Sheets, [Color]) S: Sheets [Coverage: 31%-] Coverage Display (Sheets, [Color]) S: Sheets S: [K] *EGB The number of scanned sheets of a specific coverage ratio S: [Y] *EGB [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] S: [M] *EGB S: [C] *EGB

8851 8851 001 8851 002 8851 003 8851 004

8861 8871 8881 001 002 003 004

For example, SP8-851-001 displays the number of scanned sheets whose blackcoverage ratio is 0 percent through 10 percent. SP8-881-004 displays the number of scanned sheets whose cyan-coverage ratio is 31 percent or higher.
8891 8891 001 8891 002 8891 003 8891 004 8901 8901 001 8901 002 8901 003 8901 004 8911 8911 001 8911 002 8911 003 8911 004 [PM Count. Disp] PM Counter Display (Sheets, [Color]) S: Sheets S: Toner [BK] *EGB The number of sheets output by the scanner application program S: Toner [Y] *EGB [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] S: Toner [M] *EGB S: Toner [C] *EGB [PMCounterPREV1] Previous1 PM Counter Display S: Toner [BK] *EGB The number of sheets output by the scanner application program with the previously S: Toner [Y] *EGB replaced units S: Toner [M] *EGB [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] S: Toner [C] *EGB [PMCounterPREV2] Previous2 PM Counter Display S: Toner [BK] *EGB The number of sheets output by the scanner application program with the units that was S: Toner [Y] *EGB replaced before the previous unit. S: Toner [M] *EGB [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] S: Toner [C] *EGB

G104

5-90

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


[3-6-01] *CTL Machine status The amount of time the machine spends in a specific mode [0~9999999/ 0 / 1] Operation Time *CTL The engine is operating. The counter does not include the time when the data is being saved in the HDD (while engine is not operating). Standby Time *CTL The engine is not operating. The counter includes the time when the data is being saved in the HDD. The counter does not include the time when the machine is n the Energy Saver Mode, the Low Power Mode, or the Off Mode. Energy Save Time *CTL The machine is in the Energy Saver Mode. The counter includes the time when the background printing is being executed. Low Power Time *CTL The machine is in the Low Power Mode. The counter includes the time when the engine is on in the Energy Saver Mode. The counter also includes the time when the background printing is being executed. Off Mode Time *CTL The machine is in the Off Mode. The counter includes the time when the background printing is being executed. The counter does not include the time when the main power switch is off. Down Time/SC *CTL The total downtime caused by SC codes Down Time/PrtJam *CTL The total downtime caused by paper jams Down Time/OrgJam *CTL The total downtime caused by original jams Down Time/TonEnd *CTL The total downtime caused by toner ends

8941 8941 001

8941 002

8941 003 8941 004

8941 005

SM

5-91

G104

Service Tables

8941 006 8941 007 8941 008 8941 009

ENGINE SERVICE MODE

SP9-XXX
9001 9001 064 9001 065 Adjusts the open shutter time. [0 to 990 / 210 / 10 msec/step] Close Time *EGB Adjusts the closed shutter time. [0 to 990 / 100 / 10 msec/step] [Filming Remov.] Filming Removal (R: Rotation) R: OPC: Toner *EGB [0 to 255 / 1 / 1/step] Toner Dev. Bias *EGB [0 to 800 / 50 / 1 V/step] R: OPC: No-Toner *EGB [0 to 255 / 30 / 1/step] [Filming Remov.] Filming Removal Filming Coun.: [K] *EGB Displays the counter that counts the number of sheets in black and white printing mode from previous filming removal. [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] Interval: [k] *EGB Adjusts the threshold for filming removal. This SP is executed even the print job is proceeding. [0 to 65535 / 150 / 1/step] Counter: [FC] *EGB Displays the counter that counts the number of sheets in full color printing mode from previous filming removal. [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] Interval: [FC] *EGB Adjusts the threshold for filming removal. This SP is executed even the print job is proceeding. [0 to 65535 / 150 / 1/step] [Vb: LS] Vb at Low Process Speed Vb Shift *EGB [0 to 65535 / 10 / 1/step] [Vc: LS] Vc at Low Process Speed Vc Shift *EGB [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] [Filming Remov.] Filming Removal: Job end Interval (E): [K] *EGB Displays the counter that counts the number of sheets in black and white printing mode from previous filming removal. [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] Interval (E): [FC] *EGB Displays the counter that counts the number of sheets in full color printing mode from previous filming removal. [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] Interval: [end] *EGB Adjusts the threshold for job end filming removal. This SP is not executed until the print job has ended. [0 to 65535 / 75 / 1/step] [Time Adjust.] Time Adjustment Adjusts the current year, month, date, hour, and minute. Year [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 y/step] Month [1 to 12 / 1 / 1 m/step]
5-92 SM

[Shutter Motor] Open Time

*EGB

9001 066 9001 067 9001 068 9001 069

9001 074

9001 075

9001 076

9001 083 9001 084 9001 099

9001 100

9001 101

9003 9003 001 9003 002


G104

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


9003 003 9003 004 9003 005 9801 9801 001 9801 002 9801 003 9801 004 9801 005 9801 006 9801 007 Date Hour Minute [1 to 31 / 1 / 1 d/step] [0 to 23 / 0 / 1 hour/step] [0 to 59 / 0 / 1 m/step]

[DCS Debug] DCS Debug Information DFU Common *CTL IFC *CTL SMM *CTL SJM/ RJM *CTL DSS *CTL MRS *CTL NAS *CTL [Gamma] Gamma Table (Process Speed, [Color]) RS: Regular Speed, LS: Low Speed Adjusts the gamma table lists for each mode. RS: [K] 3 *EGB [0 to 31 / 19 / 1/step] LS: [K] 3 *EGB [0 to 31 / 12 / 1/step] RS: [M] 3 *EGB [0 to 31 / 19 / 1/step] LS: [M] 3 *EGB [0 to 31 / 12 / 1/step] RS: [C] 3 *EGB [0 to 31 / 19 / 1/step] LS: [C] 3 *EGB [0 to 31 / 12 / 1/step] RS: [Y] 3 *EGB [0 to 31 / 19 / 1/step] LS: [Y] 3 *EGB [0 to 31 / 12 / 1/step] OHP: K3 *EGB [0 to 31 / 7 / 1/step] OHP: M3 *EGB [0 to 31 / 7 / 1/step] OHP: C3 *EGB [0 to 31 / 7 / 1/step] OHP: Y3 *EGB [0 to 31 / 7 / 1/step] [Vpp] (Environment) Adjusts the Vpp value for each environment. Vpp 1: LL *EGB [0 to 3000 / 1950 / 1 V/step] Vpp 2: LL *EGB [0 to 3000 / 2200 / 1 V/step] Vpp 1: ML *EGB [0 to 3000 / 1780 / 1 V/step] Vpp 2: ML *EGB [0 to 3000 / 2030 / 1 V/step] Vpp 1: MM *EGB [0 to 3000 / 1770 / 1 V/step] Vpp 2: MM *EGB [0 to 3000 / 2020 / 1 V/step] Vpp 1: MH *EGB [0 to 3000 / 1810 / 1 V/step] Vpp 2: MH *EGB [0 to 3000 / 2060 / 1 V/step] Vpp 1: HH *EGB [0 to 3000 / 1770 / 1 V/step] Vpp 2: HH *EGB [0 to 3000 / 2020 / 1 V/step]

9903 9903 003 9903 006 9903 009 9903 012 9903 015 9903 018 9903 021 9903 024 9903 028 9903 031 9903 034 9903 037

9906 9906 001 9906 002 9906 003 9906 004 9906 005 9906 006 9906 007 9906 008 9906 009 9906 010

SM

5-93

G104

Service Tables

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


9908 9908 001 [Background Po.] Background potential Upper Limit *EGB Adjusts the upper limit vale of background potential. [0 to 300 / 130 / 1/step] Lower Limit *EGB Adjusts the lower limit vale of background potential. [0 to 300 / 130 / 1/step] [Charge Output] Charge Output [Toner Fill Up] [All] [TC Initial] Toner Cartridge Initial [All] [K] [M] [C] [Y] [Toner Fill Up] [K] [M] [C] [Y] Upper Limit *EGB

9908 002

9910 9910 001 9910 003 9910 004 9910 005 9910 006 9910 007 9910 008 9910 010 9910 011 9910 012 9910 013 9910 020

Performs the charge output. Fills up the toner for all colors. Initializes the all toner bottles for each mode.

Fills up the toner for each color.

Adjusts the upper limit for filling up the toner. If the toner is detected for [N] times, the toner fill up mode ends. [N] can be adjusted with this SP9910-020. [1 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]

9911 9911 001 9911 002 9912 9912 001

[TC Initial] Toner Cartridge Initial Maximum Repeat *EGB [1 to 30 / 15 / 1/step]] Threshold *EGB [1 to 100 / 20 / 0.01V/step] [ST Sensor] read

Detects ST sensor output.

G104

5-94

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


9914 9914 001 [Waste Toner NF] Waste Toner Near Full Print 1 *EGB Adjusts the number of sheets that can be printed after the waste toner full was detected. [0 to 5000 / 1250 / 1/step] Print 2 *EGB Adjusts the number of sheets that can be printed. [0 to 1000 / 250 / 1/step] Print 3 *EGB [0 to 1000 / 125 / 1/step] Print 4 *EGB [0 to 5000 / 2500 / 1/step] Detection Times *EGB [0 to 50 / 0 / 1/step] Near Full Count. *EGB [0 to 100000 / 0 / 1/step] [LD Pow. Change] LDB Power Change *EGB [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Not execute, 1: Execute

9914 002

9914 003 9914 004 9914 005 9914 006 9918 9918 001

SM

5-95

G104

Service Tables

ENGINE SERVICE MODE

5.2.4 INPUT CHECK TABLE


When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No. Result 7 0 or 1 6 0 or 1 5 0 or 1 4 0 or 1 3 0 or 1 2 0 or 1 1 0 or 1 0 0 or 1

SP5-803 Bit Description -XXX Input Check 1 001 DFU Input Check 2 0 Color OPC Motor 1 Black OPC/ Development Motor 2 Color Development Motor 002 3 Paper Feed/ Fusing Motor 4 Registration Sensor 5 Paper Exit Sensor 6 Interlock Switch 5V 7 Top Cover Sensor Input Check 3 003 DFU Input Check 4 0-3 DFU 4 Polygon Motor Fan 5 Color Drum Gear Position Sensor
004 6 Black Drum Gear Position Sensor

Reading 0 1

Locked Locked Locked Locked Paper detected Paper not detected Open Close

Not locked Not locked Not locked Not locked Paper not detected Paper detected Close Open

005 006

011

7 Interlock Switch 24V Input Check 5 DFU Input Check 6 DFU Input Check 11 0 Paper Size Sensor 1 1 Paper Size Sensor 2 2 Paper Size Sensor 3 3 Paper Size Sensor 4 4 Paper Width Sensor 5 Paper Height Sensor 1 6 Paper Height Sensor 2 7 Paper End Sensor

Locked Activated (Actuator inside sensor) Activated (Actuator inside sensor) Opened

Not locked Deactivated

Deactivated Closed

Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed Not End

Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed End

G104

5-96

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


SP5-803 Bit Description -XXX Input Check 12 0 Transfer Belt Contact Sensor 1 Transfer Roller Contact Sensor 2 Duplex Jam Sensor 1 012 3 Duplex Jam Sensor 1 4 Fusing New Unit Sensor 5 Fusing Unit Set Sensor P1 6 Fusing Unit Set Sensor P2 7 Not Used Input Check 13 0 Paper Overflow Sensor 1 Fusing Exit Sensor 2 Inverter Sensor 013 3 Fusing Unit Fan 4 PSU Fan 5 Drive Unit Fan 6 Paper Exit Fan 7 DFU Input Check 14 0 Toner End Sensor [Y] 1 Toner End Sensor [C] 2 Toner End Sensor [M] 014 3 Toner End Sensor [K] 4 New PCU Detection [Y] 5 New PCU Detection [C] 6 New PCU Detection [M] 7 New PCU Detection [K] Input Check 15 0 LDU Shutter Sensor 1 Left Cover Sensor 2 Waste Toner Overflow Sensor 015 3 By-pass Paper Detection Sensor 4 By-pass Paper Size Sensor 1 5 By-pass Paper Size Sensor 2 6 By-pass Paper Size Sensor 3 7 By-pass Paper Size Sensor 4 Input Check 16 0-2 Not used 016 3 Fusing Entrance Sensor 4 Transfer Belt New Unit Detection 5-7 Not used Input Check 17 0-4 DFU 5 Front Door Sensor 6-7 DFU 017 Reading 0
Not Contact Not Contact Paper detected Paper detected New Set Set Overflow Paper detected Paper detected Locked Locked Locked Locked

1
Contact Contact Paper not detected Paper not detected Old Not Set Not Set Not overflow Paper not detected Paper not detected Not locked Not locked Not locked Not locked

Close Close Not overflow Paper detected Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed Paper detected New Close -

Open Open Overflow Paper not detected Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Paper not detected Old Open -

SM

5-97

G104

Service Tables

End End End End New New New New

Not end Not end Not end Not end Old Old Old Old

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


SP5-803 Bit Description -XXX Input Check 20 0 Tray 2 Paper Near End Sensor 1 1 Tray 2 Paper Near End Sensor 2 2 Tray 2 Paper End Sensor 020 3 Tray 2 Paper Feed Sensor 4 Tray 2 Paper Size 4 5 Tray 2 Paper Size 3 6 Tray 2 Paper Size 2 7 Tray 2 Paper Size 1 Input Check 21 0 Tray 3 Paper Near End Sensor 1 1 Tray 3 Paper Near End Sensor 2 2 Tray 3 Paper End Sensor 021 3 Tray 3 Paper Feed Sensor 4 Tray 3 Paper Size 4 5 Tray 3 Paper Size 3 6 Tray 3 Paper Size 2 7 Tray 3 Paper Size 1 Reading 0
Pushed Pushed End Paper detected Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed End Paper detected Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed

1
Not Pushed Not Pushed Not end Paper not detected Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not end Paper not detected Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed

5.2.5 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE


5804 5804 001 5804 002 5804 003 5804 005 5804 007 5804 008 5804 009 5804 010 5804 011 5804 012 5804 020 5804 022 5804 024 5804 026 5804 030 5804 031 5804 032 5804 033 5804 034 5804 035 5804 036 5804 040 5804 042 5804 044 5804 060 [Output Check] Fusing Fan H Fusing Fan L PSU Fan Polygon Fan PSU Inner Fan Drive Fan Exit Paper Fan H Polyg. Mir. Motor Exit Paper Fan L Duplex Fan Paper Feed Motor Mono. PCU Motor Color PCU Motor Color Dev. Motor [Y] Toner Motor [C] Toner Motor [M] Toner Motor [K] Toner Motor T. Belt Contact M T. Roll 2 Contact M LDU Shutter Motor Trans. Belt Motor Duplex In Motor Duplex Exit Motor Paper Feed Clutch Fusing Unit Fan: High speed Fusing Unit Fan: Low speed PSU Fan Polygon Motor Fan PSU Inner Fan Drive Unit Fan Paper Exit Fan: High speed Polygon Mirror Motor Paper Exit Fan: Low speed Duplex Motor Paper Feed/ Fusing Motor Black OPC/ Development Motor Color OPC Motor Color Development Motor Toner Supply Motor [Y] Toner Supply Motor [C] Toner Supply Motor [M] Toner Supply Motor [K] Transfer Belt Contact Motor Transfer Roller Contact Motor LDU Shutter Motor Transfer Belt Unit Motor Inverter Motor Duplex Motor Paper Feed Clutch

G104

5-98

SM

ENGINE SERVICE MODE


5804 061 5804 062 5804 063 5804 064 5804 065 5804 100 5804 102 5804 104 5804 106 5804 110 5804 112 5804 114 5804 116 5804 118 5804 120 5804 122 5804 124 5804 126 5804 130 5804 132 5804 134 5804 136 5804 140 5804 142 5804 200 5804 201 5804 202 5804 203 5804 204 5804 205 5804 210 5804 211 5804 212 5804 220 5804 221 5804 230 5804 231 5804 240 5804 241 Relay Clutch Regist. Clutch Develop. Clutch By-pass Solenoid Duplex Solenoid [Y]: Charge DC [C]: Charge DC [M]: Charge DC [K]: Charge DC [Y]: Charge AC [C]: Charge AC [M]: Charge AC [K]: Charge AC Charge AC Trigger [Y]: Develop. DC [C]: Develop. DC [M]: Develop. DC [K]: Develop. DC [Y]: Transfer Belt [C]: Transfer Belt [M]: Transfer Belt [K]: Transfer Belt T. Roll 2 Posi. T. Roll 2 Nega. [Y]: TD. Sensor Vcnt [C]: TD. Sensor Vcnt [M]: TD. Sensor Vcnt [K]: TD. Sensor Vcnt ID. Sensor LED Toner End Sensor ID. Sensor Left ID. Sensor Center ID. Sensor Right Color PCL Mono. PCL PFU 1 Motor PFU 1 Clutch PFU 2 Motor PFU 2 Clutch Relay Transport Clutch Registration Clutch Development Clutch By-pass Solenoid Junction Gate Solenoid Charge Roller DC: Yellow PCU Charge Roller DC: Cyan PCU Charge Roller DC: Magenta PCU Charge Roller DC: Black PCU Charge Roller AC: Yellow PCU Charge Roller AC: Cyan PCU Charge Roller AC: Magenta PCU Charge Roller AC: Black PCU Charge Roller AC Trigger Development DC: Yellow Development DC: Cyan Development DC: Magenta Development DC: Black Transfer Belt Bias: Yellow Transfer Belt Bias: Cyan Transfer Belt Bias: Magenta Transfer Belt Bias: Black Transfer Roller: Positive Voltage Transfer Roller: Negative Voltage TD Sensor Vcnt: Yellow TD Sensor Vcnt: Cyan TD Sensor Vcnt: Magenta TD Sensor Vcnt: Black ID Sensor LED Toner End Sensor ID. Sensor Left ID. Sensor Center ID. Sensor Right Color PCL Monochrome PCL Optional paper tray unit 1 Motor Optional paper tray unit 1 Clutch Optional paper tray unit 2 Motor Optional paper tray unit 2 Clutch

SM

5-99

G104

Service Tables

FIRMWARE UPDATE

5.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE


5.3.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE
The table lists the programs used by Model G104.
Type of firmware 1 2 3 Engine - Main System Printer Application NIB Web System Location of firmware Printer engine control EGB flash ROM Printer system management Controller flash ROM Feature application SD card NIB management SD card Web service application SD card Function Message displayed Engine Onboard Sys Opt SD1 Prn Opt SD1 Prn Opt SD1 Prn

5.3.2 PRECAUTIONS
Handling SD Cards
Observe the following precautions when handling SD cards: Turn off the main power switch before you insert or remove an SD card. Data in the SD card can be corrupted if you insert or remove an SD card while the main power switch is on. Do not turn off the main power switch during downloading. Keep SD cards in a safe location. Do not store SD cards in the following locations: Locations exposed to high temperature, high humidity, direct sunlight, or strong vibration Locations where there are effects from magnetic forces Do not bend or scratch SD cards. Do not drop SD cards or expose them to shock or vibration.
NOTE: For the arrangement of files in SD cards, see 5.3.3.

Upload or Download
In this section, upload and download have these meanings: Upload: To copy data from the printer to the SD card Download: To copy data from the SD card to the printer

Network Connection
Before you start, inform the user that they cannot use the printer during firmware update, and that they must disconnect the printer physically from the network. If a print job comes in during upload/download, it can cause problems with the firmware update.

G104

5-100

SM

FIRMWARE UPDATE

5.3.3 FILE ARRANGEMENT


How the Program Works
The firmware-update program for this machine searches the folder romdata for necessary firmware. When you save the firmware on a SD card, create a folder named romdata. Do not create another folder named romdata in another folder. NOTE: Do not make another firmware-update program folder in the folder romdata. Otherwise, it may cause a malfunction for the firmware updating. You should only have one firmware update program folder in the folder romdata. The firmware program contains the file information. Before downloading the firmware from an SD card, the firmware-update program reads the file information. The firmware is downloaded only when the file information is correct.
NOTE: The file information can identify the firmware, but this information does not

guarantee that the data is not corrupted.

Example
When you save the firmware, we recommend that you arrange folders and files as follows: In the folder romdata, make only one folder and use this folder for one model. Use the machine code as the name of this folder. When you save files other than firmware, make a new folder outside romdata. Save the files in this folder. Do not save any file outside the folders. (The diagram shows an example. Three folders, log, nvramdata, and prt, are outside romdata. These folders can store debug logs, NVRAM data, and captured files respectively.)
log Service Tables G1051111.fwu G1052222.fwu G1053333.fwu
G105S901.WMF

nvram prt romdata G104

SM

5-101

G104

FIRMWARE UPDATE

5.3.4 UPDATING
Procedure
Before beginning this procedure, print a configuration page. 1. Turn off the main power switch. 2. Disconnect the printer from the network ( 5.3.2). 3 2 1
G105S903.WMF

3. Remove the slot cover from slot 3 ( x 1). NOTE: Do not use the slot 2. The slot 2 is for customer use. 4. Turn the SD card face to the rear side of the printer, and insert it into slot 3. 5. Slowly push the SD card into the slot until it clicks. 6. Make sure that the SD card is locked in place. NOTE: To remove the SD card, push it in until it clicks, and release it slowly. The slot pushes out the SD card. 7. Turn on the main power switch. 8. Wait until a firmware name is shown on the display (about 1 minute). NOTE: The firmware name is read from within the firmware. The firmware name will not change even if you change the file name on your PC. 9. If the necessary firmware name is shown on the display, go to the next step. To use a different firmware, push the up-arrow key or the down-arrow key to find the necessary firmware. 10. To select the firmware, push the enter key. Make sure that a star ( ) is next to the firmware name. 11. If you update more than one firmware program at the same time, find each firmware and select each of them. Make sure a star is added to each firmware name. 12. To select Up Date, push the up-arrow key or the down-arrow key.
NOTE: If the customer has used all of three slots, you will need an empty slot for

this procedure. Ask the customer to temporarily remove one of the SD card in slot 3.

G104

5-102

SM

FIRMWARE UPDATE

13. To start firmware update, push the enter key. While each firmware is downloaded, the underscores on the operation panel are replaced by stars. 14. Wait until the message Updated is shown. 15. Turn off the main power switch. 16. Remove the SD card from the slot. 17. Attach the slot cover ( x 1). 18. Connect the printer to the network physically. 19. Turn on the main power switch. 20. Print the Configuration Page to check that the every firmware is correctly updated: Menu > List/Test Print > Config.P/Er.Log

Error Handling
An error code is shown if an error occurs during the download. Error codes have the letter E and a number. If an error occurs, the firmware has not correctly downloaded; see the error code table (5.3.6) and perform the necessary steps. After this, try to download the firmware again.

Power Failure
If firmware update is interrupted by power failure, the firmware has not correctly downloaded. In this case, machine operation is not guaranteed. You have to download the firmware again.

SM

5-103

G104

Service Tables

FIRMWARE UPDATE

5.3.5 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD

CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch before you insert or remove an SD card. Make sure that the controller and the EGB are correctly connected.

Uploading NVRAM Data


Copy the data from the NVRAM to an SD card (referred to as to upload NVRAM data in this section) before you replace the NVRAM. If you cannot upload NVRAM data, manually input the necessary settings after you replace the NVRAM. 1. Start the SP mode. 2. Select SP5990-001 (ALL (Data List)). 3. Execute the SP. 3 2 1 4. See if the SMC Report is correctly output. NOTE: You may need the SMC Report if the machine does not complete an NVRAM data upload or download ( Downloading NVRAM Data) correctly. 5. Exit the SP mode. 6. Turn off the main power switch. 7. Insert an SD card into slot 3. 8. Turn on the main power switch. 9. Enter the SP mode. 10. Select SP5824-001(NVRAM Upload). 11. Push the enter key. The upload starts. When uploading ends correctly, the following file is made: NVRAM\serial_number.NV where NVRAM is the folder name in the SD card and serial_number.NV is the file name with the extension .NV. The serial number of the printer is used as the file name. For example, if the serial number is G1040017, the file name is G1040017.NV. 12. Exit the SP mode. 13. Turn off the main power switch. 14. Remove the SD card. 15. Mark the SD card with, for example, the machine code. You will need this SD card when you download NVRAM data ( Downloading NVRAM Data). NOTE: One SD card can store the NVRAM data from two or more machines.
G105S904.WMF

G104

5-104

SM

FIRMWARE UPDATE

Downloading NVRAM Data


Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM (referred to as to download NVRAM data in this section) after you replace the NVRAM. If you cannot download NVRAM data, manually input the necessary settings. 1. Make sure that the main power switch is off. If it is on, turn it off. 2. Make sure that you have the correct SD card that contains the necessary NVRAM data. 3. Insert the SD card into slot 3. 4. Turn on the main power switch. 5. Enter SP mode. 6. Select SP5825-001 (NVRAM Download). 7. Push the enter key. The download starts. NOTE: The machine cannot execute the download if the file name in the SD card is different from the serial number of the printer ( Uploading NVRAM Data). 8. Exit the SP mode. 9. Turn off the main power switch. 10. Remove the SD card. 11. Turn on the main power switch. 12. Check that the NVRAM data is correctly downloaded. This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM: Total Count Serial Number

SM

5-105

G104

Service Tables

FIRMWARE UPDATE

Rev. 01/2006

5.3.6 ERROR CODE TABLE


These error codes are used by more than one model. Some codes are not used by Model G104.
Code 20 21 22 23 24 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 40 42 43 Cause Cannot map logical address Cannot access memory Cannot decompress compressed data Error occurred when ROM update program started SD card access error No HDD available for stamp data download Data incorrect for continuous download Data incorrect after download interrupted Incorrect SD card version Module mismatch - Correct module is not on the SD card) Module mismatch Module on SD card is not for this machine Cannot write module Cause other than E34, E35 Engine module download failed Operation panel module download failed Stamp data module download failed Controller module download failed Electronic confirmation check failed Solution Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use another SD card. HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks. Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is corrupted. Controller program abnormal. If the second attempt fails, replace controller board. Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use another SD card. HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks. Insert the SD card with the remaining data required for the download, the re-start the procedure. Execute the recovery procedure for the intended module download, then repeat the installation procedure. Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is corrupted. SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install again. SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is for another machine. Acquire correct update data then install again. SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is for another machine. Acquire correct update data then install again. Replace the update data for the module on the SD card and try again, or replace the EGB board. Replace the update data for the module on the SD card and try again, or replace the LCDC. Replace the update data for the module on the SD card and try again, or replace the hard disks. Replace the update data for the module on the SD card and tray again, or replace controller board. Write Protect switch on SD card is ON. SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is for another machine. Acquire correct update data then install again.

44 50

G104

5-106

SM

SD CARD APPLI MOVE

5.4 SD CARD APPLI MOVE


5.4.1 OVERVIEW
The service program SD Card Appli Move (SP5873) enables you to copy application programs from one SD card to another SD card. There are two service SD card slots. Model G104 can use slot 3 to store application programs. Slot 3 is for maintenance work. Because of this, if the choose one SD card application programs are stored on two SD cards or more, from these SD cards or store all the application programs on one card. Use extreme caution when using SD Card Appli Move: 1. The authentication data is transferred with the application program from one SD card to the other SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you copy the application program from this card to another SD card. 2. Do not use an SD card if it has been used for other work, for example, on a computer. Normal operation is not guaranteed when such an SD card is used. 3. Keep the SD card in a secure place ( Note) after you copy the application The SD card can program from one card to another card. This is because: be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program. You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future. NOTE: Refer to Keeping the SD card at the end of this chapter.
Service Tables SM 5-107 G104

SD CARD APPLI MOVE

5.4.2 MOVE EXEC


The menu Move Exec (SP5873-001) enables you to copy application programs from the original SD card to another SD card. The application programs are copied as follows: From slot 3 to slot 2 when SD cards are in slots 2 or in all slots Note that the authentication data is also copied with the application program ( G105S905.WMF 5.4.1). 3 2 1 1. Turn off the main power switch. 2. Make sure that an SD card is in slot 2. The application program is copied to the SD card in slot 2. 3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to slot 3. The application program is copied from this SD card. 4. Turn on the main power switch. 5. Start the SP mode. 6. Select SP5873-001 Move Exec. 7. Follow the messages displayed on the operation panel. 8. Exit the SP mode. 9. Turn off the main power switch. 10. Remove the SD card from slot 3. 11. Turn on the main power switch. 12. Check that the application programs run normally.

G104

5-108

SM

SD CARD APPLI MOVE

5.4.3 UNDO EXEC


The menu Undo Exec (SP5873-002) enables you to copy back application programs from an SD card to the original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec (SP5873-001). The application programs are copied as follows: From slot 2 to slot 3 when SD cards are in slots 2 or in all slots Note that the authentication data is also copied with the application program ( G105S906.WMF 5.4.1). 3 2 1 1. Turn off the main power switch. 2. Insert the original SD card in slot 3. The application program is copied back to this card. 3. Make sure that the SD card (having stored the application program) is in slot 2. The application program is copied back from this SD card. 4. Turn on the main power switch. 5. Enter SP mode. 6. Select SP5873-002 Undo Exec. 7. Follow the messages displayed on the operation panel. 8. Exit SP mode. 9. Turn off the main power switch. 10. Remove the SD card from slot 3. 11. Turn on the main power switch. 12. Check that the application programs run normally.
Service Tables

Keeping the SD card


After moving exe, the original SD card must be kept in a secure place. Keep the SD card in the area [A] as the drawing shows and fasten it with a tape.

[A]

G105S907.WMF

SM

5-109

G104

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

OVERVIEW

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS


6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 2 3 4 5 6

7 17 16 9 15 10 14 11 13 12
G105V101.WMF

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Toner bottle [Y] Toner bottle [C] Toner bottle [M] Toner bottle [K] Transfer Belt Unit Fusing Unit Duplex Unit ID sensor By-pass Feed Table

10. Transfer roller 11. PCU (Photo Conductor Unit) 12. Development Unit (x4) 13. Standard tray 14. PSU (Power Supply Unit) 15. Polygon Mirror Motor 16. LDU 17. Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit

SM

6-1

G104

Detailed Descriptions

OVERVIEW

6.1.2 PAPER PATH


[E] [A]

[B]

[D]
G105V102.WMF

[C]

[A]: [B]: [C]: [D]: [E]:

Duplex Unit By-pass Feed Table Optional 1 Tray Paper Feed Unit, 2 Tray Paper Feed Unit Standard tray Standard Paper Exit Tray (Internal Tray)

G104

6-2

SM

OVERVIEW

6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT


1 7 2

5 3

6
G105V103.WMF

1. Black OPC/ Development Motor: This controls the black OPC and development unit for black. 2. Color OPC Motor: This controls the OPCs for magenta, cyan, and yellow. 3. Color Development Motor: This controls the color development units (magenta/cyan/yellow). 4. Paper Feed/ Fusing Motor: This controls the paper feed mechanisms (tray 1/by-pass tray), fusing unit, paper, registration roller, transport relay roller and paper exit roller. 5. Transfer Belt Unit Motor: This controls the transfer belt unit and the transfer roller. 6. Duplex Motor: This controls the duplex exit, relay and exit rollers. 7. Inverter Motor: This controls the inverter roller.
Detailed Descriptions

SM

6-3

G104

OVERVIEW

6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE

Memory Chip (Toner bottle)

Motors

Polygon Motor

Synch. Detectors

Thermistors

Operation Panel

Sensors

Clutches

IOB

PFU

PCI Bus

SD Cards (Boot) SD Cards (Option) Memory DIMM

PSU

EGB

Fusing Lamp

LD Boards

Fan

High Voltage Supply Boad

Controller

IEEE1284

IEEE1394 Standard components IEEE 802.11 b Bluetooth


G105D902.WMF

HDD

Optional components

NVRAM

The EGB (Engine Board) controls all of the machine functions and the handshake with the CTL (Controller). The IOB (In/Out Board) controls input/output, drivers and input/output -connections. The IOB is a part of the EGB expansion board. Only two of the optional interface boards (IEEE1284, IEEE1394, IEEE802.11b, and Bluetooth) can be installed. The controller connects to the EGB through the PCI Bus (Peripheral Component Interconnect Bus).

G104

6-4

SM

OVERVIEW

Descriptions
1. EGB (Engine Board): This controls the Engine, the controller interface, image processing, MUSIC (Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval Correction), and input/output. MUSIC is also called Automatic Line Position Adjustment). 2. IOB (Input/Output Board): This controls input/output, and the interfaces with the optional units, and the operation panel. 3. Controller: The controller board controls these functions: SD cards (Boot) IEEE802.11b SD cards (Option) Bluetooth Memory DIMM NVRAM IEEE1284 HDD IEEE1394 4. LD Drive Board: This is the laser diode drive circuit board. 5. IEEE1394 Interface (Option): This lets computers connect to this printer with an IEEE1394 interface. 6. HDD Unit (Option): The HDD unit stores the data for these items. Additional software fonts Collation Locked print Sample print Downloaded forms for form overlay 7. Memory DIMM (Standard: 64MB DRAM, Option: 64/128/256MB DRAM): This is for more printer processing memory, and is also used for collation and for soft fonts. 8. Operation Panel Board: Controls the display panel, the LED, and the keypad. 9. IEEE1284 Interface (Option): This is a parallel printer port. 10. USB: Lets you connect the printer to a computer. 11. Bluetooth (Option): Lets you connect the printer to a computer with a wireless connection. 12. IEEE802.11b wireless LAN (Option): Lets you connect the printer to a computer with a wireless connection.

SM

6-5

G104

Detailed Descriptions

OVERVIEW

6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS

9 8

3 6

5
G105D101.WMF

This machine uses four PCUs, four development units, and four laser beams for color printing. Each PCU contains a drum, charge roller, cleaning brush, and blade. The toner image on each drum is transferred to the transfer belt. All four color toners are put on the belt at the same time. Then the completed four-color image is transferred to the paper.

G104

6-6

SM

OVERVIEW

1. Drum charge: The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge 2. Laser exposure: The laser beam from the laser diode (LD) goes through the lens and mirrors and to the drum. To make a latent image on the drum, the machine turns the laser beam on and off. 3. Development: The development roller moves negatively-charged toner to the latent image on the drum surface. This machine uses four development units (one for each color). 4. Image transfer: The charge that is applied to the transfer roller pulls the toner from the drum to the transfer belt. Four toner images are put on the paper. 5. Cleaning for OPC drum: The cleaning brush and blade remove remaining toner on the drum surface after image transfer to the paper. 6. Quenching for OPC drum: Quenching is done at the end of each page with a quenching lamp (LED array) in the PCU. 7. Paper registration: The registration roller controls the paper feed timing to make sure that the image transfers to the correct location on the paper. It also removes skew. 8. Paper Transfer and Separation: Toner transfers from the transfer belt to the paper when the paper is fed between the transfer belt and transfer roller. At this time, the paper also separates from the transfer belt, because of a discharge plate immediately after the transfer roller. 9. ID sensor: The ID sensor board contains three ID sensors (one at the left, one at the center, and one at the right). The ID sensor detects the density of the ID sensor pattern on the transfer belt. The ID sensor output is used for process control and for automatic line-position adjustment, skew, and color registration adjustments for the latent image.
Detailed Descriptions

SM

6-7

G104

PROCESS CONTROL

6.2

PROCESS CONTROL

6.2.1 OVERVIEW

[C] [B] [A]

G105D117.WMF

This machine has these two forms of process control: Potential control Toner supply control Process control uses these components: Three ID (image density) sensors (left [A], center [B], and right [C]). Only the center ID sensor is used for process control. The left, center, and right ID sensors are used in combination for line positioning and other adjustments. TD (toner density) sensor in each development unit.

G104

6-8

SM

PROCESS CONTROL

6.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL


Overview
Potential control controls development to keep the toner images on the drums at the same density. It does this by compensating for variations in drum chargeability and toner density. The machine uses the ID sensor to measure the reflectivity of the transfer belt and the density of a standard sensor pattern. This is done during the process control self-check. The machine measures these values from the ID sensor output and a reference table in memory. VD: Drum potential without exposure to adjust this, the machine adjusts the charge roller voltage. VB: Development bias VL: Drum potential at the strongest exposure to adjust this, the machine adjusts the laser power. (Also, VREF is corrected. This is used for toner supply control.) This controls the development potential to make sure that the maximum quantity of toner applied to the drum is constant. If SP3-501-001 process control is set to 1 (Fixed), the machine does not perform the potential control, but uses these fixed parameters: Development bias adjusted with SP2-212-001 to 008 Charge roller voltage adjusted with SP2-201-001 to 009 Laser power selected with SP2105-001 to 012. However, these SPs are not normally adjusted in the field.

Process Control Self-check


Detailed Descriptions

This machine performs potential control with a procedure that is known as the process control self-check. This procedure is done at these 9 times. 1. Initial This starts automatically at the following times: Immediately after the power is turned on When the machine comes back from energy saver mode 6 hours after the power was turned on (can be changed with SP 3554 001) If absolute humidity changes more than 6 g/m3 (e.g. 23C/ 50% 27C/ 70%). The humidity threshold can be changed with SP 3554 002.

SM

6-9

G104

PROCESS CONTROL

2. Interval: Job End At the end of a job, process control is done after the interval of time that is set with SP 3555 001, if more than 210 prints (default) were made after the previous process control (this number can be changed with SP3551-001 and 002). At the end of a job, process control is done immediately, if more than 300 (default) prints were made after the previous process control (this number can be changed with SP3551-003 and -004). The default setting of SP 3555 001 is 0. Because of this, there is no difference between these two processes, and the 300-print setting is not used. After process control is done (except for forced process control), the counters are reset to 0. 3. Interval: Interrupt (default: 500) If the machine makes a sequence of 500 or more color prints in the same job, printing stops and process control is done. After it is completed, the machine continues to make prints. The default value of 500 can be adjusted with SP3551-005 to -006 4. Non-use Time (6 hours) This starts before the next print job if the machine has no job for 6 hours. If the non-use time process control is done (N) times after the user turns on the power, it will not be done. N is adjusted with SP3558. 5. Installation This starts only when this machine turns on at first installation. The machine does this if SP5-950-001 is set to 1 (set at the factory). 6. After Toner End Recovery This starts after recovery from a toner end condition. 7. After Developer Initialization This starts after a developer initialization is done. Developer initialization occurs automatically after a new PCU is installed. 8. After Transfer Belt Unit Initialization This starts after a transfer belt unit initialization is done. Transfer belt unit initialization occurs automatically after a new transfer belt unit is installed. 9. Forced This is done when SP3-820-001 is used.

G104

6-10

SM

PROCESS CONTROL

6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK PROCEDURE


Step 1: VSG Adjustment
This machine uses three ID sensors (direct-reflection type). They are located at the left, center, and right of the transfer unit. Only the center ID sensor is used for process control. The ID sensor checks the bare transfer belt's reflectivity and the machine calibrates the ID sensor until its output (known as VSG) is as follows. VSG = 4.0 0.5 Volts This calibration adjusts for the transfer belt's condition and the ID sensor condition, for example, dirt on the belt or ID sensor.

Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation


The machine mixes the developer and then makes a 10-gradation pattern on the transfer belt for each toner color. The pattern has 10 squares (the sequence is as follows: 10 black squares, 10 magenta squares, 10 cyan squares and 10 yellow squares). Each of the squares is 15.03 mm x 12.23 mm, and is a solid-color square. To make the squares, the machine changes the development bias and charge roller voltage. The difference between development bias and charge roller voltage is always the same.

Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection


The ID sensor detects the densities of the 10 solid-color squares for each color. This data goes to memory.

Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation


Detailed Descriptions G104

The quantity of toner on the transfer belt (M/A, mass per unit area, mg/cm2) is calculated for each of the 10 gradations of the sensor pattern. To do this, the machine uses the ID sensor output value from each gradation of the pattern.

SM

6-11

PROCESS CONTROL

Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment


The machine makes a plot of the 10 values of M/A against the development potential that was used to make each of the gradations. Then it makes a line through the 10 points. Then, it finds the development potential that is necessary to put the target M/A of toner on the OPC.
Development Vk B This development potential is then used to 0 Potential find the best values of development bias, G105D947.WMF charge roller voltage and laser power for the machine in its current condition. To do this, it refers to a table in memory. M/A

Target M/A

The machine also adjusts VREF (toner density target) at the same time. As a result, the development gamma detected by process control will be the value stored in SP3-561-001 to -004 (do not adjust in the field unless told to do this). After that, the transfer belt cleaning unit cleans the transfer belt.

6.2.4 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL


Toner Supply Control Modes
This machine has four toner supply control modes. They are selected with SP 3301-001 to 004. 1. Fixed supply mode This mode is used when the TD sensor becomes defective. The amount of toner supply can be adjusted with SP3-302-001 -004 if the image density is incorrect (the default setting is 5%). 2. Proportional control mode 1 (Pixel) This mode is used when the TD sensor becomes defective. Only the pixel count is used to control toner supply. The amount of toner supply can be adjusted with SP3-306-001 to -004. 3. Proportional control mode 2 (TD sensor) This mode is used when the ID sensor at the center becomes defective. Only the TD sensor is used to control toner supply. The amount of toner supply can be adjusted with SP3-306-005 to -008.

G104

6-12

SM

PROCESS CONTROL

4. Hybrid control mode This is the default toner supply control mode. The TD sensor or the pixel count are used in this mode. If the image coverage ratio is less than the value of SP 3-701-002 to 005, pixel count is used. If the image coverage ratio is more than the value of SP 3-701-002 to 005, the TD sensor is used. But, if SP 3-701-001 is off, then the TD sensor is always used. The default setting for this SP is off. Because of this, pixel count is not used. The amount of toner supply can be adjusted with SP3-306-009 to -020. The TD sensor is in the PCU. If the TD sensor becomes defective, the technician must replace the PCU. But if this is not possible at that time, the technician can change the toner supply mode with SP 3-301-001 to 004.

Low Image Coverage


After process control, toner refresh mode is done (this can be switched off with SP 3721 001). Toner refresh is only done if the percentage of pages (after the previous process control) that was detected with low image coverage is more than the value of SP 3721 002. SP 3701 002 to 005 control the limits that the machine uses to detect if the image coverage is low. Toner refresh mode supplies new toner, because there is old toner in the developer after printing many pages with low image coverage. During toner refresh mode, the machine does the following:
Detailed Descriptions

1) The machine mixes the developer for 5 seconds. 2) The machine does an engine free run, which simulates printing of 10 sheets of A4/LT size paper with the image data (2 by 2) and normal toner supply. 3) The machine mixes the developer for 10 seconds.

SM

6-13

G104

PROCESS CONTROL

6.2.5 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION

[A]
G105D106.WMF

Introduction Toner Near End


To detect toner near-end the machine uses: Pixel count (memory chip on the toner bottle)

Toner End
To detect toner end the machine uses: Output from the toner end sensor [A]

G104

6-14

SM

PROCESS CONTROL

Toner Near End Detection


The machine uses pixel count to detect toner near end. 1) The controller counts the printed pixels. Then, it calculates the remaining toner quantity from the record stored in the memory ID chip for each toner bottle. 2) If the remaining toner quantity is calculated at less than 10% of a full bottle, the machine detects a toner near-end condition. 3) The remaining toner quantity and Toner near end are recorded in the memory ID chip. 4) Toner near-end is displayed on the LCD display. NOTE: Toner near-end detection uses the pixel counter on the memory ID chip. If new toner is added to the empty toner bottle, the contents of the ID chip are not reset, so the toner near-end or end condition will not reset. Also, near-end detection cannot be done properly.

Toner End Detection


The machine detects toner end when the toner end sensor detects no toner 3 times in a row 3.1 seconds after toner was supplied. At this time, Toner end is recorded in the memory ID chip.

Toner End Recovery


The machine detects that a toner bottle was replaced if one of these events occurs during a toner end condition: The top cover is opened and closed. The main switch is turned off and on. The machine then starts to supply toner to the development unit. After this, the machine resets the toner end condition. NOTE: 1) When Toner near end is detected, Toner end recovery is not done. 2) If there is no Toner end information in the memory ID chip, the machine detects that there is toner in the toner bottle and Toner end recovery is done.
Detailed Descriptions

SM

6-15

G104

PROCESS CONTROL

6.2.6 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION


When the machine detects that a new PCU was installed, it initializes the developer. To do this, the machine mixes the developer for a few seconds, and adjusts VCNT (control voltage for TD sensor) to adjust VT (TD sensor output) equal to 2.5 0.1 volts. The machine stores this VT as VREF. During PCU initialization, the machine automatically supplies toner because there is no toner in the toner supply pipe at installation. Then the machine performs a process control self-check.

G104

6-16

SM

PAPER FEED

6.3 PAPER FEED


6.3.1 OVERVIEW
3 2 1 4 5

G105D126.WMF

1. Paper feed roller 2. Relay transport roller 3. Registration roller 4. Transfer belt drive roller

5. Transfer roller 6. Duplex relay roller 7. Duplex exit roller 8. By-pass feed roller
Detailed Descriptions

The machine has a paper tray (550 sheets) and a by-pass paper feed table (100 sheets). The paper feed mechanism uses a friction pad system.

SM

6-17

G104

PAPER FEED

6.3.2 PAPER FEED DRIVE

[C]

[B]
G105D127.WMF

[A]

The paper feed and fusing motor drives the paper feed roller [A], by-pass feed roller [B] and registration roller [C] via clutches and gears. The paper feed roller and by-pass feed roller feed paper to the registration roller. The machine creates a paper buckle at the registration roller to correct paper skew. The paper buckle can be adjusted with SP1-003-001 to -045.

G104

6-18

SM

PAPER FEED

6.3.3 PAPER TRAY


Paper Lift
[C] [D] [A] [B]

[E]

[F]
G105D128.WMF

When the tray [A] is set in the machine, the tray arms [B] move along the guide slopes [C] of the main frame. This makes the springs [D] lift the bottom plate [E]. The bottom plate [E] pushes the paper against the paper feed roller and keeps the top sheet of paper at the correct height as paper is fed from the stack.
Detailed Descriptions

Using the paper pressure switch [F], you can adjust the bottom plate pressure. When you use thick paper of 75g/m2 or more, move this switch to the left.

SM

6-19

G104

PAPER FEED

Paper Size Detection

1 2 3 4
[A]

[B] [D]

[C]
G105D129.WMF

The paper size sensor is at the rear of the tray on the engine mainframe. This sensor has four switches. The outputs from the switches detect the paper size, as shown in the table. The actuators are on the side plate [B]. The side plate is moved by the end plate [D] through a cam [C].
Switch Location 2 3 Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed

Paper Size LG SEF A4 SEF LT SEF US. EXE SEF B5 SEF A5 SEF/ HLT SEF A5 LEF/ HLT LEF

1 Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed -

4 Pushed Pushed Pushed

SEF = Short Edge Feed LEF = Long Edge Feed

G104

6-20

SM

PAPER FEED

Paper Near End/End Detection

[A] [G]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E] [F]
G105D131.WMF

There are four sensors in tray 1: the two near end sensors [B] [E], the end sensor [C] and the paper width sensor [A].

Near-end detection
Two near end sensors detect the amount of paper in the tray. When the quantity of paper decreases, the bottom-plate-pressure lever moves up and the actuator [F] (on the pressure-lever drive shaft) turns.
Remaining paper Full ~ 450 450 ~ 250 250 ~ 50 50 ~ 0 Near end sensor 1 [E] ON ON OFF OFF Near end sensor 2 [B] OFF ON ON OFF
Detailed Descriptions G104

OFF: No actuator

End detection
When the paper tray is empty, the actuator [D] moves into the end sensor. The sensor detects paper end.

Paper width sensor


When paper with a small width (less than A5/HLT) is put in the tray, it does not lift the actuator [G] of the paper width sensor. Because of this, the paper width sensor detects the paper that has a width less than A5/HLT.

SM

6-21

PAPER FEED

By-pass Tray Feed and Size Detection


[D] [A] [C]

[F] [B] [G]

[H]
G105D130.WMF

[E]

Paper Feed Mechanism


When the paper detection feeler [A] detects a sheet of paper, the by-pass solenoid [B] unlocks the feed shaft stopper at the left end of the by-pass feed shaft [C]. The by-pass feed shaft has the feed roller [D] and two cams [E]. These cams move the paper support plate [F] up and down. This pushes the sheets of paper against the feed roller.

Paper Size Detection Mechanism


There are two paper side plates [G] on the by-pass tray. These connect with the paper size sensor [H] through a rack-and-pinion mechanism.

G104

6-22

SM

PAPER FEED

6.3.4 DUPLEX
1 2 3

G105D122.WMF

1. Inverter roller 2. Inverter sensor 3. Duplex jam sensor 1 4. Duplex entrance roller

5. Duplex relay roller 6. Duplex jam sensor 2 7. Duplex exit roller 8. Junction gate

SM

6-23

G104

Detailed Descriptions

PAPER FEED

Drive
[B]

[A]

[D]

[E] [C] [F]

G105D123.WMF

The inverter motor [A] controls the inverter roller [B] that feeds the sheet of paper to the duplex unit. The duplex motor [C] controls the duplex entrance roller [D], duplex relay roller [E] and duplex exit roller [F] that feed the sheet of paper to the registration roller.

G104

6-24

SM

PAPER FEED

Interleaving Step 1: This duplex unit uses the interleaving method. This decreases the total time of duplex printing.
The machine prints on side [1]. Then, the first sheet of paper is fed partially out of the exit, but not fully. Then the exit roller changes direction and the paper is redirected to the duplex feed path. At the same time, the second sheet of paper is fed between the transfer belt and the transfer roller, and side [3] is printed.

G105D124.WMF

Step 2: The machine prints side [3] on the second sheet of paper.
The second sheet of paper is fed to the paper exit, and into the duplex feed path. At the same time, the first sheet of paper is fed between the transfer belt and the transfer roller, and side [2] is printed. The second sheet of paper immediately follows the first sheet of paper in the duplex feed path. Then side [4] is printed.
5

5
G105D125.WMF

SM

6-25

G104

Detailed Descriptions

1 2

LASER EXPOSURE

6.4 LASER EXPOSURE


6.4.1 OVERVIEW
1 2 3 4

5 6 14 7 13 8

9 12 11 10
G105D133.WMF

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

LDB unit-C LDB unit-Y LDB unit-K LDB unit-M Synchronizing detector board-M, K-E LD Mirror-K F-theta lens-M, K

8. Synchronizing detector board-M, K-S 9. Mirror 10. Synchronizing detector board-Y, C-S 11. Polygon mirror motor 12. Synchronizing detector board-Y, C-E 13. F-theta lens-Y, C 14. LD Mirror-Y

This machine uses four LDB units and one polygon mirror motor to produce latent images on four OPC drums (one drum for each color toner). There are two hexagonal mirrors. Each mirror reflects beams from two LDB units. Laser exposure for yellow and cyan starts from the right side of the drum, but for magenta and black it starts from the left side of the drum. This is because the units for yellow and cyan are on the other side of the polygon mirror from the units for magenta and black.

G104

6-26

SM

LASER EXPOSURE

6.4.2 OPTICAL PATH


[A] [B] [D] [E]

[C]

[F]

G105D132.WMF

The laser beams for cyan [B] and magenta [D] are sent to the upper part of the polygon mirror [C]. The laser beams for yellow [A] and black [E] are sent to the lower part of the polygon mirror. The LD mirrors (see the previous page) reflect the laser beams for yellow and black to the lower polygon mirror. The mirror [F] corrects the main scan line. Without this mirror, the line bends at the middle of the main scan. The central bend of the mirror is adjusted in the factory. The speed of the polygon mirror is controlled by the selected mode (see below).
Mode B/W (except OHP/Thick paper) Color (except OHP/Thick paper) OHP/Thick Resolution (dpi) 600 x 600 1,200 x 600 1,200 x 1,200 600 x 600 1,200 x 600 1,200 x 1,200 600 x 600 1,200 x 600 1,200 x 1,200 Polygon motor speed (rpm) 36614 36614 36614 36614 36614 Process line speed (mm/s) 155 77.5 155 77.5 77.5 Print speed (ppm) 25
Detailed Descriptions G104

12.5 25 12.5 12.5

SM

6-27

LASER EXPOSURE

6.4.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR

[A]

[F]

[E]

[D]

[C]

[B]

G105D133.WMF

Overview
The machine has four laser synchronizing detector boards (LSD) as shown above. Each pair of boards detects two colors. The machine knows each color from the time that they are detected. The two LSDs [A] [B] are used for magenta and black, and the two [C] [D] are used for yellow and cyan.

Main Scan Start Detection


For magenta and black, the LSD [B] detects the start of the main scan. For yellow and cyan, the LSD [C] detects the start of the main scan. The arrows [E] [F] show the direction of the laser scan.

G104

6-28

SM

LASER EXPOSURE

6.4.4 LD SAFETY SWITCH


A safety switch turns off when the front cover or the right door is opened. As a result, a relay on the PSU cuts the power supply (+5V) to the four LD boards. (The electric circuits run through the EGB and IOB.) The LD safety switch system interrupts the laser beam circuit when the cover is open.
EGB IOB
Door SW

+5VE2

PSU

Front and Upper Right Cover Switch The front cover and the right cover are mechanically connected to the actuator. The actuator is mechanically connected to the safety switch. When one of these covers is opened or closed, the actuator opens or closes the safety switch.

LDB (C)

LD Control IC

LDB (M)

LD Control IC

LDB (Y)

LD Control IC

LDB (K)

LD Control IC

G105D901.WMF

SM

6-29

G104

Detailed Descriptions

LASER EXPOSURE

6.4.5 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT


Overview
YY, KK, CC, MM: Spaces between two lines of the same color KY, KC, KM: Spaces between a black line and a color line

Front

Center

Rear

Y K C M Y K C M
MM CC YY KK KY KC KM YY KK CC KY KC KM YY KK CC KY KC KM

MM

MM

G105D921.WMF

During automatic line position adjustment, the line patterns above are created eight times on the transfer belt. The spaces between the lines (YY, KK, CC, MM, KY, KC, KM) are measured by the front, center, and rear ID sensors. The controller reads the average of the spaces, and adjusts the following items: Sub scan line position for YCM Main scan line position for KYCM Magnification ratio for KYCM Skew for YCM ( NOTE) NOTE: In this procedure, only the skew for YCM is measured. If you want to adjust the main skew, do the main skew adjustment procedure. ( 3.3.2) The transfer-belt-cleaning unit cleans the transfer belt after the patterns are measured.

G104

6-30

SM

LASER EXPOSURE

Summary of Each Adjustment Sub scan line position for YCM


The adjustment of the sub-scan line position for YCM uses the line position for K as a reference (color registration). The machine measures the gaps between the lines of each color in the pattern on the transfer belt. If the gaps for a color are not correct, the machine moves the image of the color up or down the sub scan axis. To do this, it changes the laser write timing for that color.

Main scan line position for KYCM


If the machine detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, it changes the laser-write-start timing for each scan line.

Magnification adjustment for KYCM


If the machine detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes the LD clock frequency for the necessary color.

Skew for YCM


The adjustment of the skew for YCM uses the line position for K as a reference.

SM

6-31

G104

Detailed Descriptions

LASER EXPOSURE

Adjustment Conditions
If SP 2153-001 is set to on, then automatic line position adjustment is done at the times shown below.

After process control is done


If SP 2153-002 is set to on, then the adjustment is done when these types of process control are successfully done. Initial process control Interval process control No-use time process control

Initialization If SP 2153-003 is set to on, then the adjustment is done when the main power is turned on or the machine comes back from the standby mode, but only if one of the following conditions occurs.
At a set time after the previous adjustment. The default value is 360 minutes. You can adjust the time with SP2153-013. When the temperature changed after a previous adjustment by more than a set value. The default value is 5. You can adjust the temperature change value with 2153-012.

Printing
If SP 2153-004 is set to on, then the adjustment is done when the machine gets print job data, but only if one of the following conditions occurs. At a set time after the previous adjustment. The default value is 360 minutes. You can adjust the time with SP2153-013. When the temperature changed after a previous adjustment by more than a set value. The default value is 5 C. You can adjust the temperature change value with SP2153-012. When the magnification changed after a previous adjustment by more than a set value. The default value is 1 %. You can adjust the magnification change value with SP2153-015.

G104

6-32

SM

LASER EXPOSURE

Interrupt If SP 2153-005 is set to on, then the adjustment is done when the one of the following conditions occurs during a print job with many pages.

When the number of printed pages after the previous adjustment becomes more than a set number. The number of pages includes black and color printing. The default value is 190 pages. (If this condition occurs, automatic line position adjustment after the next interval process control will not be cancelled.) You can adjust the default value with SP2153-010. When the temperature changed after a previous adjustment by more than a set value. The default value is 5 C. You can adjust the temperature change value with SP2153-012. When the magnification changed after a previous adjustment by more than a set value. The default value is1 %. You can adjust the magnification change value with SP2153-015.

This table shows when the automatic line position adjustment is done. It also shows the main SPs that control the timing of the adjustment. If SP 2153 001 is off, then the automatic adjustment is never done. Note that the adjustments for the sub-scan line position, main scan line position, and magnification are done at the same time.
Enabled/Disabled (SP 2153 001) On After Process Control (SP 2153 002) ON Initialization (SP 2153 003) On Printing (SP 2153 004) ON Off Off ON Off Off On ON Off Off ON Off Off Interrupt (SP 2153 005) On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off On Off Remarks Default

No Adjustment

NOTE: You can also do the automatic line position adjustment manually with SP2111-001.

SM

6-33

G104

Detailed Descriptions

LASER EXPOSURE

Main Scan Skew Adjustment

[A]

Y C M K

C M K

[D]

[B]

[C]

G105D139.WMF

You can adjust the mirror adjustment cam for magenta [C], cyan [B], and yellow [A] with a screwdriver. This mechanism corrects the main scan skew. The diagram shows the effect on line skew [D] when you turn the cam in a counterclockwise direction. For more about this adjustment, see section 3.3.2.

G104

6-34

SM

LASER EXPOSURE

LDU Shutter

[B]

[A]

[D]
G105D134.WMF

[C] The LD unit has a shutter. The shutter prevents toner and other dust from falling on the LDU glass. The shutter motor [A] moves the shutter [B] in the direction of the arrow with the gear [C]. SC270 occurs if the output of the LDU shutter sensor [D] does not change 1 second after the LDU shutter motor turned on.

SM

6-35

G104

Detailed Descriptions

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.5 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT


6.5.1 OVERVIEW

3 6 4
G105D102.WMF

1. OPC drum 2. Cleaning brush 3. Waste toner collection coil

4. Cleaning blade 5. Cleaning brush roller 6. Charge roller

This machine has four PCUs, one for each color. Each PCU contains an OPC drum, charge roller, cleaning brush, and cleaning blade. The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (circumference: about 94.2 mm). The photoconductor gap between each PCU and development roller is set by the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft. It is not adjustable in the field.

G104

6-36

SM

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.5.2 DRIVE AND DRIVE GEAR POSITION SENSOR


[H] [G] [A] [B] [C] [D]

[E] [F]
G105D105.WMF

The black OPC/development motor [F] drives the PCU for black. The color development motor [A] drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow. One motor controls these three drums to help reduce CMY color registration errors.

Mechanism
The machine uses drum gear position sensors to detect if the drum motors are turning. SC380 occurs when it detects that the drum motor does not move. These sensors also help the machine to initialize the positions of the gears when the main switch is turned on and at initialization. This prevents changes between printouts in how the gears engage, which can cause changes in copy quality. There is an actuator on each of the black [D] and magenta [B] drum gears. The drum gear position sensors [C][E] detect the positions of these actuators. The sensors check that the two actuators are parallel. This mechanism makes sure that output quality does not change. The cyan [G] and yellow [H] drum gears operate directly with the magenta drum gear because these three drum gears are connected through other gears. In the ready condition, the two actuators are parallel. If they are not in a parallel position, the machine adjusts the position of the black drum gear automatically.

SM

6-37

G104

Detailed Descriptions

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

Initialization Process and SC Codes


When a drum gear position sensor has found an error, SC code 396 or 397 is shown. The table shows the steps of the initialization procedure, possible errors, and corresponding SC codes.
Initialization process The four drums turn at the same time for seven seconds. The two drum position sensors detect the two drum gear interrupters several times. Possible error The black drum gear actuator is not detected. The color drum gear actuator is not detected. Both black and yellow drum gear actuators are not detected. SC code 396 397 396

Step 1

Step 2

Step 3

The time lags between detection of the black drum gear interrupter and detection of the color drum gear interrupter are checked. The average time lag is calculated. The black drum turns. The position of the gear is adjusted for the average time difference.

The black drum gear actuator is not detected ( NOTE).

396

NOTE: If the connector of the black drum position sensor is connected to the magenta drum position sensor (and the connector of the magenta drum position sensor is connected to the black drum position sensor), no error occurs in step 1 and step 2.

G104

6-38

SM

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.5.3 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING

[A]

[B]
G105D103.WMF

This machine uses a charge roller [A]. The charge roller charges the drum surface with a negative charge. The high voltage supply board, which is at the rear of the machine, applies a dc and ac voltage (at a constant current) to the roller. The ac voltage helps to make sure that the charge given to the drum is as constant as possible. The machine automatically controls the charge roller voltage if automatic process control is enabled (that is, if SP3-501-001 is set to 0). However, if process control is turned off, (that is, if SP3-501-001 is set to 1), the dc voltage is the value stored in SP2-201-001 to 004 or SP2-201-006 to -009 (do not adjust in the field unless told to do so). The diameter of the roller is 30 mm (the circumference is about 94.2 mm). The cleaning brush roller [B], which always touches the charge roller, cleans the charge roller. For quenching at the end of every job, light from the quenching lamp (LED array in the PCU) illuminates the full area of the drum.
Detailed Descriptions

SM

6-39

G104

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.5.4 DRUM CLEANING

[A] [C] [B]

[D]
G105D104.WMF

The cleaning brush [A] loosens the remaining toner on the drum surface. The lubricant bar [B] lubricates the brush. The cleaning blade [C] then removes the waste toner. The toner collection coil [D] moves the toner to the waste toner collection duct.

G104

6-40

SM

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.5.5 WASTE TONER COLLECTION


[E] [A] [B] [C] [D]

[N] [F] [M] [G] [L]

[K]

[J]

[I]
G105D110.WMF

[H]

The waste toner from the collection coils in the four PCUs fits into the waste-toner collection bottle from the four openings [I][J][K][M] at the rear of the PCUs. The toner collection coils [B][C][D][G] move the waste toner to the waste toner bottle [L]. Coils [B][C][D] are driven by the color development motor and coil [G] is driven by the black OPC/development motor. NOTE: The openings [I] to [M] are for these PCUs: black [I], cyan [J], magenta [K], yellow [M]. The waste toner from the transfer-belt cleaning unit falls into the waste toner collection bottle from a separate opening [N]. The toner collection coil [A] moves this waste toner to the waste toner bottle. The waste toner collection coil [H] is driven by the transfer roller contact motor. The waste toner bottle has five seals (one at each opening). The seals prevent scattering of waste toner. The pin [E] at the waste toner entrance pushes the shutter spring [F] in the rear of the PCU. Because of this, waste toner can fall into the waste toner bottle when the left cover is closed. If the left cover is open, the shutter mechanism prevents the waste toner from spilling out from the rear of the PCUs.

SM

6-41

G104

Detailed Descriptions

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.5.6 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION AND SET DETECTION


[A]

[B]
G105D110.WMF

The left cover sensor [A] (behind waste toner bottle) in the main frame detects when the left cover is open. It also detects if the waste toner bottle is in the machine. If the Close Front/Left Cover indication shows on the LCD when the cover is closed, check if the waste toner bottle is in the machine correctly. The waste toner sensor [B] detects when the bottle is almost full. When the bottle contains a set quantity of waste toner, the sensor turns off. The machine detects that the waste toner bottle is almost full. After that, the machine can print approximately 1250 more sheets. After printing 1250 sheets, the machine indicates Replace Waste Toner bottle after the end of the job. The printer cannot be used until the bottle is replaced or emptied. NOTE: The number of sheets is calculated for a paper size of A4/LT and an image coverage ratio for each color of 5%.

G104

6-42

SM

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.5.7 PCU DETECTION (DEVELOPMENT UNIT DETECTION)

[C]

[A]

[B]

G105D109.WMF

Unit Set Detection Pins


Each PCU has a connector [A]. The machine uses this to detect if the PCUs and development units are in the machine. Each PCU is detected through this connector when the drum positioning plate is closed.

New Unit Detection


Each PCU also has a circular hook [B]. The machine uses this to detect when a new PCU is installed. On a new unit, the hook holds up the terminal [C]. This hook turns a switch on, and the machine detects that the unit is new.
Detailed Descriptions

When the unit is driven for the first time, the hook turns and releases the terminal and the switch turns off. The hook cannot pick up the terminal again. Because of this, the machine detects that this PCU is not new.

SM

6-43

G104

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

Error Message PCU


When the machine cannot detect a PCU, it outputs the first message, Reset PCU Correctly, and the second message, Xxxxx; where Xxxxx is a color, for example Magenta. The operation panel shows the first message and then shows the second message, and then back to the first. Each message is shown for 3 seconds. If two or more PCUs are not detected, the second message shows those colors, for example Yellow/Cyan and Yellow/Magenta Black.

Reset PCU Correctly


G105D908.WMF

Magenta
G105D909.WMF

Yellow/Cyan
G105D910.WMF

Yellow/Magenta Black
G105D911.WMF

G104

6-44

SM

DEVELOPMENT

6.6 DEVELOPMENT
6.6.1 OVERVIEW
6 1 2

3 4 5
G105D102.WMF

1. Doctor blade 2. Developer hopper 3. Mixing coil (left)

4. TD sensor 5. Mixing coil (right) 6. Development roller

This machine has four development units, one for each color. The developer in each unit is supplied to the development roller by the two mixing coils. Electrostatic attraction moves the developer to the surface of the roller.
Detailed Descriptions

The drum positioning plate and the rear shaft set the photoconductor gap between the PCU and development roller. It is not adjustable in the field. The TD sensor detects toner density. Each development unit has a TD sensor. The diameter of the development roller is 18 mm (the circumference is approximately 56.5 mm).

SM

6-45

G104

DEVELOPMENT

6.6.2 DRIVE

[C] [B]

[A]

G105D108.WMF

The black development motor [A] drives the development roller and the photoconductor for black through gears and the development clutch [B]. The color development motor [C] drives the development unit for magenta, cyan, and yellow through gears. The machine only contains one development clutch, and it is only used for black.

G104

6-46

SM

DEVELOPMENT

6.6.3 DEVELOPER MIXING

[A]

[C] [B]
G105D107.WMF

The toner is supplied from the hopper [A]. Two mixing coils [B and C] move the developer forward and backward to mix the developer. Mixing occurs at the following times: Immediately after a new PCU is installed. During the process control self check During toner supply During development. Every 36 hours (can be changed with SP 3554 003) If absolute humidity changes more than 6 g/m3 (e.g. 23C/ 50% The humidity threshold can be changed with SP 3554 004.

27C/ 70%).
Detailed Descriptions G104

SM

6-47

DEVELOPMENT

6.6.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS


The high voltage supply board #2 supplies development bias to the development roller through the receptacle at the rear of each development unit. There are ac and dc bias voltages. The ac bias improves toner transfer to the drum. The machine automatically controls the dc bias, if automatic process control is enabled. However, if process control is turned off, (that is, if SP3-501-001 is set to 1), the dc bias is the value stored in SP2212-001 to 009 (do not adjust in the field unless told to do this).

G104

6-48

SM

DEVELOPMENT

6.6.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM


Overview
[A]

[B] [C] [G]

[D] [E]

[F]
G105D106.WMF

This machine uses four toner bottles [A]. Each bottle has a spiral groove [B] in it. The toner supply motor [F] turns the toner bottle (each bottle has a separate motor). When the toner supply drive-mechanism starts, the toner bottles turn and the groove moves toner to the mouth of the bottle. Here, toner spills into a hopper [C]. Mylar blades turn and move the toner to an opening in the side of the hopper and the toner falls into the development unit [D]. The quantity of toner that is added is controlled by the length of time that the toner supply mechanism turns.
Detailed Descriptions G104

Toner End Detection


Toner end sensors [E] detect toner end conditions ( 6.2.5).

6.6.6 TONER BOTTLE DETECTION


Each toner bottle is detected by connection to the memory ID chip connector [G].

SM

6-49

IMAGE TRANSFER

6.7 IMAGE TRANSFER


6.7.1 OVERVIEW
1 9 2 3

4 8

6
G105D111.WMF

1. Transfer belt 2. Belt transfer roller 3. Transfer belt drive roller 4. Transfer roller 5. Belt entrance roller

6. Transfer belt tension roller 7. Cleaning blade 8. Toner collection coil 9. Cleaning brush

The toner is attracted from the four OPC drums to the transfer belt by the belt transfer rollers. For a full color print, all four colors are moved from the PCUs to the transfer belt at the same time. The transfer roller then moves the four-color toner image from the transfer belt to the paper.

G104

6-50

SM

IMAGE TRANSFER

Transfer Unit Detection and New Unit Detection


[A]

[B]

G105D115.WMF

Transfer belt unit detection


The transfer belt unit is detected when the connector [A] is connected. The transfer belt rotation sensor [B] detects when the transfer belt entrance roller turns. It also detects the belt speed. To do this, it monitors the black and white stripes on the shaft. Changes in temperature have an effect on the transfer belt drive roller. This can cause changes in belt speed. Color registration errors occur if belt speed is not constant. The rotation sensor detects any speed change and the machine keeps the transfer belt speed constant. You can enable or disable this belt speed correction with SP 2153 8.

New transfer belt unit detection


The transfer belt rotation sensor has a fuse when the transfer belt unit is new. The fuse is blown when the machine is turned on. At this time, it is detected as a new unit. NOTE: The transfer belt unit is replaced as a maintenance item.

SM

6-51

G104

Detailed Descriptions

IMAGE TRANSFER

6.7.2 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE AND TRANSFER BELT ROLLER VOLTAGE

[C]

[A]

[D]
G105D112.WMF

[B]

The transfer belt motor [A] drives the transfer belt drive roller [B]. The belt tension roller [C] adds tension to the transfer belt to help turn the belt. The speed of the transfer belt drive is set by the process line speed. The belt transfer rollers [D] are charged from the terminal plates to transfer the toner from the PCUs to the transfer belt.

G104

6-52

SM

IMAGE TRANSFER

Transfer belt contact

[C]

[A]

[D]

[B]
G105D113.WMF

The transfer belt does not touch the color PCUs (cyan, magenta and yellow) when the machine makes a black and white print. The transfer belt contact motor [A] turns the CMY contact cam shaft [B] when the machine starts to make a color print. The CMY contact cam lifts the belt transfer roller unit for CMY [C] to the transfer belt. Because of this mechanism, the life of the transfer belt is longer (it is not necessary for the transfer belt to touch the color PCUs when the machine makes a black and white print). The transfer belt contact sensor [D] detects if the transfer roller unit for CMY touches the transfer belt. If it does not touch the transfer belt during color printing, the machine stops and shows SC 442.
Detailed Descriptions SM 6-53 G104

IMAGE TRANSFER

Transfer belt cleaning


[B] [A] [C]

[D] [F]

[E]

[G]
G105D114.WMF

[A] Cleaning brush [B] Seal [C] Transfer belt drive roller

[D] Transfer belt cleaning blade [E] Toner collection coil [F] Pressure spring

The transfer belt cleaning blade removes remaining toner from the transfer belt to prevent ghosting on the next print. This blade is included in the blade holder. The pressure spring applies pressure to the center of the blade holder. This blade gets constant pressure from the pressure spring. The toner collection coil moves the remaining toner to the waste toner bottle from its opening [G].

G104

6-54

SM

IMAGE TRANSFER

6.7.3 TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT


[G]

[F]

[E]

[A]

[D] [C]

[B]

G105D116.WMF

[A] Transfer roller [B] Registration roller [C] Transfer belt [D] OPC

[E] Belt transfer roller [F] Transfer belt drive roller [G] Discharge plate

Transfer from the belt


Detailed Descriptions

The belt transfer roller [E] is supplied a positive voltage, and this voltage pulls the toner from OPC [D] to the transfer belt. After all four layers of toner are transferred to the transfer belt [C], the registration roller [B] turns on and feeds the paper to the transfer roller [A]. Paper feed is timed to align the leading edge of the toner image on the belt at 4 mm from the leading edge of the paper. The paper moves at the same speed as the transfer belt.

Image transfer
Charged with a negative voltage, the transfer belt drive roller [F] pushes the toner from the transfer belt to the paper. This voltage is automatically corrected for ambient temperature and humidity, print speed, and paper type. To clean the transfer roller, positive and negative voltages are applied to the transfer belt drive roller to pull toner particles from the transfer roller to the belt. The belt-cleaning mechanism then removes this toner from the belt.

SM

6-55

G104

IMAGE TRANSFER

Discharge

[A]

G105D117.WMF

The discharge plate [A] removes remaining voltage from the printed paper. This is supplied with a positive voltage. As a result, the voltage is neutralized and paper separation from the transfer belt occurs.

G104

6-56

SM

IMAGE TRANSFER

Transfer roller contact


[A]

[E]

[F]

[D] [C]
G105D136.WMF

[B]

The transfer roller [A] is kept away from the transfer belt during the stand-by condition. When printing starts, the transfer roller contact motor [B] turns the cam shaft [C]. This shaft has two cams [D] and an actuator [E]. The two cams push the transfer roller contact levers, which in turn push the transfer roller against the transfer belt. The actuator turns on the transfer roller contact sensor [F] when the cam shaft turns. Then, the machine detects that the transfer roller touches the transfer belt.

SM

6-57

G104

Detailed Descriptions

FUSING

6.8 FUSING
6.8.1 OVERVIEW
3

12

11 10 9 8 7 6
7. Fusing belt 8. Heating roller 9. Heating lamp 10. Thermistor 11. New fusing unit detection fuse 12. Thermostat

G105D118.WMF

1. Fusing tension roller 2. Cleaning roller 3. Oil supply roller 4. Pressure lever 5. Pressure roller 6. Hot roller

For this model, a belt fusing system is used. This system has a faster warm-up time than a standard hot and pressure roller system. The heating roller is made of aluminum to increase the temperature of the fusing belt quickly. The hot roller is made of sponge, which becomes a little flat at the contact point of the pressure roller. This increases the fusing nip. This roller does not contain a heating lamp. The heating roller thermistor controls the temperature of the lamp. Each new fusing unit contains a fuse. A short time after a new fusing unit is installed, this fuse blows. When this occurs, the machine detects that a new fusing unit is installed. The oil supply roller supplies oil to the fusing belt through the oiling roller. This mechanism applies a constant thickness of oil to the fusing belt.
G104 6-58 SM

FUSING

6.8.2 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL


[G] [D] [C] [B] [A]

[E]

[F]

G105D948.WMF

The machine starts to warm up the fusing unit to reach the print ready condition. When the heating roller temperature gets to the idling temperature [A], the idling procedure starts to warm up the hot roller. The temperature becomes higher than the machine ready temperature [B] and reaches the print ready temperature [C] after the heating roller completes idling. The temperature increases to the target printing temperature. Then printing starts. If the temperature does not get to the target printing temperature before 30 seconds (SP 1104 022), printing starts. The temperature increases to the first print temperature [G] when the first sheet of paper is printed, but this is only for the first page. After the printing job, the machine turns off the heating roller to prevent overheating [F]. The fusing temperature settings can be adjusted.

Fusing roller idling


Fusing roller idle occurs at the following three times: Immediately after the power is turned on, or when the machine comes back from energy saver mode, if the fusing unit temperature is less than 100C. This is [E] on the diagram. This idling keeps the heating roller warmed up equally while it is heated. This temperature is controlled with SP 1912-005, and the durations of fusing idling are controlled with SP 1912-006, and 008 to 013 You can also adjust this with SP1912-002 and 1105-043 At the end of a job: [F] This prevents the heating rollers overheating. After printing, the machine turns the heating roller with no heating. You can adjust the setting with SP1912 007 At intervals of 4 hours if the machine is not used. This prevents deformation of the hot roller and pressure roller. Controlled by SP 1912-003 (interval) and 004 (duration)
SM 6-59 G104

Detailed Descriptions

FUSING

Enable/disable this idling feature: 1912-001 For fusing idling at the start of a job, the duration and the fusing unit temperature during idling are also corrected for ambient temperature. SP 1917 controls all the corrections. The temperature/humidity sensor measures the room temperature. Corrections are made if: Room temperature is below 18C (L threshold, controlled by SP 1917-008) Room temperature is above 30C (H threshold, controlled by SP 1917-007)

Idling ready temperature before first print job: [A]


This is the idling ready temperature for the heating roller before the first print job. You can adjust the setting with SP1912-005. The default is 100C. If the heating roller temperature does not reach this temperature within 15 seconds after the heating lamp turns on, SC 542 occurs.

Machine ready temperature: [B]


You can adjust the setting with SP1913-002. The default is 150C.

Print ready temperature: [C]


You can adjust the setting with SP1105-022. The default is 160C.

Target printing temperature: [D] This is adjusted by the value stored in SP1104-023. This value is added to the print ready temperature. The default is 5C. First print temperature: [G]
When the machine prints the first page, the heating roller temperature can quickly decrease. If necessary, you can increase the temperature for the first page. This is a good adjustment for cold environments. If fusing is not sufficient for the first page of a job, adjust these SPs: Temperature increase for the first page of a job: SP 1104-025 This value is added to the target printing temperature. The default is 0C. Duration for application of the temperature increase: SP 1104-026 The increase is applied if the interval between jobs is greater than these values: OHP, Thick paper, or 1200 x 1200 dpi: SP 1104-024 Other types of job: SP 1104-027

G104

6-60

SM

FUSING

Corrections for Small Paper Sizes (less than A5/LT)


These corrections prevent excess heating of the fusing unit when paper widths less than A5/LT are used. In multi-page printing with this size paper, the heating rollers temperature is not the same in all areas because the smaller size paper is less than the width of the heating roller. The temperature at the ends of the roller that do not touch the paper becomes higher than other points on the roller during multipage printing. The following corrections decrease this problem: Print speed: This is decreased after 15 pages. Then, 30 seconds after this, the print speed increases back to the standard speed again. You can adjust with SP 1911-001 to 003. Fusing temperature: This is decreased in three stages, as shown below. Decreased by 5C after 50 pages are printed (controlled by SP 1911-004 and 014) Decreased by 5C again after 50 more pages are printed (controlled by SP 1911-006 and 016) Decreased by 5C again after 50 more pages are printed (controlled by SP 1911-008 and 018) There are also temperature reductions for one-sided printing and two-sided printing. One sided printing: The temperature is decreased in two steps, as shown below After 15 pages, no reduction (controlled by SP 1911-021 and 023) After 15 more pages, decreased by 5C (controlled by SP 1911-022 and 024) Duplex printing: The temperature is decreased in two steps, as shown below After 15 pages, no reduction (controlled by SP 1911-025 and 027) After 15 more pages, decreased by 10C (controlled by SP 1911-026 and 028)

NOTE: 1) If the thermistor output is less than 0C for six seconds, SC541 occurs. 2) If the heating lamp gets full power for 8 seconds after the heating roller gets to the print ready temperature, SC545 occurs.

SM

6-61

G104

Detailed Descriptions

Overheat Protection If the heating roller temperature becomes higher than 230C, the CPU cuts off the power to the heating lamp and SC543 occurs. If 250C is detected, the thermostat opens, and the heating lamp power is cut off. SC545 occurs.

FUSING

6.8.3 DRIVE
[F] [A]

[E] [B]

[C]

[D]

G105D120.WMF

After the toner image is transferred to the paper [A], it passes through the fusing unit. The fusing unit contains the heating roller [B]. The heating lamp [C] applies heat to the heating roller. The heating roller applies heat to the fusing belt [D] to melt the toner on the paper. The paper receives pressure between the fusing belt and the pressure roller [E], and melted toner bonds to the paper. When the paper exits the fusing unit, it goes to the exit tray. The paper exit sensor [F] detects paper jams.

G104

6-62

SM

CONTROLLER

6.9 CONTROLLER
6.9.1 OVERVIEW
IEEE1394 I/F IEEE802.11b IEEE1284 I/F Bluetooth

Controller

PCI I/F Flash ROM 8 MB

PCI I/F

BUS

CPU

EEP ROM

Trumpet

Shaker
SD Slot #2, #3

FRAM 32KB

PHY

SDRAM DIMM I/F

IDE I/F

SD Slot #1

Engine I/F

NVRAM I/F

Network I/F

USB I/F

DDR SDRAM DIMM x 2

HDD

SD Card (Boot)

NV RAM Board 64KB


G105D920.WMF

The controller uses GW architecture. 1. CPU: PMC RM7035C (533MHz) 2. TRUMPET: GW architecture ASIC. It controls the interface with the CPU and controls these functions: memory, local bus interrupts, PCI bus, video data, HDD, SD card for booting and image processing. 3. SHAKER: IO control ASIC. It controls the network, operation panel, USB port, SD cards. 4. SDRAM DIMM (2 slots): 128 MB SDRAM (resident) Can be increased to 512 MB with two 256 MB SDRAM. 5. Flash ROM: 8 MB flash ROM programmed for the boot system. 6. SD card (Boot): The 32 MB SD card installed in the SD card slot #1 includes the program for system, network application, printer, PCL5c, PS3 and RPCS applications and internal printer fonts.
Detailed Descriptions

SM

6-63

G104

CONTROLLER

7. NVRAM: 32 KB FRAM for the printer parameters, logged data and a record of the number of pages printed for each User Code. 8. NVRAM board (option): 96MB NVRAM increases the number of User Codes form 100 to 500. 9. Network Interface: 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T 10. USB Interface: USB2.0 11. IEEE 1394 Interface (option): Firewire supports a data transfer speed of up to 400 Mbps. 12. IEEE 1284 Interface (option): This is the parallel printer port. 13. IEEE 802.11b (option): This lets you connect the printer to a wireless network. 14. Bluetooth (option): This lets you connect the printer to a Bluetooth network. 15. HDD (option): A 2.5 HDD (40 GB) can be connected using the IDE interface. 16. SD Card slots: Slots 1 to 3, numbered from right to left. Slot 1: Boot SD card Slot 2: Customers application (for example, PostScript 3) Slot 3: Service use (for example, firmware upgrade), customers application

G105S903.WMF

1) The system and application software for the following boards can be downloaded from SD cards connected to slot #3. Controller (Flash ROM and SD card for boot) EGB (Engine board) NOTE: See the Service Tables Firmware Update Procedure for details on downloading software from the SD card. 2) An SD Card programmed with an additional application can be installed in SD Card slot #2 or #3. Use slot 2 first. If an additional application cannot be merged onto the card on slot 2, then use slot 3 for that additional application. If possible, keep slot #3 empty for the firmware update.

G104

6-64

SM

CONTROLLER

6.9.2 BOARD LAYOUT


Engi I ne /F SD R A M D I M I x2 M /F

I E I (H D D ) D /F

A SI C (TR U M P ET)

NVRAM

C PU D I SW P

A SI C (S H A K ER )

Fl ash RO M

N etw ork I /F

U SB I /F

S D C ard I /F #3 P C II /F

S D C ard I /F #2

S D C ard I /F #1

P C II /F

LED
G105D922.WMF

DIP Switches: Factory use only. Keep DIP SW 1 ON and all other switches OFF.

SM

6-65

G104

Detailed Descriptions

SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration: Print Process: Printer Languages: Desktop Laser beam scanning & Electro photographic printing 4 drums tandem method RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream) PCL5c/e PCL-XL Adobe PostScript 3 PDF RPCS: 1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi PCL5c/e: 600 x 600 dpi 300 x 300 dpi PCL-XL: 1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi Adobe PostScript 3: 1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi PDF: 1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi 1 bit/256 gradations
Resolution 600 x 600 dpi 1200 x 600 dpi 1200 x 1200 dpi 600 x 600 dpi 1200 x 600 dpi 1200 x 1200 dpi Plain paper 25 ppm 25 ppm 12.5 ppm 25 ppm 25 ppm 12.5 ppm Thick/OHP 12.5 ppm 12.5 ppm 12.5 ppm 12.5 ppm 12.5 ppm 12.5 ppm

Resolution:

Gradation Printing speed:

Monochrome

Color

Resident Fonts:

Host Interfaces:

Ethernet (10/100 Base-TX): Standard USB2.0: Standard IEEE1394 (SCSI print, IP over 1394): Optional IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN): Optional Parallel (IEEE1284: Optional): Optional Bluetooth (Wireless): Optional

Network Protocols:
SM

TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk


7-1 G104

Specifications

PCL5c: 35 Manager Intelli fonts 10 TrueType fonts 1 Bitmap font Adobe PostScript 3: 136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)

SPECIFICATIONS

First Print Speed: Warm-up Time Print Paper Capacity: (80 g/m2, 20lb)

Color: 15 seconds or less (from tray 1) Black & White: 10 seconds or less (from tray 1) Less than 30 seconds (at 23C/50%) Standard tray: 550 sheets By-pass tray: 100 sheets Optional paper feed tray: 550 sheets (Refer to Supported Paper Sizes.)
Standard Tray By-pass Optional Tray

Print Paper Size:

Minimum Maximum A4 / B5 / 81/2" 11" / 81/2" x 14" (SEF) 90 x 148 mm 216 x 356 mm A4 / B5 / 81/2" x 11" / 81/2" x 14" (SEF)

Printing Paper Weight:

Standard tray, Optional paper tray, and bypass tray One-sided: 52-216 g/m2 (16-55 lb) Duplex: 60-157 g/m2 (16-43 b) Paper weight settings at printer driver and operation panel: Thin: 52 60.2 g/m2 Plain paper 1 (Plain): 60.2 90.2 g/m2 Plain paper 2 (Plain & Recycled): 90.2 104.7 g/m2 Thick paper 1: 104.7 157 g/m2 Thick paper 2: 157 216 g/m2

Output Paper Capacity: Memory: Power Source: Power Consumption:

Standard exit tray: 500 sheets (face down) Standard 128/ 256 MB, up to 512 MB with optional Memory Unit 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 11 A (for North America) 220 V - 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 6 A (for Europe/Asia)
120 V 990 W or less 6 W or less 220-240 V 1200 W or less 6 W or less

Maximum Energy Saver

Noise Emission: (Sound Power Level) Mainframe Only


Printing Stand-by 63 dB or less 40 dB or less

Full System
67 dB or less 40 dB or less

NOTE: The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO9296 at the operator position. Dimensions (W x D x H):446 x 589.5 x 487 mm (17.4" x 23.2" x 19.2") Weight:
G104

Less than 50 kg (110.3 lb.)


7-2 SM

SPECIFICATIONS

2. SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES


Paper A3 A4 SEF A4 LEF A5 SEF A5 LEF A6 SEF B4 SEF B5 SEF B5 LEF B6 SEF Ledger Letter SEF Letter LEF Legal SEF Half Letter SEF Executive SEF Executive LEF F SEF Foolscap SEF Folio SEF 8K 16K SEF 16K LEF Width Custom Length Postcard Double postal card Com10 Env. Monarch Env. C6 Env. C5 Env. DL Env. Size (W x L) 297 x 420 mm 210 x 297 mm 297 x 210 mm 148 x 210 mm 210 x 148 mm 105 x 148 mm 257 x 364 mm 182 x 257 mm 257 x 182 mm 128 x 182 mm 11" x 17" 8.5" x 11" 11" x 8.5" 8.5" x 14" 5.5" x 8.5" 7.25" x 10.5" 10.5" x 7.25" 8" x 13" 8.5" x 13" 8.25" x 13" 267 x 390 mm 195 x 267 mm 267 x 195 mm 70 x 216 mm *1 5.5" x 14" *2 14" ~ 900 mm 100 x 148 mm 200 x 148 mm 4.125" x 9.5" 3.875" x 7.5" 114 x 162 mm 162 x 229 mm 110 x 220 mm Main Tray NA N Y N Y# N Y# N Y# N Y# N Y N Y Y Y N Y# Y# Y# N Y# N Y# Y# N Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# E/A N Y N Y N Y N Y# N Y# N Y N Y Y# Y N Y# Y# Y# N Y# N Y# Y# N Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# PFU NA N Y N Y# N N N Y# N Y# N Y N Y Y Y N Y# Y# Y# N Y# N Y# Y# N N Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# E/A N Y N Y N N N Y# N Y# N Y N Y Y# Y N Y# Y# Y# N Y# N Y# Y# N N Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# By-pass Tray NA E/A N N Y Y N N Y# Y N N Y# Y N N Y# Y# N N Y# Y# N N Y Y# N N # Y Y# Y Y# Y Y# N N Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# N N # Y Y# N N # Y Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# # Y Y# # Y Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Dupl ex N Y N Y N Y N Y N Y N Y N Y Y Y N Y Y Y N Y N N N N N N N N N
Specifications

N N

*1: This size is only for the by-pass tray. The size for the main tray and OPU is 98 mm. *2: This size is only for the main tray and by-pass tray. The size for OPU is 148 mm.

Remarks:
Y Y# N Supported: the sensor detects the paper size. Supported: the user specifies the paper size. Not supported

SM

7-3

G104

SPECIFICATIONS

3. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer allows you to select which components to install.

3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS


Printer Language PCL 5c/6 PS3 RPCS Windows 95/98/ME Yes Yes Yes Windows NT4.0 Yes Yes Yes Windows 2000 Yes Yes Yes Windows XP Yes Yes Yes Macintosh No Yes No

NOTE: 1) The printer drivers for Windows NT 4.0 are only for the Intel x86 platform. There is no Windows NT 4.0 printer driver for the PowerPC, Alpha, or MIPS platforms. 2) The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows 2000, which uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each operating system is provided with the driver. 3) The PS3 driver for Macintosh supports Mac OS 7.6 or later versions.

3.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE


Software Font Manager 2000 (Win95/98/Me, NT4.0, 2000, XP, Server2003) Smart Device Monitor for Admin (Win95/98/Me, NT4.0, 2000, XP, Server2003) Smart Device Monitor for Cloant (Win95/98/Me, NT4.0, 2000, XP, Server2003) Description A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer

A printer management utility for network administrators. NIB setup utilities are also available.

A printer management utility for client users. A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP/IP network. A peer to peer print utility over a TCP/IP network. This provides the parallel printing and recovery printing features. Printer Utility for Mac This software provides several convenient functions for printing from Macintosh clients. (Mac) IEEE1394 Utility This utility solves problems with Windows 2000, XP, (Win2000, XP, Server2003) Server2003. DeskTopBinder V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite itself can be used as personal document (Win95/98, 2000, NT4, XP, management software and can manage both image data converted from paper documents and application files saved in Server2003) each clients PC.

G104

7-4

SM

SPECIFICATIONS

4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
Item Machine Code G104 Main Unit G105 Options Paper Feed Unit Internal Options 128 MB DIMM Memory 256 MB DIMM Memory NVRAM Memory IEEE1284 I/F Board IEEE1394 I/F Board IEEE802.11b Board Bluetooth Board HDD Type 4000 Network Data Protection Unit Type A G392 B584 G818 G395 B679 B581 G813 B736 G395 G820 No. Remarks Standard model (128 MB memory, no HDD) High specification model (256 MB memory, HDD standard) Up to two trays unit can be installed.

Used in common with model K-C2

NOTE: 1) Two of the IEEE1394, IEEE1284, IEEE802.11b, and Bluetooth can be installed at the same time.

SM

7-5

G104

Specifications

SPECIFICATIONS

5. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Paper Feed System: Paper Height Detection: Capacity: Paper Weight: Paper Size Power Source: Power Consumption: Dimension (W x D x H): Weight: Friction Pad 5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Near End and Empty) 550 sheets x 1 tray (80 g/m2, 20 lb) 52 to 216 g/m2 (14 to 58 lb) A4 / B5 / 81/2" x 11" / 81/2" x 14" (SEF) DC 24 V, 5 V (from the main frame) Less than 15 W 446 x 576 x 150 mm 8.5 kg (18 lb)

G104

7-6

SM

G160/G161

G160/G161
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................... 1-1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS....................................................... 1-1 1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT INSTALLATION ........................................................ 1-2

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ............................................... 2-1


2.1 USER REPLACEABLE ITEMS ............................................................. 2-1 2.2 SERVICE MAINTENANCE ................................................................... 2-2 2.2.1 RECOMMENDED CLEANING PROCEDURE ............................. 2-2

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT.................................... 3-1


3.1 BEFORE YOU START.......................................................................... 3-1 3.2 LASER OPTICS .................................................................................... 3-2 3.2.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS .................................................. 3-2 3.2.2 LD UNIT ....................................................................................... 3-2 3.3 FUSING ................................................................................................ 3-6 3.3.1 THERMISTOR AND THERMOSTAT ........................................... 3-6 3.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ............................................................. 3-9 3.4.1 CONTROLLER BOARD............................................................... 3-9 3.4.2 INSTALLING THE NEW NVRAM............................................... 3-10

4. TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................. 4-1
4.1 PROCESS CONTROL RESULTS......................................................... 4-1 4.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ............................................................. 4-3 4.2.1 SUMMARY................................................................................... 4-3 4.2.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS......................................................... 4-3 4.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE............................................................ 4-32 4.3.1 BLANK PRINT ........................................................................... 4-32 4.3.2 ALL-BLACK PRINT.................................................................... 4-32 4.3.3 MISSING CMY COLOR ............................................................. 4-32 4.3.4 LIGHT PRINT............................................................................. 4-33 4.3.5 REPEATED SPOTS OR LINES ON PRINTS ............................ 4-33 4.3.6 DARK VERTICAL LINE ON PRINTS ......................................... 4-34 4.3.7 WHITE HORIZONTAL LINES OR BANDS ................................ 4-34 4.3.8 MISSING PARTS OF IMAGES .................................................. 4-35 4.3.9 DIRTY BACKGROUND.............................................................. 4-35 4.3.10 PARTIAL CMY COLOR DOTS ................................................ 4-35 4.3.11 DARK IRREGULAR STREAKS ON PRINTS ........................... 4-35 4.3.12 CMY COLOR IRREGULAR STREAKS.................................... 4-35 4.3.13 GHOSTING.............................................................................. 4-36 4.3.14 UNFUSED OR PARTIALLY FUSED PRINTS.......................... 4-36 4.3.15 IMAGE SKEW.......................................................................... 4-36

SM

G160/G161

4.3.16 BACKGROUND STAIN............................................................ 4-36 4.3.17 NO PRINTING ON PAPER EDGE........................................... 4-37 4.3.18 IMAGE NOT CENTERED WHEN IT SHOULD BE .................. 4-37 4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ............................................ 4-38 4.4.1 SENSORS ................................................................................. 4-38 4.5 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS ............................................................. 4-42 4.5.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT ............................................................. 4-42 4.5.2 IOB............................................................................................. 4-42 4.6 LEDS................................................................................................... 4-43 4.6.1 CONTROLLER .......................................................................... 4-43

5. SERVICE TABLES .................................................................. 5-1


5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ............................................................... 5-1 5.1.1 SERVICE MODE OPERATION ................................................... 5-1 5.1.2 REMARKS ................................................................................... 5-2 5.1.3 BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING ................................................... 5-4 5.2 SERVICE MODE TABLE ...................................................................... 5-6 5.2.1 CONTROLLER SERVICE MODE ................................................ 5-6 5.2.2 ENGINE SERVICE MODE......................................................... 5-10 5.2.3 INPUT CHECK TABLE ............................................................ 5-159 5.2.4 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE ........................................................ 5-162 5.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE ....................................................................... 5-165 5.3.1 TYPES OF FIRMWARE........................................................... 5-165 5.3.2 PRECAUTIONS ....................................................................... 5-165 5.4 SD CARD APPLICATION MOVE...................................................... 5-166 5.4.1 OVERVIEW.............................................................................. 5-166 5.4.2 MOVE EXEC............................................................................ 5-166 5.4.3 UNDO EXEC............................................................................ 5-167 5.4.4 KEEPING THE SD CARD........................................................ 5-168

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS................................... 6-1


6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN .......................................................................... 6-1 6.2 OVERVIEW........................................................................................... 6-2 6.2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT .............................................................. 6-2 6.2.2 BOARD STRUCTURE ................................................................. 6-3 6.3 PROCESS CONTROL .......................................................................... 6-6 6.3.1 OVERVIEW.................................................................................. 6-6 6.3.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL............................................................... 6-6 6.3.3 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL....................................................... 6-9 6.3.4 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION ....................... 6-11 6.3.5 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION.................................................. 6-12 6.4 PAPER FEED ..................................................................................... 6-13 6.4.1 BY-PASS TRAY FEED AND SIZE DETECTION ....................... 6-13 6.5 LASER EXPOSURE ........................................................................... 6-14 6.5.1 LD SAFETY SWITCH ................................................................ 6-14 6.5.2 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT.......................... 6-15 6.6 FUSING .............................................................................................. 6-19

G160/G161

ii

SM

6.6.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................ 6-19 6.6.2 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL ....................................... 6-20 6.6.3 DRIVE ........................................................................................ 6-23 6.7 CONTROLLER.................................................................................... 6-24 6.7.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................ 6-24 6.7.2 BOARD LAYOUT....................................................................... 6-26

7. SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................... 7-1


7.1 SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................ 7-1 7.1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................... 7-1 7.1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES ...................................................... 7-4 7.1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES...................................................... 7-5 7.1.4 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ..................................................... 7-7

SM

iii

G160/G161

Read This First


Safety Notices
Important Safety Notices Prevention of Physical Injury
1. 2. 3. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the printer and peripherals, make sure that the printer power cord is unplugged. The wall outlet should be near the printer and easily accessible. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components. 4. The printer drives some of its components when it completes the warm-up period. Be careful to keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components as the printer starts operation. 5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the printer is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.

Health Safety Conditions


Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Immediately wash eyes with plenty of water. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.

Observance of Electrical Safety Standards


The printer and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer service representative who has completed the training course on those models.

Lithium Batteries
Incorrect replacement of lithium battery(s) on the EGB and controller board may pose risk of explosion. Replace only with the same type or with an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal


1. 2. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an open flame. Dispose of used toner, the maintenance unit which includes developer or the

organic photoconductor in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.) 3. 4. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.

LASER SAFETY
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.

Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Optics Housing Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes. CAUTION MARKING:

Symbols, Abbreviations, and Trademarks


Symbols and Abbreviations
This manual uses the symbols and abbreviations shown below.

Symbol Clip ring Screw Connector Clamp SEF LEF

Meaning Refer to section number

Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed

Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and /or other countries. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated. PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.

INSTALLATION

Installation Requirements

1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
The installation procedure for G160/G161 is the same as G104. For details, refer to the Quick Installation Guide for G160/G161.

SM

1-1

G160/G161

G160/G161

Optional Unit Installation

1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT INSTALLATION


The following options are available for this machine. Refer to the Hardware Guide for how to install these options: Paper Tray Unit (G392) HDD (G395) IEEE802.11b Interface Unit (Wireless LAN: G813) IEEE 1284 Interface Board (B679) Bluetooth Interface Unit (B826) Gigabit Ethernet Board (G874-01) VM Card (G874-08) USB Host Interface Unit (B825) Data Overwrite Security Unit (G874-21) PictBridge Interface (G874-19) 128 MB DIMM (B584) 256 MB DIMM (G818) NVRAM (User account enhancement: G395)

G160/G161

1-2

SM

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

User Replaceable Items

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2.1 USER REPLACEABLE ITEMS
The user replaces the following items if the service contract requires that the user does some of the PM. Item PCU Transfer Belt Unit Waste Toner Bottle Maintenance Kit Fusing Unit Transfer Roller Paper Feed Roller x 3 Friction Pad x 3 Dust Filter x 2 Chart: A4 (LT), 5% Mode: Continuously Printing Environment: Recommended temperature and humidity Yield changes depend on circumstances and print conditions An error message shows when a maintenance counter gets to the value in the PM table when the machines default settings are used. It is not necessary to reset counters for each part if the technician does the PM. The machine detects new components automatically and resets the necessary counters. 100 KP Remarks 50 KP (YMC, BK) 100 KP 50 KP

SM

2-1

G160/G161

G160/G161

Service Maintenance

2.2 SERVICE MAINTENANCE


2.2.1 RECOMMENDED CLEANING PROCEDURE
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Turn off the main switch. Remove the waste toner bottle. Remove the PCUs. Remove the transfer belt unit. Do not touch the transfer belt surface. Remove the fusing unit. Remove the standard paper tray. Clean the paper path. Clean all printer rollers with dry cloth only. Do not clean the transfer roller. 9. Use a blower brush to clean the laser unit windows. 10. Vacuum the interior of the printer. 11. Carefully clean the area around the transfer roller.

G160/G161

2-2

SM

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

Before You Start

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


3.1 BEFORE YOU START
This section shows the differences between G104 and G160/G161. For other items procedures, refer to the service manual for G104. Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before you perform the procedures in this section. Remove the following items before you perform removal procedures: 4 toner bottles (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) Waste toner bottle Standard paper tray

SM

3-1

G160/G161

G160/G161

Laser Optics

3.2 LASER OPTICS


Turn off the main power switch and unplug the printer before you perform the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.

3.2.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS


The caution decal is attached as shown below

Be sure to turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet before you perform any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit. This printer uses a class 3B laser beam with a wavelength of 655 nm and an output of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.

3.2.2 LD UNIT
Replacement
Print the SMC report with SP 5990 2 before you replace the LDU.

1.

Electrical board unit (see the Service Manual for G104: Electrical Components
3-2 SM

G160/G161

Laser Optics

Electrical Board Unit) 2. LDU [A]

Color Registration Adjustment


You must manually perform the color registration adjustment after you install the new LDU. When the polygon mirror motor or LDB unit is defective, only replace the defective parts. At this time, if only the motor is changed, it is not necessary to do this adjustment procedure. 1. 2. Print the SMC report with SP 5990 2 before you replace the LDU. Find the values for SP 2181 1, SP 2181 11, 2181 21, and 2181 31. Perform SP 2111 2 (Pro. Position Adj > Execute) to roughly adjust the line position after you install the new LDU. Result = OK shows on the LCD if this is done correctly. If not, do it again until you get OK. 3. Perform SP2111 3 (Skew Adjust. > Execute) to measure the skew values for each color. Result = OK shows on the LCD if this is done correctly. If not, do it again until you get OK. 4. Check the skew values with SP 2181: Then write down the values. (You can also check these if you print the SMC report again with SP 5990 2. The values will probably be different from the values on the report that you printed in step 1.) SP 2181 1 for black skew SP 2181 11 for magenta SP 2181 21 for cyan SP 2181 31 for yellow

5.

Open the left cover

SM

3-3

G160/G161

G160/G161

Laser Optics

6.

Adjust the skew adjustment cam [A] for each color with a screwdriver. You must adjust the skew values for each color until they are all the same as the value for magenta that you found in step 1, before you replaced the LDU. For example: If the new value for K (after step 4) is 300 and the old value for magenta (in step 1) is 250, you must adjust the skew for K until it is 250. Turn the cam as shown in the Cam Rotation Direction column below to increase the skew value. Turn it in the opposite direction from this to decrease the skew value. Adjustment value shows the change when you turn the cam one click. Cam Rotation Direction CW CW CCW CCW Adjustment Value 14 m 10 m 10 m 10 m

Color Yellow Cyan Magenta Black

The adjustment values in the table are not exact values. These are approximate values. CW: Clockwise, CCW: Counter-clockwise

The diagram shows the effect on line skew [B] when you turn the cam in a counter clockwise direction. 7. Close the left cover. Then measure the skew values again with SP 2111 3. (To do this, repeat step 3.) If these are close to the value for magenta that you found in step 1 (within one click in the above table), go to the next step. If not, do SP 2111 3 again until you get a

G160/G161

3-4

SM

Laser Optics

good result. 8. 9. Perform SP 2111 1 to finely adjust the line position for each color. Try SP 2111 2 if Result = OK does not show. When you get Result = OK, this adjustment is completed.

SM

3-5

G160/G161

G160/G161

Fusing

3.3 FUSING
Make sure that the fusing unit is cool before you touch it. The fusing unit can be very hot. Be sure to restore the insulators, shields, etc after you service the fusing unit.

3.3.1 THERMISTOR AND THERMOSTAT


1. 2. Front door Fusing unit (see the Service Manual for G104: Fusing Unit)

3.

Fusing unit guide plate [A] (

x 4)

4. 5.

Release the connector [B] from the fusing lower cover [C] (hook x 1). Fusing lower cover [C] ( x 2)

G160/G161

3-6

SM

Fusing

6.

Thermistor with bracket [D] (

x 2,

x 1)

Do not remove the thermistor from the bracket when removing it. The pressure of the thermistor plate to the fusing belt is adjusted properly in the factory. If you remove it, some image problem may occur.

7.

Fusing upper cover [E] (

x 4)

SM

3-7

G160/G161

G160/G161

Fusing

8.

Thermostat [F] x 2 (

x 3)

Do not recycle a thermostat that is already opened. Safety is not guaranteed if you do this.

G160/G161

3-8

SM

Electrical Components

3.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS


Before you replace the EGB (Engine Board), the controller, or the NVRAM, print out the SMC reports (SP Mode Data and Logging Data). After you replace the EGB (Engine Board) or the controller, remove the NVRAM from the old board and install it on the new board. If the NVRAM on the old board is defective, replace the NVRAM (see NVRAM Replacement Procedure).

3.4.1 CONTROLLER BOARD

1.

Controller unit [A] (

x 3)

2.

Controller unit cover [B] (

x 4)

SM

3-9

G160/G161

G160/G161

Electrical Components

3.

Controller board [C] (

x 7)

Remove the NVRAM from the old board. Then install it on the new board. Keep NVRAMs away from objects that can cause static electricity. The data in NVRAMs can be corrupted by static electricity. Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the board. A half-disk is engraved on one side of the NVRAM, and a guide mark is on one side of the NVRAM slot. When you install the NVRAM, the half-disk and the guide mark must be on the same side.

3.4.2 INSTALLING THE NEW NVRAM


When the NVRAM on the controller board is detective, you must replace the detective NVRAM with a new NVRAM. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Controller board (see Controller Board) Remove the defective NVRAM. Install the new NVRAM on the controller board. Reassemble the machine. Plug in and turn on the main power Set the date and time with the timer setting in the UP (Maintenance < Menu ) after installing a new controller board. If the date and time setting is not done, the WebImage Monitor will not be available.

G160/G161

3-10

SM

TROUBLESHOOTING

Process Control Results

4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 PROCESS CONTROL RESULTS
The table below lists the process control results shown in SP 3821. Number 10 21 22 31 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 90 99 Success ID sensor correction error ID sensor: LED adjustment error Charge bias correction error High Vmin (Bk), High K2 (Color) error Low K2 (Color) error High K5 error Low K5 error High development gamma Low development gamma Development bias adjustment error Development bias adjustment error No process control Not successful Result No error SC 400 SC 418 SC 300 to 307 SP 3145 (see the note below the table) SP 3146 (see the note below the table) SP 3147 (see the note below the table) SP 3147 (see the note below the table) Gamma > 5.0 (see the note below the table) Gamma < 0.5 (see the note below the table) Vk >150V (see the note below the table) Vk < -150V (see the note below the table) Interrupt during the process control (e.g. Door open)
G160/G161

Notes

This error code does not usually occur. If no problem is observed with image density and/or development gamma, nothing needs to be done. If an image problem such as low image density is observed, check the following points:

SM

4-1

G160/G161

Process Control Results

Transfer belt/PCU/ID sensor/Toner bottle The 8 numbers on the LCD in SP 3821 indicate the process control result for each color. There are two numbers for each color. The numbers are shown from left to right on the display as follows: Black, Magenta, Cyan, Yellow. For example, if process control for each color is successful: 10 (Black), 10 (Magenta), 10 (Cyan), 10 (Yellow)

G160/G161

4-2

SM

Service Call Conditions

4.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS


4.2.1 SUMMARY
1. 2. 3. All SCs are logged. If a PCB is suspected to be the cause of a problem, first disconnect then reconnect the connectors before you replace them. If a motor is suspected to be the cause of a problem,first check the mechanical load before you replace motors or sensors if the problem concerns a motor lock. There are 4 levels of service call conditions. Level A Definition To prevent damage to the machine, the main machine cannot be operated until a service representative has reset the SC. SCs that disable only the features that use the defective item. Although these SCs are not B shown to the user under normal conditions, they are displayed on the operation panel only when the defective feature is selected. C The SC history is updated. The machine can be operated as usual. Turning the main switch off then on resets SCs D displayed on the operation panel. These are redisplayed if the error occurs again. The SC will not be displayed. Only the SC history is updated. Turn the operation switch off and on. Turn the operation switch or main switch off and on. Reset Procedure Do SP 5810, and then turn the main power switch off and on.

4.2.2 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS


Remove the NVRAM from the old board and install it on the new one when you replace the EGB or the controller board. The SC level is indicated under SC number in the list below. The numbers (1, etc.) in the Possible Cause/Requirement Action column indicate the
G160/G161 4-3 G160/G161

required actions.

SM

Service Call Conditions

Engine SC
SC [Level] Symptom Incorrect serial number 195 [D] When checking the registered product number, it does not match the printers product number. 1. Registered product number does not match the printers product number. Ask your service key man. Possible Cause/Required Action

Polygon motor error: Time out with the polygon motor activated 202 [D] After the polygon motor turns on or changes the speed, SCRDY_N is not active within 10 seconds. Disconnected cable from the polygon motor drive board or defective connection Defective polygon motor or drive board

Polygon motor error: Time out with the polygon motor inactivated 203 [C] After the polygon motor turns off or changes the speed, SCRDY_N is not inactive within 10 seconds. Disconnected cable from the polygon motor drive board or defective connection Defective polygon motor or drive board

Polygon motor error: XSCRDY signal error PMRDY_N signal 204 [C] consecutively detects that the polygon motor is an inactive state while LDB unit scans. 1. 2. 3. Disconnected cable from the polygon motor drive board or defective connection Defective polygon motor or drive board Check the connectors. Replace the polygon motor. Replace the polygon motor drive board.

Polygon motor error: XSCRDY signal not stable PMRDY_N signal 205 [D] consecutively detects that the polygon motor is an inactive state while the polygon motor turns on or changes the speed. 210 [C] 1. 2. 3. Disconnected cable from the polygon motor drive board or defective connection Defective polygon motor or drive board. Check the connectors. Replace the polygon motor. Replace the polygon motor drive board.

Trailing edge laser detection error: [K] The laser synchronizing detection signal for LDB [K] Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection unit or defective

G160/G161

4-4

SM

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom of the trailing edge is not detected for one second after the LDB unit turned on when detecting the main scan magnification. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Possible Cause/Required Action connection Defective laser synchronizing detector Defective LDB Defective EGB Check the connectors. Replace the laser-synchronizing detector. Replace the LDB. Replace the EGB.

Trailing edge laser detection error: [Y] The laser synchronizing detection signal for LDB [Y] 211 [C] of the trailing edge is not detected for one second after Same as SC 210 the LDB unit turned on when detecting the main scan magnification. Trailing edge laser detection error: [M] The laser synchronizing detection signal for LDB [M] 212 [C] of the trailing edge is not detected for one second after Same as SC 210 the LDB unit turned on when detecting the main scan magnification. Trailing edge laser detection error: [C] The laser synchronizing detection signal for LDB [C] 213 [C] of the trailing edge is not detected for one second after Same as SC 210 detecting the main scan magnification.
G160/G161 4-5 G160/G161

the LDB unit turned on when

SM

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom

Possible Cause/Required Action

Laser Synchronizing Detection Error: LDB of the leading edge [K] Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection unit or defective The laser synchronizing detection signal for LDB [K] 220 [D] of the leading edge is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally. 3. 4. 1. 2. connection Defective laser synchronizing detector Defective LDB Defective EGB Check the connectors. Replace the laser-synchronizing detector. Replace the LDB. Replace the EGB.

Leading edge laser detection error: [Y] The laser synchronizing detection signal for LDB [Y] 222 [D] of the leading edge is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally. Leading edge laser detection error: [M] The laser synchronizing detection signal for LDB [M] 224 [D] of the leading edge is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally. Leading edge laser detection error: [C] 226 [D] The laser synchronizing detection signal for LDB [C] of the leading edge is not output for two seconds after Same as SC 221 Same as SC 221 Same as SC 221

G160/G161

4-6

SM

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally. FGATE: On error [K] The PFGATE ON signal

Possible Cause/Required Action

Defective connection between the controller board and EGB Defective cable between the EGB and LDB 1. 2. 3. Check the connectors. Replace the LDB. Replace the EGB.

230 [C]

does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for [K] starts. FGATE: Off error [K] The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after

Defective connection between the controller board and EGB Defective cable between the EGB and LDB 1. 2. 3. Check the connectors. Replace the LDB. Replace the EGB.

231 [C]

processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for [K] ends. The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts. FGATE: On error [Y] The PFGATE register of

232 [C]

GAVD does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for [Y] started. FGATE: Off error [Y] The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for [K] ends. Same as SC 231
G160/G161 4-7 G160/G161

Same as SC 230

233 [C]

SM

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts. FGATE: On error [M] The PFGATE register of

Possible Cause/Required Action

234 [C]

GAVD does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for [M] started. FGATE: Off error [M] The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after Same as SC 230

235 [C]

processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for Same as SC 231 [M] ends. The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts. FGATE: On error [C] The PFGATE register of

236 [C]

GAVD does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for [C] started. FGATE: Off error [C] The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 Same as SC 230

237 [C]

seconds after processing the image in Same as SC 231 normal job or MUSIC for [C] ends. The PFGATE ON signal

G160/G161

4-8

SM

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom still asserts when the next job starts. LDB error [K]

Possible Cause/Required Action

240 [D]

The EGB detects LDB error a few times consecutively when LDB unit turns on after 1. LDB initialization. LDB error [Y] Defective LDB Replace the LDB.

241 [D]

The EGB detects LDB error a few times consecutively when LDB unit turns on after LDB initialization. LDB error [M] Same as SC240

242 [D]

The EGB detects LDB error a few times consecutively when LDB unit turns on after LDB initialization. LDB error [C] Same as SC240

243 [D]

The EGB detects LDB error a few times consecutively when LDB unit turns on after LDB initialization. LDU shutter error Same as SC240

270 [D]

Sensor output does not change even if 1 second passes after the LDU shutter 1. motor is on.

Sensor defective or LDU shutter motor defective Replace the LDU shutter sensor or shutter motor.

High voltage power board: Charge voltage output error [K] 300 [D] The measured voltage is not proper when EGB measures the charge output for each color. 1. Defective charge roller Defective connectors Defective high voltage power 1 Check the connectors.
G160/G161 G160/G161

Disconnected harness

SM

4-9

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom 2. 3. 4.

Possible Cause/Required Action Replace the PCU for black. Replace the drum positioning plate. Replace the high voltage power 1.

High voltage power board: Charge voltage output error [M] Defective charge roller Defective connectors 301 [D] The measured voltage is not proper when EGB measures the charge output for each color. 1. 2. 3. 4. Disconnected harness Defective high voltage power 1 Check the connectors. Replace the PCU for magenta. Replace the drum positioning plate. Replace the high voltage power 1.

High voltage power board: Charge voltage output error [C] Defective charge roller Defective connectors 302 [D] The measured voltage is not proper when EGB measures the charge output for each color. 1. 2. 3. 4. Disconnected harness Defective high voltage power 1 Check the connectors. Replace the PCU for cyan. Replace the drum positioning plate. Replace the high voltage power 1.

High voltage power board: Charge voltage output error [Y] Defective charge roller Defective connectors 303 [D] The measured voltage is not proper when EGB measures the charge output for each color. 1. 2. 3. 4. 304 [D] Charge AC bias error [K] The charge current less than 200 A is detected. Defective charge roller Defective connectors Disconnected harness Defective high voltage power 1 Check the connectors. Replace the PCU for yellow. Replace the drum positioning plate. Replace the high voltage power 1.

G160/G161

4-10

SM

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom

Possible Cause/Required Action Disconnected harness Defective high voltage power 1 1. 2. 3. 4. Check the connectors. Replace the PCU for black. Replace the drum positioning plate. Replace the high voltage power 1.

Charge AC bias error [M] Defective charge roller Defective connectors 305 [D] Disconnected harness The charge current less than 200 A is detected. 1. 2. 3. 4. Charge AC bias error [C] Defective charge roller Defective connectors 306 [D] Disconnected harness The charge current less than 200 A is detected. 1. 2. 3. 4. Charge AC bias error [Y] Defective charge roller Defective connectors 307 [D] Disconnected harness The charge current less than 200 A is detected. 1. 2. 3. 4. Defective high voltage power 1 Check the connectors. Replace the drum positioning plate. Replace the high voltage power 1.
G160/G161

Defective high voltage power 1 Check the connectors. Replace the PCU for magenta. Replace the drum positioning plate. Replace the high voltage power 1.

Defective high voltage power 1 Check the connectors. Replace the PCU for cyan. Replace the drum positioning plate. Replace the high voltage power 1.

Replace the PCU for yellow.

SM

4-11

G160/G161

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom Color development motor error LOCK signal is not detected for more than two seconds while the

Possible Cause/Required Action

Color development motor slip due to the increase of the load torque 1. Adjust the load torque properly by replacing or cleaning the development unit. 2. Replace or repair the development motor if the load torque is normal.

325 [D]

motor START signal is on. LOCK signal is not cancelled within two seconds after the motor is off.

TD sensor: Output maximum error [K] 360 [D] Vt is more than the maximum value (4.5) for three times consecutively. 361 [D] 362 [D] 363 [D] 1. Defective connector connection Increasing toner density Replace the PCU.

TD sensor: Output maximum error [M] Same as SC 360 TD sensor: Output maximum error [C] Same as SC 360 TD sensor: Output maximum error [Y] Same as SC 360 TD sensor: Output minimum error [K]

364 [D]

Vt is less than the minimum value (0.5) for three times consecutively. 1.

Defective connector connection Decreasing toner density Replace the PCU.

365 [D] 366 [D] 367 [D] 368 [D]

TD sensor Output minimum error [M] Same as SC 364 TD sensor: Output minimum error [C] Same as SC 364 TD sensor: Output minimum error [Y] Same as SC 364 TD sensor: Initial control voltage error [K] Vt is less than 1 V even though the control power Defective connector connection Defective TD sensor

G160/G161

4-12

SM

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom voltage is adjusted to the maximum. Vt is more than 1 V even 1. though the control power voltage is adjusted to the minimum.

Possible Cause/Required Action The toner density in the developer is different from the initial condition. Replace the PCU.

369 [D] 370 [D] 371 [D]

TD sensor: Initial control voltage error [M] Same as SC 368 TD sensor: Initial control voltage error [C] Same as SC 368 TD sensor: Initial control voltage error [Y] Same as SC 368 TD sensor: Initial adjustment error [K]

372 [D]

Vt is not (A 0.2) when initial setting for TD sensor is executed. A = SP3011-001 for [K] 1.

Defective connector connection Defective TD sensor The toner density in the developer is different from the initial condition. Replace the PCU.

TD sensor: Initial adjustment error [M] 373 [D] Vt is not (A 0.2) when initial setting for TD sensor is executed. A = SP 3011 2 for [M] TD sensor: Initial adjustment error [C]: same as 372 374 [D] Vt is not (A 0.2) when initial setting for TD sensor is executed. A = SP 3011 3 for [C] TD sensor: Initial adjustment error [Y]: same as 372 375 [D] Vt is not (A 0.2) when initial executed. A = SP 3011 4 for [Y] Same as 372
G160/G161 G160/G161

Same as 372

Same as 372

setting for TD sensor is

SM

4-13

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom Drum gear position sensor error

Possible Cause/Required Action

380 [C]

When receiving the input signal of drum gear position sensor is not correctly done, SC380 is logged. Drum motor error [K] 1. 2.

Dirty or defective drum gear position sensor Clean the drum gear position sensor. Replace the drive unit.

OPC motor slip due to the excessive load The LOCK signal is not 396 [D] detected for 2 seconds more while the start signal of the drum motor for black PCU is output. 3. 4. 1. 2. Clean the PCU. Check the cable from the Black OPC/ Development motor. Replace it if necessary. Replace the EGB. Replace the Black OPC/Development motor. Drum motor error [CMY] The LOCK signal is not 397 [D] detected for 2 seconds more while the start signal of the drum motor for color PCU is output. ID sensor correction error 400 [D] Regular Vsp is not (4 0.5V) when ID sensor correction is executed. 1. Defective ID sensors Dirty ID sensors or transfer belt ID sensor life is over. Replace the ID sensors. Same as SC 396

ID sensor: LED adjustment error 418 [D] LED PWM adjustment is not [A] for three times consecutively. [A] = 50 < [A] < 400 442 [D] Transfer belt contact error The transfer belt contact sensor does not detect the Dirty transfer belt contact sensor Defective transfer belt contact motor 1. Defective ID sensors Dirty ID sensors or transfer belt ID sensor life is over. Replace the ID sensors.

G160/G161

4-14

SM

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom movement of actuator at the sensor while the polygon motor rotates. 1. 2. Transfer roller contact error

Possible Cause/Required Action Disconnected connector of transfer belt contact sensor or motor Disconnected cable Replace the transfer belt contact sensor. Replace the transfer belt contact motor.

Defective transfer roller contact sensor The transfer roller contact 452 [D] sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at the sensor while the polygon motor rotates. 1. 2. 3. Defective transfer roller contact motor Defective IOB Replace the transfer roller contact sensor. Replace the transfer roller contact motor. Replace the IOB.

High Voltage Power 1: High voltage output error One of the DC bias outputs for each PCU is shorted or one of the transfer belt bias outputs for [Y], [M] and [C]. Power leaking 490 [D] Error signal is detected for 10 times consecutively. Defective connection Disconnected cable Defective PCU Defective High Voltage Power 1 1. 2. 3. Replace the High Voltage Power 1. Reset the cables and components. Replace the PCU.

High Voltage Power 2: High voltage output error One of the separation bias output, 491 [D] development bias output and transfer belt 10 times consecutively. transfer belt bias output for [K] and transfer roller bias output is shorted. Power leaking
G160/G161

Error signal is detected for

cleaning bias output is shorted or one of the

SM

4-15

G160/G161

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom

Possible Cause/Required Action Defective connection Defective PCU Defective High Voltage Power 2 1. 2. 3. Replace the High Voltage Power 2. Reset the cables and components. Replace the PCU.

Paper feed / Fusing motor error LOCK signal is not detected for more than two seconds while the 531 [D] motor START signal is on. LOCK signal is not cancelled within two seconds after the motor is off. Fan motor error The fan motor On signal is not detected for the components below after the 532 [D] drum motor for black is set to On. PSU fan Fusing unit fan Polygon motor fan Drive unit fan Exit paper fan 541 [A] Thermistor error The thermistor output is less than 0 C for six seconds. Print ready temperature error The heating roller temperature increase Defective thermistor Thermistor coming off Disconnected thermistor Defective connector connection 1. Defective fan motor If the error occurs again, one of the fans is defective. Remove the covers, find the defective fan and replace it. 1. Defective paper feed/ fusing motor Replace the paper feed/ fusing motor.

542 [A]

G160/G161

4-16

SM

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom that is less than 67 degrees for 9 seconds is detected five times consecutively. The fusing temperature does not reach the print ready temperature within 15 seconds after the fusing lamp was controlled. High temperature detection: Software

Possible Cause/Required Action Incorrect power supply input at the main power socket Defective fusing lamp

543 [A]

The thermistor detects 230C for 0.2 seconds. High temperature detection: Hard

Defective thermistor Defective I/O board Defective EGB

Defective thermistor 544 [A] Defective I/O board The thermistor detects 250C. 1. 2. Heating lamp error The fusing lamp is 545 [A] full-powered for 8 seconds after the heating roller reaches the print ready temperature. Zero cross error The zero cross signal is 547 [D] detected three times even though the heater relay is off when turning 1. on the main power. 2. Defective fusing lamp relay Defective fusing lamp relay circuit Check the power supply source. Replace the PSU.
G160/G161 G160/G161

Defective EGB Defective fusing unit, PSU, or EGB Replace the fusing unit. Replace the PSU.

Deformed thermistor Thermistor coming off Defective fusing lamp

Unstable power supply

SM

4-17

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom The zero cross signal is not detected for three seconds even though the heater relay is on after turning on the main power or closing the front door. The detection error occurs twice or more in the ten zero cross signal detections. This error is defined when the detected zero cross signal is less than 17 for 200 ms. Zero cross frequency error The detection error occurs ten times in a row in ten zero cross signal detections. This error is defined when the detected zero cross signal is more than 28 for 200 ms. This SC is only logged. In this case, the power frequency is defined as 60 Hz. Continuous paper jam at Fusing unit The paper jam occurs three times consecutively at the 1.

Possible Cause/Required Action

557 [C]

Noise (high frequency) Check the power supply source.

559 [A]

fusing unit only when the SP 1159 1 is set to "1 (ON)". If not, this SP does not occur. The jam counter is cleared when a sheet of paper is fed 1. 2.

Defective fusing entrance sensor Defective EGB Replace the fusing entrance sensor. Replace the EGB.

G160/G161

4-18

SM

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level] normally.

Symptom

Possible Cause/Required Action

Controller board command error Loose connection Defective controller board 687 [D] A command from the controller board is not received. 2. 3. EGB data error 690 [D] The data transfer in the EGB is interrupted by some incident (e.g. cover open etc.) during the data transfer. 1. Defective EGB Replace the EGB. 1. Defective EGB Check the connection of the controller board. Replace the controller board. Replace the EGB.

Controller Error
The following table shows the controller error codes. These codes show at these times if an error occurs: Power-on After the power-on self diagnostic test Always try turning the main switch off and on and check if the problem persists. SC [Level] 636

Symptom SD Card Error Expanded authentication module error There is no expanded

Possible Cause/Required Action

No expanded authentication module Defective SD card No DESS module module. 2. Install the SD card.
G160/G161

-001 [B]

authentication module in the machine. The SD card or the file of the 1. expanded authentication module is broken.

Install the expanded authentication

SM

4-19

G160/G161

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom There is no DESS module in 3. the machine. Version error

Possible Cause/Required Action Install the DESS module.

-002 The version of the expanded [B] authentication module is not correct. Engine start-up error 670 [D] A command from the controller board is not received. Watchdog error 818 [B] While the system program is running, no other programs can run (due to a bus hold or 1. endless loop). 819 Kernel stop Process error 2. 1. 1.

Incorrect module version Install the correct file of the expanded authentication module.

Defective engine board. Replace the engine board.

Defective system program Defective controller board Reinstall the system program. Replace the controller board.

Defective RAM DIMM [0696e] [B] System completely down 1. 2. VM full error Defective RAM DIMM [0766d] [B] Unexpected system memory size 1. 2. [4361] Cache error Defective CPU 1. Replace the controller board. Defective controller Software error Check and/or replace the RAM DIMM. Replace the controller. Defective controller Software error Check and/or replace the RAM DIMM. Replace the controller.

[B] Cache error in the CPU [----] The others [B] Error in OS

Defective memory

G160/G161

4-20

SM

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom

Possible Cause/Required Action Defective flash memory Defective CPU 1. Replace the controller board.

820

Self-Diagnostic Error: CPU [0001-0015] [000A-000D]: Detailed error code During the boot monitor program and self-diagnostic, [B] any exception or cut-in are not supposed to happen. If these happen, it is defined as SC. [00FF]: Detailed error code Defective CPU [B] Cache access error in the CPU Defective local bus 1. 2. 3. Turn the main power switch off and on. Reinstall the system program. Replace the controller board. 1. 2. Defective CPU device Defective boot monitor program or self-diagnostic program Replace the controller board. Reinstall the system firmware.

[0601, 0602, 0605, 0606, 0607, 0609]: Detailed error code [B] Exceptional command does not operate even though it is executed on purpose. 1. Defective CPU devices Replace the controller board.

[B] [060A-060E]: Detailed error code Cut-in command does not operate when it is executed. [0610]: Detailed error code [B] Timer cut-in does not operate even though it is set. [0612]: Detailed error code Defective ASIC Cut-in in ASIC occurs. 1. cut-in. Replace the controller board.
G160/G161

Defective CPU devices Defective ASIC devices 1. Replace the controller board.

Defective CPU devices 1. Replace the controller board.

[B]

Defective devices in which ASIC detects

SM

4-21

G160/G161

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom [06FF]: Detailed error code

Possible Cause/Required Action

[B]

The pipeline clock frequency rate is different from the prescribed value. [0702]: Detailed error code The result when the program 1.

Defective CPU devices Mode bit data error, which is used for initializing CPU. Replace the controller board.

Insufficient CPU cache Insufficient memory process speed 1. 2. Replace the controller board. Replace the RAM DIMM.

[B] is executed in the command cache is different from desirable value.

[0709, 070A]: Detailed error code Even you write the data in the [B] only cache of memory, the data is actually written in another area (not cache) of memory. [B] An error occurs when checking the TLB. [B] The calculation error in the CPU occurs. 821 [0B00] [B] Self-Diagnostic Error: ASIC ASIC error The write-&-verify check error has occurred in the ASIC. ASIC not detected [0B06] [B] ASIC (controller board defective) The ASIC of the I/O is not detected. 1. [0B10] SHM register check error [B] Failed to initialize or could not Defective bus connection Poor connection between North Bridge and PCI I/F. Replace controller board. 1. Defective controller board Replace the controller. 1. 1. [4002-4005]: Detailed error code Defective CPU Replace the CPU. 1. 2. Defective CPU devices Incorrect SPD Boot mode setting error Replace the controller board. Replace the RAM DIMM.

[0801, 0804, 0807, 0808, 0809, 80A]: Detailed error code Defective CPU devices Replace the controller board.

G160/G161

4-22

SM

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom read connection bus. Data in SHM register incorrect. 1.

Possible Cause/Required Action Defective SHM Replace controller board

Timer error between ASIC and CPU The CPU checks if the ASIC timer works properly [0D05] compared with the CPU [B] timer. If the ASIC timer does not function in the specified range, this SC code is displayed. 822 Self-Diagnostic Error: HDD Timeout error/ [3004]: Command error Loose connection When the main switch is [3003] turned on or starting the [B] self-diagnostic, the HDD stays busy for the specified time or more. 823 Self-diagnostic Error: NIB MAC address check sum error [6101] [B] The result of the MAC address check sum does not match the check sum stored in ROM. PHY IC error [6104] The PHY IC on the controller [B] cannot be correctly recognized. PHY IC loop-back error [B] loop-back test for the PHY IC Same as SC823-[6101] on the controller.
G160/G161 G160/G161

System firmware problem Defective RAM-DIMM Defective controller Reinstall the controller system firmware. 1. 2. Replace the RAM-DIMM. Replace the controller board.

Defective HDD Defective controller 1. 2. 3. Check that the HDD is correctly connected to the controller. Replace the HDD. Replace the controller.

Defective controller 1. Replace the controller.

Same as SC823-[6101]

[6105] An error occurred during the

SM

4-23

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM

Possible Cause/Required Action

824 [B]

The controller cannot recognize the standard NVRAM installed or detects that the NVRAM is defective. 1.

NVRAM damaged or abnormal Backup battery has discharged NVRAM socket damaged Replace the NVRAM.

826

Self-diagnostic Error: RTC/Optional NVRAM Clock error An RTC device is recognized, and the difference between the RTC device and the CPU exceeds the defined limit. No RTC device is recognized. RTC not detected 1. RTC defective NVRAM without RTC installed Backup battery discharged Replace the NVRAM with another NVRAM with an RTC device.

[1501] [B]

[15FF] [B]

NVRAM without RTC installed The RTC device is not detected. Self-diagnostic Error: RAM Verification error 1. Backup battery discharged Replace the NVRAM with another NVRAM with an RTC device.

827

[0201] [B]

Error is detected during a write/verify check for the standard RAM (SDRAM DIMM). Resident memory error 1. 2.

Loose connection Defective SDRAM DIMM Defective controller Replace the SDRAM DIMM. Replace the controller.

[0202] The SPD values in all RAM [B] DIMM are incorrect or unreadable. 828 Self-diagnostic Error: ROM 1.

Defective RAM DIMM Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM Defective 12C bus Replace the RAM DIMM.

G160/G161

4-24

SM

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom Boost lap code error The boot monitor and OS program stored in the ROM DIMM is checked. If the check sum of the program is 1. incorrect, this SC code is displayed. ROMFS error All areas of the ROM DIMM 2.

Possible Cause/Required Action

[0101] [B]

Defective ROM DIMM Defective controller Replace the ROM DIMM. Replace the controller.

[0104] are checked. If the check [B] sum of all programs stored in the ROM DIMM is incorrect, this SC code is displayed. 829 1.

Defective ROM DIMM Replace the ROM DIMM.

Self-diagnostic Error: Optional RAM Verification error (Slot 1)

[0401] The data stored in the RAM [B] in Slot 1 does not match the data when reading. Composition error (Slot 1) The result of checking the [0402] composition data of the RAM in Slot 1 on the controller is incorrect. IEEE1394 interface error 851 [B] 1. 2. 1. 2.

Not specified RAM DIMM installed Defective RAM DIMM Replace the RAM DIMM. Replace the controller board.

Not specified RAM DIMM installed Defective RAM DIMM Replace the RAM DIMM. Replace the controller board.

Defective IEEE1394 The 1394 interface is unusable. 1. 2. Defective controller. Replace the IEEE1394 interface board. Replace the controller.

Wireless LAN or Bluetooth card not detected at starting communication [B] Bluetooth card is not detected before 1. 2. Check the connection. Insert the wireless LAN or Bluetooth
G160/G161

853

The wireless LAN or

Loose connection

SM

4-25

G160/G161

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom communication is established, though the wireless LAN or Bluetooth board is detected.

Possible Cause/Required Action card to its board.

Wireless LAN or Bluetooth card not detected during operation The wireless LAN or 854 [B] Bluetooth card is not detected after communication 1. is established, though the wireless LAN or Bluetooth board is detected. Wireless LAN or Bluetooth card error Loose connection 855 [B] An error is detected in the wireless LAN or Bluetooth card. 1. 2. Defective wireless LAN or Bluetooth card Check the connection. Replace the wireless LAN or Bluetooth card. Wireless LAN or Bluetooth board error Defective wireless LAN or Bluetooth board 856 [B] An error is detected in the wireless LAN or Bluetooth board. USB interface error 857 [B] Defective USB driver The USB interface cannot be used due to a driver error. HDD: Initialization error 860 [B] HDD not initialized The controller detects that the hard disk fails. 1. 2. Defective HDD Reformat the HDD (SP5832). Replace the HDD. 1. 2. Loose connection Check the connection. Replace the controller. 1. 2. Loose connection Check the connection. Replace the wireless LAN or Bluetooth board. 2. Loose connection Check the connection. Insert the wireless LAN or Bluetooth card to its board.

G160/G161

4-26

SM

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom HDD: Reboot error

Possible Cause/Required Action

Loose connection Defective cables 861 [D] The HDD does not become ready within 30 seconds after the power is supplied to the HDD. 1. 2. 3. 4. HDD: Read error 863 [D] Defective HDD The data stored in the HDD cannot be read correctly. HDD: CRC error 864 [D] While reading data from the HDD or storing data in the HDD, data transmission fails. HDD: Access error 865 [D] An error other than SC863 and SC864 is detected while operating the HDD. 866 [B] SD card authentication error A correct license is not found in the SD card. SD card error 867 [D] The SD card for an application is ejected from the slot. 868 [D] 1. The SD card for an application is ejected from the slot. Install the SD card.
G160/G161 G160/G161

Defective HDD Defective controller Check the connection between the HDD and controller. Check and replace the cables. Replace the HDD. Replace the controller.

Defective controller 1. 2. Replace the HDD. Replace the controller.

Defective HDD 1. Replace the HDD.

Defective HDD 1. Replace the HDD.

SD-card data is corrupted. 1. Store correct data in the SD card.

SD card access error [File system error, Device error] SD card error occurs when SD card is activated. Defective SD card Defective SD card controller

SM

4-27

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom 1. 2. 3. 4. Address data error

Possible Cause/Required Action For a file system error, format the SD card on your PC. For a device error, turn the mains switch off and on. Replace the SD card. Replace the controller.

Defective software program Defective HDD 870 [B] An error is detected in the data copied to the address book over a network. Incorrect path to the sever 1. 2. 3. HDD mail data error 872 [B] An error is detected in the mail receiving data area of the HDD at machine initialization. HDD mail transfer error 873 [B] An error is detected in the mail transmitting data area of the HDD at machine initialization. Delete All error 1: HDD An error is detected while the 874 [D] all data of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted physically by the Data Overwrite Security Unit (B735). 875 Delete All error 2: Data area 2. 1. Not installed Data Overwrite Security Unit (SD card) Defective HDD Install the Data Overwrite Security Unit (B735). Replace the HDD. 1. 2. Defective HDD Power failure during an access to the HDD Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-001). Replace the HDD. 1. 2. Defective HDD Power failure during an access to the HDD Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-001). Replace the HDD. Initialize the address book data (SP5846-50). Initialize the user information (format the hard disk with SP5832). Replace the HDD.

G160/G161

4-28

SM

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level] [D]

Symptom An error is detected while the all data of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted logically by the Data Overwrite Security Unit (B735). 1.

Possible Cause/Required Action

The logical format for HDD fails. Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again.

876

Log Data Error Log Data Error 1 001 [D] 1. 002 [D] 1. 2. 003 [D] 1. 2. 004 [D] An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine operation. This can be caused by switching the machine off while it is operating. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004. Log Data Error 2 The DESS module is not installed when the DESS module is set to ON. Replace the DESS module. Turn off the DESS module function.

Log Data Error 3 Invalid encryption key log due to defective NVRAM data Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004. Disable the log encryption setting.

Log Data Error 4 Unusual encryption function log due to the defective NVRAM data 1. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004. Log Data Error 5

005 [D] 1. 2. 099 [D]

NVRAM or HDD, which is used in other machine, is installed. Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.

Log Data Error 99 Other than above causes 1. Ask your supervisor.
G160/G161 G160/G161

877 [B]

HDD Data Overwrite Security SD card error The all delete cannot be executed even though the Defective SD card (B735) Not installed SD card (B735)

SM

4-29

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level]

Symptom Data Overwrite Security Unit 1. (B735) is installed and activated. Electric counter error 2.

Possible Cause/Required Action Replace the NVRAM and then install the new SD card (B735). Check and reinstall the SD card (B735).

Defective NVRAM Defective controller 900 [D] Abnormal data is stored in the counters. 1. 2. 3. 4. Printer function error 920 [B] The error that causes the malfunction in the software application is detected. Printer font error 921 [B] No font is detected in the machines that have the font in the SD card when the printer application is run. Software performance error 1 Defective software 990 [D] Defective controller The software makes an unexpected operation. 1. 2. Software performance error 2 991 [C] Unexpected software error detected, which does not affect operation of the machine The machine does not stop and the SC code is not displayed. The machine automatically recovers. However, the SC code is logged in the engine summary sheet (SMC). Software error Reinstall the controller and/or engine main firmware. See the Note at the end of the SC table. Install the System, Printer Application, NIB, and Web System firmware. Turn the main switch off/on, or install Printer Application firmware Unexpected hardware structure (insufficient memory or hard disk space.) Turn the main switch off and on. Check the connection between the NVRAM and controller. Replace the NVRAM. Replace the controller.

G160/G161

4-30

SM

Service Call Conditions

SC [Level] 992 [D]

Symptom SC not defined SC that is not controlled in the system occurs. Application start error

Possible Cause/Required Action

Defective system software

Loose connection of RAM, DIMM and SD card in slot 1 998 [D] No applications start within 60 seconds after the power is turned on. 1. 2. 3. Defective controller Software problem Check if the RAM, DIMM and SD card in slot 1 are properly connected. Reinstall the controller system firmware. Replace the controller.

If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file), the problem may be caused by a software error. In this case, the following data and information needs to be sent back to your product specialist. Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken Summary sheet (SP mode 1 Service/Printer SP, SP 1004 [Print Summary]) SMC - All (SP 5990 2) SMC - Logging (SP 5990 4) Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the problem is logged.) Image file which causes the problem, if possible

SM

4-31

G160/G161

G160/G161

Troubleshooting Guide

4.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE


Remove the NVRAM from the original engine control board and install it on the new one when you replace the engine control board.

4.3.1 BLANK PRINT


Symptom Possible cause Defective LDU Defective PCU Defective transfer belt unit Incorrect action of transfer No image is printed. roller board Defective engine board (EGB) Necessary actions Replace the LDU. Replace the PCU. Replace the transfer belt unit. Check the guide and the transfer roller. board 1 or 2. Replace the engine board (EGB).

Defective high voltage supply Replace high voltage supply

4.3.2 ALL-BLACK PRINT


Symptom Possible cause Incorrectly installed PCU Defective PCU board Defective LDU Defective engine board (EGB) Defective main board Necessary actions Install the PCU correctly. Replace the PCU. board 1 or 2. Replace the LDU. Replace the engine board (EGB). Replace the main board.

Defective high voltage supply Replace high voltage supply All the paper is black.

4.3.3 MISSING CMY COLOR


Symptom C, M, or Y is missing. Possible cause Defective PCU Loose connection between printer cartridge and engine Necessary actions Replace the PCU. Replace the drum positioning cover. (See Replacement and

G160/G161

4-32

SM

Troubleshooting Guide

Symptom

Possible cause board (EGB)

Necessary actions Adjustment Electrical Components Electrical Board Unit.)

Transfer belt not contacting PCU Defective the color OPC motor Defective engine board (EGB)

Check the belt tension unit. Replace the color OPC motor. Replace the engine board (EGB).

4.3.4 LIGHT PRINT


Symptom Possible cause Loose connection between transfer roller and high voltage supply unit Dust in the laser beam path Printed images are too weak. Transfer belt not contacting PCU Defective PCU Defective transfer roller Defective fusing unit Defective engine board (EGB) Necessary actions Check the connection between the transfer roller and the high voltage supply unit. Clean the laser beam path. Check the transfer unit. Replace the PCU. Repair the transfer roller. Replace the fusing unit. Replace the engine board (EGB).

4.3.5 REPEATED SPOTS OR LINES ON PRINTS


The same spots or lines appear at regular intervals. Interval At intervals of 35.0 mm (1.38 inches) inches) Possible cause Defective charge roller Necessary actions Replace the PCU. Replace the PCU. Replace the transfer belt
G160/G161

At intervals of 35.8 mm (1.41 Defective OPC cleaning brush roller At intervals of 40.5 mm (1.59 Defective belt entrance roller

SM

4-33

G160/G161

Troubleshooting Guide

Interval inches) At intervals of 41.1 mm (1.62 inches) At intervals of 47.1 mm (1.86 inches) At intervals of 56.5 mm (2.23 inches) At intervals of 72.8 mm (2.87 inches) inches) At intervals of 82.5 mm (3.25 inches) inches) At intervals of 141.4 mm (5.57 inches)

Possible cause unit. Defective belt transfer roller Defective toner mixing auger Defective development roller Defective belt tension roller

Necessary actions

Replace the transfer belt unit. Replace the PCU. Replace the PCU Replace the transfer belt unit. Replace the transfer belt unit. Replace the transfer roller. Replace the PCU or the fusing unit Replace the fusing unit.

At intervals of 82.2 mm (3.24 Defective transfer belt drive roller Defective transfer roller

At intervals of 94.2 mm (3.71 Defective OPC drum or pressure roller Defective fusing belt

4.3.6 DARK VERTICAL LINE ON PRINTS


Symptom . A dark line appears. The line is parallel to the paper feed direction of one CMY color. A dark line appears. The line is Dust in the laser beam path parallel to the paper feed direction of any color (not C, M, or Y). Defective transfer belt unit Defective fusing unit Clean the laser beam path. Replace the transfer belt unit. Replace the fusing unit. Defective PCU Replace the PCU. Possible cause Necessary actions

4.3.7 WHITE HORIZONTAL LINES OR BANDS


Symptom White lines or bands appear in images of all toner colors. Possible cause Defective PCU Defective transfer belt unit Necessary actions Replace the PCU. Replace the transfer belt unit.

G160/G161

4-34

SM

Troubleshooting Guide

Symptom

Possible cause Defective transfer roller

Necessary actions Replace the transfer roller.

4.3.8 MISSING PARTS OF IMAGES


Symptom Possible cause Defective PCU Some parts of images are missing. Defective transfer belt unit Defective transfer roller Defective fusing unit Necessary actions Replace the PCU. Replace the transfer belt unit. Replace the transfer roller. Replace the fusing unit.

4.3.9 DIRTY BACKGROUND


Symptom Backgrounds of one CMYK color are too dense. Backgrounds of more than one CMYK are too dense.color Possible cause Defective PCU Necessary actions Replace the PCU.

Defective high voltage supply Replace the high voltage board supply board (1 or 2).

4.3.10 PARTIAL CMY COLOR DOTS


Symptom color appear at irregular intervals. Possible cause Necessary actions Replace the PCU. Replace the transfer belt unit. Replace the fusing unit. Unexpected dots of the same Defective PCU Defective transfer belt unit Defective fusing unit

4.3.11 DARK IRREGULAR STREAKS ON PRINTS


Symptom Unexpected streaks appear at irregular intervals. Possible cause Defective transfer belt Necessary actions Replace the transfer belt unit.

4.3.12 CMY COLOR IRREGULAR STREAKS


Symptom Unexpected streaks of the Possible cause Defective PCU Necessary actions Replace the PCU.
G160/G161

SM

4-35

G160/G161

Troubleshooting Guide

Symptom same color appear at irregular intervals.

Possible cause Defective transfer belt unit

Necessary actions Replace the transfer belt unit.

4.3.13 GHOSTING
Symptom The same or similar image appears two or more times. They get weaker and weaker. Possible cause Defective PCU Defective transfer unit Necessary actions Replace the PCU. Replace the transfer unit.

4.3.14 UNFUSED OR PARTIALLY FUSED PRINTS


Symptom Some parts of images are not fused very well. Possible cause Non-standard paper in use Incorrect media type mode Defective fusing unit Necessary actions Use recommended paper. Select an appropriate media mode. Replace the fusing unit.

4.3.15 IMAGE SKEW


Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Incorrect installation of paper Install the paper correctly. Incorrect paper guide position Defective registration roller Incorrect action of transfer Images are skewed roller Defective engine board (EGB) Unclean separation pad Defective spring Adjust the paper guide correctly. Repair the paper feed unit. Check the transfer roller. Replace the engine board (EGB). Clean the separation pad. Replace the spring for the friction pad.

4.3.16 BACKGROUND STAIN


Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions

G160/G161

4-36

SM

Troubleshooting Guide

Symptom

Possible cause Unclean transfer roller

Necessary actions Clean the transfer roller. Clean the paper path. Clean the registration roller. Clean the fusing unit exit. Replace the fusing unit.

The reverse side of the paper is not clean.

Unclean paper path Unclean registration roller Unclean fusing unit exit Defective fusing unit

4.3.17 NO PRINTING ON PAPER EDGE


Symptom Possible cause Defective PCU Images are not printed in the Defective toner cartridge areas around the paper edges. Defective transfer belt unit Transfer belt not contacting PCU Necessary actions Replace the PCU. Replace the toner cartridge. Replace the transfer belt unit. Check the transfer unit.

4.3.18 IMAGE NOT CENTERED WHEN IT SHOULD BE


Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions Incorrect installation of paper Install the paper correctly. Images do not come to the center. Incorrect paper guide position Incorrect margin setting Defective engine control board Adjust the paper guide correctly. Adjust the margin setting. Replace the engine control board.

SM

4-37

G160/G161

G160/G161

Electrical Component Defects

4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS


4.4.1 SENSORS
No. 1 Sensor Name/ Sensor Board Name Color Drum Gear Position Sensor Black Drum Gear Position Sensor Toner End Sensor (K) 3 Toner End Sensor (M) Toner End Sensor (C) Toner End Sensor (Y) Transfer Belt Contact Sensor Transfer Roller Contact Sensor TD Sensor (K) 6 TD Sensor (M) TD Sensor (C) TD Sensor (Y) A L Active H CN No./ Pin No. CN222/2 Condition Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Symptom SC380

CN222/5

SC380 Toner end cannot be detected. Toner end is detected even if there is enough toner.

CN222/8 CN230/13 CN230/26 CN230/29

Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open

CN222/11

SC442

CN222/14 CN222/20 CN225/4 CN230/4 CN230/20

SC452 SC368 (K) SC369 (M) SC370 (C) SC371 (Y) Automatic line position adjustment error: Transfer belt unit

Transfer Belt Rotation

CN222/27

Shorted

speed cannot be detected, causing image skew. Close Front/Left Cover is displayed. Front cover open cannot be detected. Waste Toner near full is indicated.

Open 10 Front Door Sensor H CN206/1 Shorted 11 Waste Toner Overflow Sensor H CN230/10 Open

G160/G161

4-38

SM

Electrical Component Defects

No.

Sensor Name/ Sensor Board Name

Active

CN No./ Pin No.

Condition

Symptom Waste toner full

Shorted

cannot be detected even if the waste toner bottle is full. Close Front/Left Cover is displayed. Left cover open cannot be detected. Printed image is wrong, such as rough image, dirty background or weak image.

Open 12 Left Cover Sensor H C230/15 Shorted Open 13 Temperature/Humidity Sensor A A CN231/1 CN231/3 Shorted

CN214/17 14 Paper Size Sensor L CN214/15 CN214/14 CN214/13

Open Shorted Paper size error

Paper jam is not Open 15 Fusing Entrance Sensor L CN213/6 Shorted detected even if there is paper Paper jam is detected even if there is no paper. Paper jam is not Open 16 Duplex Jam Sensor 1 L CN213/1 Shorted detected even if there is paper Paper jam is detected even if the there is no paper. Paper jam is not 17 Duplex Jam Sensor 2 L CN213/3 is paper Short Paper jam is detected
G160/G161

Open

detected even if there

SM

4-39

G160/G161

Electrical Component Defects

No.

Sensor Name/ Sensor Board Name

Active

CN No./ Pin No.

Condition

Symptom even if the there is no paper. Paper is not detected on the by-pass tray Paper is detected even if there is no paper on the by-pass tray.

Open 18 By-pass Paper Detection Sensor L CN211/22 Shorted

CN211/17 19 By-pass Paper Size Sensor L CN211/16 CN211/20 CN211/19 20 Inverter Sensor L CN211/2

Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Paper size error

Paper jam Z

21

Fusing Exit Sensor

CN210/13

Paper jam A The paper overflow message is not displayed even when a paper overflow condition exists, causing paper jam. The paper overflow message is displayed. Paper Jam A

22

Paper Overflow Sensor

Open L CN210/10

Shorted 23 Paper Exit Sensor L CN210/7 Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open Shorted Open

24

ID Sensors

CN209

SC400/418

25

Fusing Thermistor

A L L H

CN209/1 CN209/3 CN209/4 CN208/2

SC541 Reset Fusing Unit correctly is displayed. Close Top Cover is


SM

26 27

Fusing Set Sensor Top Cover Sensor

G160/G161

4-40

Electrical Component Defects

No.

Sensor Name/ Sensor Board Name

Active

CN No./ Pin No.

Condition

Symptom displayed.

Shorted 28 LDU Shutter Sensor H CN207/17 Open Shorted Open Shorted Open 30 Paper Width Sensor H CN207/11 Shorted Paper Height Sensor 1/2 CN207/5 CN207/8 Open Shorted

Top cover open cannot be detected. SC270

29

Registration Sensor

CN207/14

Paper Jam A Always, small paper is detected, causing slow printing. Small paper size is not detected. Remaining paper volume is wrong on Web Image Monitor. Paper end is detected even if paper is placed in the paper tray. Paper end is not detected even if there

31

Open

32

Paper End Sensor

CN2072 Shorted

is no paper in the paper tray, causing a paper jam.

SM

4-41

G160/G161

G160/G161

Blown Fuse Conditions

4.5 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS


4.5.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
Fuse FU1 FU2 FU3 FU4 FU5 FU6 Rating 115V 15A/125V 8A/125V 1A/250V 4A/250V 6.3A/250V 6.3A/250V 220V-240V 8A/250V 4A/250V 1A/250V 4A/250V 6.3A/250V 6.3A/250V Symptom when turning on the main switch No response. No response. Tray Heater does not turn on. No display. SC270 is displayed. SC270 is displayed.

4.5.2 IOB
Fuse FU1 FU2 FU3 1A 3.15A 3.15A Rating Symptom when turning on the main switch SC270 is displayed. Toners are not supplied. Optional Paper Tray Unit dose not work.

G160/G161

4-42

SM

LEDs

4.6 LEDS
4.6.1 CONTROLLER
Number LED 1 LED 2 Normal Off Blinking Controller software download Blinking Blinking Off Lit or Off Error

SM

4-43

G160/G161

G160/G161

SERVICE TABLES

Service Program Mode

5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Before accessing the service menu, do the following: 1. 2. Confirm that there is no print data in the printer buffer (the Data In LED must not be lit or blinking). If there is some data in the buffer, wait until all data has been printed. This machine has SSP mode, which is restricted for supervisor use only. However, most of them are also used for the factory adjustments. Do not change those SSP settings unless it is indicated to do so by the service manual.

5.1.1 SERVICE MODE OPERATION


The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only, so that they can properly maintain product quality. If this mode is used by anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be deleted or settings might be changed. In such case, product quality cannot be guaranteed.

Entering the Service Mode

If you switch the machine off, any jobs stored on the hard disk using the sample print or protected print features will be deleted. Check with the user tools first to see if there are any jobs stored with these features (Menu key - Sample Print, or Protected Print).
G160/G161

SM

5-1

G160/G161

Service Program Mode

Method: Press the Up/Down arrow keys together for about 5 seconds, and then press the OK key. SYSTEMver x.xx/ 1. Service appears on the display. The machine automatically goes off line when you enter the service mode.

Accessing the Required Program


Use the Up/Down arrow keys to scroll through the menu listing. 1. 2. 3. Service: Controller service modes Engine: Engine service modes End: Exit service mode keys.

To select an item, press the OK key. Then the sub-menu shows. Scroll through the sub menu items using the To go back to a higher level, press the Escape key.

Inputting a Value or Setting for a Service Program


Enter the required program mode as explained above. The setting appearing on the display is the current setting. Select the required setting using the keys, then press the OK key. The previous value remains if the OK key is not pressed.

Exiting Service Mode


Select End from the service mode main menu, then press the OK key. To make the settings effective, turn the main switch off and on after exiting service mode.

5.1.2 REMARKS
Display on the Control Panel Screen
Since the maximum number of characters which can be displayed on the control panel screen is limited (12 or 17 characters), the description of SP modes displayed on the screen needs to be abbreviated. The following are the major abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full description is over 12 or 17 characters. 1. Paper Type N: Plain paper 1, N2 or Normal 2: Plain paper 2 (plain & recycled) TC: Thick paper, Thick 1: Thick paper 1, Thick 2: Thick paper 2 TN: Thin paper SP: Special paper 2. Color Mode [Color]
G160/G161 5-2 SM

Service Program Mode

[K]: Black in B&W mode [Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode [YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan [FC], [Cl]: Full Color mode [FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full color mode 3. Process Speed LS: Low speed xx RS: Regular speed xxx HS: High speed xxx As shown in the following table, the process speed (mm/s) depends on the print mode (B&W or Color), resolution, and/or type of paper selected. Some SP mode settings depend on the process speed. Line speed (mm/s) G160 155 77.5 155 77.5 77.5 G161 182 91 91 91 91 Print speed (ppm) G160 25 12.5 25 12.5 12.5 G161 30 15 30 15 15

Mode

Resolution (dpi) 600 x 600

B/W

1,200 x 600 1,200 x 1,200 600 x 600

Color

1,200 x 600 1,200 x 1,200 600 x 600

OHP/Thick

1,200 x 600 1,200 x 1,200

4. Count Unit R: Rotation S: Prints 5. Environment LL: Low temperature and Low humidity ML: Medium temperature and Low humidity MM: Medium temperature and Medium humidity HH: High temperature and High humidity 7. Others The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.
G160/G161 G160/G161

MH: Medium temperature and High humidity

SM

5-3

Service Program Mode

FA: Factory setting (Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory.) DFU: Design/Factory Use only - Do not touch the SP mode in the field. P in the right hand side of the mode number column means that this SP mode relates to the Printer Controller. If P is not in the column, this SP mode relates to the Printer Engine. A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change. An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this mode is stored in the NVRAM (Engine and Printer Controller). If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to the default value. EGB, CTL and NV indicate which NVRAM contains the data. EGB: NVRAM on the EGB board CTL: NVRAM on the controller board NV: NVRAM on the NVRAM expansion board (user account enhancement kit) The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP table in the following manner. [ Adjustable range / Default setting / Step ] Alphanumeric

If Alphanumeric is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the setting of the SP mode is displayed on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead of only numbers. However, the settings in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers.

5.1.3 BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING


Do not change the bit switches unless you are told to do this by the manufacturer. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start the SP mode. Select the Service menu with " Press the "OK" key three times. To select a bit switch, press the " / " keys. Push the OK key. Set the value with these keys: [Left] [Right]: Moves the cursor to one of the adjacent bits. [Up] [Down]: Changes a bit between "0" and "1". [Escape]: Goes out of the program without saving changes. [OK]: Goes out of the program and saves changes. The digit at the left [A] is bit 7 and the digit at the right [B] is bit 0. / " keys.

G160/G161

5-4

SM

Service Program Mode

6. 7.

Push the "Escape" key one or more times until the menu SP mode (Service) is shown. Select End and push the OK key.

SM

5-5

G160/G161

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

5.2 SERVICE MODE TABLE


5.2.1 CONTROLLER SERVICE MODE
1001 1001 001 [Bit Switch] Bit Switch 1 *CTL Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU Bit 0 to 2: Not used. Do not change the settings. Bit 3: Changing the print language (PCL <-> PS) 1001 002 Bit Switch 2 *CTL 0: Enabled 1: Disabled (No change) Bit 4 to 7: Not used. Do not change the settings. Bit 0: PostScript3 Euro glyph 0: Disabled 1: Enabled (Even if there is no Euro Glyph in the ROM, it is possible to load the Euro Glyph data.) Bit 1: Not used. Do not change the setting. Bit 2:PCL5e/5c (HP4000/HP8000) The left space command is set to 0, the machine is changed to 1 1001 003 Bit Switch 3 *CTL 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Bit 3: PCL5e/GL2: pen # of PW 0: Normal 1: Patch Bit 4: Tray selecting 0: The tray is determined by auto tray selection 1: Like HP/SV Bit 5 to 7: Not used. Do not change the settings. 1001 004 Bit Switch 4 *CTL Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU Bit 0 to 2: Not used. Do not change the settings. Bit 3: Enables the %% command of the 1001 005 Bit Switch 5 *CTL PostScript detection condition for the auto print language selection function. 0: Enabled

G160/G161

5-6

SM

Service Mode Table

1: Disabled Bit 4 to 7: Not used. Do not change the settings. 1001 006 1001 007 1001 008 Bit Switch 6 Bit Switch 7 Bit Switch 8 *CTL *CTL *CTL Adjusts bit switch settings. DFU

1003 1003 001 1003 003

[Clear Setting] Initialize System Delete Program Initializes settings in the System menu of the user mode. DFU

1004 1004 001

[Print Summary] Service Summary Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).

1005 1005 001

[Display Version] Printer Version Displays the version of the controller firmware.

1007 1007 001 1007 002 1007 003 1007 004 1007 005 1007 006 1007 007

[Supply Display] Development PCU Transfer Int. Transfer Transfer Roller Fuser Fuser Oil *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step] [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step] [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step] [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step] [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step] [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step] [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]

1101 1101 001

[ToneCtlSet] Tone (Factory) *CTL *CTL *CTL Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b) the previous setting, or c) the current setting.
G160/G161

1101 2 Tone (Prev.) 1101 3 Tone (Current)

1102

[ToneCtlSet]

*CTL

Sets the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment. The

SM

5-7

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

asterisk (*) shows which mode is set. 00: *1200x1200Photo 01: 600x600Text 02: 1200x1200Text 03: 1200x600Text 04: 600x600Photo 05: 1200x600Photo

1103 1103 001 1103 002

[PrnColorSheet] ToneCtlSheet ColorChart Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma adjustment.

1104 1104 001 1104 021 1104 041 1104 061 1104 002 1104 022 1104 042 1104 062 1104 003 1104 023 1104 043 1104 063 1104 004 1104 024 1104 044 1104 064 1104 005 1104 025 1104 045 1104 065

[ToneCtlValue] Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the Mode Selection menu. Set Black 1 Set Cyan 1 Set Magenta 1 Set Yellow 1 Set Black 2 Set Cyan 2 Set Magenta 2 Set Yellow 2 Set Black 3 Set Cyan 3 Set Magenta 3 Set Yellow 3 Set Black 4 Set Cyan 4 Set Magenta 4 Set Yellow 4 Set Black 5 Set Cyan 5 Set Magenta 5 Set Yellow 5 *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL [0 to 255 / 80 / 1/step] [0 to 255 / 64 / 1/step] [0 to 255 / 48 / 1/step] [0 to 255 / 32 / 1/step] [0 to 255 / 16 / 1/step]

G160/G161

5-8

SM

Service Mode Table

1104 006 1104 026 1104 046 1104 066 1104 007 1104 027 1104 047 1104 067 1104 008 1104 028 1104 048 1104 068 1104 009 1104 029 1104 049 1104 069 1104 010 1104 030 1104 050 1104 070 1104 011 1104 031 1104 051 1104 071 1104 012 1104 032 1104 052 1104 072 1104 013 1104 033 1104 053 1104 073 1104 014 1104 034

Set Black 6 Set Cyan 6 Set Magenta 6 Set Yellow 6 Set Black 7 Set Cyan 7 Set Magenta 7 Set Yellow 7 Set Black 8 Set Cyan 8 Set Magenta 8 Set Yellow 8 Set Black 9 Set Cyan 9 Set Magenta 9 Set Yellow 9 Set Black 10 Set Cyan 10 Set Magenta 10 Set Yellow 10 Set Black 11 Set Cyan 11 Set Magenta 11 Set Yellow 11 Set Black 12 Set Cyan 12 Set Magenta 12 Set Yellow 12 Set Black 13 Set Cyan 13 Set Magenta 13 Set Yellow 13 Set Black 14 Set Cyan 14

*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL [0 to 255 / 224 / 1/step] [0 to 255 / 208 / 1/step]
G160/G161 G160/G161

[0 to 255 / 96 / 1/step]

[0 to 255 / 112 / 1/step]

[0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]

[0 to 255 / 144 / 1/step]

[0 to 255 / 160 / 1/step]

[0 to 255 / 176 / 1/step]

[0 to 255 / 192 / 1/step]

SM

5-9

Service Mode Table

1104 054 1104 074 1104 015 1104 035 1104 055 1104 075

Set Magenta 14 Set Yellow 14 Set Black 15 Set Cyan 15 Set Magenta 15 Set Yellow 15

*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL [0 to 255 / 240 / 1/step]

[ToneCtlSave] Saves the print gamma (adjusted with the Gamma Adj.) as the new Current 1105 Setting. Before the machine stores the new current setting, it moves the data stored as the current setting to the previous setting memory-storage location.

1106 1106 001

[Toner Limit Value] Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development. TonerLimitValue *CTL [100 to 400 / 260 / 1%/step]

1108 1108 001 1108 002 1108 003 1108 004 1108 005 1108 006 1108 007 1108 008

[Ext. Toner Save] Mode 1: Text Mode 2: Text Mode 1: Image Mode 2: Image Mode 1: Line Mode 2: Line Mode 1: Paint Mode 2: Paint DFU

5.2.2 ENGINE SERVICE MODE


SP1-XXX (Feed)
[Lead Edge Reg.] Leading Edge Registration (Tray or By-pass, Paper Type, Process Speed) 1001 Paper Type ->N: Plain paper 1, N2 or Normal 2: Plain paper 2, Thick2: Thick paper 2 (see the Specifications table for details on these paper weights) Process Speed: LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed

G160/G161

5-10

SM

Service Mode Table

Adjusts the leading edge registration. This SP changes the registration clutch operation timing for each mode. A +ve value sets the registration start timing earlier. A ve value sets the registration start timing later. The value of the normal paper in RS is the standard value. The values of papers other than normal are added to the value of the normal paper in RS. 1001 001 1001 002 1001 003 1001 004 1001 005 1001 006 1001 007 1001 008 1001 009 1001 010 1001 011 1001 012 1001 013 1001 014 1001 015 1001 016 1001 017 1001 018 1001 019 1001 020 1001 021 1001 022 1001 023 1001 024 1001 025 1001 026 1001 027 Tray 1: Normal: LS Tray 1: Normal: RS Tray 1: Thick Tray 1: OHP Tray 2: Normal: LS Tray 2: Normal: RS Tray 2: Thick Tray 2: OHP Tray 3: Normal: LS Tray 3: Normal: RS Tray 3: Thick Tray 3: OHP By-pass: N: LS By-pass: N: RS By-pass: Thick By-pass: OHP Duplex: Normal: LS Duplex: Normal: RS Duplex: Thick Duplex: N2: LS Duplex: N2: RS Tray 1: Normal 2: LS Tray 1: Normal 2: RS Tray 1: Thick 2 Tray 1: Thin: LS Tray 1: Thin: RS Tray 1: Special *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / -3.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / -3.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / -3.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / -3.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / -3.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]
G160/G161 G160/G161

[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]

SM

5-11

Service Mode Table

1001 028 1001 029 1001 030 1001 031 1001 032 1001 033 1001 034 1001 035 1001 036 1001 037 1001 038 1001 039 1001 040 1001 041 1001 042 1001 043 1001 044 1001 045

Tray 2: Normal 2: LS Tray 2: Normal 2: RS Tray 2: Thick 2 Tray 2: Thin: LS Tray 2: Thin: RS Tray 2: Special Tray 3: Normal 2: LS Tray 3: Normal 2: RS Tray 3: Thick 2 Tray 3: Thin: LS Tray 3: Thin: RS Tray 3: Special By-pass: N2: LS By-pass: N2: RS By-pass: Thick 2 By-pass: Thin: LS By-pass: Thin: RS By-pass: Special

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] [-10.0 to 10.0 / 1.5 / 0.1 mm/step]

1002 1002 001 1002 002 1002 003 1002 004 1002 005

[S-to-S Reg.] Side-to-Side Registration By-pass Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Duplex *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each mode. This SP changes the laser main scan start position. [-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle (Tray or By-pass, Paper Type, Process Speed) 1003 Paper Type ->N: Plain paper 1, N2 or Normal 2: Plain paper 2, Thick2: Thick paper 2 (see the Specifications table for details on these paper weights) Process Speed-> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed 1003 001 1003 002 1003 003 Tray 1: Normal: LS Tray 1: Normal: RS Tray 1: Thick *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller for each mode. This SP changes the paper feed timing.

G160/G161

5-12

SM

Service Mode Table

1003 004 1003 005 1003 006 1003 007 1003 008 1003 009 1003 010 1003 011 1003 012 1003 013 1003 014 1003 015 1003 016 1003 017 1003 018 1003 019 1003 020 1003 021 1003 022 1003 023 1003 024 1003 025 1003 026 1003 027 1003 028 1003 029 1003 030 1003 031 1003 032 1003 033 1003 034 1003 035 1003 036 1003 037

Tray 1: OHP Tray 2: Normal: LS Tray 2: Normal: RS Tray 2: Thick Tray 2: OHP Tray 3: Normal: LS Tray 3: Normal: RS Tray 3: Thick Tray 3: OHP By-pass: N:LS By-pass: N:RS By-pass: Thick By-pass: OHP Duplex: Normal: LS Duplex: Normal: RS Duplex: Thick Duplex: N2: LS Duplex: N2: RS Tray 1: Normal 2: LS Tray 1: Normal 2: RS Tray 1: Thick 2 Tray 1: Thin: LS Tray 1: Thin: RS Tray 1: Special Tray 2: Normal 2: LS Tray 2: Normal 2: RS Tray 2: Thick 2 Tray 2: Thin: LS Tray 2: Thin: RS Tray 2: Special Tray 3: Normal 2: LS Tray 3: Normal 2: RS Tray 3: Thick 2 Tray 3: Thin: LS

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

*EGB *EGB

SM

5-13

G160/G161

G160/G161

*EGB

Service Mode Table

1003 038 1003 039 1003 040 1003 041 1003 042 1003 043 1003 044 1003 045

Tray 3: Thin: RS Tray 3: Special By-pass: N2: LS By-pass: N2: RS By-pass: Thick 2 By-pass: Thin: LS By-pass: Thin: RS By-pass: Special

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[Mt Speed] Drive Motor Speed DFU (Unit, Process Speed, Paper Type) Paper Type 1004 Process Speed N: Plain paper 1, N2 or Normal 2: Plain paper 2, Thick2: Thick LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed paper 2 (see the Specifications table for details on these paper weights) CW: Clockwise, CCW: Counterclockwise PFU: Optional paper tray unit 1004 001 1004 002 1004 003 1004 004 1004 005 1004 006 1004 007 1004 008 1004 009 1004 010 DEV / OPC [K]: LS DEV / OPC [K]: RS DEV [CMY]: LS DEV [CMY]: RS OPC [CMY]: LS OPC [CMY]: RS Fusing: LS Fusing: RS Transfer Belt: LS Transfer Belt: RS *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the black development and OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color development motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / P2a: 1.4, P2b: 0.95 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in the 1004 011 PFU: LS *EGB optional paper tray unit. [-4.00 to 4.00 / P2a: -0.36, P2b: -1.06 / 0.01%/step] 1004 012 PFU: RS *EGB [-4.00 to 4.00 / P2a: -0.36, P2b: -0.27 / 0.01%/step]

G160/G161

5-14

SM

Service Mode Table

1004 013 1004 014 1004 015

Duplex: LS: Add Duplex: RS: Add Duplex: LS

*EGB *EGB *EGB

Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / P2a: -0.36, P2b: 0.41 / 0.01%/step] [-4.00 to 4.00 / P2a: -0.36, P2b: 1.21 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the inverter motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 1.4 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the inverter motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the black development and OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color development motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in the optional paper tray unit. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.14 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the inverter motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the inverter motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the black development and OPC
G160/G161

1004 016 1004 017 1004 018 1004 019 1004 020 1004 021 1004 022 1004 023 1004 024 1004 025 1004 026 1004 027 1004 028 1004 029 1004 030 1004 031 1004 032 1004 033 1004 034 1004 035 1004 036 1004 037 1004 038 1004 039 1004 040 1004 041

Duplex: RS Reverse: LS: CW Reverse: RS: CW Reverse: LS: CCW Reverse: RS: CCW

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

DEV / OPC [K]: LS: N2 *EGB DEV / OPC [K]: RS: N2 *EGB DEV [CMY]: LS: N2 DEV [CMY]: RS: N2 OPC [CMY]: LS: N2 OPC [CMY]: RS: N2 Fusing: LS: N2 Fusing: RS: N2 Trans. Belt: LS: N2 Trans. Belt: RS: N2 PFU: LS: Normal 2 PFU: RS: Normal 2 Duplex: LS: Add: N2 Duplex: RS: Add: N2 Duplex: LS: N2 Duplex: RS: N2 Reverse: LS: CW: N2 Reverse: RS: CW: N2 Rever.: LS: CCW: N2 Rever.: RS: CCW: N2 *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

DEV / OPC [K]: LS: TC *EGB

SM

5-15

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] 1004 042 1004 043 DEV [CMY]: LS: TC OPC [CMY]: LS: TC *EGB *EGB Adjusts the color development motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor 1004 044 Fusing: LS: Thick *EGB speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step] 1004 045 Trans. Belt: LS: TC *EGB Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in the 1004 046 PFU: LS: Thick *EGB optional paper tray unit. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.14 / 0.01%/step] 1004 047 1004 048 1004 049 1004 050 Duplex: LS: Add: TC Duplex: LS: Thick Reverse: LS: CW: TC Rever.: LS: CCW: TC *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the inverter motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the inverter motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the black development and OPC 1004 051 DEV / OPC [K] LS:TC2 *EGB motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] 1004 052 1004 053 DEV [CMY]: LS: TC2 OPC [CMY]: LS: TC2 *EGB *EGB Adjusts the color development motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor 1004 054 Fusing: LS: TC 2 *EGB speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step] 1004 055 1004 056 T. Belt: LS: TC 2 PFU: LS: Thick 2 *EGB *EGB Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in the

G160/G161

5-16

SM

Service Mode Table

optional paper tray unit. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.14 / 0.01%/step] 1004 057 Duplex: LS: Thick 2 *EGB Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the black development and OPC 1004 058 DEV / OPC [K]: LS: SP *EGB motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] 1004 059 1004 060 DEV [CMY]: LS: SP OPC [CMY]: LS: SP *EGB *EGB Adjusts the color development motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor 1004 061 Fusing: LS: SP *EGB speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step] 1004 062 Trans. Belt: LS: SP *EGB Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in the 1004 063 PFU: LS: SP *EGB optional paper tray unit. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.14 / 0.01%/step] 1004 064 1004 065 1004 066 1004 067 1004 068 1004 069 1004 070 1004 071 1004 072 1004 073 1004 074 1004 075 Duplex: LS: SP *EGB Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the black development and OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01 %/step] Adjusts the color development motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor speed. Fusing: RS: Thin Trans. Belt: LS: TN Trans. Belt: RS: TN PFU: LS: Thin *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [-4.00 to 4.00 / P2a: 1.4, P2b: 1.05 / 0.01%/step] [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in the
G160/G161

DEV / OPC [K]: LS: TN *EGB DEV / OPC [K]: RS: TN *EGB DEV [CMY]: LS: Thin DEV [CMY]: RS: Thin OPC [CMY]: LS: Thin OPC [CMY]: RS: Thin Fusing: LS: Thin *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed.

SM

5-17

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

1004 076 1004 077 1004 078 1004 079

PFU: RS: Thin Duplex: LS: Thin Duplex: RS: Thin DEV / OPC [K]: LS: OHP DEV [CMY]: LS: OHP OPC [CMY]: LS: OHP

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

optional paper tray unit. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the black development and OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01 %/step] Adjusts the color development motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the color OPC motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.35 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the paper exit and fusing motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.6 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the transfer belt motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.0 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the speed of the feed motor in the optional paper tray unit. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -1.14 / 0.01%/step] Adjusts the duplex motor speed. [-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.36 / 0.01%/step]

1004 080 1004 081

*EGB *EGB

1004 082

Fusing: LS: OHP

*EGB

1004 083

T.Belt: LS: OHP

*EGB

1004 084

PFU: LS: OHP

*EGB

1004 085

Duplex: LS: OHP

*EGB

1006 1006 001

[Phase Adjust.] Phase Adjustment Adjusts the phase angle between the K drum Angle *EGB and the CMY drums. [-180 to 180 / 0 / 1/step] DFU

1104 1104 001

[Fusing Cont.] Fusing Control Control Method *EGB [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Selects the fusing control method. 0: ON/OFF Control, 1: PID Control (Phase control) Max. Wait Time *EGB [0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step]

1104 022

Adjusts the maximum waiting time for the target printing temperature of fusing unit. After this interval, printing will start if the temperature did not get to the target.

G160/G161

5-18

SM

Service Mode Table

Paper Feed. Temp. 1104 023

*EGB

[0 to 30 / P2a: 5, P2b: 10 / 1/step]

Adjusts the increase in the temperature of the fusing unit between the ready condition and the start of paper feed at the start of a new job. 1st Add Time: LS [0 to 50 / 0 / 0.1 sec/step]

1104 024

For print jobs at low speed. If the interval between jobs is less than this setting, then the temperature change (1104 025) for the first page of a new job is not applied. 1st Add Temp. *EGB [0 to 20 / P2a: 2, P2b: 8 / 1C/step]

1104 025

Adds this value to the basic fusing temperature, for the first page of a new job. This extra temperature is necessary because when the printer starts the first page, the fusing unit is not warm enough. 1st Temp. Maint. *EGB [0 to 50 / P2a: 15, P2b: 8 / 1 sec/step]

1104 026

Adjusts the time for maintaining the temperature change that is set with 1104 025. 1st Print Inter. *EGB [0 to 100 / P2a: 0.2, P2b: 0 / 0.1 sec/step]

1104 027

For print jobs at regular speed. If the interval between jobs is less than this setting, then the temperature change (1104 025) for the first page of a new job is not applied. Paper Feed. Temp. *EGB [0 to 30 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step]

1104 028

Adjusts the increase in the temperature of the fusing unit between the ready condition and the start of paper feed at the start of a new job (B/W mode). 1st PrtDecTmpTime *EGB [0 to 255 / P2a: 0, P2b: 3 / 1 sec/step]

1104 029

Adjusts the time for decreasing 1C when the temperature decline to the target printing temperature. PreRot.Thre.Temp. *EGB [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 deg/step]

1104 030

Adjusts the threshold temperature for the added idling rotation. 1st PrtDecTmpTime *EGB [0 to 255 / 2 / 1 sec/step]

1104 031

Adjusts the added idling rotation time. This SP is activated when the fusing temperature does not reach the specified temperature with SP1104-30.

[Fusing Temp.] Fusing Temperature (Paper Type, Mode, Color, Process Speed) 1105 Paper Type -> N: Plain paper 1, N2: Plain paper 2, TC: Thick, TN: Thin, SP: Special, OHP, ENV: Envelope, GL: Glossy paper, TK2: Thick paper 2 Mode -> Simple [one-sided] or Duplex
G160/G161

SM

5-19

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

Color -> K: Black only, FC: Full color Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed Reload: Print ready, between jobs Adjusts the fusing unit temperature for each mode. 1105 022 1105 025 1105 026 1105 027 1105 028 1105 029 1105 031 1105 033 1105 034 1105 035 1105 036 1105 037 1105 039 1105 040 1105 042 Reload Temp. TC1: Simple: [K] TC1: Duplex: [K] TC1: Simple: [FC] TC1: Duplex: [FC] TC2: Simple: [K] TC2: Simple: [FC] N: Simple: [K]: LS N: Simple: [K]: RS N: Duplex: [K]: LS N: Duplex: [K]: RS N: Simple: [FC]: LS N: Simple: [FC]: RS N: Duplex: [FC]: LS N: Duplex: [FC]: RS Check Temp. Time 1105 043 *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [120 to 180 / 145 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 160 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 145 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 160 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 145 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 160 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 145 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 160 / 1C/step] [0 to 10 / 2.0 / 0.1 sec/step] [120 to 180 / 160 / 1C/step] [100 to 200 / 160 / 1C/step]

Adjusts the rotation time before checking the fusing unit temperature. If the main switch is turned on and off for a short time, it might be possible that the checked temperature is high even though the whole of the fusing unit is not high enough for printing condition. 1105 049 1105 050 1105 051 1105 052 1105 053 1105 054 1105 055 1105 056 1105 057 1105 058 N2: Simple: [K]: LS N2: Simple: [K]: RS N2: Duplex: [K]: LS N2: Duplex: [K]: RS N2: Simple: [FC] LS N2: Simple: [FC] RS N2: Duplex: [FC] LS N2: Duplex: [FC] RS TN: Simple: [K]: LS TN: Simple: [K]: RS *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [120 to 180 / 150 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 165 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 150 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 165 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 150 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 165 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 150 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 165 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 135 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 150 / 1C/step]

G160/G161

5-20

SM

Service Mode Table

1105 059 1105 060 1105 061 1105 062 1105 063 1105 064 1105 065 1105 067 1105 069 1105 071 1105 073 1105 074 1105 075 1105 076 1105 077 1105 078 1105 089 1105 090 1105 091 1105 092

TN: Duplex: [K]: LS TN: Duplex: [K] RS TN: Simple: [FC] LS TN: Simple: [FC] RS TN: Duplex: [FC] LS TN: Duplex: [FC] RS SP1: Simple: [K] LS SP1: Duplex: [K] LS SP1: Simp.: [FC] LS SP1: Dupl.: [FC] LS ENV: Simple: [K] RS ENV: Simple: [FC] RS GL: Simple: [K] LS GL: Duplex: [K] LS GL: Simple: [FC] LS GL: Duplex: [FC] LS OHP: [K]: LS OHP: [FC]: LS TK2: Duplex: [K] TK2: Duplex: [FC]

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[120 to 180 / 135 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 150 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 135 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 150 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 135 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 150 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 165 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 165 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 165 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 165 / 1C/step] [120 to 180 / 170 / 1C/step]

[120 to 180 / 155 / 1C/step]

[120 to 180 / 155 / 1C/step]

[120 to 180 / 160 / 1C/step]

[120 to 180 / 150 / 1C/step]

1106

[Fusing Temp.] Fusing Temperature H. Roller: Heat Roller Displays the heating roller temperature at H. Roller Temp. this time. [0 to 230 / 0 / 1C/step]

1106 002

1159

[Fusing JAM SC] Fusing JAM SC Setting Turns on or off the fusing jam SC to detect the three consecutive paper jams at fusing unit. 0: OFF 1: ON
G160/G161 G160/G161

1159 001

Fusing JAM SC

*EGB

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

SM

5-21

Service Mode Table

[Print Speed Ctl] Print Speed Control for small paper sizes (A5 or smaller) (Sheets of paper, Interval time or Temperature, Process Speed) 1911 Simple [one-sided] or Duplex Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed See section 6 for more about these SPs. 1911 001 1911 002 PPM Down: RS: S PPM Down: LS: S *EGB *EGB The print speed (PPM) is reduced after the machine has printed this number of pages continuously. [0 to 99 / 15 / 1 sheet/step] The print speed goes back to the normal 1911 003 PPM Down Inter. *EGB speed after this interval. [0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step] The temperature is decreased by this 1911 004 S-size Temp. 1 *EGB amount to prevent overheating the fusing unit for small size paper. [0 to 200 / 2 / 1C/step] 1911 006 1911 008 1911 014 1911 016 1911 018 1911 020 S-size Temp. 2 S-size Temp. 3 S-size Temp.: S1 S-size Temp.: S2 S-size Temp.: S3 Simple Temp. 3 *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 200 / 5 / 1C/step]] These SPs control when the above temperature reductions are done. [0 to 255 / P2a: 30, P2b: 25 / 1 sheet/step] [0 to 255 / P2a: 20, P2b: 10 / 1 sheet/step] [0 to 255 / P2a: 50, P2b: 15 / 1 sheet/step] This SP controls when the temperature reduction of SP1911-022 is done. [0 to 500 / P2a: 0, P2b: 15 / 1 sheet/step] Adjusts the temperature reduction for 1911 021 Simple Temp. 1 *EGB one-sided printing. [0 to 200 / 2 / 1C/step]] Adjusts the temperature reduction 2 for 1911 022 Simple Temp. 2 *EGB one-sided printing. [0 to 200 / 5 / 1C/step]] This SP keeps the target print temperature 1911 023 Simple Temp.:S1 *EGB for specified printouts with this SP. [0 to 500 / 100 / 1 sheet/step]

G160/G161

5-22

SM

Service Mode Table

This SP controls when the temperature 1911 024 Simple Temp.:S2 *EGB reduction of SP1911-021 is done. [0 to 500 / P2a: 30, P2b: 10 / 1 sheet/step] Adjusts the temperature reduction for duplex 1911 025 1911 026 Duplex Temp. 1 Duplex Temp. 2 *EGB *EGB printing. [0 to 200 / 2 / 1C/step]] [0 to 200 / 5 / 1C/step]] This SP keeps the target print temperature 1911 027 Duplex Temp.: S1 *EGB for specified printouts with this SP in duplex printing. [0 to 500 / 80 / 1 sheet/step] This SP controls when the temperature 1911 028 Duplex Temp.: S2 *EGB reduction of SP1911-025 is done. [0 to 500 / P2a: 20, P2b: 10 / 1 sheet/step] This SP controls when the temperature 1911 029 Duplex Temp.: S3 *EGB reduction of SP1911-026 is done. [0 to 500 / P2a: 0, P2b: 15 / 1 sheet/step] Keeps the temperature reduction for the time 1911 040 Dec.Tmp Keep Time *EGB specified with this SP even the process control interrupts the multiple printing job. [0 to 500 / P2a: 0, P2b: 60 / 1 sec/step]

[Fusing Rotat.] Fusing Unit Roller Rotation Control 1912 Paper Type -> TC1: Thick paper 1, TC2: Thick paper 2, OHP, SP: Special, GL: Glossy paper Rotation *EGB [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off 1: On.

When the printer is in the ready condition, the nip between the hot roller and 1912 001 pressure roller is in the same position. This may cause deformation of the rollers. Therefore, a temporary rotation prevents this problem. SP 1912 001 turns this feature on or off. SP1912-003 and 004 control this rotation. Pre-rotation: Fusing idling 1912 002
G160/G161 G160/G161

Prerotat. Speed

*EGB

[0 to 2 / 2 / -]

Adjusts the speed of the fusing-unit rollers during fusing idling. 0: 1/3 regular speed, 1: Low speed, 2: Regular speed

SM

5-23

Service Mode Table

Rotation Freque. 1912 003

*EGB

[1 to 24 / 4 / 1 hour/step]

Adjusts the frequency of the fusing-unit roller rotation if the machine is in the ready condition for a very long interval. Rotation Inter. *EGB [0 to 25 / 0.1 / 0.1 sec/step]

1912 004

Adjusts the duration of the fusing-unit roller rotation Prerotat. Temp. *EGB [0 to 200 / 100 / 1C/step]

1912 005

Fusing idling is not done if the fusing unit temperature is above this value. Prerotat. Inter. *EGB [0 to 180 / 1 / 1 min/step]

1912 006

Adjusts the duration of fusing idling immediately after the power is turned on. Ex. Rotation Time *EGB [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec/step]

1912 007

Adjusts the time for extra rotation of the fusing unit rollers at the end of a job. If the fusing motor stops before the fusing lamp turns off, the temperature can become very high. Prerotat. Ext. *EGB [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

1912 008

Adjusts the additional time for pre-rotation of the fusing rollers. TC1: Rotat. Ext. *EGB [0 to 255 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

1912 010

Adjusts the additional time of the fusing roller pre-rotation for thick paper 1. TC2 Rotat. Ext. *EGB [0 to 255 / 15 / 1 sec/step]

1912 011

Adjusts the additional time of the fusing roller pre-rotation for thick paper 2. OHP: Rotat. Ext. *EGB [0 to 255 / 15 / 1 sec/step]

1912 012

Adjusts the additional time of the fusing roller pre-rotation for OHP. SP: Rotat. Ext. *EGB [0 to 255 / 15 / 1 sec/step]

1912 013

Adjusts the additional time of the fusing roller pre-rotation for special paper. GL: Rotat. Ext. *EGB [0 to 255 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

1912 014

Adjusts the additional time of the fusing roller pre-rotation for glossy paper. LL: RotSpd. Sel *EGB [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 sec/step] 0: OFF, 1: ON

1912 015

Turns on or off the rotation speed switching of the pre-rotation in LL condition. When the "ON" is set, pre-rotation speed is the one-third of normal speed. LM: RotSpd. Select *EGB [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 sec/step] 0: OFF, 1: ON

1912 016

Turns on or off the rotation speed switching of the pre-rotation in LM condition. When the "ON" is set, pre-rotation speed is the one-third of normal speed.

1912 017

MM/HH: RotSpd. Sel

*EGB

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 sec/step]

G160/G161

5-24

SM

Service Mode Table

0: OFF, 1: ON Turns on or off the rotation speed switching of the pre-rotation in MM/HH condition. When the "ON" is set, pre-rotation speed is the one-third of normal speed.

1913 1913 002

[Heating Roller] Heating Roller Control Stand-by Temp. condition. *EGB [0 to 200 / 150 / 1C/step] Adjusts the heating roller temperature when the machine is in the ready

1916 1916 001

[Nip Measure] Fusing Nip Width Measurement DFU Nip Measure Exe. [0 or 1 / 0 /-] 0: Not execute, 1: Execute

Performs the nip width measurement. 1916 002 Prerotation Time *EGB [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

Adjusts the rotation time of the fusing unit rollers before the nip measurement.

[Environ. Adapt.] Fusing Idling: Environment Correction The machine automatically adjusts the duration of fusing idling, depending on room temperature measured by the temperature/humidity sensor (Paper Type, Temperature Environment, Value of Temperature/ Rotation Time) 1917 Paper Type paper weights) Temperature Environment -> H: High temperature, L: Low temperature Value of Temperature/ Time: Dec.: Decrease, Inc.: Increase Adjusts the threshold degree between LL 1917 001 LL/MM Border *EGB (Low temperature and Low humidity) and MM (Middle temp. and middle humidity). [0 to 35 / 23 / 1C/step] Adjusts the additional temperature for LM
G160/G161

N1: Plain paper 1, N2: Plain paper 2, T1: Thick paper 1, T2:

Thick paper 2, SP: Special (see the Specifications table for details on these

1917 002

LM Temp Adj.

*EGB

condition. This temperature is added to the fusing temperature of MM condition. [0 to 30 / 4 / 1C/step] Adjusts the rotation time decrease at high

1917 003

H: Rotat. Time Dec.

*EGB

SM

5-25

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

temperature. [-120 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the temperature decrease for plain 1917 004 N1: H: Temp. Dec. *EGB paper 1 at high temperature. [-50 to 0 / 0 / 1C/step] Adjusts the temperature increase for plain 1917 005 N1: L: Temp. Inc. *EGB paper 1 at low temperature. [0 to 30 / 10 / 1C/step] Adjusts the rotation time increase at low 1917 006 L: Rotat. Time Inc. *EGB temperature. [0 to 120 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Sets the threshold temperature detected as 1917 007 H: Standard Temp. *EGB high temperature. [25 to 40 / 30 / 1C/step] Sets the threshold temperature detected as 1917 008 L: Standard Temp. *EGB low temperature. [-15 to 30 / 18 / 1C/step] Adjusts the rotation time decrease at low 1917 09 L: Rotation Dec. *EGB temperature. [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the temperature decrease for plain 1917 010 N2: H: Temp. Dec. *EGB paper 2 at high temperature. [-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the temperature increase for plain 1917 011 N2: L: Temp. Inc. *EGB paper 2 at low temperature. [0 to 30 / P2a: 10, P2b: 13 / 1C/step] Adjusts the temperature decrease for thin 1917 012 TN: H: Temp. Dec. *EGB paper at high temperature. [-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the temperature increase for thin 1917 013 TN: L: Temp. Inc. *EGB paper at low temperature. [0 to 30 / P2a: 7, P2b: 10 / 1C/step] Adjusts the temperature decrease for thick 1917 014 TC1: H: Temp. Dec. *EGB paper 1 at high temperature. [-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

G160/G161

5-26

SM

Service Mode Table

Adjusts the temperature increase for thick 1917 015 TC1: L: Temp. Inc. *EGB paper 1 at low temperature. [0 to 30 / P2a: 7, P2b: 10 / 1C/step] Adjusts the temperature decrease for thick 1917 016 TC2: H: Temp. Dec. *EGB paper 2 at high temperature. [-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the temperature increase for thick 1917 017 TC2: L: Temp. Inc. *EGB paper 2 at low temperature. [0 to 30 / P2a: 7, P2b: 10 / 1C/step] Adjusts the temperature decrease for OHP at 1917 018 OHP: H: Temp. Dec. *EGB high temperature. [-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the temperature increase for OHP at 1917 019 OHP: L: Temp. Inc. *EGB low temperature. [0 to 30 / P2a: 7, P2b: 10 / 1C/step] Adjusts the temperature decrease for special 1917 020 SP: H: Temp. Dec. *EGB paper at high temperature. [-50 to 0 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the temperature increase for special 1917 021 SP: L: Temp. Inc. *EGB paper at low temperature. [0 to 30 / P2a: 7, P2b: 10 / 1C/step] Adjusts the temperature increase for envelop 1917 022 ENV:H:Temp. Inc. *EGB at high temperature. [-50 to 0 / 0 / 1C/step] Adjusts the temperature increase for envelop 1917 023 ENV:L:Temp. Inc. *EGB at low temperature. [0 to 30 / 7 / 1C/step] Adjusts the temperature increase for 1917 024 GL:H:Temp. Inc. *EGB glossary paper at high temperature. [-50 to 0 / 0 / 1C/step] Adjusts the temperature increase for 1917 025 GL:L:Temp. Inc. *EGB glossary paper at low temperature.
G160/G161 G160/G161

[0 to 30 / 7 / 1C/step]

SM

5-27

Service Mode Table

SP2-XXX (Drum)
[Color Regist.] Color Registration Correction ([Color], M: Main scan, S: Sub scan) You can adjust these SPs if the color registration is not good after the Line 2101 Position Adjustment (also known as MUSIC) is done. The [K] value (-001) is the standard value in the main scan adjustment. The values other than [k] value are added to [K] value. So, [K] value normally does not need to be adjusted in the main scan adjustment. 2101 001 2101 002 2101 003 2101 004 2101 005 2101 006 2101 007 2101 008 2101 013 2101 014 2101 015 2101 016 2101 017 2101 018 [K]: M Regist. Dot [M]: M Regist. Dot [C]: M Regist. Dot [Y]: M Regist. Dot [K]: M Reg. SubD [K-M]: M Reg. SubD [K-C]: M Reg. SubD [K-Y]: M Reg. SubD [K-M]: S Reg. 600 [K-C]: S Reg. 600 [K-Y]: S Reg. 600 [K-M]: S Reg. 1200 [K-C]: S Reg. 1200 [K-Y]: S Reg. 1200 *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 line/step] Adjusts the side edge registration by a dot for each mode. [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step]

Adjusts the side edge registration by 1/16 dot. [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1/16dot/step]

[Magnifi. Adj.] Magnification Adjustment 2102 2102 001 2102 002 2102 003 2102 004 2102 005 Color, M Magnifi.: Main scan magnification Adjusts the main scan magnification correction for each color. [K]:M Magnifi. [M]:M Magnifi. [C]:M Magnifi. [Y]:M Magnifi. PLL *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the PLL (phase lock loop). [-1.00 to 1.00 / 0.00 / 0.001 %/step] [-1.00 to 1.00 / 0.00 / 0.001 %/step]

2103

[Trim Adjust.] Erase Margin Adjustment

G160/G161

5-28

SM

Service Mode Table

Lead Ed: Leading Edge, Trail. Ed: Trailing Edge, Left/Right Ed: Left/ Right Edge Adds this value to the leading edge erase 2103 001 Lead Ed. Width *EGB margin position in the sub scan direction. [-127 to 127 / 71 / 1 line/step] Adds this value to the trailing edge erase 2103 002 Trail. Ed. Width *EGB margin position in the sub scan direction. [-127 to 127 / 71 / 1 line/step] Adds this value to the left edge erase margin 2103 003 Left Ed. Width *EGB position in the main scan direction. [-127 to 127 / 47 / 1 dot/step] Adds this value to the right edge erase 2103 004 Right Ed. Width *EGB margin position in the main scan direction. [-127 to 127 / 47 / 1 dot/step] Adds this value to the leading edge erase 2103 005 Lead Ed.Width/SP1 *EGB margin position in the sub scan direction for special paper or thin paper. [-127 to 127 / 95 / 1 line/step]

2104 2104 001 2104 002 2104 003 2104 004

[Magnifi. Adj.] Magnification Adjustment ([Color], Main Scan Magnification) [K]: M Magnifi. [M]: M Magnifi. [C]: M Magnifi. [Y]: M Magnifi. *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the main scan magnification. [-1.00 to 1.00 / 0.00 / 0.01%/step]

[LD Power Cont.] LD Power Control 2105 2105 001 2105 002 2105 003 2105 004 2105 009 2105 010 ([Color], Process Speed) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed [K] 0 [M] 0 [C] 0 [Y] 0 [K] 0: LS [M] 0: LS *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the LD power at low speed. [10 to 200 / 100 / 1%/step] DFU Adjusts the LD power. [10 to 200 / 100 / 1%/step] DFU
G160/G161

SM

5-29

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

2105 011 2105 012

[C] 0: LS [Y] 0: LS

*EGB *EGB

2106 2106 001

Polygon Motor Stop Time Adjusts the time to stop the polygon motor *EGB after job end. [0 to 180 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

2109 2109 001

[LD BeamPattern] LD Beam Pattern Adds the picture to the LD test pattern. Picture Addition [0 or 1 / 0 /-] 0: Not execute, 1: Execute Selects the LD test pattern. [0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step] Selects the color for the LD test pattern. [0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step]

2109 002 2109 004

Pattern Select Color Select

2111 2111 001 2111 200 2111 003 2111 004 2111 005

[Manual Execut.] Manual Line Position Adjustment Execution Position Adjust. Pro. Position Adj. Skew Adjust. ID S. Adjust. Area.Magni.Clr. Performs the line position adjustment. Performs an approximate line position adjustment. Performs the skew adjustment. Tests the ID sensor. Clears the area magnification setting.

2120

[LD Off Check] Displays the LD off check state.

2143 2143 001 2143 002 2143 003 2143 004

[ID S. Display] ID Sensor Display The ID sensor assembly has three sensors: Left, Center, Right PWM: Left PWM: Center PWM: Right Avg: Left *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the PWM value for each sensor. [0 to 512 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the average output from each

G160/G161

5-30

SM

Service Mode Table

2143 005 2143 006 2143 007 2143 008 2143 009 2143 010 2143 011 2143 012 2143 013 2143 014 2143 015 2143 016 2143 017 2143 018

Avg: Center Avg: Right Max: Left Max: Center Max: Right Min: Left Min: Center Min: Right Max2: Left Max2: Center Max2: Right Min2: Left Min2: Center Min2: Right

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

sensor. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 volt/step] Displays the maximum output from each sensor. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 volt/step] Displays the minimum output from each sensor. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 volt/step] Displays the maximum 2 output from each sensor. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 volt/step] Displays the maximum 2 output from each sensor. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 volt/step]

2150 2150 001 2150 002 2150 003 2150 004 2150 005 2150 006 2150 007 2150 008 2150 009 2150 010 2150 011 2150 012 2150 013 2150 014 2150 015 2150 016 2150 017

[Area Magni. Cor] Area Magnification Correction ([Color], Area) [K]: Area 1 [K]: Area 2 [K]: Area 3 [K]: Area 4 [K]: Area 5 [K]: Area 6 [K]: Area 7 [K]: Area 8 [K]: Area 9 [K]: Area 10 [K]: Area 11 [K]: Area 12 [M]: Area 1 [M]: Area 2 [M]: Area 3 [M]: Area 4 [M]: Area 5 *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the magnification correction for each area.
G160/G161

Adjusts the magnification correction for each area. [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]

[-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]

SM

5-31

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

2150 018 2150 019 2150 020 2150 021 2150 022 2150 023 2150 024 2150 025 2150 026 2150 027 2150 028 2150 029 2150 030 2150 031 2150 032 2150 033 2150 034 2150 035 2150 036 2150 037 2150 038 2150 039 2150 040 2150 041 2150 042 2150 043 2150 044 2150 045 2150 046 2150 047 2150 048

[M]: Area 6 [M]: Area 7 [M]: Area 8 [M]: Area 9 [M]: Area 10 [M]: Area 11 [M]: Area 12 [C]: Area 1 [C]: Area 2 [C]: Area 3 [C]: Area 4 [C]: Area 5 [C]: Area 6 [C]: Area 7 [C]: Area 8 [C]: Area 9 [C]: Area 10 [C]: Area 11 [C]: Area 12 [Y]: Area 1 [Y]: Area 2 [Y]: Area 3 [Y]: Area 4 [Y]: Area 5 [Y]: Area 6 [Y]: Area 7 [Y]: Area 8 [Y]: Area 9 [Y]: Area 10 [Y]: Area 11 [Y]: Area 12

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the magnification correction for each area. [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] Adjusts the magnification correction for each area. [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]

2151

[Area Width] Area Width Correction ([Color], Area)

G160/G161

5-32

SM

Service Mode Table

2151 001 2151 002 2151 003 2151 004 2151 005 2151 006 2151 007 2151 008 2151 009 2151 010 2151 011 2151 012 2151 013 2151 014 2151 015 2151 016 2151 017 2151 018 2151 019 2151 020 2151 021 2151 022 2151 023 2151 024 2151 025 2151 026 2151 027 2151 028 2151 029 2151 030 2151 031 2151 032 2151 033 2151 034

[K]: Area 1 [K]: Area 2 [K]: Area 3 [K]: Area 4 [K]: Area 5 [K]: Area 6 [K]: Area 7 [K]: Area 8 [K]: Area 9 [K]: Area 10 [K]: Area 11 [K]: Area 12 [M]: Area 1 [M]: Area 2 [M]: Area 3 [M]: Area 4 [M]: Area 5 [M]: Area 6 [M]: Area 7 [M]: Area 8 [M]: Area 9 [M]: Area 10 [M]: Area 11 [M]: Area 12 [C]: Area 1 [C]: Area 2 [C]: Area 3 [C]: Area 4 [C]: Area 5 [C]: Area 6 [C]: Area 7 [C]: Area 8 [C]: Area 9 [C]: Area 10

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step]

[0 to 1024 / 472 / 1 dot/step]

[0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step]

[0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step]

[0 to 1024 / 472 / 1 dot/step]

[0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step]

[0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step]

[0 to 1024 / 472 / 1 dot/step]


G160/G161 G160/G161

SM

5-33

Service Mode Table

2151 035 2151 036 2151 037 2151 038 2151 039 2151 040 2151 041 2151 042 2151 043 2151 044 2151 045 2151 046 2151 047 2151 048

[C]: Area 11 [C]: Area 12 [Y]: Area 1 [Y]: Area 2 [Y]: Area 3 [Y]: Area 4 [Y]: Area 5 [Y]: Area 6 [Y]: Area 7 [Y]: Area 8 [Y]: Area 9 [Y]: Area 10 [Y]: Area 11 [Y]: Area 12

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step]

[0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step]

[0 to 1024 / 472 / 1 dot/step]

[0 to 1024 / 355 / 1 dot/step]

2152 2152 006 2152 007 2152 008 2152 009 2152 010 2152 011 2152 012 2152 013 2152 014 2152 015 2152 016 2152 017 2152 018 2152 019 2152 020 2152 021 2152 022

[Area Shading] Area Shading Correction Setting ([Color], Area) [K]: Area 0 [K]: Area 1 [K]: Area 2 [K]: Area 3 [K]: Area 4 [K]: Area 5 [K]: Area 6 [K]: Area 7 [K]: Area 8 [K]: Area 9 [K]: Area 10 [M]: Area 0 [M]: Area 1 [M]: Area 2 [M]: Area 3 [M]: Area 4 [M]: Area 5 *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0.10 to 2.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step] [0.10 to 2.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step]

G160/G161

5-34

SM

Service Mode Table

2152 023 2152 024 2152 025 2152 026 2152 027 2152 028 2152 029 2152 030 2152 031 2152 032 2152 033 2152 034 2152 035 2152 036 2152 037 2152 038 2152 039 2152 040 2152 041 2152 042 2152 043 2152 044 2152 045 2152 046 2152 047 2152 048 2152 049

[M]: Area 6 [M]: Area 7 [M]: Area 8 [M]: Area 9 [M]: Area 10 [C]: Area 0 [C]: Area 1 [C]: Area 2 [C]: Area 3 [C]: Area 4 [C]: Area 5 [C]: Area 6 [C]: Area 7 [C]: Area 8 [C]: Area 9 [C]: Area 10 [Y]: Area 0 [Y]: Area 1 [Y]: Area 2 [Y]: Area 3 [Y]: Area 4 [Y]: Area 5 [Y]: Area 6 [Y]: Area 7 [Y]: Area 8 [Y]: Area 9 [Y]: Area 10

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0.10 to 2.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step] [0.10 to 2.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step]

2153

[MUSIC Setting] Timing for Automatic Line Position Adjustment (MUSIC) Enables or disables the automatic line position adjustment. If this SP is 0, the [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: On
G160/G161 G160/G161

2153 001

Auto Execution

*EGB

adjustment is never done.

SM

5-35

Service Mode Table

Enables or disables the adjustment after 2153 002 Process Control *EGB process control is done. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: On Enables or disables the adjustment immediately after the power is turned on 2153 003 Initialization *EGB or when recovering from energy save mode. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: On Enables or disables the adjustment immediately after the machine starts to receive print job data. The adjustment is 2153 004 Data In *EGB done if one of the conditions set with SP2153-012, -013 and 015 is satisfied. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: On Enables or disables the adjustment during printing. The adjustment is done if one of 2153 005 Cut In *EGB the conditions set with SP2153-012, -013 and 015 is satisfied. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric 0: No, 1: Yes Enables or disables the adjustment after 2153 006 Job End *EGB printing. [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: On Enables or disables the transfer belt speed correction during the adjustment. The transfer belt speed is affected by changes in temperature. A change of the 2153 008 Trans. Belt Speed 2 *EGB transfer belt speed during the adjustment causes color registration errors. This SP keeps the transfer belt speed constant. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: On

G160/G161

5-36

SM

Service Mode Table

Turns on or off the line position adjustment 2153 009 P-P Synch. between sheets of paper. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: OFF, 1: ON If this number of pages was printed after the previous adjustment was done, then 2153 010 Manual Cut In *EGB the adjustment is done again. The number of sheets is counted in SP7806-003 and 004. [10 to 999 / 190 / 1 page/step] If the room temperature changes by this amount or more after the previous 2153 012 MUSIC Temp. *EGB adjustment was done, then the adjustment is done again. [2 to 30 / 5 / 1C/step] If this amount of time has passed after the 2153 013 Passage Time *EGB previous adjustment was done, then the adjustment is done again. [0 to 1440 / 360 / 1 min/step] Sets the threshold (magnification error) 2153 015 Maginificat. Error *EGB from previous MUSIC for executing MUSIC. [0 to 10 / 1 / 0.1%/step]

[MUSIC Result] Result of Automatic Line Position Adjustment ([Color],Value, Unit) 2181 Value-> Skew, Bent, M. Scan Erro.: Main Scan Error, S. Scan Erro.: Sub Scan Error, M. Cor: Main Scan Correction, S. Cor: Sub Scan Correction Unit-> Dot, SubD.: Sub Dot, 600/ 1200 dpi The following SPs display the result of MUSIC for each mode. 2181 001 2181 002 2181 003 2181 004 2181 005 [K]: Skew [K]: Bent [K]: M. Scan Erro. [K]: S. Scan Erro. [K]: M Cor.: Dot *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step] [-5000 to 5000 / 0 / 1 m/step]
G160/G161 G160/G161

SM

5-37

Service Mode Table

2181 006 2181 007 2181 008 2181 011 2181 012 2181 013 2181 014 2181 015 2181 016 2181 017 2181 018 2181 021 2181 022 2181 023 2181 024 2181 025 2181 026 2181 027 2181 028 2181 031 2181 032 2181 033 2181 034 2181 035 2181 036 2181 037 2181 038

[K]: M Cor.: SubD. [K]: S Cor.: 600 [K]: S Cor.: 1200 [M]: Skew [M]: Bent [M]: M. Scan Erro. [M]: S. Scan Erro. [M]: M Cor.: Dot [M]: M Cor.: SubD. [M]: S Cor.: 600 [M]: S Cor.: 1200 [C]: Skew [C]: Bent [C]: M. Scan Erro. [C]: S. Scan Erro. [C]: M Cor.: Dot [C]: M Cor.: SubD. [C]: S Cor.: 600 [C]: S Cor.: 1200 [Y]: Skew [Y]: Bent [Y]: M. Scan Erro. [Y]: S. Scan Erro. [Y]: M Cor.: Dot [Y]: M Cor.: SubD. [Y]: S Cor.: 600 [Y]: S Cor.: 1200

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step] [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 line/step] [-999 to 999 / 0 / 1 micrometer/step] [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step] [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 line/step] [-5000 to 5000 / 0 / 1 micrometer/step] [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step] [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 line/step] [-5000 to 5000 / 0 / 1 micrometer /step] [-127 to 127 / 0 / 1 line/step]

2186 2186 001 2186 002 2186 003 2186 004

[MUSIC Record] Automatic Line Position Adjustment Record The following SPs display the MUSIC record. Year Month Date Time *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 y/step] [1 to 12 / 1 / 1 m/step] [1 to 31 / 1 / 1 d/step] [0 to 23 / 0 / 1 h/step]

G160/G161

5-38

SM

Service Mode Table

2186 005 2186 006 2186 007 2186 008 2186 009

Minute Temperature Result Execution Failure

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[0 to 59 / 0 / 1 y/step] [0 to 100 / 0 / 1C/step] [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 /step] [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step] [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]

[MUSIC Result] Automatic Line Position Adjustment Result 2187 2187 001 2187 002 2187 003 2187 004 The following SPs display the skew adjustment values after the line position adjustment have been done. [K]:Skew Adj. [M]:Skew Adj. [C]:Skew Adj. [Y]:Skew Adj. *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [-99 to 99 / 0 / 1 click/step]

[Charge Bias: DC] Charge Roller Voltage: DC 2201 (Process Speed, [Color]) Process Speed only when SP3-501-001 is set to "1". 2201 001 2201 002 2201 003 2201 004 2201 006 2201 007 2201 008 2201 009 RS: [K] RS: [M] RS: [C] RS: [Y] LS: [K] LS: [M] LS: [C] LS: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [200 to 999 / 585 / 1 V/step] LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed These SPs adjust the DC voltage of the drum charge roller. These are used

[Charge Bias: AC] Charge Roller Voltage: AC (Process Speed, [Color]) 2202 speed These SPs adjust the AC voltage of the drum charge roller. These are used 2202 001 2202 002 RS: [K] RS: [M] *EGB *EGB [0 to 3000 / 2000 / 1 V/step]
G160/G161 G160/G161

Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular

only when SP2-202-011 is set to "1".

SM

5-39

Service Mode Table

2202 003 2202 004 2202 006 2202 007 2202 008 2202 009

RS: [C] RS: [Y] LS: [K] LS: [M] LS: [C] LS: [Y]

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Selects the method for the charge roller AC bias adjustment. [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Process Control, 1: Setting Adjusts the interval for charge roller AC

2202 011

Output Control

*EGB

2202 012

Interval

*EGB

bias adjustment. [0 to 2000 / 210 / 1 sheet/step]

[Charge Bias: AC] Charge Roller Voltage: AC/I (Process Speed, [Color]) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular 2203 speed These SPs adjust the AC/I bias of the drum charge roller. These are used only when SP3-501-001 is set to 1. 2203 001 2203 002 2203 003 2203 004 RS: [K] RS: [M] RS: [C] RS: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1.5 / P2a: 0.49, P2b: 0.30 / 0.01 mA/step] [0 to 1.5 / P2a: 0.48, P2b: 0.30 / 0.01 mA/step] [0 to 1.5 / P2a: 0.49, P2b: 0.30 / 0.01 mA/step] [0 to 1.5 / P2a: 0.48, P2b: 0.30 / 0.01 mA/step]

[Charge Bias] Charge Roller Voltage: Corrections for humidity 2204 (Environmental correction, [Color]) For more about the humidity conditions, see SP 2304. Adds these environment correction coefficients to the charge bias. 2204 001 2204 002 2204 003 Environ. : HH: [K] Environ. : HH: [M] Environ. : HH: [C] *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 255 / P2a: 109, P2b: 204 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a: 107, P2b:196 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a: 104, P2b: 197 / 1%/step]

G160/G161

5-40

SM

Service Mode Table

2204 004 2204 006 2204 007 2204 008 2204 009 2204 011 2204 012 2204 013 2204 014 2204 016 2204 017 2204 018 2204 019 2204 021 2204 022 2204 023 2204 024

Environ. : HH: [Y] Environ. : H: [K] Environ. : H: [M] Environ. : H: [C] Environ. : H: [Y] Environ. : MM: [K] Environ. : MM: [M] Environ. : MM: [C] Environ. : MM: [Y] Environ. : L: [K] Environ. : L: [M] Environ. : L: [C] Environ. : L: [Y] Environ. : LL: [K] Environ. : LL: [M] Environ. : LL: [C] Environ. : LL: [Y]

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[0 to 255 / P2a: 106, P2b: 191 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a 106, P2b: 197 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a 106, P2b: 197/ 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a 106, P2b: 190 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a 104, P2b: 183 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a 101, P2b: 187 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a 101, P2b: 179 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a 100, P2b: 179 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a 100, P2b: 176 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a 105, P2b: 196 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a 104, P2b: 184 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a 103, P2b: 184 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a 105, P2b: 185 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a 110, P2b: 202 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a 109, P2b: 194 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a 110, P2b: 195 / 1%/step] [0 to 255 / P2a 109, P2b: 190 / 1%/step]

[Dev. Bias: DC] Development Bias: DC (Process Speed, [Color]) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed, LS: Low 2212 speed These SPs adjust the development bias. These are used only when SP3-501-001 is set to 1. 2212 001 2212 002 2212 003 2212 004 2212 005 2212 006 2212 007 2212 008 RS: [K] RS: [M] RS: [C] RS: [Y] LS: [K] LS: [M] LS: [C] LS: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB
G160/G161

[50 to 800 / 350 / 1 V/step]

2251 2251 001

[Manual Toner] Forced Toner Supply Execution [K] Manually executes toner supply for each

SM

5-41

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

2251 002 2251 003 2251 004

[M] [C] [Y]

color. The toner supply procedure is done specified times with SP2252 (supplied for one second on and one second off).

2252 2252 001 2252 002 2252 003 2252 004

[Forced Toner] Forced Toner Supply Execution Repeat: [K] Repeat: [M] Repeat: [C] Repeat: [Y] Adjusts the toner supply times for SP2251. [0 to 30 / 8 / 1 time/step]

2302 2302 001 2302 002 2302 003

[Temp./Humidity] Temperature / Humidity Display Temperature Relative Humidity Absolute Humidity Displays the temperature. [-128 to 127 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step] Display the relative humidity. [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1%RH/step] Display the absolute humidity. [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 g/m3/step] Display the current environment. [0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step] 0: LL, 1: ML, 2: MM, 3: MH, 4: HH

2302 004

Current Environ.

2303 2303 001

[Envir. Correct.] Environment Correction Manually sets the environment. Manual Correct. *EGB [0 to 5 / 0 / 1/step] 0: OFF, 1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH

[EC Threshold] Environment Correction Threshold 2304 2304 001 2304 002 2304 003 2304 004 (Humidity, Environment) A. Humidity: Absolute Humidity These SPs adjust the thresholds (absolute humidity) for each environment. A. Humidity: LL-MM A. Humidity: ML-MM A. Humidity: MM-MH A. Humidity: MH-HH *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 100 / 5.0 / 0.1 g/m3/step] [0 to 100 / 8.0 / 0.1 g/m3/step] [0 to 100 / 16.0 / 0.1 g/m3/step] [0 to 100 / 26.0 / 0.1 g/m3/step]

G160/G161

5-42

SM

Service Mode Table

2306 2306 001

[Vd Link Corre.] Vd Link Correction Sets the Vd link correction. Setting *EGB [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Execute, 1: Not execute Adjusts the Vd link correction coefficient. [1.00 to 2.50 / 1.00 / 0.01/step]

2306 002

Correction Coef.

*EGB

2314 2314 011 2314 012 2314 013

[Trans.Belt Bias] Transfer Belt Current at Process Control Adjusts the transfer belt current at process Process Cont. [K] Process Cont. [M] Process Cont. [C] *EGB *EGB *EGB control for [K]. [0 to 60 / P2a 15.0, P2b: 13.0 / 0.1 A /step] Adjusts the transfer belt current at process control for [M, C]. [0 to 60 / P2a 12.5, P2b: 10.0 / 0.1 A /step] Adjusts the transfer belt current at process control for [Y]. [0 to 60 / P2a 12.5, P2b: 13.0 / 0.1 A /step]

2314 014

Process Cont. [Y]

*EGB

[T.Roll2 Clean.] Transfer Roller Cleaning 2326 2326 002 2326 003 2326 005 2326 006 (Positive or Negative Bias, Process Speed) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed, LS: Low speed Posi. Bias: RS Posi. Bias: LS Nega. Bias: RS Nega. Bias: LS *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the positive voltage for transfer roller cleaning. [0 to 2 / 2.0 / 0.1 KV/step] Adjusts the negative voltage for transfer roller cleaning. [0 to 60 / 60.0 / 0.1V/step]

2352

[Trans.Belt Bias] Transfer Belt Current ([Color], Process Speed) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed Adjusts the current that is applied to the [K]: RS transfer belt.
G160/G161

2352 001

[0 to 60 / P2a 15.0, P2b: 17.0 / 0.1 A /step]

2353

[Trans.Belt Bias] Transfer Belt Current

SM

5-43

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

([Color], Process Speed) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed Adjusts the current that is applied to the 2353 001 [K]: LS *EGB transfer belt. [0 to 60 / P2a 6.0, P2b: 7.5 / 0.1 A /step]

2357

[Trans.Belt Bias] Transfer Belt Current ([Color], Process Speed) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed Adjusts the current that is applied to the [FC/ K]: RS [FC/ M]: RS [FC/ C]: RS [FC/ Y]: RS *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 60 / P2a 12.5, P2b: 15.0 / 0.1 A /step] transfer belt. [0 to 60 / P2a 15.0, P2b: 17.0 / 0.1 A /step]

2357 001 2357 002 2357 003 2357 004

[Trans.Belt Bias] Transfer Belt Current 2358 2358 001 2358 002 2358 003 2358 004 ([Color], Process Speed) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed Adjusts the current that is applied to the transfer belt. [FC/ K]: LS [FC/ M]: LS [FC/ C]: LS [FC/ Y]: LS *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 60 / 6.0 / 0.1 A /step] [0 to 60 / P2a 6.0, P2b: 7.5 / 0.1 micro-A/step]

[Normal: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area of plain paper 1 in B/W mode 2402 (Process Speed, Paper Side, Unit) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation) Adjusts the transfer roller current. 2402 007 RS: 1st: T. Roll2 *EGB [0 to 60 / P2a 25.0, P2b: 18.3/15.5 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -A/step] 2402 008 2402 012 2402 013 RS: 1st: Separa. RS: 2nd: T. Roll2 RS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -KV/step] [0 to 60 / P2a 20.0/15.0 (NA/EU), P2b: 18.3/15.5 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

G160/G161

5-44

SM

Service Mode Table

[Normal: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image 2403 area of plain paper 1 in B/W mode (Process Speed, Paper Side) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Adjusts the transfer roller current. 2403 007 LS: 1st: T. Roll2 *EGB [0 to 60 / P2a 15.0/17.5 (NA/EU), P2b: 15.3/12.5 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -A /step] 2403 008 2403 012 2403 013 LS: 1st: Separa. LS: 2nd: T. Roll2 LS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [0 to 60 / P2a 15.0/12.5 (NA/EU), P2b: 15.3/12.5 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

[Normal: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the 2407 image area of plain paper 1 in color mode (Process Speed, Paper Side) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Adjusts the transfer roller current. 2407 013 RS: 1st: T. Roll2 *EGB [0 to 60 / P2a 27.5/25.0 (NA/EU), P2b: 30.2/27.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -A /step] 2407 014 2407 021 2407 022 RS: 1st: Separa. RS: 2nd: T. Roll2 RS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [0 to 60 / P2a 25.0/27.5 (NA/EU), P2b: 25.5/30.2 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

[Normal: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the 2408 image area of plain paper 1 in color mode (Process Speed, Paper Side) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Adjusts the transfer roller current. / 0.1 -A /step] 2408 014 LS: 1st: Separa. *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.
G160/G161

2408 013

LS: 1st: T. Roll2

*EGB

[0 to 60 / P2a 20.0/17.5 (NA/EU), P2b: 21.3

SM

5-45

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] 2408 021 2408 022 LS: 2nd: T. Roll2 LS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB *EGB [0 to 60 / P2a 20.0, P2b: 18.3/19.5 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

[Normal:[K]:LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the 2421 leading edge area of plain paper 1 in B/W mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separation: Discharge plate (paper separation) 2421 003 2421 007 2421 012 Separation T.Roll2: 1st T.Roll2: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2422 2422 002 2422 003

[Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, plain paper 1 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> N: Normal LE: Leading Edge T. Roll 2: N: LE Separation: N: LE *EGB *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] [0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step]

[Normal: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the 2423 trailing edge area of plain paper 1 in B/W mode Paper side: 1st or 2nd Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separation: Discharge plate (paper separation) 2423 003 2423 007 2423 012 Separation T. Roll 2: 1st T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2424 2424 002 2424 003

[Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, plain paper 1 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> N: Normal, Edge ->TE: Trailing Edge T. Roll 2: N: TE Separation: N: TE *EGB *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step]

2426

[Normal: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the leading edge area of plain paper 1 in color mode

G160/G161

5-46

SM

Service Mode Table

Paper side: 1st or 2nd 2426 003 2426 007 2426 012 Separation T. Roll 2: 1st T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2428 2428 003 2428 007 2428 012

[Normal: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the trailing edge area of plain paper 1 in color mode Separation T. Roll 2: 1st T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

[Normal2: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area of plain paper 2 in B/W mode 2432 (Process Speed, Paper Side, Unit) Process Speed -> RS: Regular speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation) Adjusts the transfer roller current. 2432 007 RS: 1st: T. Roll 2 *EGB [0 to 60 / P2a 17.5, P2b: 15.5/15.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -A /step] 2432 008 2432 012 2432 013 RS: 1st: Separa. RS: 2nd: T. Roll 2 RS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [0 to 60 / P2a 15.0, P2b: 15.3 / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

[Normal2: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the 2433 image area of plain paper 2 in B/W mode (Process Speed, Paper Side) Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Adjusts the transfer roller current. 2433 007 LS: 1st: T. Roll 2 *EGB [0 to 60 / P2a 11.0, P2b: 10.0/12.3 (NA/EU) / Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
G160/G161

0.1 -A /step] 2433 008 LS: 1st: Separa. *EGB

SM

5-47

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

2433 012 2433 013

LS: 2nd: T. Roll 2 LS: 2nd: Separa.

*EGB *EGB

[0 to 60 / P2a 12.5, P2b: 12.5/12.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

[Normal2: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the 2437 image area of plain paper 2 in color mode (Process Speed, Paper Side) RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Adjusts the transfer roller current. 2437 013 RS: 1st: T. Roll 2 *EGB [0 to 60 / P2a 20.0, P2b: 24.3/18.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -A /step] 2437 014 2437 021 2437 022 RS: 1st: Separa. RS: 2nd: T. Roll 2 RS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [0 to 60 / P2a 20.0/22.5 (NA/EU), P2b: 19.5/21.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

[Normal2: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the 2438 image area of plain paper 2 in color mode (Process Speed, Paper Side) LS: Low Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Adjusts the transfer roller current. 2438 013 LS: 1st: T. Roll 2 *EGB [0 to 60 / P2a 12.5/15.0 (NA/EU), P2b: 12.3 / 0.1 -A /step] 2438 014 2438 021 2438 022 LS: 1st: Separa. LS: 2nd: T. Roll 2 LS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [0 to 60 / P2a 15.0/20.0 (NA/EU), P2b: 13.5/15.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

[Normal2:[K]:LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the 2451 leading edge area of plain paper 2 in B/W mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separation: Discharge plate (paper separation) 2451 003 2451 007 2451 012 Separation Trans.Roll2: 1st Trans.Roll2: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%"

G160/G161

5-48

SM

Service Mode Table

on the LCD actually means 100%.

2452 2452 002 2452 003

[Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, plain paper 2 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> N: Normal, LE: Leading Edge T. Roll 2: N2: LE Separation: N2: LE *EGB *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] [0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step]

[Normal2: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the 2453 trailing edge area of plain paper 2 in B/W mode Paper side: 1st or 2nd Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separation: Discharge plate (paper separation) 2453 003 2453 007 2453 012 Separation T. Roll 2: 1st T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2454 2454 002 2454 003

[Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, plain paper 2 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> N: Normal, TE: Trailing Edge T. Roll 2: N2: TE Separation: N2: TE *EGB *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step]

[Normal2:[FC]:LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the 2456 2456 003 2456 007 2456 012 leading edge area of plain paper 2 in color mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Separation T. Roll 2: 1st T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

[Normal2:[FC]:TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the 2458 2458 003 2458 007 2458 012 trailing edge area of plain paper 2 in color mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Separation T. Roll 2: 1st T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%"
G160/G161

SM

5-49

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

on the LCD actually means 100%.

[Spec1:[K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the leading 2462 edge area of special paper 1 in B/W mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd 2462 007 2462 008 2462 012 2462 013 RS: 1st: T.Roll2 RS: 1st:Separa. RS: 2nd: T.Roll2 RS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 100 / P2a 22.5, P2b: 15.5 / 0.1 A /step] [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step] [0 to 100 / 25.0 / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]

[Spec1:[K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the trailing 2463 edge area of special paper 1 in B/W mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd 2463 007 2463 008 2463 012 2463 013 LS: 1st: T.Roll2 LS: 1st:Separa. LS: 2nd: T.Roll2 LS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 100 / P2a 15.0, P2b: 12.5 / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step] [0 to 100 / 20.0 / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]

[Spec1:[FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the leading 2467 edge area of special paper 1 in color mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd 2467 013 2467 014 2467 021 2467 022 RS: 1st: T.Roll2 RS: 1st:Separa. RS: 2nd: T.Roll2 RS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 100 / P2a 22.5, P2b: 18.5 / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step] [0 to 100 / P2a 35.0, P2b: 30.0 / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]

[Spec1:[FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the trailing 2468 edge area of special paper 1 in color mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd 2468 013 LS: 1st: T.Roll2 *EGB [0 to 100 / P2a 12.5, P2b: 17.5 / 0.1 -A /step]

G160/G161

5-50

SM

Service Mode Table

2468 014 2468 021 2468 022

LS: 1st:Separa. LS: 2nd: T.Roll2 LS: 2nd: Separa.

*EGB *EGB *EGB

[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step] [0 to 100 / P2a 35.0, P2b: 25.0 / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]

[Glossy2:[K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the 2472 leading edge area of glossy paper 2 in B/W mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd 2472 007 2472 008 2472 012 2472 013 RS: 1st: T.Roll2 RS: 1st:Separa. RS: 2nd: T.Roll2 RS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 100 / P2a 15.0, P2b: 12.5 / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step] [0 to 100 / 13.0 / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]

[Glossy2:[K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the 2473 2473 007 2473 008 2473 012 2473 013 trailing edge area of glossy paper 2 in B/W mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd LS: 1st: T.Roll2 LS: 1st:Separa. LS: 2nd: T.Roll2 LS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 100 / 10.0 / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step] [0 to 100 / P2a 11.2, P2b: 10.0 / 0.1 -A/step] [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]

[Glossy2:[FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the 2477 2477 013 2477 014 2477 021 2477 022 leading edge area of glossy paper 2 in color mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd RS: 1st: T.Roll2 RS: 1st:Separa. RS: 2nd: T.Roll2 RS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 100 / 15.0 / 0.1 -A/step] [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step] [0 to 100 / P2a 17.5, P2b: 15.0 / 0.1 -A/step] [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]
G160/G161 SM 5-51 G160/G161

Service Mode Table

[Glossy2:[FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the 2478 2478 013 2478 014 2478 021 2478 022 trailing edge area of glossy paper 2 in color mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd LS: 1st: T.Roll2 LS: 1st: Separa. LS: 2nd: T.Roll2 LS: 2nd: Separa. *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 100 / 10.0 / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step] [0 to 100 / P2a 13.5, P2b: 10.0 / 0.1 -A/step] [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -kV/step]

[Spec1:[K]:TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction 2481 2481 007 2481 012 for the leading edge area of special paper 1 in B/W mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd RS: 1st: T.Roll2 RS: 2nd: T.Roll2 *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[Spec1:[K]:LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction 2483 2483 007 2483 012 for the trailing edge area of special paper 1 in B/W mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd LS: 1st: T.Roll2 LS: 2nd: T.Roll2 *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[Spec1:[FC]:TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction 2486 2486 007 2486 012 for the leading edge area of special paper 1 in color mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd RS: 1st: T.Roll2 RS: 2nd:Separa. *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[Spec1:[FC]:LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction 2488 2488 007 2488 012 for the trailing edge area of special paper 1 in color mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd LS: 1st: T.Roll2 LS: 1st:Separa. *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

2491

[Glossy2:[K]:TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the leading edge area of glossy paper 2 in B/W mode

G160/G161

5-52

SM

Service Mode Table

Paper Side: 1st or 2nd 2491 007 2491 012 RS: 1st: T.Roll2 RS: 2nd: T.Roll2 *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[Glossy2:[K]:LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage 2493 2493 007 2493 012 correction for the trailing edge area of glossy paper 2 in B/W mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd LS: 1st: T.Roll2 LS: 2nd: T.Roll2 *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[Glossy2:[FC]:TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage 2496 2496 007 2496 012 correction for the leading edge area of glossy paper 2 in color mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd RS: 1st: T.Roll2 RS: 2nd:Separa. *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[Glossy2:[FC]:LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage 2498 2498 007 2498 012 correction for the trailing edge area of glossy paper 2 in color mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd LS: 1st: T.Roll2 LS: 2nd:Separa. *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[Thick: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image 2501 area of thick paper 1 in B/W mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation) 2501 007 2501 008 2501 012 2501 013 T. Roll 2: 1st Separation: 1st T. Roll 2: 2nd Separation: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / P2a 10.0, P2b: 9.2 / 0.1 -A /step] Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [0 to 60 / P2a 12.5, P2b: 12.3 / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]
G160/G161

2506

[Thick: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area of thick paper 1 in color mode

SM

5-53

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

Paper Side: 1st or 2nd 2506 013 2506 014 2506 021 2506 022 T. Roll 2: 1st Separation: 1st T. Roll 2: 2nd Separation: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / P2a 11.0, P2b: 12.3 / 0.1 -A /step] Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] [0 to 60 / P2a 17.5, P2b: 18.3 / 0.1 -A /step] [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

[Thick: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction 2521 2521 003 2521 007 2521 012 for the leading edge area of thick paper 1 in B/W mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Separation T. Roll 2: 1st T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2522 2522 002 2522 003

[Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, thick paper 1 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TC: Thick, LE: Leading Edge T. Roll 2: Thick: LE Separation: TC: LE *EGB *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] [0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step]

[Thick: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction 2523 2523 003 2523 007 2523 012 for the trailing edge area of thick paper 1 in B/W mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Separation T. Roll 2: 1st T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2524 2524 002 2524 003

[Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, thick paper 1 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TC: Thick, TE: Trailing Edge T. Roll 2: Thick: TE Separation: TC: TE *EGB *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step]

G160/G161

5-54

SM

Service Mode Table

[Thick: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction 2526 2526 003 2526 007 2526 012 for the leading edge area of thick paper 1 in color mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Separation T. Roll 2: 1st T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

[Thick: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction 2528 2528 003 2528 007 2528 012 for the trailing edge area of thick paper 1 in color mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Separation T. Roll 2: 1st T. Roll 2: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

[Thick2: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image 2531 area of thick paper 2 in B/W mode Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation) 2531 007 2531 008 Transfer Roller 2 Separation *EGB *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / P2a 10.0, P2b: 9.2 / 0.1 -A /step] Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

2536 2536 013 2536 014

[Thick2: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area of thick paper 2 in color mode Transfer Roller 2 Separation *EGB *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / P2a 12.5, P2b: 12.3 / 0.1 -A /step] Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

2551 003 2551 007

Separation Transfer Roller2

*EGB *EGB

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different

SM

5-55

G160/G161

G160/G161

2551

[Thick2: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the leading edge area of thick paper 2 in B/W mode

Service Mode Table

from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2552 2552 002 2552 003

[Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, thick paper 2 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TC2: Thick 2, LE: Leading Edge T. Roll 2: TC2: LE Separa.: TC2: LE *EGB *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step]

2553 2553 003 2553 007

[Thick2: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the trailing edge area of thick paper 2 in B/W mode Separation Transfer Roller2 *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2554 2554 002 2554 003

[Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, thick paper 2 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TC2: Thick 2, TE: Trailing Edge T. Roll 2: TC2: TE Separa.: TC2: TE *EGB *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step]

2556 2556 003 2556 007

[Thick2: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the leading edge area of thick paper 2 in color mode Separation Transfer Roller2 *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2558 2558 003 2558 007

[Thick2: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the trailing edge area of thick paper 2 in color mode Separation Transfer Roller2 *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

G160/G161

5-56

SM

Service Mode Table

2561

[Special1: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the leading edge area of special paper 1 in B/W mode [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2561 003

Separation

*EGB

2563

[Special1: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the trailing edge area of special paper 1 in B/W mode [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2563 003

Separation

*EGB

2566

[Special1: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the leading edge area of special paper 1 in color mode [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2566 003

Separation

*EGB

2568

[Special1: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the trailing edge area of special paper 1 in color mode [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2568 003

Separation

*EGB

2571

[Glossy2: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the leading edge area of glossy paper 2 in B/W mode [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different on the LCD actually means 100%.
G160/G161

2571 003

Separation

*EGB

from these SP's values. For example, "20%"

SM

5-57

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

2573

[Glossy2: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the trailing edge area of glossy paper 2 in B/W mode [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2573 003

Separation

*EGB

2576

[Glossy2: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the leading edge area of glossy paper 2 in color mode [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2576 003

Separation

*EGB

2578

[Glossy2: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the trailing edge area of glossy paper 2 in color mode [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2578 003

Separation

*EGB

[OHP: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image 2601 area of OHP in B/W mode Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation) 2601 002 2601 003 Transfer Roller2 Separation *EGB *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / P2a 15.0, P2b: 7.5 / 0.1 -A /step] Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

2606 2606 005 2606 006

[OHP: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area of OHP in color mode Transfer Roller2 Separation *EGB *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / P2a 15.0, P2b: 21.3 / 0.1 -A /step Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 -KV/step]

G160/G161

5-58

SM

Service Mode Table

2621 2621 002 2621 003

[OHP: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the leading edge area of OHP in B/W mode Transfer Roller2 Separation *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2622 2622 002 2622 003

[Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, OHP (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> OHP, LE: Leading Edge T. Roll 2: OHP: LE Separa.: OHP: LE *EGB *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] [0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step]

2623 2623 002 2623 003

[OHP: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the trailing edge area of OHP in B/W mode Transfer Roller2 Separation *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2624 2624 002 2624 003

[Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, OHP (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> OHP, TE: Trailing Edge T. Roll 2: OHP: TE Separa.: OHP: TE *EGB *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step]

2626 2626 002 2626 003

[OHP: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the leading edge area of OHP in color mode Transfer Roller2 Separation *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
G160/G161

2628 2628 002

[OHP: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the trailing edge area of OHP in B/W mode Transfer Roller2 *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

SM

5-59

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

The value displayed on the LCD is different 2628 003 Separation *EGB from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

[Thin: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image 2631 area of thin paper in B/W mode Unit -> T.Roll2: Transfer roller, Separa.: Discharge plate (paper separation) 2631 007 2631 008 Transfer Roller 2 Separation *EGB *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 30.0 / 0.1 -A /step] Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

[Thin: [K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image 2633 area of thin paper in B/W mode Process Speed -> LS: Low Speed 2633 007 2633 008 T.Roll 2: LS Separation: LS *EGB *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current. [0 to 60 / 15.0 / 0.5 -A /step] Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

2636

[Thin: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image area of thin paper in color mode Adjusts the transfer roller current. Transfer Roller 2 *EGB [0 to 100 / P2a 27.5/25.0 (NA/EU), P2b: 30.2/24.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -A /step] Adjusts the discharge plate voltage. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

2636 013

2636 014

Separation

*EGB

[Thin: [FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image 2638 area, of thin paper in color mode Process Speed -> LS: Low Speed Adjusts the transfer roller current. 2638 013 2638 014 T.Roll 2: LS Separation: LS *EGB *EGB [0 to 100 / P2a 17.5, P2b: 21.3/18.3 (NA/EU) / 0.1 -A /step] Adjusts the discharge plate voltage.

G160/G161

5-60

SM

Service Mode Table

[0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

2651

[Thin: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the leading edge area of thin paper in B/W mode [0 to 400 / 200 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "40%" on the LCD actually means 200 %. [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2651 003

Separation

*EGB

2651 007

Transfer Roller2

*EGB

2652 2652 002 2652 003

[Switch Timing] Switch timing from leading edge to normal, thin paper (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TN: Thin, LE: Leading Edge T. Roll 2: Thin: LE Separation: TN: LE *EGB *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] [0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step]

2653 2653 003 2653 007

[Thin: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the trailing edge area of thin paper in B/W mode Separation Transfer Roller2 *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2654 2654 002 2654 003

[Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, thin paper (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TN: Thin, TE: Trailing Edge T. Roll 2: Thin: TE Separation: TN: TE *EGB *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step]

2656

[Thin: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the leading edge area of thin paper in color mode [0 to 400 / 200 / 5%/step] Separation *EGB The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "40%"
G160/G161

2656 003

SM

5-61

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

on the LCD actually means 200 %. [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] 2656 007 Transfer Roller2 *EGB The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2658 2658 003 2658 007

[Thin: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction for the trailing edge area of thin paper in color mode Separation Transfer Roller2 *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

[Special3:[K]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the image 2751 area of special paper 3 in B/W mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd 2751 007 T.Roll 2: 1st *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current for 1st side. [0 to 100 / 7.5 / 0.1 -A /step] Adjusts the discharge plate voltage for 1st 2751 008 Separation: 1st *EGB side. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] Adjusts the transfer roller current for 2nd 2751 021 T.Roll2:nd *EGB side. [0 to 100 / P2a: 15.0, P2b: 10.0 / 0.1 -A /step] Adjusts the discharge plate voltage for 2nd 2751 022 Separation: 2nd *EGB side. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

[Special3:[FC]] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage for the 2756 image area of special paper 3 in color mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd 2756 013 2756 014 T.Roll 2: 1st Separation: 1st *EGB *EGB Adjusts the transfer roller current for 1st side. [0 to 100 / 10.0 / 0.1 -A /step] Adjusts the discharge plate voltage for 1st

G160/G161

5-62

SM

Service Mode Table

side. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step] Adjusts the transfer roller current for 2nd 2756 021 T.Roll2:nd *EGB side. [0 to 100 / P2a: 20.0, P2b: 15.0 / 0.1 -A /step] Adjusts the discharge plate voltage for 2nd 2756 022 Separation: 2nd *EGB side. [0 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.1 -KV/step]

[Special: [K]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage 2771 2771 003 2771 007 2771 012 correction for the leading edge area of special paper 3 in B/W mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Separation T.Roll 2: 1st T.Roll 2: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2772 2772 002 2772 003

[Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to leading edge, special paper 3 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TN: Thin, TE: Trailing Edge T. Roll 2: Sp3: TE Separation: TN: TE *EGB *EGB [0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] [0 to 200 / 25 / 1 mm/step]

[Special: [K]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage 2773 2773 003 2773 007 2773 012 correction for the trailing edge area of special paper 3 in B/W mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Separation T.Roll 2: 1st T.Roll 2: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

2774 002 2774 003

T. Roll 2: Sp3: TE Separation: TN: TE

*EGB *EGB

[0 to 200 / 10 / 1 mm/step] [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 mm/step]

SM

5-63

G160/G161

G160/G161

2774

[Switch Timing] Switch timing from normal to trailing edge, special paper 3 (Paper Type, Edge) Paper Type -> TN: Thin, TE: Trailing Edge

Service Mode Table

[SP: [FC]: LE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction 2776 2776 003 2776 007 2776 012 for the leading edge area of special paper 3 in color mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Separation T.Roll 2: 1st T.Roll 2: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

[SP: [FC]: TE] Transfer roller current and discharge plate voltage correction 2778 2778 003 2778 007 2778 012 for the trailing edge area of special paper 3 in color mode Paper Side: 1st or 2nd Separation T.Roll 2: 1st T.Roll 2: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

[T2: N: Size 4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Plain paper 1, Paper width between A5 and A6 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side) 2901 LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2901 001 2901 002 2901 003 2901 004 2901 005 2901 006 2901 007 2901 008 2901 009 2901 010 LL: RS [K]: 1st LL: RS [K]: 2nd LL: RS [FC]: 1st LL: RS [FC]: 2nd LL: LS [K]: 1st LL: LS [K]: 2nd LL: LS [FC]: 1st LL: LS [FC]: 2nd MM: RS [K]: 1st MM: RS [K]: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / P2a: 135, P2b: 160 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 220 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 165, P2b: 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 190, P2b: 185 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 130, P2b: 135 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 240, P2b: 175 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 120, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 215, P2b: 235 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 140, P2b: 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 235/265 (NA/EU), P2b: 265 / 5%/step]

G160/G161

5-64

SM

Service Mode Table

2901 011 2901 012 2901 013 2901 014 2901 015 2901 016 2901 017 2901 018 2901 019 2901 020 2901 021 2901 022 2901 023 2901 024

MM: RS [FC]: 1st MM: RS [FC]: 2nd MM: LS [K]: 1st MM: LS [K]: 2nd MM: LS [FC]: 1st MM: LS [FC]: 2nd HH: RS [K]: 1st HH: RS [K]: 2nd HH: RS [FC]: 1st HH: RS [FC]: 2nd HH: LS [K]: 1st HH: LS [K]: 2nd HH: LS [FC]: 1st HH: LS [FC]: 2nd

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 125 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 245, P2b: 310 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 120, P2b: 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 285/300 (NA/EU), P2b: 300 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 100, P2b: 145 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 290, P2b: 350 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 450 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 215/270 (NA/EU), P2b: 400 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 110, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 260, P2b: 310 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 350 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 295, P2b: 540/570 (NA/EU) / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 290 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 335 / 5%/step]

[T2: N: Size 5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Plain paper 1, Paper width A6 or less (Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side) 2902 LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2902 001 2902 002 2902 003 2902 004 2902 005 2902 006 2902 007 2902 008 LL: RS [K]: 1st LL: RS [K]: 2nd LL: RS [FC]: 1st LL: RS [FC]: 2nd LL: LS [K]: 1st LL: LS [K]: 2nd LL: LS [FC]: 1st LL: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / P2a: 170/200 (NA/EU), P2b: 160 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 360, P2b: 290/275 (NA/EU) / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 200, P2b: 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 260, P2b: 185 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 335, P2b: 240 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 160, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 300, P2b: 235 / 5%/step]
G160/G161

SM

5-65

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

2902 009 2902 010 2902 011 2902 012 2902 013 2902 014 2902 015 2902 016 2902 017 2902 018 2902 019 2902 020 2902 021 2902 022 2902 023 2902 024

MM: RS [K]: 1st MM: RS [K]: 2nd MM: RS [FC]: 1st MM: RS [FC]: 2nd MM: LS [K]: 1st MM: LS [K]: 2nd MM: LS [FC]: 1st MM: LS [FC]: 2nd HH: RS [K]: 1st HH: RS [K]: 2nd HH: RS [FC]: 1st HH: RS [FC]: 2nd HH: LS [K]: 1st HH: LS [K]: 2nd HH: LS [FC]: 1st HH: LS [FC]: 2nd

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 230 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 285/345 (NA/EU), P2b: 310/325 (NA/EU) / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 185/180 (NA/EU), P2b: 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 275, P2b: 310/ / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 130, P2b: 245 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 365, P2b: 400 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 140, P2b: 295 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 320, P2b: 350 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 135, P2b: 455 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 240/290 (NA/EU), P2b: 400 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 290, P2b: 310 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 400 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 320, P2b: 540/650 (NA/EU) / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 290 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 400, P2b: 335 / 5%/step]

[T2: N2: Size 4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Plain paper 2 Paper width between A5 and A6 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side) 2903 LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2903 001 2903 002 2903 003 2903 004 2903 005 2903 006 2903 007 LL: RS [K]: 1st LL: RS [K]: 2nd LL: RS [FC]: 1st LL: RS [FC]: 2nd LL: LS [K]: 1st LL: LS [K]: 2nd LL: LS [FC]: 1st *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / P2a: 135, P2b: 160 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 220 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 165, P2b: 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 190, P2b: 185 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 130, P2b: 135 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 200, P2b: 175 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 120, P2b: 165 / 5%/step]

G160/G161

5-66

SM

Service Mode Table

2903 008 2903 009 2903 010 2903 011 2903 012 2903 013 2903 014 2903 015 2903 016 2903 017 2903 018 2903 019 2903 020 2903 021 2903 022 2903 023 2903 024

LL: LS [FC]: 2nd MM: RS [K]: 1st MM: RS [K]: 2nd MM: RS [FC]: 1st MM: RS [FC]: 2nd MM: LS [K]: 1st MM: LS [K]: 2nd MM: LS [FC]: 1st MM: LS [FC]: 2nd HH: RS [K]: 1st HH: RS [K]: 2nd HH: RS [FC]: 1st HH: RS [FC]: 2nd HH: LS [K]: 1st HH: LS [K]: 2nd HH: LS [FC]: 1st HH: LS [FC]: 2nd

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[0 to 1275 / P2a: 215, P2b: 235 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 140, P2b: 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 250, P2b: 265 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125/145 (NA/EU), P2b: 125 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 245, P2b: 310 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 120, P2b: 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 255, P2b: 355 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 145 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 290, P2b: 350 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 450 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 270/240 (NA/EU), P2b: 400 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 110, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 260, P2b: 310 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 350 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 295, P2b: 540/535 (NA/EU) / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 290 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 335 / 5%/step]

[T2: N2: Size 5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Plain paper 2, Paper width A6 or less (Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side) 2904 LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2904 001 2904 002 2904 003 2904 004 LL: RS [K]: 1st LL: RS [K]: 2nd LL: RS [FC]: 1st LL: RS [FC]: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / P2a: 155, P2b: 160 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 320, P2b: 265/225 (NA/EU) / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 200/175 (NA/EU), P2b: 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 260/220 (NA/EU), P2b: 185 / 5%/step]
G160/G161

SM

5-67

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

2904 005 2904 006 2904 007 2904 008 2904 009 2904 010 2904 011 2904 012 2904 013 2904 014 2904 015 2904 016 2904 017 2904 018 2904 019 2904 020 2904 021 2904 022 2904 023 2904 024

LL: LS [K]: 1st LL: LS [K]: 2nd LL: LS [FC]: 1st LL: LS [FC]: 2nd MM: RS [K]: 1st MM: RS [K]: 2nd MM: RS [FC]: 1st MM: RS [FC]: 2nd MM: LS [K]: 1st MM: LS [K]: 2nd MM: LS [FC]: 1st MM: LS [FC]: 2nd HH: RS [K]: 1st HH: RS [K]: 2nd HH: RS [FC]: 1st HH: RS [FC]: 2nd HH: LS [K]: 1st HH: LS [K]: 2nd HH: LS [FC]: 1st HH: LS [FC]: 2nd

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 280, P2b: 240 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 160, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a:300, P2b: 235 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 230 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 265/290 (NA/EU), P2b: 345 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 275, P2b: 310 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 145, P2b: 245 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 265, P2b: 375 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 165, P2b: 295 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 320, P2b: 350 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 135, P2b: 455 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 290/270 (NA/EU), P2b: 400 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 290, P2b: 310 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 400 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 320, P2b: 540/535 (NA/EU) / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 290 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 400, P2b: 335 / 5%/step]

[T2: Thin: Size4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thin Paper, Paper width between A5 and A6 2905 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2905 001 2905 002 2905 003 2905 004 LL: RS [K] LL: RS [FC] LL: LS [K] LL: LS [FC] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / P2a: 135, P2b: 160 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 140, P2b: 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 130, P2b: 135 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 120, P2b: 165 / 5%/step]

G160/G161

5-68

SM

Service Mode Table

2905 005 2905 006 2905 007 2905 008 2905 009 2905 010 2905 011 2905 012

MM: RS [K] MM: RS [FC] MM: LS [K] MM: LS [FC] HH: RS [K] HH: RS [FC] HH: LS [K] HH: LS [FC]

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[0 to 1275 / P2a: 140, P2b: 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 140/125 (NA/EU), P2b: 125 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 120, P2b: 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 140/100 (NA/EU), P2b: 145 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 450 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 110, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 350 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 290 / 5%/step]

[T2: Thin: Size5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thin paper, Paper width A6 or less 2906 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2906 001 2906 002 2906 003 2906 004 2906 005 2906 006 2906 007 2906 008 2906 009 2906 010 2906 011 2906 012 LL: RS [K] LL: RS [FC] LL: LS [K] LL: LS [FC] MM: RS [K] MM: RS [FC] MM: LS [K] MM: LS [FC] HH: RS [K] HH: RS [FC] HH: LS [K] HH: LS [FC] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / P2a: 165, P2b: 160 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 200, P2b: 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 160, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 230 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 185/150 (NA/EU), P2b: 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 130, P2b: 245 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 170/140 (NA/EU), P2b: 295 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 135, P2b: 455 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 400 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 290 / 5%/step]
G160/G161

[T2: TC: Size4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thick Paper 2907 1, Paper width between A5 and A6 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side)

SM

5-69

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2907 001 2907 002 2907 003 2907 004 2907 005 2907 006 2907 007 2907 008 2907 009 2907 010 2907 011 2907 012 LL: LS [K]: 1st LL: LS [K]: 2nd LL: LS [FC]: 1st LL: LS [FC]: 2nd MM: LS [K]: 1st MM: LS [K]: 2nd MM: LS [FC]: 1st MM: LS [FC]: 2nd HH: LS [K]: 1st HH: LS [K]: 2nd HH: LS [FC]: 1st HH: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 260, P2b: 255 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 250 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 180 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 300, P2b: 335 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 170 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 300, P2b: 320 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step]

[T2: TC: Size5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thick paper 1, Paper width A6 or less (Environment, Process Speed, [Color], Paper Side) 2908 LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed, Paper Side: 1st or 2nd The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2908 001 2908 002 2908 003 2908 004 2908 005 2908 006 2908 007 2908 008 2908 009 2908 010 2908 011 LL: LS [K]: 1st LL: LS [K]: 2nd LL: LS [FC]: 1st LL: LS [FC]: 2nd MM: LS [K]: 1st MM: LS [K]: 2nd MM: LS [FC]: 1st MM: LS [FC]: 2nd HH: LS [K]: 1st HH: LS [K]: 2nd HH: LS [FC]: 1st *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / 205 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 420, P2b: 410 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 265 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 500 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 435 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 245 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 495, P2b: 535 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step]

G160/G161

5-70

SM

Service Mode Table

2908 012

HH: LS [FC]: 2nd

*EGB

[0 to 1275 / 445 / 5%/step]

[T2: TC2: Size4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thick Paper 2, Paper width between A5 and A6 2909 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2909 001 2909 002 2909 003 2909 004 2909 005 2909 006 LL: LS [K] LL: LS [FC] MM: LS [K] MM: LS [FC] HH: LS [K] HH: LS [FC] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 180 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 170 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]

[T2: TC2: Size5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Thick paper 2, Paper width A6 or less 2910 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2910 001 2910 002 2910 003 2910 004 2910 005 2910 006 LL: LS [K] LL: LS [FC] MM: LS [K] MM: LS [FC] HH: LS [K] HH: LS [FC] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / 205 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 265 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 245 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step]

[T2: SP Size4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Special paper, Paper width between A5 and A6 2911 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2911 001 LL: LS [K] *EGB [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]
G160/G161

SM

5-71

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

2911 002 2911 003 2911 004 2911 005 2911 006

LL: LS [FC] MM: LS [K] MM: LS [FC] HH: LS [K] HH: LS [FC]

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[0 to 1275 / 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 180 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 170 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]

101-106 These are used for 2nd side of the paper. 2911 101 2911 102 2911 103 2911 104 2911 105 2911 106 LL: LS: [K] LL: LS: [FC] MM: LS: [K] MM: LS: [FC] HH: LS: [K] HH: LS: [FC] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / P2a: 285, P2b: 320 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 250 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 300, P2b: 355 (NA/EU)150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 320 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 270 / 5%/step]

[T2: SP: Size5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Special paper, Paper width A6 or less 2912 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2912 001 2912 002 2912 003 2912 004 2912 005 2912 006 LL: LS [K] LL: LS [FC] MM: LS [K] MM: LS [FC] HH: LS [K] HH: LS [FC] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / 205 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 265 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 245 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 200 / 5%/step]

101-106 These are used for 2nd side of the paper. 2912 101 2912 102 2912 103 2912 104 2912 105 2912 106 LL: LS: [K] LL: LS: [FC] MM: LS: [K] MM: LS: [FC] HH: LS: [K] HH: LS: [FC] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / P2a: 455, P2b: 535 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 400 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 500, P2b: 510 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 435 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 535 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 445 / 5%/step]

G160/G161

5-72

SM

Service Mode Table

[T2: SP1: Size4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Special paper1, Paper width between A5 and A6 2913 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2913 001 2913 002 2913 003 2913 004 2913 005 2913 006 2913 007 2913 008 2913 009 2913 010 2913 011 2913 012 2913 013 2913 014 2913 015 2913 016 2913 017 2913 018 2913 019 2913 020 2913 021 2913 022 2913 023 2913 024 LL: RS [K]: 1st LL: RS [K]: 2nd LL: RS [FC]: 1st LL: RS [FC]: 2nd LL: LS [K]: 1st LL: LS [K]: 2nd LL: LS [FC]: 1st LL: LS [FC]: 2nd MM: RS [K]: 1st MM: RS [K]: 2nd MM: RS [FC]: 1st MM: RS [FC]: 2nd MM: LS [K]: 1st MM: LS [K]: 2nd MM: LS [FC]: 1st MM: LS [FC]: 2nd HH: RS [K]: 1st HH: RS [K]: 2nd HH: RS [FC]: 1st HH: RS [FC]: 2nd HH: LS [K]: 1st HH: LS [K]: 2nd HH: LS [FC]: 1st HH: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / P2a: 135, P2b: 160 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 220 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 135, P2b: 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 190, P2b: 185 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 130, P2b: 135 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 240, P2b: 175 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 120, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 215, P2b: 235 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 140, P2b: 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 265 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 125 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 245, P2b: 310 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 120, P2b: 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 300 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 145 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 290, P2b: 350 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 450 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 270, P2b: 400 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 110, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 260, P2b: 310 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 350 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 295, P2b: 455 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 290 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 335 / 5%/step]

2914

paper1, Paper width A6 or less (Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed

SM

5-73

G160/G161

G160/G161

[T2: SP1: Size5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Special

Service Mode Table

The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2914 001 2914 002 2914 003 2914 004 2914 005 2914 006 2914 007 2914 008 2914 009 2914 010 2914 011 2914 012 2914 013 2914 014 2914 015 2914 016 2914 017 2914 018 2914 019 2914 020 2914 021 2914 022 2914 023 2914 024 LL: RS [K]: 1st LL: RS [K]: 2nd LL: RS [FC]: 1st LL: RS [FC]: 2nd LL: LS [K]: 1st LL: LS [K]: 2nd LL: LS [FC]: 1st LL: LS [FC]: 2nd MM: RS [K]: 1st MM: RS [K]: 2nd MM: RS [FC]: 1st MM: RS [FC]: 2nd MM: LS [K]: 1st MM: LS [K]: 2nd MM: LS [FC]: 1st MM: LS [FC]: 2nd HH: RS [K]: 1st HH: RS [K]: 2nd HH: RS [FC]: 1st HH: RS [FC]: 2nd HH: LS [K]: 1st HH: LS [K]: 2nd HH: LS [FC]: 1st HH: LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / P2a: 170, P2b: 160 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 310, P2b: 260 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 165, P2b: 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 225, P2b: 185 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 335, P2b: 240 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 160, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 300, P2b: 235 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 230 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 275, P2b: 325 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 275, P2b: 310 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 130, P2b: 245 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 365, P2b: 400 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 200, P2b: 295 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 320, P2b: 350 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 135, P2b: 455 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 290, P2b: 400 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 290, P2b: 310 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 400 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 320, P2b: 455 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 290 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 400, P2b: 335 / 5%/step]

[T2:GL2:Size4] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Glossary paper2, Paper width between A5 and A6 2915 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

G160/G161

5-74

SM

Service Mode Table

2915 001 2915 002 2915 003 2915 004 2915 005 2915 006 2915 007 2915 008 2915 009 2915 010 2915 011 2915 012 2915 013 2915 014 2915 015 2915 016 2915 017 2915 018 2915 019 2915 020 2915 021 2915 022 2915 023 2915 024

LL: RS [K]: 1st LL: RS [K]: 2nd LL: RS [FC]: 1st LL: RS [FC]: 2nd LL: LS [K]: 1st LL: LS [K]: 2nd LL: LS [FC]: 1st LL: LS [FC]: 2nd MM: RS [K]: 1st MM: RS [K]: 2nd MM: RS [FC]: 1st MM: RS [FC]: 2nd MM: LS [K]: 1st MM: LS [K]: 2nd MM: LS [FC]: 1st MM: LS [FC]: 2nd HH: RS [K]: 1st HH: RS [K]: 2nd HH: RS [FC]: 1st HH: RS [FC]: 2nd HH: LS [K]: 1st HH: LS [K]: 2nd HH: LS [FC]: 1st HH: LS [FC]: 2nd

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[0 to 1275 / P2a: 135, P2b: 160 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 195, P2b: 220 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 165, P2b: 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 190, P2b: 185 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 130, P2b: 135 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 200, P2b: 175 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 120, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 215, P2b: 235 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 140, P2b: 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 250, P2b: 265 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 155, P2b: 125 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 245, P2b: 310 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 120, P2b: 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 255, P2b: 300 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 130, P2b: 145 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 290, P2b: 350 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 450 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 270, P2b: 400 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 110, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 260, P2b: 310 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 350 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 295, P2b: 465 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 290 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 335 / 5%/step]

[T2:GL2:Size5] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Glossary paper2, Paper width A6 or less 2916 (Environment, Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.
G160/G161

2916 001 2916 002 2916 003

LL: RS [K]: 1st LL: RS [K]: 2nd LL: RS [FC]: 1st

*EGB *EGB *EGB

[0 to 1275 / P2a: 200, P2b: 160 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 270, P2b: 235 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 200, P2b: 130 / 5%/step]

SM

5-75

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

2916 004 2916 005 2916 006 2916 007 2916 008 2916 009 2916 010 2916 011 2916 012 2916 013 2916 014 2916 015 2916 016 2916 017 2916 018 2916 019 2916 020 2916 021 2916 022 2916 023 2916 024

LL: RS [FC]: 2nd LL: LS [K]: 1st LL: LS [K]: 2nd LL: LS [FC]: 1st LL: LS [FC]: 2nd MM: RS [K]: 1st MM: RS [K]: 2nd MM: RS [FC]: 1st MM: RS [FC]: 2nd MM: LS [K]: 1st MM: LS [K]: 2nd MM: LS [FC]: 1st MM: LS [FC]: 2nd HH: RS [K]: 1st HH: RS [K]: 2nd HH: RS [FC]: 1st HH: RS [FC]: 2nd HH: LS [K]: 1st HH: LS [K]: 2nd HH: LS [FC]: 1st HH: LS [FC]: 2nd

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[0 to 1275 / P2a: 260, P2b: 185 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 280, P2b: 240 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 160, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 300, P2b: 235 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 230 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 265, P2b: 345 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 195, P2b: 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 275, P2b: 310 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 130, P2b: 245 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 265, P2b: 350 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 175, P2b: 295 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 320, P2b: 350 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 135, P2b: 455 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 290, P2b: 400 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 290, P2b: 310 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 400 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 320, P2b: 465 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 125, P2b: 290 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 400, P2b: 335 / 5%/step]

2920 2920 001

[S: HH SP: 1st] Smaller than A5 HH Special paper, 1st side T2 Switch Timing *EGB [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 mm/step] [0 to 1275 / 20 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is

2920 002

T2 Correction

*EGB

different from these SP's values. For example, "4%" on the LCD actually means 20 %.

2921 2921 001 2921 002

[S: HH SP: 2nd] Smaller than A5 HH Special paper, 2nd side T2 Switch Timing T2 Correction *EGB *EGB [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 mm/step] [0 to 1275 / 0 / 5%/step] The value displayed on the LCD is different

G160/G161

5-76

SM

Service Mode Table

from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%.

[Separa. : LE: HH] Separation Voltage: Correction for HH Humidity at the Leading Edge (Paper Type, Process Speed, [Color]) Paper Type -> Normal, Thin 2930 Process Speed -> LS: Low speed, RS: Regular speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2930 001 2930 002 2930 003 2930 004 2930 005 2930 006 2930 007 2930 008 2930 009 2930 010 2930 011 2930 012 Normal: RS: [K] Normal: RS: [FC] Normal: LS: [K] Normal: LS: [FC] Normal 2: RS: [K] Normal 2: RS: [FC] Normal 2: LS: [K] Normal 2: LS: [FC] Thin: RS: [K] Thin: RS: [FC] Thin: LS: [K] Thin: LS: [FC] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 400 / 200 / 5%/step]

[T2:LL:SP1] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, LL Environment, Special paper1, 2938 (Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2938 001 2938 002 2938 003 2938 004 2938 005 2938 006 RS [K]: 1st RS [K]: 2nd RS [FC]: 1st RS [FC]: 2nd LS [K]: 1st LS [K]: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / 80 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 80 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 80, P2b: 95 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 65, P2b: 100 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 65 / 5%/step]
G160/G161

SM

5-77

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

2938 007 2938 008

LS [FC]: 1st LS [FC]: 2nd

*EGB *EGB

[0 to 1275 / P2a: 100, P2b: 75 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 60, P2b: 80 / 5%/step]

[T2:LL:GL2] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, LL Environment, Glossary paper2, 2939 (Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2939 001 2939 002 2939 003 2939 004 2939 005 2939 006 2939 007 2939 008 RS [K]: 1st RS [K]: 2nd RS [FC]: 1st RS [FC]: 2nd LS [K]: 1st LS [K]: 2nd LS [FC]: 1st LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / P2a: 85, P2b: 80 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 85 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 70, P2b: 100 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 75, P2b: 50 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 80, P2b: 90 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 100, P2b: 75 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 75, P2b: 100 / 5%/step]

[T2:ML:SP1] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, ML Environment, Special paper1, 2948 (Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2948 001 2948 002 2948 003 2948 004 2948 005 2948 006 2948 007 2948 008 RS [K]: 1st RS [K]: 2nd RS [FC]: 1st RS [FC]: 2nd LS [K]: 1st LS [K]: 2nd LS [FC]: 1st LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 90 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 95 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 90, P2b: 100 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 85, P2b: 100 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 85 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 100, P2b: 90 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 80, P2b: 90 / 5%/step]

2949

[T2:ML:GL2] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, ML Environment, Glossary paper2,

G160/G161

5-78

SM

Service Mode Table

(Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2949 001 2949 002 2949 003 2949 004 2949 005 2949 006 2949 007 2949 008 RS [K]: 1st RS [K]: 2nd RS [FC]: 1st RS [FC]: 2nd LS [K]: 1st LS [K]: 2nd LS [FC]: 1st LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / P2a: 95, P2b: 90 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 95 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 95 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 85, P2b: 100 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 85, P2b: 75 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 90, P2b: 95 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 100, P2b: 90 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 90, P2b: 100 / 5%/step]

[T2:MH:SP1] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, MH Environment, Special paper1, 2958 (Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2958 001 2958 002 2958 003 2958 004 2958 005 2958 006 2958 007 2958 008 RS [K]: 1st RS [K]: 2nd RS [FC]: 1st RS [FC]: 2nd LS [K]: 1st LS [K]: 2nd LS [FC]: 1st LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / P2a: 110, P2b: 100 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 100 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 110, P2b: 175 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 160, P2b: 115 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 135, P2b: 110 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 160, P2b: 110 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 205, P2b: 120 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 115, P2b: 120 / 5%/step]

[T2:MH:GL2] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, MH Environment, Glossary paper2, 2959 (Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2959 001 RS [K]: 1st *EGB [0 to 1275 / P2a: 120, P2b: 100 / 5%/step]
G160/G161

SM

5-79

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

2959 002 2959 003 2959 004 2959 005 2959 006 2959 007 2959 008

RS [K]: 2nd RS [FC]: 1st RS [FC]: 2nd LS [K]: 1st LS [K]: 2nd LS [FC]: 1st LS [FC]: 2nd

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

[0 to 1275 / 115 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 135, P2b: 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 145, P2b: 130 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 150, P2b: 115 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 125 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 175, P2b: 160 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 130, P2b: 175 / 5%/step]

[T2:HH:SP1] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, HH Environment, Special paper1, 2968 (Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2968 001 2968 002 2968 003 2968 004 2968 005 2968 006 2968 007 2968 008 RS [K]: 1st RS [K]: 2nd RS [FC]: 1st RS [FC]: 2nd LS [K]: 1st LS [K]: 2nd LS [FC]: 1st LS [FC]: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / P2a: 120, P2b: 115 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 110, P2b: 115 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 130, P2b: 205 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 165, P2b: 125 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 135, P2b: 120 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 200, P2b: 120 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 225, P2b: 140 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 120, P2b: 135 / 5%/step]

[T2:HH:GL2] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, HH Environment, Glossary paper2, 2969 (Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed The value displayed on the LCD is different from these SP's values. For example, "20%" on the LCD actually means 100%. 2969 001 2969 002 2969 003 2969 004 2969 005 2969 006 RS [K]: 1st RS [K]: 2nd RS [FC]: 1st RS [FC]: 2nd LS [K]: 1st LS [K]: 2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 1275 / P2a: 135, P2b: 120 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 135 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a:170, P2b: 150 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 160, P2b: 165 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 200, P2b: 125 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / 150 / 5%/step]

G160/G161

5-80

SM

Service Mode Table

2969 007 2969 008

LS [FC]: 1st LS [FC]: 2nd

*EGB *EGB

[0 to 1275 / P2a: 200, P2b: 185 / 5%/step] [0 to 1275 / P2a: 165, P2b: 200 / 5%/step]

2971 2971 001 2971 002 2971 003 2971 004 2971 005 2971 006

[T2:Size3] Transfer Roller Current: Correction for Humidity, Size3 (Process Speed, [Color]) LS: Low Speed, RS: Regular Speed LL/1st LL/2nd MM/1st MM/2nd HH/1st HH/2nd *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step] [0 to 100 / 70 / 1%/step] [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step] [0 to 100 / P2a: 75, P2b: 60 / 1%/step] [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step] [0 to 100 / P2a: 80, P2b: 65 / 1%/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)
3001 3001 001 3001 002 3001 003 3001 004 [Vt Display] Vt Display ([Color]) [K] [M] [C] [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the output voltage of TD sensor for each color. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.01 / 0.01 V/step]

3002 3002 001 3002 002 3002 003 3002 004

[Vcnt Current] Current Vcnt Display ([Color]) [K] [M] [C] [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the current Vcnt for each color. [0.00 to 5.00 / 3.00 / 0.01 V/step]

[Vcnt Initial] Initial Vcnt Display ([Color]) 3002 005 3002 006 3002 007 3002 008 [K] [M] [C] [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the initial Vcnt for each color. [0.00 to 5.00 / 3.00 / 0.01 V/step]

3003 3003 001 3003 002 3003 003

[Vtref Current] Current Vtref Display ([Color]) [K] [M] [C] *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the current Vtref for each color. [0.00 to 5.00 / 3.00 / 0.01 V/step]
G160/G161

SM

5-81

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

3003 004

[Y]

*EGB

[Vtref Initial] Initial Vtref Display ([Color]) 3003 005 3003 006 3003 007 3003 008 [K] [M] [C] [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the initial Vtref for each color. [0.00 to 5.00 / 3.00 / 0.01 V/step]

3011 3011 001 3011 002 3011 003 3011 004 3011 005 3011 006 3011 007 3011 008

[T. Sensor Init.] Toner Density Sensor Initial Setting (Agitation Time, TS Target: Toner Sensor Target Value, [Color]) Agitation: [K] Agitation: [M] Agitation: [C] Agitation: [Y] TD Target: [K] TD Target: [M] TD Target: [C] TD Target: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the agitation time for the developer for each color. [0 to 300 / 65 / 1 sec/step]

Adjusts the TS initial target voltage for each color. [0.00 to 5.00 / 2.80 / 0.01 V/step]

3021 3021 001 3021 002 3021 003 3021 004

[Vt Shift] Vt Shift Setting ([Color]) [K] [M] [C] [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the Vt shift rate for each color. [0.00 to 5.00 / P2a: 0.75, P2b: 0.90 / 0.01 V/step]

3032 3032 001 3032 002 3032 003 3032 004 3032 005

[Vcnt Response] DFU [K] [M] [C] [Y] Max *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the Vcnt correction coefficient for each color. [1.00 to 5.00 / 3.71 / 0.01 V/step] Adjusts the maximum Vcnt correction coefficient. [1.00 to 5.00 / 4.30 / 0.01 V/step] Adjusts the minimum Vcnt correction coefficient.

3032 006

Min

*EGB

G160/G161

5-82

SM

Service Mode Table

[1.00 to 5.00 / 3.50 / 0.01 V/step]

3041 3041 001 3041 002 3041 003 3041 004 3041 005 3041 006 3041 007 3041 008

[Vtref] Vtref Setting ([Color]) Lower Limit: [K] Lower Limit: [M] Lower Limit: [C] Lower Limit: [Y] Upper Limit: [K] Upper Limit: [M] Upper Limit: [C] Upper Limit: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Sets the lower limit Vtref voltage for each color. [0.10 to 5.00 / 1.50 / 0.01 V/step] DFU Sets the maximum limit Vtref voltage for each color. [0.10 to 5.00 / 3.70 / 0.01 V/step]

3042 3042 001 3042 002 3042 003 3042 004 3042 005 3042 006 3042 007 3042 008 3042 009 3042 014 3042 015 3042 016 3042 017

[Vtref] Vtref Correction Setting ([Color]) DFU Sets the Vtref correction. Mode Step [K] Step [M] Step [C] Step [Y] Adj. Remain: [K] Adj. Remain: [M] Adj. Remain: [C] Adj. Remain: [Y] Change Step: [K] Change Step: [M] Change Step: [C] Change Step: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric 0: On, 1: Off Adjusts the Vtref correction step for each color. [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.10 / 0.01 V/step]

Displays the remaining Vtref value for each color. [-5.00 to 5.00 / - / 1 V/step]

Adjusts the density change rate of the ID sensor pattern for each color. [0 to 100 / 15 / 1%/step]

3051 3051 001 3051 002 3051 003 3051 004

[Vt Thr.Setting] Vt Threshold Setting ([Color]) Low Vt Thr.:[K] Low Vt Thr.:[M] Low Vt Thr.:[C] Low Vt Thr.:[Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Sets the threshold of the lower limit Vt voltage for each color. [0.10 to 5.00 / 2.00 / 0.01 V/step]
G160/G161 G160/G161

SM

5-83

Service Mode Table

3051 005 3051 006 3051 007 3051 008

High Vt Thr.:[K] High Vt Thr.:[M] High Vt Thr.:[C] High Vt Thr.:[Y]

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

DFU Sets the threshold of the upper limit Vt voltage for each color. [0.10 to 5.00 / 3.00 / 0.01 V/step]

3101 3101 001 3101 002 3101 003 3101 004

[P. Sensor Patt.] ID Sensor Pattern Setting ([Color]) Change Value: [K] Change Value: [M] Change Value: [C] Change Value: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the density change rate of the ID sensor pattern for each color. [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1%/step]

3102 3102 001 3102 002 3102 003 3102 004

[P. Sensor Patt.] ID Sensor Pattern Setting ([Color]) Change Value: [K] Change Value: [M] Change Value: [C] Change Value: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the toner amount change of the ID sensor pattern for each color. [-1.000 to 1.000 / 0 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]

3103 3103 001 3103 002 3103 003 3103 004

[P. Sensor Patt.] ID Sensor Pattern Setting ([Color]) DFU Pot.Corr.Val: [K] Pot.Corr.Val: [M] Pot.Corr.Val: [C] Pot.Corr.Val: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Stores the delta Vcnt (current Vcnt - initial Vcnt) value for each color. [-500 to 500 / 0 / 1 V/step]

3104 3104 001 3104 002 3104 003 3104 004

[P. Sensor Patt.] ID Sensor Pattern Setting ([Color]) DFU m/a Corr.Step:[K] m/a Corr.Step:[M] m/a Corr.Step:[C] m/a Corr.Step:[Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the change amount of toner at the density change rate of the ID sensor pattern. [0 to 0.250 / 0.015 / 0.001 mg/cm2 /step]

3111 3111 001 3111 002

[Voff Display] Vsp-offset Display Regular Diffusion *EGB *EGB Displays the Vsp-offset regular voltage. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step] Displays the Vsp-offset diffusion voltage. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step]

G160/G161

5-84

SM

Service Mode Table

3121 3121 001 3121 002

[Vsg Display] Vsg Display Regular Diffusion *EGB Displays the Vsp regular voltage. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step] Displays the Vsp diffusion voltage. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step]

3131 3131 001

[Lps Display] Lps Display Lps *EGB Displays the value of Ips. [0 to 511 / 0 / 1/step]

3141 3141 001 3141 005

[Vmin Display] [K] [Cl] *EGB *EGB Displays the Vmin voltage for each color. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step]

3142 3142 001

[Kx Display] Min *EGB Displays the minimum Kx. [0.0000 to 1.0000 / 0.0000 / 0.0001/step]

3143 3143 002 3143 003 3143 004

[K5 Display] ([Color]) [M] [C] [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the P.sensor K5 for each color. [0.0000 to 5.0000 / 1.2500 / 0.0001/step]

3145 3145 001

[Vmin] DFU Upper Limit *EGB Adjusts the maximum Vmin. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.05 / 0.01 V/step]

3146 3146 001

[K2] DFU [0.0000 to 1.0000 / 0.1500 / 0.0001/step]


G160/G161

Upper Limit

*EGB

Adjusts the upper limit. DFU Adjusts the lower limit.

3146 002

Lower Limit

*EGB

SM

5-85

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

[0.0000 to 1.0000 / 0.0500 / 0.0001/step]

3147 3147 001

[K5] DFU Upper Limit *EGB Adjusts the upper limit. [0.0000 to 5.0000 / 2.5000 / 0.0001/step] DFU

3147 002

Lower Limit

*EGB

Adjusts the lower limit. [0.0000 to 5.0000 / 0.7500 / 0.0001/step]

3148 3148 001

[P sensor Prm.] ID sensor Parameter setting *EGB DFU [0 to 8.0000 / 4.600 / 0.001/step]

3151 3151 001 3151 002 3151 003 3151 004 3151 005 3151 006 3151 007 3151 008

[Vsg Display] ([Color]) Regular: [K] Regular: [M] Regular: [C] Regular: [Y] Diffusion: [K] Diffusion: [M] Diffusion: [C] Diffusion: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the Vsg output from ID sensor for each mode. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step]

Displays the Vsg output from ID sensor for each mode. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 V/step]

3161 3161 001 3161 002 3161 003 3161 004 3161 005

[P. Pattern] ID Sensor Pattern Setting ([Color]) DFU Target Value: [K] Target Value: [M] Target Value: [C] Target Value: [Y] Target Switch *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the target density of ID sensor pattern for each mode. [0 to 100 / 50 / 1%/step] [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Not used

3162 3162 001 3162 002

[P. Pattern] ID Sensor Pattern Setting ([Color]) M/A: [K] M/A: [M] *EGB *EGB Displays the toner amount of the ID sensor pattern for each mode.

G160/G161

5-86

SM

Service Mode Table

3162 003 3162 004

M/A: [C] M/A: [Y]

*EGB *EGB

[0 to 1.000 / 0 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]

3171 3171 001 3171 002

[P. Pattern] ID Sensor Pattern Setting ([Color]) DFU Adjusts the interval of making the ID sensor Interval: [K] Interval: [MCY] *EGB *EGB pattern. [0 to 200 / 150 / 1 sheet/step] [0 to 200 / 200 / 1 sheet/step]

3202 3202 001 3202 002 3202 003 3202 004

[Toner Near End] Toner Near End ([Color]) Counter: [K] Counter: [M] Counter: [C] Counter: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the counter of the toner near end for each mode. [0 to 30 / 0 / 1/step]

3301 3301 001 3301 002 3301 003

[Toner Mode] Toner Supply Control ([Color]) [K] [M] [C] *EGB *EGB *EGB Selects the method of the toner suppy for each mode. [0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step] 0: Fixed, 1: Coefficient (Pixel), 2: Coefficient (TD sensor), 3: Hybrid

3301 004

[Y]

*EGB

See Detailed Section Descriptions Process Control Toner Near-end/Toner End Detection

3302 3302 001 3302 002 3302 003 3302 004

[Toner Mode] Toner Supply Control ([Color]) Fixed Rate: [K] Fixed Rate: [M] Fixed Rate: [C] Fixed Rate: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the toner supply rate for each mode. These SPs are enabled only when SP3301 for each color is set to 0. [0 to 100 / 5 / 1%/step]

3303 3303 001 3303 002 3303 003

[Toner Mode] Toner Supply Control ([Color]) T. Supply Rate: [K] T. Supply Rate: [M] T. Supply Rate: [C] *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the toner supply rate for each mode. [0 to 100 / 0 / 1%/step]
G160/G161

SM

5-87

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

3303 004

T. Supply Rate: [Y]

*EGB

3304 3304 001 3304 002 3304 003 3304 004 3304 005 3304 006 3304 007 3304 008

[Toner Mode] Toner Supply Control ([Color]) Upper Limit: [K] Upper Limit: [M] Upper Limit: [C] Upper Limit: [Y] Lower Limit: [K] Lower Limit: [M] Lower Limit: [C] Lower Limit: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the upper limit of toner supply rate for each mode. [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]

Adjusts the lower limit of toner supply rate for each mode. [0 to 800/ 100 / 10 msec/step]

3305 3305 001 3305 002 3305 003 3305 004

[Toner Mode] Toner Supply Control ([Color]) Convert Time: [K] Convert Time: [M] Convert Time: [C] Convert Time: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the coefficient for calculating the toner supply time. [1.0 to 20.0 / 3.45 / 0.01 msec/mg /step]

3306 3306 001 3306 002 3306 003 3306 004 3306 005 3306 006 3306 007 3306 008 3306 009 3306 010 3306 011 3306 012 3306 013 3306 014 3306 015

[Toner Mode] Toner Supply Control ([Color]) Coefficient 1: [K] Coefficient 1: [M] Coefficient 1: [C] Coefficient 1: [Y] Coefficient 2: [K] Coefficient 2: [M] Coefficient 2: [C] Coefficient 2: [Y] Coefficient 3: [K] Coefficient 3: [M] Coefficient 3: [C] Coefficient 3: [Y] Coefficient 4: [K] Coefficient 4: [M] Coefficient 4: [C] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the time of the toner supply in proportional control mode (Pixel). [0.10 to 5.00 / 1.00 / 0.01/step]

Adjusts the time of the toner supply in proportional control mode (TD sensor). [0.10 to 5.00 / 0.3 / 0.01/step]

Adjusts the time of the toner supply in hybrid control mode. [0.10 to 5.00 / 0.4 / 0.01/step] Adjusts the time of the toner supply in hybrid control mode. [0.10 to 5.00 / 0.1 / 0.01/step]

G160/G161

5-88

SM

Service Mode Table

3306 016 3306 017 3306 018 3306 019 3306 020

Coefficient 4: [Y] Coefficient 5: [K] Coefficient 5: [M] Coefficient 5: [C] Coefficient 5: [Y]

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the time of the toner supply in hybrid control mode. [0.10 to 5.00 / 0.80 / 0.01/step]

3401 3401 001

[Toner End Detec] Toner End Detection *EGB [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Detected, 1: Not detected

3411 3411 001 3411 002 3411 003

[Toner Near End] ([Color]) DFU Min. Print: [K] Min. Print: [Cl] Max. Print: [K] *EGB *EGB *EGB Minimum: This is the minimum number of prints after the toner end sensor detects toner end. Maximum: For low image coverage, more sheets can be printed. This sets the maximum

3411 004

Max. Print: [Cl]

*EGB

that can be printed after toner end is detected. [0 to 750 / 0 / 1/step] DFU

3411 005 3411 006

Pixel: [K] Pixel: [Cl]

*EGB *EGB

Adjusts the number of sheets (A4), which the pixel area is converted into for the toner end after detecting the toner near end. [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

3501

[Process Cont.] Process Control Sets the method of the process control. [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]

3501 001

ON/ OFF

*EGB

0: Auto, 1: Fixed 2: Auto + LS, 3: Auto (Table fixed) Do not use settings 2 and 3.

3511 3511 001 3511 002 3511 003

[Pntr. Display] Process Control Table Display ([Color]) [K] [M] [C] *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the current process control table for each mode. [1 to 30 / 15 / 1/step]
G160/G161

SM

5-89

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

3511 004

[Y]

*EGB

3521 3521 001 3521 002 3521 003 3521 004

[DEV.Potential] Development Potential Setting ([Color]) [K] [M] [C] [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the development bias for each color. [1 to 800 / 0 / 1 V/step]

3522 3522 001 3522 002 3522 003 3522 004

[DEV.Potential] Development Potential Setting ([Color]) MAX [K] MAX [M] MAX [C] MAX [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the maximum development bias for each color. [1 to 800 / 450 / 1 V/step]

3523 3523 001 3523 002 3523 003 3523 004

[DEV.Potential] Development Potential Setting ([Color]) MIN [K] MIN [M] MIN [C] MIN [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the minimum development bias for each color. [1 to 800 / 150 / 1 V/step]

3531 3531 001 3531 002 3531 003 3531 004

[M/A Target] ([Color]) Adjusts the maximum toner target M/A for [K] [M] [C] [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0.000 to 1.000 / 0.500 / 0.001 mg/step] each mode. [0.000 to 1.000 / 0.53 / 0.001 mg/step]

3541 3541 001

[TD Setting] Toner Density Adjustment Setting *EGB [ 0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: On, 1: Off

3551 3551 001

[PC SelfChk] Process Control Self-check Job End 1: [K] *EGB At the end of a job, process control is done

G160/G161

5-90

SM

Service Mode Table

after the interval of time that is set with SP 3551 002 Job End 1: [Cl] *EGB 3555 001, if this number of pages was printed after the previous process control. [0 to 2000 / 210 / 1 page/step] 3551 003 3551 004 3551 005 3551 006 Job End 2: [K] Job End 2: [Cl] Job End 3: [K] Job End 3: [Cl] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB At the end of a job, process control is done immediately, if this number of pages was printed after the previous process control. [0 to 2000 / 300 / 1 page/step] In the middle of a job, printing stops and process control is done if the number of pages in the job gets to this number. [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]

3553 3553 001

[PC SelfChk] Adjusts the threshold time for the self check Idle Time *EGB without the machine operation. [0 to 24 / 6 / 0.1 Hour/step]

3554 3554 001

[Pow. ON SelfChk] Power On Self-check Adjusts the threshold (Time) of the process Time *EGB control from turning the power on. [0 to 24 / 6.0 / 0.1 H/step] Adjusts the threshold (Temperature/

3554 002

Temp./ Humidity

*EGB

Humidity) of the process control. [0 to 100 / 6 / 0.1 g/m3/step] Adjusts the threshold (Time) for developer

3554 003

Time 2

*EGB

mixing after turning the power on. [0 to 200.0 / 36.0 / 0.1 H/step] Adjusts the threshold (Temperature/ Humidity) for developer mixing after turning the power on. [0 to 100 / 6.0 / 0.1 g/m3/step]
G160/G161

3554 004

Temp./ Humidity 2

*EGB

3555 3555 001

[S.Chk Stand-by] Process Control Self-check Stand-by Time *EGB Waiting time for the next job command after

SM

5-91

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

job end. If the next job command comes before this interval expires, the "JOB END 1" process control is not done. (SP3551 001 and 002) [0 to 30 / 0 / 1 /sec]

3556 3556 001 3556 002 3556 003 3556 004 3556 005

[Image Process.] Display the Time of Last Image Processing Time (Year) Time (Month) Time (Date) Time (Hour) Time (Minute) *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 year/step] [1 to 12 / 1 / 1 month/step] [1 to 31 / 1 / 1 day/step] [0 to 23 / 0 / 1 hour/step] [0 to 59 / 0 / 1 minute/step]

3557 3557 001 3557 002 3557 003

[Image Process.] Image Processing Temperature Humidity A. Humidity *EGB *EGB *EGB [-127 to 127 / 0.0 / 0. 1C/step] [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1% RH/step] [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 g/m3/step]/step]

3558 3558 001

[No Use SelfChk] No Use Self-check Adjusts the maximum repeat times of the Maximum Repeat *EGB process control. [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 time/step]

3561 3561 001 3561 002 3561 003 3561 004

[Dev g Display] Development gamma Display ([Color]) [K] [M] [C] [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the development gamma measured during the process control self-check. [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.01/step]

3562 3562 001 3562 002 3562 003 3562 004

[Vk Display] ([Color]) [K] [M] [C] [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the current Vk value. [-300 to 300 / 0 / 1 V/step]

G160/G161

5-92

SM

Service Mode Table

3573 3573 001 3573 002 3573 003 3573 004

[Vd Display] ([Color]) [K] [M] [C] [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the current Vd value. [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 V/step]

3574 3574 001 3574 002 3574 003 3574 004

[Vl Display] ([Color]) [K] [M] [C] [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the current Vl value. [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 V/step]

3575 3575 001 3575 002 3575 003 3575 004 3575 005 3575 006 3575 007 3575 008

[Vb Display] (Process Speed,[Color]) RS: Regular speed, LS: Low speed RS: [K] RS: [M] RS: [C] RS: [Y] LS: [K] LS: [M] LS: [C] LS: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the current Vb value for each mode. [0 to 800 / 350 / 1 V/step]

3576 3576 001 3576 002 3576 003 3576 004 3576 005 3576 006 3576 007 3576 008

[Charge Bias] Charge Roller Bias (DC, Process Speed,[Color]) RS: Regular speed, LS: Low speed DC: RS: [K] DC: RS: [M] DC: RS: [C] DC: RS: [Y] DC: LS: [K] DC: LS: [M] DC: LS: [C] DC: LS: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the current charge roller DC bias of the development unit for each mode. [0 to 999 / 585 / 1 V/step]
G160/G161 5-93 G160/G161

SM

Service Mode Table

3577 3577 001 3577 002 3577 003 3577 004 3577 005 3577 006 3577 007 3577 008

[Charge Bias] Charge Roller Bias (AC, Process Speed,[Color]) RS: Regular speed, LS: Low speed AC: RS: [K] AC: RS: [M] AC: RS: [C] AC: RS: [Y] AC: LS: [K] AC: LS: [M] AC: LS: [C] AC: LS: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the current charge roller AC bias of the development unit for each mode. [0.0 to 3.0 / 1.9 / 0.001 kV/step]

3581 3581 001 3581 002 3581 003 3581 004 3581 005 3581 006 3581 007 3581 008

[LD Control] LD Power Control Displays the current LD power rate for each mode. LD: RS: [K] LD: RS: [M] LD: RS: [C] LD: RS: [Y] LD: LS: [K] LD: LS: [M] LD: LS: [C] LD: LS: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [10 to 200 / 100 / 1%/step]

[Dev. Setup] Developer Initialization Setting 3601 3601 001 3601 002 3601 003 3601 004 Adjusts the number of the sheet for the developer free run at the developer initializing for each color. SheetSet: [K] SheetSet: [M] SheetSet: [C] SheetSet: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]

3602 3602 001 3602 002

[Dev. Setup] Developer Initialization Setting Adjusts the toner supply times for the developer initializing for each color. SupplySet: [K] SupplySet: [M] *EGB *EGB [0 to 30 / 20 / 1 /step]

G160/G161

5-94

SM

Service Mode Table

3602 003 3602 004

SupplySet: [C] SupplySet: [Y]

*EGB *EGB

[Dev. Setup] Developer Initialization Setting DFU 3606 3606 001 Specifies the maximum times of developer initialization to adjust the proper toner density. Repeat *EGB [0 to 20 / 5 / 1 /step]

3611 3611 001 3611 002 3611 003 3611 004 3611 005 3611 006 3611 007 3611 008 3611 009 3611 010 3611 011 3611 012

[Supply Thresh] Adjusts the toner supply threshold for the toner density adjustment. Normal: [K] Normal: [M] Normal: [C] Normal: [Y] High Vt:[K] High Vt [M] High Vt [C] High Vt [Y] DEV.SetUp: [K] DEV.SetUp [M] DEV.SetUp [C] DEV.SetUp [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [1 to 800 / 380 / 1 V/step] [1 to 800 / 420 / 1 V/step]

3612 3612 001 3612 002 3612 003 3612 004 3612 005 3612 006 3612 007 3612 008 3612 009

[Consume Thresh] Adjusts the toner consume threshold for the toner density adjustment. Normal: [M] Normal: [C] Normal: [Y] Normal:[K] Low Vt: [K] Low Vt: [M] Low Vt: [C] Low Vt: [Y] DEV.SetUp: [K] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB
G160/G161 5-95 G160/G161

[1 to 800 / 220 / 1 V/step]

[1 to 800 / 250 / 1 V/step]

*EGB *EGB *EGB

SM

Service Mode Table

3612 010 3612 011 3612 012

DEV.SetUp [M] DEV.SetUp [C] DEV.SetUp [Y]

*EGB *EGB *EGB

[Low Resolution] (Threshold, [Color]) SP 3701-001 controls if the pixel count is used in hybrid toner supply mode or 3701 not. If this SP is on, it is used if the image coverage ratio for the page is below a threshold value (if the coverage is above this ratio, then the TD sensor is used). If this SP is off, then the TD sensor is always used. SP3701-002 to 005 control the threshold values for the image coverage ratio. 3701 001 3701 002 3701 003 3701 004 3701 005 Low Resolution Threshold: [K] Threshold: [M] Threshold: [C] Threshold: [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 100 / 1 / 1%/step] [0 to 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On

3721 3721 001

[Low Resolution] Toner Refresh Mode Setting in Low Image Coverage Ratio Enables or disables the toner refresh mode. Toner Refresh Mode *EGB [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: On. 1: Off Toner refresh mode is done if the percentage of pages that have low image coverage is larger than this threshold value. [0 to 50 / 20 / 1%/step] Toner refreshing coefficient: DFU [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step] Specifies the interval of the process control at low coverage printing. [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

3721 002

S: Toner Refresh

*EGB

3721 003 3721 004 3721 005

Toner refresh coef. Interval Bk Interval Col

*EGB *EGB *EGB

3731 3731 001 3731 002 3731 003

[SUM.ImageArea] [Bk] [M] [C] *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the total coverage for each color after the process control execution. This SP is cleared when the process control is done.

G160/G161

5-96

SM

Service Mode Table

3731 004

[Y]

*EGB

Value: pixel

3741 3741 001 3741 002 3741 003 3741 004

[Thr.SplyMthod] [Bk] [M] [C] [Y] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Adjusts the threshold for low coverage printing. [0 to 255 / 1 / 1%/step]

3801 3801 001 3801 002 3801 003 3801 004 3801 005 3801 006

[TD Initial] TD sensor Initialization ([Color]) DFU [All] [Cl] [K] [M] [C] [Y] Initializes the developer for each mode. Press the Enter key to execute the initialization after the machine asks "Execute?"

3811 3811 001

[Developer] Developer Initialization All Initializes all the developers.

3820

[Process Cont.] Process Control Executes the process control. Press the Enter key to execute the initialization after the machine asks "Execute?"

3820 001

3821 3821 001 3821 002 3821 003 3821 004 3821 005 3821 006 3821 007 3821 008

[P Ctl Result] Process Control Result 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays each logged process control result. The ten most recent ones are shown. 3821 001 is the most recent. See Troubleshooting Process Control Results.
G160/G161 5-97 G160/G161

SM

Service Mode Table

3821 009 3821 010

9 10

*EGB *EGB

SP5-XXX (Mode)
5001 5001 001 [All Indicators On] *CTL Checks the LED on the operation panel. 0: Normal, 1: All lit

5024

[mm/ inchDisplay] Sets units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes. [0 or 1 / 1 /-] 0: mm (EU/AS), 1: inch (NA)

5024 001

*CTL

5045

[Accounting count] Selects the counting method if the meter charge mode is enabled with SP5-930-001.

5045 001

Counter Method

*CTL

You can change the setting only one time. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Developments, 1: Pages

5051

[Refill Toner Disp] Toner Refill Display Enable or disable the warning display when you install a toner bottle that was refilled by

5051 001

Refill Toner Disp

*CTL

third party venders. [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Enable, 1: Disable

5055

[Display IP address] Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD. [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Not display, 1: Display

5055 001

Display IP address

*CTL

5056

[Coverage Counter]

G160/G161

5-98

SM

Service Mode Table

Display or does not display the coverage 5056 001 Coverage Counter *CTL counter. [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Not display, 1: Display

5150

[Bypass Long Paper] By-pass Long Paper Lets or does not let the by-pass tray feed extra long paper (up to 1260 mm). [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On

5150 001

0: OFF, 1: ON

5169 5169 001

[CE Login] Enables or disables the CE login. CE Login *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On

5302

[Set Time] Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone. [-1440 to 1440 / NA, EU, CH / 1 minute/step] NA: -300, EU: 60, CH: 480

5302 002

Time difference

*CTL#

5307 5307 001

[Summer Time] Enables or disables the summer time mode. ON/OFF [0 to 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On NA: 04100010, EU: 035(4)00010, ASIA: 105(4)00010

5307 003

Rule Set(Start)

Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode. 1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12] 3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5] 4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday] 7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
G160/G161

5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23] 8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]

SM

5-99

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

For example: 3500010 (EU default) The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March The digits are counted from the left. Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1". 5307 004 Rule Set(End) NA: 105(4)60000, EU: 105(4)00000, ASIA: 03100000

Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode. There are 8 digits in this SP. 1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12] 3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5] 4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday] 5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23] The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00". The digits are counted from the left. Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".

5401

[Access Control] *CTL "SDK" is the "Software Development Kit". *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL These data can be converted from SAS (VAS) when installed or uninstalled. DFU

5401 200 SDK1 Unique ID 5401 201 SDK1 Certification Method 5401 210 SDK2 Unique ID 5401 211 SDK2 Certification Method 5401 220 SDK3 Unique ID 5401 221 SDK3 Certification Method

5404 5404 001

[User Code Clear] User Code Counter Clear User Code Clear] Clears all counters for users.

5501

[PM Alarm Interval] PM Alarm Interval Sets the PM alarm Interval. [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1k prints/step] The alert is sent to the e-mail address that is specified for the system administrator using a

5501 001

Printout

*CTL

G160/G161

5-100

SM

Service Mode Table

browser and the built-in web server (Web Image Monitor). 0: Disables the PM alarm When SP5-866-001 is set to "1", this SP is enabled.

5504

[Jam Alarm] Sets the jam alarm level. If a paper jam occurs, the jam alarm counter increases by +1. If no paper jam occurs while the set number of paper is output, the jam alarm counter decreases by -1. The jam alarm occurs when the jam alarm counter gets to +10. [0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step] 0: Disables the jam alarm 1: 1.5K, 2: 3K, 3: 6K The alert is sent to the e-mail address that is specified for the system administrator using a browser and the built-in web server (Web Image Monitor). When SP5-866-001 is set to "1", this SP is enabled.

5504 001

Jam Alarm

*CTL

5505

[Error Alarm] Sets the error alarm level. If an SC code occurs, the error alarm counter increases by +1. If no SC code occurs while the set number of paper is output, the jam alarm counter decreases by -1. The error alarm occurs

5505 001

Error Alarm

*CTL

when the error alarm counter reaches +5. [0 to 255 / 30 / 1/step] The alert is sent to the e-mail address that is specified for the system administrator using a browser and the built-in web server (Web
G160/G161

0: Disables the PM alarm

SM

5-101

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

Image Monitor). When SP5-866-001 is set to "1", this SP is enabled.

5507 5507 001 5507 003 5507 004 5507 005 5507 006 5507 007 5507 128 5507 133 5507 134 5507 142 5507 164 5507 166

[Supply Alarm] Paper Size Toner Maintenance Kit S Drum Life Remain S Waste Toner Bottle Tensya Supply Al Interval: Others Interval: A4 Interval: A5 Interval: B5 Interval: LG Interval: LT *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL Sets the paper supply alarm level. A paper supply alarm counter increases by +1 when a sheet of the related size is used. The paper supply alarm occurs when one of the paper supply alarm counters gets to the set value. [250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1/step] The alert is sent to the e-mail address that is specified for the system administrator using a browser and the built-in web server (Web *CTL Enables or disables the supply alarm. [0 to 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off, 1: On

5507 172

Interval: HLT

*CTL

Image Monitor). When SP5-866-001 is set to "1", this SP is enabled.

[SC/Alarm Setting] 5515 5515 001 5515 002 Turns on or off the following SC alarm settings. These SP's are active when the CSS or NRS is enabled. SC Call Service Parts Ne *CTL *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON This SP activates the service parts near end call. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON 5515 003 5515 004 Service Parts En User Call *CTL *CTL This SP activates the service parts end call. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON

G160/G161

5-102

SM

Service Mode Table

This SP activates the communication test 5515 006 Communication Te *CTL call. [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON This SP activates the machine information 5515 007 5515 008 5515 009 Machine Infomat Alarm Notice Non Genuine Tonn *CTL *CTL *CTL call. [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON This SP activates the non genuine toner bottle call. [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON This SP activates the automatic supply order 5515 010 Supply Automatic *CTL call. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON This SP activates the supply management 5515 011 Supply Managemen *CTL call. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON

5801 5801 001 5801 002 5801 003 5801 004 5801 005 5801 008 5801 010

[Memory Clear] Resets the SP5801-002 through 016 except All Engine SCS IMH MCS Printer GWWS/NFA the security related data in 003, 010, 011and 015. These cannot be reset with SP mode. Resets or deletes the engine-related data. Clears the system settings. Clears IMH data. DFU Clears MCS data. DFU Clears the printer application settings. Clears the web service data and the network application data. Initializes the system default and interface settings (IP address also), SmartNetMonitor for Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.
G160/G161

5801 011

NCS

5801 014 5801 015 5801 016

DCS Setting Clear UCS Setting MIRS Setting

Resets or deletes the DCS-related data. Resets or deletes the UCS-related data. Resets or deletes the MIRS-related data.

SM

5-103

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

5801 017 5801 018 5801 019

CCS SRM Memory Clr LCS

Resets or deletes the CSS-related data. FA Resets or deletes the SRM-related data. Resets or deletes the LCS-related data.

5802

[Engine Free Run] Performs a free run on the printer engine. The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence of A4/LT

5802 001

printing from the 1st tray. Therefore, paper should be loaded in the 1st tray, but paper is not fed. The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode for a test.

5803

[Input Check] See Input Check Table

5804

[Output Check] See Output Check Table

5808

[Destination] Destination Code Display Displays the destination code. [0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric 0: DOM (Japan), 1: OTHER, 2: ASIA 3: ERP (Europe). 4: USA

5808 001

Destin. Code Disp

*EGB

5810 5810 001

[Fusing SC Reset] Resets a type A service call condition. Turn Fusing SC Reset the main power switch off and on after resetting the SC code.

5811 5811 001

[Serial No.] Machine Serial No. Setting Setting *EGB [SSP]

G160/G161

5-104

SM

Service Mode Table

Sets the machine serial number. 5811 002 Display *EGB Displays the machine serial number.

5812

[Service TEL] Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on the Counter List, which can be printed with the users Counter menu. This can be up to 19 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input). Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on the Counter List, which can be printed with the users "Counter" menu if the Meter Charge mode is selected with SP5-930-1. This can be up to 19 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input).

5812 001

Telephone

*CTL

5812 002

Facsimile

*CTL

5813 5813 001

[Power Freqency] Displays the power frequency. [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 Hz/step] Not used

5814 5814 001

[Power Voltage] Detected Voltage Displays the detected power voltage. [0 to 400 / 0 / 1 V/step] Not used

5816

[NRS Function] These settings are used for NRS. [0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step] Alphanumeric 0: Off, 1: CSS (Not used) 2: Network (The remote service function is on.) [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0: Start, 1: End [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

5816 001

I/F Setting

*CTL

5816 002 5816 003

CE Call Function Flag

*CTL *CTL

SM

5-105

G160/G161

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

0: Off (The remote service function is disabled.) 1: On (The remote service function is enabled.) 5816 007 SSL Disable *CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: On, 1: Off Sets the timeout counter for the remote 5816 008 RCG Connect T/O *CTL connection. [1 to 90 / 10 / 1 second/step] Sets the timeout counter for writing 5816 009 RCG Write Timeout *CTL processing. [0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second/step] Sets the timeout counter for reading 5816 010 RCG Read Timeout *CTL processing. [0 to 100 / 60 / 1 second/step] Enables or disables access to the SOAP 5816 011 Port 80 *CTL method via port 80. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Disables, 1: Enables 5816 021 Function Flag *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Not registered, 1: Registered This SP displays the Cumin installation status. 5816 022 Install Status *CTL 0: Basil not registered 1: Basil registered 2: Device registered Connect Mode (N/M) 5816 023 0: Internet connection 1: Dial-up connection 5816 061 NotiTime ExpTime *CTL *CTL

This SP displays and selects the Cumin connection method.

Proximity of the expiration of the certification. HTTP Proxy use *CTL

5816 062

This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates with the service center.

G160/G161

5-106

SM

Service Mode Table

HTTP Proxy Host

*CTL

This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between Cumin-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server address. The address is necessary to set up 5816 063 Cumin-N. The address display is limited to 127 characters. Characters beyond the 127th character are ignored. This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report. HTTP Proxy Port *CTL

This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between Cumin-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up 5816 064 Cumin-N. This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report. HTTP Proxy AutUsr *CTL

This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name. 5816 065 The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st character is ignored. This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report. HTTP Proxy AutPass *CTL

This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password. 5816 066 The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st character is ignored. This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report. 5816 067 Cer Updt Cond *CTL

Displays the status of the certification update. 0 1 2 The certification used by Cumin is set correctly. The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the successful update.
G160/G161

from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated.

SM

5-107

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

3 4 11 12

The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failed update. The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being sent to the GW URL. A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection. The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the certification update request. The notification of the request for certification update has completed successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update request from the rescue GW URL The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored. The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of the successful completion of this event. The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of this event. The certification update request has been received from the GW URL, the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was completed, but an certification error has been received, and the rescue certification is being recorded. The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of the certification update. *CTL

13

14 15 16

17

18 5816 068

Cer Abnml Cause the certification. 0 1 2 3 4 5

Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress. Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired. An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification has expired. Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual certification. Notification of a common certification without ID2. Notification that no certification was issued.

G160/G161

5-108

SM

Service Mode Table

6 5816 069

Notification that GW URL does not exist. *CTL

Cer Updt ReqID

The ID of the request for certification. Firm Updating *CTL

5816 083

Displays the status of the firmware update. Firm UpFlg NoHDD *CTL

5816 084

This setting determines if the firmware can be updated, even without the HDD installed. Firm UpUsr Conf *CTL

This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version of 5816 085 the firmware before the firmware update execution. If the option to confirm the previous version is selected, a notification is sent to the system manager and the firmware update is done with the firmware files from the URL. Firmware Size 5816 086 *CTL

Allows the service technician to confirm the size of the firmware data files during the firmware update execution. CERT: MacroVsn *CTL

5816 087

Displays the macro version of the NRS certification. CERT: PAC Vsn *CTL

5816 088

Displays the PAC version of the NRS certification. CERT: ID2 Code *CTL

5816 089

Displays ID2 for the NRS certification. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asteriskes () indicate that no NRS certification exists. CERT: Subject *CTL

5816 090

Displays the common name of the NRS certification subject. CN = the following 17 bytes. Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks () indicate that no DESS exists. CERT: SeriNum *CTL

5816 091

Displays serial number for the NRS certification. Asterisks () indicate that no DESS exists. CERT: Issuer *CTL
G160/G161

5816 092

Displays the common name of the issuer of the NRS certification. CN = the following 30 bytes. Asteriskes () indicate that no DESS exists. CERT: St ExpTime *CTL

5816 093

Displays the start time of the period for which the current NRS certification is

SM

5-109

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

enabled. CERT: End ExpTime 5816 094 enabled. 5816 200 Poling Man Exc *CTL *CTL

Displays the end time of the period for which the current NRS certification is

No information is available at this time. Instl: Condition *CTL

Displays a number that indicates the status of the NRS service device. 0: Neither the NRS device nor Cumin device are set. 1: The Cumin device is being set. Only Box registration is completed. In this 5816 201 status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling request. 2: The Cumin device is set. In this status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling request. 3: The NRS device is being set. In this status the Cumin device cannot be set. 4: The NRS module has not started. 5816 202 Instl: ID # *CTL

Allows entry of the number of the request needed for the Cumin device. Instl: Reference *CTL

5816 203

Executes the inquiry request to the NRS GW URL. Instl: Ref Rslt SP5816-203. 0: Succeeded 1: Inquiry number error 2: Registration in progress *CTL

Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with

5816 204

3: Proxy error (proxy enabled) 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled) 5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password) 6: Communication error 7: Certification update error 8: Other error 9: Inquiry executing Instl: Ref Section *CTL

5816 205

Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in answer to the inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at

G160/G161

5-110

SM

Service Mode Table

the GW URL. 5816 206 Instl: Rgstltn *CTL

Executes Cumin Registration. Instl: Rgstltn Rst 0: Succeeded 2: Registration in progress 3: Proxy error (proxy enabled) *CTL

Displays a number that indicates the registration result.

5816 207

4: Proxy error (proxy disabled) 5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password) 6: Communication error 7: Certification update error 8: Other error 9: Registration executing

5816 208

Error Code Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed. Cause Illegal Modem Parameter Code -11001 -11002 -11003 -12002 Operation Error, Incorrect Setting -12003 -12004 Error Caused by Response from GW URL -2385 -2387 -2389 -2390 -2391 -2392 -2393 Meaning Chat parameter error Chat execution error Unexpected error Inquiry, registration attempted without acquiring device status. Attempted registration without execution of an inquiry and no previous registration. Attempted setting with illegal entries for certification and ID2. Attempted dial up overseas without the correct international prefix for the telephone number. Not supported at the Service Center Database out of service Program out of service Two registrations for same device Parameter error Basil not managed
G160/G161 G160/G161

SM

5-111

Service Mode Table

-2394 -2395 -2396 -2397 -2398 5816 209 Instl Clear *CTL

Device not managed Box ID for Basil is illegal Device ID for Basil is illegal Incorrect ID2 format Incorrect request number format

Releases a machine from its Cumin setup. Print Com Log *CTL

5816 250

Prints the communication log.

5821 5821 001

[NRS Address] CSS-PI Device RCG IP Address (used for NRS) *CTL [0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step] DFU Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote Communication Gate). [00000000h to FFFFFFFFh / 00000000h / 1/step]

5821 002

*CTL

5824 5824 001

[NVRAM Upload] Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except NVRAM Upload # for counters and the serial number) from the NVRAM to an SD card.

5825 5825 001

[NVRAM Download] NVRAM Download # Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card to the NVRAM.

5828

[Network Setting] Job spool settings/ Interface selection for Ethernet and wireless LAN Switches Centronics IEEE1284 compatibility on/off for the network. [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

5828 050

1284 Compatible

*CTL

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Selecting 0 disables bi-directional data transmission.

G160/G161

5-112

SM

Service Mode Table

Switches the ECP setting for Centronics off/on. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 5828 052 ECP *CTL 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled With 1 selected, SP5-828-050 must be enabled for 1284 mode compatibility. Switches the job spool on/off. 5828 065 Job Spool *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Selects the treatment of the job when a 5828 066 HD job Clear *CTL spooled job exists at power on. [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0: Data is cleared, 1: Automatically printed Switches job spooling off or on and enables settings for job spooling protocols. [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0: Off, 1: On Bit switches: 5828 069 Job Spool (Protocol) *CTL Bit 0: LPR Bit 1: FPT Bit 2: IPP Bit 3: SMB Bit 4: Not used. Bit 5: DIPRINT Bits 6 and 7: Reserved 5828 090 TELNET (0: OFF, 1: ON) Enables or disables Telnet. *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Enables or disables the Web monitor. 5828 091 Web (0: OFF, 1: ON) *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Displays the IPv6 link local address for the wireless LAN or Ethernet. Displays the IPv6 stateless address 1 to 5 for
G160/G161

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 5828 145 5828 147 Active IPv6 Link Active IPv6 Stat (1)

SM

5-113

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

5828 149 5828 151 5828 153 5828 155 5828 156 5828 158

Active IPv6 Stat (2) Active IPv6 Stat (3) Active IPv6 Stat (4) Active IPv6 Stat (5) IPv6 Manual Addr IPv6 Gateway Add

the wireless LAN or Ethernet.

Displays the IPv6 manual setting address for the wireless LAN or Ethernet. Displays the IPv6 gateway address for the wireless LAN or Ethernet.

5832 5832 001

[HDD] HDD Initialization # Prepares the hard disk. Use this SP mode only when there is a hard disk error.

5839 5839 007

[IEEE 1394] Cycle Master *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 /-] 0: Off, 1: On [0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step] 0: Standard, 1: IRM Color Copy 2: Reserved, 3: Always Effective [0 or 1 / 0 /-] 0: Off, 1: On [0 or 1 / 1 /-] 0: Off, 1: On [0 or 1 / 1 /-] 0: Off, 1: On [0 or 1 / 0 /-] 0: Off, 1: On [0 to 63 / 8 / 1/step]]

5839 008

BCR mode

*CTL

5839 009 5839 010 5839 011 5839 012 5839 013

IRM 1394a Check Unique ID Logout Login Login MAX

*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL

5840

[IEEE 802.11b] Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the

5840 006

Channel Max

*CTL

wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings are set for the maximum end

G160/G161

5-114

SM

Service Mode Table

of the range for each area. Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels. EU: [1 to 13 / 13 / 1/step] NA/ AS: [1 to 11 / 11 / 1/step] Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The 5840 007 Channel Min *CTL default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels. EU: [1 to 13 / 1 / 1/step] NA/ AS: [1 to 11 / 1 / 1/step] Selects the WEP key. [00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary] 5840 011 WEP Key Select *CTL 00: Key #1 01: Key #2 (Reserved) 10: Key #3 (Reserved) 11: Key #4 (Reserved)

5842

[GWWS Analysis] Net File Application Analysis Prints or does not print the module log for each bit. [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] 0: Prints, 1: Not print Bit switches: Bit 0: System or other related application. Bit 1: Captured related application

5842 001

Setting 1

*CTL

Bit 2: Certification related application Bit 3: Address related application Bit 4: Control devices or transmission logs related application related application Bit 6: Documents related application in bit 7, 0: Not printed, 1: Printed
G160/G161

Bit 5: Output (print, fax or transmission)

SM

5-115

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

Bit 7: MSB related application Selects the stamp type for the log of Net File Application Analysis. Bit switches: 5842 002 Setting 2 *CTL Bit 0 to 6: Not used. Bit 7 0: Minute/second/micro second 1: Date/hour/minute/second

5844 5844 001 5844 002 5844 003 5844 004

[USB] Adjusts the USB transfer rate. Transfer Rate Vendor ID Product ID Dev Release Num *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL [0001 or 0004 / 0004 / -] 0001: Full speed, 0004: Auto Change Displays the vendor ID. Displays the product ID. Displays the device release version number.

5845 5845 003 5845 004

[Dlv Server Stting] Delivery Server Setting DeliErr DisplTime Delivery Options *CTL *CTL Specifies the retry interval. [60 to 900 / 300 / 1 second/step] Specifies the maximum number of retries. [0 to 99 / 3 / 1/step]

5846 5846 010

[UCS Setting] LDAP Search TOut *CTL [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step] Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server. AddtB Acl Info *CTL

This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is 5846 041 powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users. 5846 046 IniSet/All AddrB *CTL

G160/G161

5-116

SM

Service Mode Table

This SP clears all the setting information managed in UCS and address book information (local, delivery, LDAP) and restores these settings to their default values. Use this SP to initial the account information (user codes and passwords) for system managers and users as well. 5846 047 Ini Local AddrB *CTL

Clears the local address book information, including the user code. Ini LDAP AddrB *CTL

5846 049

Clears the LDAP address book information, except the user code. Init All AddrB *CTL Initializes all address information data except the administration account.

5846 050

Clears all directory information managed by UCS, including all user codes. Turn off and on the main power switch after executing this SP. Bkup All AddrB *CTL

5846 051

Uploads all directory information to the SD card. Restr All AddrB *CTL

5846 052

Downloads all directory information from the SD card. Clear Backup Info *CTL

Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the service slot. Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this machine. 5846 053 This feature does not work if the card is write-protected. After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, and then turn the power off. Do not remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing. Search option address book. 5846 060 Bit: Meaning Bit0: Checks both upper/lower case characters Bit1: Japan Only Bit2 to 7 Compl Opt1 5846 062 *CTL [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
G160/G161

*CTL

This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local

Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the password. Note:

SM

5-117

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

This SP does not normally require adjustment. This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book. Compl Opt2 *CTL [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]

Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to lower case and 5846 063 defines the length of the password. Note: This SP does not normally require adjustment. This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book. Compl Opt3 *CTL [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]

Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to numbers and 5846 064 defines the length of the password. Note: This SP does not normally require adjustment. This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book. Compl Opt4 *CTL [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]

Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to symbols and 5846 065 defines the length of the password. Note: This SP does not normally require adjustment. This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book. Encryption Stat 5846 094 server. *CTL [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step] No default

Shows the status of the encryption function of the address book on the LDAP

5848 5848 004

[Web Service] Enables or disables the udirectory access ac: UD *CTL limitation. 0000: Disabled, 0001: Enabled

G160/G161

5-118

SM

Service Mode Table

5848 009 5848 011 5848 022 5848 210 5848 211 5848 212 5848 213 5848 214 5848 215 5848 216

ac: Job Ctrl ac: Dev Mng ac:Uadmin LogType: Job 1 LogType: Job 2 LogType: Access PrimarySrv SecondarySrv Start Time Interval Time *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL

Switches access control on and off. 0000: OFF, 0001: ON

Displays the log server settings. These can be adjusted with the Web Image Monitor.

[1 to 1000 / 1 / 1 hour/step]

Specifies the interval of transmitting log information. This SP is activated only when the SP5848-217 is set to "2". Timing *CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]

5848 217

Selects the method for transmitting log information. 0: Transmitting OFF, 1: Always Transmitting, 2: Interval Transmitting

5849 5849 001 5849 003

[Installation Date] Enables or disables the udirectory access Display Total Counter *CTL *CTL limitation. 0000: Disabled, 0001: Enabled

5851 5851 001

[Bluetooth] Adjusts the Bluetooth setting. Mode *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Public, 1: Private

5856

[Remote ROM Update] Allows the technician to update the firmware using a parallel cable. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Disable, 1: Enable
G160/G161

5856 002

Local Port

5857 5857 001

[Debug Log Save] ON/ OFF *CTL Enables Or Disables The Debug Log Saving

SM

5-119

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

Function. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/Step] Alphanumeric 0: OFF, 1: ON Sets the storage location for the debug log. 5857 002 5857 005 5857 006 5857 009 5857 010 5857 011 5857 012 5857 013 5857 014 5857 015 5857 016 Target Save to HDD Save to SD Card HDD to SD Latest HDD to SD Any Erase HDD Debug Erase SD Debug Dsply-SD Space SD to SD Latest SD to SD Any *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL [2 or 3 / 2 / 1/step] 2: HDD, 3: SD Sets the key number of the debug log. Sets the key number of the debug log. Copies the most recent 4 MB of the debug log from the hard disk to the SD card. Sets the key number of the debug log copied from the hard disk to the SD card. Deletes the debug log from the hard disk. Deletes the debug log from the SD card. Shows the free space on the SD card. Copies the most recent 4 MB of the debug log from an SD card to a different SD card. Sets the key number of the debug log copied from an SD card to a different SD card. Makes a log file on the HDD to save debug logs. To save debug logs, the controller makes a log file first, then writes data in the file. This procedure can use much time. The user can switch off the main power switch 5857 017 Make SD Debug File *CTL before the log is written in the file. To prevent this possible problem, you can prepare a log file in advance. If you do this, the controller uses less time to save logs because the log file is prepared.

Make HDD Debug File *CTL

5858

[Debug Log Save: SC] Collects debug logs when an engine-related SC code occurs. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: OFF, 1: ON

5858 001

Engine SC

*CTL

G160/G161

5-120

SM

Service Mode Table

Collects debug logs when a controller-related 5858 002 Controller SC *CTL SC code occurs. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: OFF, 1: ON 5858 003 Any SC *CTL Sets the SC code whose logs are collected. [00000 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] Collects debug logs when a paper jam 5858 004 Jam *CTL occurs. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: OFF, 1: ON

5859 5859 001 5859 002 5859 003 5859 004 5859 005 5859 006 5859 007 5859 008 5859 009 5859 010

[Debug Log Save Key] Key 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key 7 Key 8 Key 9 Key 10 *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL The event is set with SP5-857-2. The storage is set with SP5-858. [0000000 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] Sets the key number of a specific event (see the note below) whose logs are saved in the specified storage place (see the note below). When multiple key numbers are assigned, the logs are collected in this order: Key 1, Key 2, ..., Key 9, Key 10.

5860 5860 002

[SMTP/ POP3/ IMAP] SMTP Server Port No. *CTL Adjusts the number of the SMTP server ports. [1 to 65535 / 25 / 1/step] Enables or disables the SMTP authentication for mail transfers. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Disable, 1: Enable Encrypts or does not encrypt passwords for [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Automatic, 1: Not encrypt, 2: Encrypt Enables or disables the authentication that is
G160/G161

5860 003

SMTP Auth.

*CTL

5860 006

SMTP Auth. Encryp

*CTL

POP3/IMAP4 authentications.

5860 007

POP before SMTP

*CTL

SM

5-121

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

executed on the POP server before the communication is established with the SMTP server to transfer mails. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Disable, 1: Enable Adjusts the waiting time to access the SMTP 5860 008 POP to SMTP Wait *CTL server after the authentication on the POP server. [0 to 10000 / 300 / 1 ms/step] Sets the protocol of receiving e-mail. 5860 009 Mail Receive Pro *CTL [1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step] 1: POP3, 2: IMAP4, 3: SMTP Encrypts or does not encrypt passwords for 5860 013 POP3/IMAP4 Auth. *CTL POP3/IMAP4 authentications. [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Automatic, 1: Not encrypt, 2: Encrypt 5860 014 5860 015 5860 016 5860 017 POP3 Srvr Port No. IMAP4 Srv Port SMTP Rx Port No Mail Rx Interval *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL Adjusts the port number of the POP server. [1 to 65535 / 110 / 1/step] Adjusts the port number of the IMAP4 server. [1 to 65535 / 143 / 1/step] Adjusts the port number of the SMTP server. [1 to 65535 / 25 / 1/step] Adjusts the interval of receiving an e-mail. [2 to 1440 / 3 / 1 minute/step] Sets the way of keeping the e-mail in the server. 5860 019 Mail Keep Setting *CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Not keeping 1: Keeping All 2: Keeping the only error e-mail Adjusts the time for keeping the partial 5860 020 ParMail Rec TOut *CTL e-mails. If the partial e-mails are not received during the set time, these are deleted. [1 to 168 / 72 / 1 h/step] 5860 021 MDN Res RFC2298 *CTL Determines whether RFC2298compliance is

G160/G161

5-122

SM

Service Mode Table

switched on for MDN reply mail. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: No, 1: Yes Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated 5860 022 SMTP Aut FileldRep *CTL account after the SMTP server is validated. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: No. From item not switched, 1: Yes. From item switched. Selects directly the way of SMTP authentication if all SMTP authentications fail due to the error in the SP5860-006. This SP is activated only when SP5860-003 is 5860 025 SMTP Auth DirectSet *CTL set to Enable. Bit switch 0: LOGIN Bit switch 1: PLAIN Bit switch 2: CRAM MD5 Bit switch 3: DIGEST MD Bit switch 4 - 7: Not used

5866

[E-Mail Report] Disables and re-enables the email notification feature. [0 or 1/ 0 / 1/step] 0: Enable, 1: Disable Enables or disables to add the date field on the alert notice e-mail. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Off, 1: On

5866 001

Report Validity

*CTL

5866 005

Add DataFiled

*CTL

5869

[RAM Disk Setting] Enables or disables the e-mail transfer function. This SP sets the RAM disk size for the e-mail transfer function. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

5869 001

Mail Function

*CTL#

SM

5-123

G160/G161

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

0: On, 1: Off

5870 5870 001 5870 003

[Common Key Info Writi] Common Key Information Writing Writing Initialize *CTL *CTL Writes the authentication data (used for NRS) in the memory. Initializes the authentication data in the memory.

5873 5873 001 5873 002

[SD Card Appli Move] Move Exec Undo Exec See SD Card Appli Move. See SD Card Appli Move.

5878 5878 001

[Option Setup] Option Setup Executes the setup for the Data Overwrite Security Unit.

5886 5886 001

[Permit ROM update] Permit ROM update *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]

5907

[Plug/ Play] Plug/Play Name Selection [0 to 8 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Ricoh, Aficio SP C411DN 1: Ricoh, Aficio SP C410DN 2: SAVIN, CLP31DN 3: SAVIN, CLP27DN 4: Gestetner, C7531dn

5907 001

*CTL

5: Gestetner, C7526dn 6: NRG, C411DN 7: NRG, C410DN 8: infotec, IPC 3030DN 9: infotec, IPC 2525DN 10: LANIER, LP231cn/SP C411DN 11: LANIER, LP226cn/SP C410DN

5924

[SDK Apli Display] SDK Application Display

G160/G161

5-124

SM

Service Mode Table

Enables or disables the LCD display of the 5924 001 SDK Appli Display *CTL SDK application. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Not display, 1: Display

5930

[Meter Click Ch.] Meter Click Charge Enables or disables the Meter Charge mode. When enabling the Meter Charge mode, the

5930 001

Meter Click Ch.

*EGB

Counter menu is added to the user menu. [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: OFF, 1: ON Displays or does not display the end display for the PCU. This SP is activated only when

5930 010

PCU

*EGB

the SP5930-001 is set to "1". [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: OFF, 1: ON Displays or does not display the end display for the transfer belt unit. This SP is activated

5930 014

Mid Trans Unit

*EGB

only when the SP5930-001 is set to "1". [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: OFF, 1: ON Displays or does not display the end display for the fusing unit. This SP is activated only

5930 016

Fusing Unit.

*EGB

when the SP5930-001 is set to "1". [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: OFF, 1: ON

5990 5990 001 5990 002 5990 004 5990 005 5990 006

[SP Print Mode] All (Data List) SP (Mode Data List) Logging Data Diagnosic Report Non-Default Does SP5-990-002, 004, 005, 006, and 007. Prints an SMC report on all SP modes. Prints an SMC report on the SPs that save logs.
G160/G161

Prints the Self-Diagnostic Report. Prints an SMC report on the SPs that have settings, which are different from the defaults.

SM

5-125

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

5990 007

NIB Summary

Prints the network configuration report.

SP7-XXX (Data Log)


7401 7401 001 [Total SC Counter] Total SC Counter *CTL Displays the number of SC codes detected. [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

7403 7403 001 7403 002 7403 003 7403 004 7403 005 7403 006 7403 007 7403 008 7403 009 7403 010

[SC History] Latest Latest 1 Latest 2 Latest 3 Latest 4 Latest 5 Latest 6 Latest 7 Latest 8 Latest 9 *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL Displays the SC codes detected. The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are displayed on the screen, and also can be seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.

7502 7502 001

[Total Paper Jam Coun] Total Paper Jam *CTL Displays the total number of jams detected. [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

[Paper Jam/Loc] Paper Jam Location 7504 7504 001 7504 003 7504 004 7504 005 7504 006 7504 007 7504 008 7504 009 Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected. At Power On Tray 1: Non-feed Tray 2: Non-feed Tray 3: Non-feed By-pass: Non-feed Duplex: Non-feed Registration Fusing Unit *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL Not used Tray 1: Paper is not fed. Tray 2: Paper is not fed. Tray 3/LCT: Paper is not fed. By-pass: Paper is not fed. Duplex: Paper is not fed. Registration Senor does not get "ON". Fusing Exit Sensor does not get "ON".

G160/G161

5-126

SM

Service Mode Table

7504 010 7504 011 7504 012 7504 013 7504 015 7504 016 7504 061 7504 063 7504 065 7504 066 7504 070 7504 071

Exit Inverter (F) Inverter (R) Duplex Exit Bank Paper Feed Fusing Entrance Regist: Stay Exit: Stay Inverter (F): Stay Inverter (R): Stay Bank Paper 1: Stay Bank Paper 2: Stay

*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL

Paper Exit Sensor does not get "ON". Duplex: ON Duplex Jam Sensor 1 does not get "ON". Duplex Jam Sensor 2 does not get "ON". Optional Paper Feed Sensor does not get "ON". Fusing Entrance Sensor does not get "ON". Registration Sensor does not get "OFF" Paper Exit Sensor does not get "OFF". Duplex: OFF Duplex Exit 1: OFF Not used Not used

7506 7506 133 7506 134 7506 142 7506 164 7506 166 7506 172 7506 255

[Paper Jam/Size] A4 SEF A5 SEF B5 SEF LG SEF LT SEF HLT SEF Others *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL Displays the number of jams according to the paper size. [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

7507 7507 001 7507 002 7507 003 7507 004 7507 005 7507 006 7507 007 7507 008 7507 009 7507 010

[Dsply-P Jam Hist] Paper Jam History Display Latest Latest 1 Latest 2 Latest 3 Latest 4 Latest 5 Latest 6 Latest 7 Latest 8 Latest 9 *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL
G160/G161 5-127 G160/G161

Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.

*CTL *CTL *CTL

SM

Service Mode Table

7801 7801 250

[Memory/Version/PN] Memory Version and Part Number Display Memory/Version/PN *CTL Displays the part number and version of all ROMs in the machine.

[PM Counter Display] Preventive Maintenance Counter Display 7803 (Sheets or Rotations (%), Unit, [Color]) Trans Belt Unit: Transfer Belt Unit T. Roll 2: Transfer Roller 2, Waste Toner: Waste Toner Bottles Displays the PM counter for each unit. 7803 001 7803 002 7803 003 7803 004 7803 005 7803 009 7803 010 7803 011 7803 012 7803 013 7803 014 7803 015 7803 017 7803 018 7803 019 7803 020 7803 025 7803 026 Paper S: PCU: [K] S: PCU: [M] S: PCU: [C] S: PCU: [Y] S: Transfer Belt Unit S: T. Roll 2 S: Fusing Unit S: By-pass S: Tray 1 S: Tray 2 S: Tray 3 R: PCU: [K] R: PCU: [M] R: PCU: [C] R: PCU: [Y] R: Trans Belt Unit R: T. Roll 2 *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit. When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM Counter - Previous (SP7-906-1 to 10) and is reset to 0. The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked with SP7-906-1 to 10. SP7-803-001: This shows the number of pages printed. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current maintenance unit. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step] When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM Counter Previous (SP7-906-11 to 20) and is reset to 0. The total number of revolutions made 7803 027 R: Fusing Unit *EGB with the last unit replaced can be checked with SP7-906-11 to 20. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 rotation/step] 7803 033 Toner Supply: [K] *EGB Displays the number of sheets printed until

G160/G161

5-128

SM

Service Mode Table

7803 034 7803 035 7803 036 7803 037 7803 038 7803 039 7803 040 7803 045 7803 046

Toner Supply: [M] Toner Supply: [C] Toner Supply: [Y] R%: PCU: [K] R%: PCU: [M] R%: PCU: [C] R%: PCU: [Y] R%: Trans Belt Unit R%: T. Roll 2

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

the waste toner bottle becomes full or toner runs out. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step] Displays the value given by the following formula: (Current revolution / Target revolution) where Current revolution is the current value for the counter of the part, and Target revolution is the values of SP7-803-17 through 27. This shows how much of the units expected lifetime has been used up. The R% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for 100,

7803 047

R%: Fusing Unit

*EGB

that unit. If the print count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the R% counter is still less than 100%. [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 rotation%/step]

7803 050 7803 051 7803 052 7803 053 7803 054 7803 055 7803 056

PCU Life: [K] PCU Life: [Col] reserved reserved TransBeltU.Life T.Roll2 Life FusingUnit Life

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

Displays the PCU unit life. [-999 to 999 / 100 / 1/step]

Displays the transfer belt unit life. [-999 to 999 / 100 / 1/step] Displays the paper transfer unit life. [-999 to 999 / 100 / 1/step] Displays the fusing unit life. [-999 to 999 / 100 / 1/step]

[PM Counter Reset] Preventive Maintenance Counter Reset 7804 (Sheets, Unit, [Color]) Trans Belt Unit: Transfer Belt Unit, T. Roll 2: Transfer Clears the PM counter for each unit. 7804 001 Paper
G160/G161 G160/G161

Roller 2, Waste Toner: Waste Toner Bottle, Toner: Toner Bottles

SM

5-129

Service Mode Table

7804 002 7804 003 7804 004 7804 005 7804 009 7804 010 7804 011 7804 012 7804 013 7804 014 7804 015 7804 017 7804 018 7804 019 7804 020 7804 021 7804 022 7804 023 7804 024 7804 050

PCU: [K] PCU: [M] PCU: [C] PCU: [Y] Trans Belt Unit Transfer Roller 2 Fusing Unit S: By-pass S: Tray 1 S: Tray 2 S: Tray 3 S: Toner: [K] S: Toner: [M] S: Toner: [C] S: Toner: [Y] Toner Supply: [K] Toner Supply: [M] Toner Supply: [C] Toner Supply: [Y] All

Clears the PM counter. Press the Enter key after the machine asks Execute?. When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit is installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM Counter-Previous (SP7-906-1 to 40) and is reset to "0".

7806 7806 001 7806 002

[Procon Counter] Process Control Counter ([Color]) [K] [Cl] *EGB *EGB [0 to 2000 / 0 / 1/step]

[MUSIC Counter] ([Color]) 7806 003 7806 004 [K] [Cl] *EGB *EGB Counts the paper printed after previous MUSIC. [0 to 999 / 0 / 1/step]

[P. Pattern Coun.] P. Sensor Pattern Counter ([Color]) 7806 005 7806 006 [K] [Cl] *EGB *EGB [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]

[Low Resolution] Low Resolution Counter ([Color]) 7806 007 7806 008 Sheets: [K] Sheets: [M] *EGB *EGB [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]

G160/G161

5-130

SM

Service Mode Table

7806 009 7806 010 7806 011

Sheets: [C] Sheets: [Y] Counter

*EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 2000 / - / 1 /step]

7807 7807 001

[SC/ Jam Counter Reset] SC/ Jam Counter Reset Clears the all counters related to SC codes and paper jams.

7810 7810 001

[Engine Cnt Reset] Engine Counter Reset All Clear Clears the all Engine counters other than the total counter (SP7812).

7812 7812 001 7812 002 7812 100

[Total Cnt. Rst.] Total Counter Reset Color Counter Black Counter All Reset Clears the total color counter. Clears the total black counter. Clears the total all counter.

[Rep. Cnter Reset] Replacement Counter Reset 7815 (Sheets, Unit, [Color]) Trans Belt Unit: Transfer Belt unit, Waste Toner: Waste Toner Bottle, Toner: Toner Bottle 7815 001 7815 002 7815 003 7815 004 7815 005 7815 006 7815 007 7815 008 PCU: [K] PCU: [M] PCU: [C] PCU: [Y] Trans Belt Unit Transfer Roller 2 Fusing Unit S: By-pass Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the black PCU. Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the magenta PCU. Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the cyan PCU. Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the yellow PCU. Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the Transfer belt unit. Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the Transfer Roller. Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the Fusing unit. Clears the replacement counter and the
G160/G161

SM

5-131

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

previous unit counter of the Paper pick up roller at by-pass. Clears the replacement counter and the 7815 009 S: Tray 1 previous unit counter of the Paper pick up roller at tray 1. Clears the replacement counter and the 7815 010 S: Tray 2 previous unit counter of the Paper pick up roller at tray 2. Clears the replacement counter and the 7815 011 S: Tray 3 previous unit counter of the Paper pick up roller at tray 3. 7815 029 Toner: [K] Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the black toner bottle Clears the replacement counter and the 7815 030 Toner: [M] previous unit counter of the magenta toner bottle 7815 031 Toner: [C] Clears the replacement counter and the previous unit counter of the cyan toner bottle Clears the replacement counter and the 7815 032 Toner: [Y] previous unit counter of the yellow toner bottle 7815 100 All Clears the all replacement and the previous unit counters.

7817 7817 100

[Rep Cnter Reset] Replacement Counter Reset All Clear Clears the all adjustment counters.

7832 7832 001

[Display-Self-Diag] Display Self-Diagnostic Result Displays the result of the diagnostics. To Display-Self-Diag scroll the return codes, press the up-arrow key or the down-arrow key.

7834 7834 255

[Cov. Counter] Coverage Counter All Clear Clears the all coverage counters.

G160/G161

5-132

SM

Service Mode Table

7836 7836 001

[Total Memory Size] Shows the total storage size.

[Rep. Count. Disp] Replacement Counter Display 7853 7853 002 7853 003 7853 004 7853 005 7853 009 7853 010 7853 011 7853 012 7853 013 7853 014 7853 015 7853 028 (Sheets, Unit, [Color]) Trans Belt Unit: Transfer Belt unit, Waste Toner: Waste Toner Bottle, Toner: Toner Bottle PCU: [K] PCU: [M] PCU: [C] PCU: [Y] Trans Belt Unit Transfer Roller 2 Fusing Unit S: By-pass S: Tray 1 S: Tray 2 S: Tray 3 Waste Toner *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the replacement counter for each unit. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]

7901 7901 001 7901 002 7901 003

[Assert Info] File Name Number of Lines Location *CTL *CTL *CTL Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data stored in this SP is used for problem analysis.

[PM Counter-PREV] Previous Preventive Maintenance Counter Display 7906 7906 001 7906 002 7906 003 7906 004 7906 008 7906 009 7906 010 (Sheets or Rotation (%),Unit, [Color]) Trans Belt Unit: Transfer Belt Unit, T. Roll 2: Transfer Roller 2, Waste Toner: Waste Toner Bottle, Toner: Toner Bottles S: PCU: [K] S: PCU: [M] S: PCU: [C] S: PCU: [Y] S: Trans Belt Unit S: T. Roll 2 S: Fusing Unit *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units.
G160/G161 G160/G161

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]

SM

5-133

Service Mode Table

7906 011 7906 012 7906 013 7906 014 7906 018 7906 019 7906 020 7906 026 7906 027 7906 028 7906 029 7906 030 7906 031 7906 032 7906 033 7906 034 7906 035 7906 036 7906 037 7906 038 7906 039 7906 040

R: PCU: [K] R: PCU: [M] R: PCU: [C] R: PCU: [Y] R: Trans Belt Unit R: Paper Trans R: Fusing Unit Toner Supply: [K] Toner Supply: [M] Toner Supply: [C] Toner Supply: [Y] R%: PCU: [K] R%: PCU: [M] R%: PCU: [C] R%: PCU: [Y] R%: Trans Belt Unit R%: T. Roll 2 R%: Fusing Unit S: By-pass S: Tray 1 S: Tray 2 S: Tray 3

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the toner supply time for each color in the previous toner bottles. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the value given by the following formula: (Current count / Yield count) x 100, where Current count is the current values in the counter for the part, and Yield count is the recommended yield. [0 to 999 / 0 / 1%/step] Displays the number of sheets fed with the previous maintenance unit. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the number of revolutions for each unit in the previous maintenance units. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step]

7931 7931 001 7931 002 7931 003 7931 004 7931 005 7931 006 7931 007 7931 008 7931 009

[Toner Info [K]] Toner Bottle Information [K] (R: Replacement or E: End) Model ID Cartridge Ver Brand ID Area ID Production ID Color ID Maintenance ID New Recycle Count *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the information number for each category.

G160/G161

5-134

SM

Service Mode Table

7931 010 7931 011 7931 012 7931 013 7931 014 7931 015 7931 016 7931 017 7931 018

Prod. Date Serial No. Remaining Toner Toner End Refill Flag R: Total Counter R: Color Counter E: Total Counter E: Color Counter

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the remaining toner rate. [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step] Displays the toner end record. Displays the refilling record. Displays the total number of sheets when replacing the new toner bottle for the b/w mode or the full color mode. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the total number of sheets when detecting the toner end for the b/w mode or the full color mode. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the toner near end record. [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the date of the install the toner bottle. Displays the date of the toner end.

7931 019 7931 020 7931 021

Near End Install Date Toner End Date

*EGB *EGB *EGB

7932 7932 001 7932 002 7932 003 7932 004 7932 005 7932 006 7932 007 7932 008 7932 009 7932 010 7932 011 7932 012

[Toner Info [M]] Toner Bottle Information [M] (R: Replacement or E: End) Model ID Cartridge Ver Brand ID Area ID Production ID Color ID Maintenance ID New Recycle Count Prod. Date Serial No. Remaining Toner *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the remaining toner rate. [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
G160/G161 G160/G161

Displays the information number for each category.

SM

5-135

Service Mode Table

7932 013 7932 014 7932 015 7932 016 7932 017 7932 018

Toner End Refill Flag R: Total Counter R: Color Counter E: Total Counter E: Color Counter

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

Displays the toner end record. Displays the refilling record. Displays the total number of sheets when replacing the new toner bottle for the b/w mode or the full color mode. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the total number of sheets when detecting the toner end for the b/w mode or the full color mode. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the toner near end record. [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the date of the install the toner bottle. Displays the date of the toner end.

7932 019 7932 020 7932 021

Near End Install Date Toner End Date

*EGB *EGB *EGB

7933 7933 001 7933 002 7933 003 7933 004 7933 005 7933 006 7933 007 7933 008 7933 009 7933 010 7933 011 7933 012 7933 013 7933 014 7933 015 7933 016

[Toner Info [C]] Toner Bottle Information [C] (R: Replacement or E: End) Model ID Cartridge Ver Brand ID Area ID Production ID Color ID Maintenance ID New Recycle Count Prod. Date Serial No. Remaining Toner Toner End Refill Flag R: Total Counter R: Color Counter *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the remaining toner rate. [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step] Displays the toner end record. Displays the refilling record. Displays the total number of sheets when replacing the new toner bottle for the b/w Displays the information number for each category.

G160/G161

5-136

SM

Service Mode Table

mode or the full color mode. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] 7933 017 7933 018 E: Total Counter E: Color Counter *EGB *EGB Displays the total number of sheets when detecting the toner end for the b/w mode or the full color mode. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] 7933 019 7933 020 7933 021 Near End Install Date Toner End Date *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the toner near end record. [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the date of the install the toner bottle. Displays the date of the toner end.

7934 7934 001 7934 002 7934 003 7934 004 7934 005 7934 006 7934 007 7934 008 7934 009 7934 010 7934 011 7934 012 7934 013 7934 014 7934 015 7934 016 7934 017 7934 018

[Toner Info [Y]] Toner Bottle Information [Y] (R: Replacement or E: End times) Model ID Cartridge Ver Brand ID Area ID Production ID Color ID Maintenance ID New Recycle Count Prod. Date Serial No. Remaining Toner Toner End Refill Flag R: Total Counter R: Color Counter E: Total Counter E: Color Counter *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the remaining toner rate. [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step] Displays the toner end record. Displays the refilling record. Displays the total number of sheets when replacing the new toner bottle for the b/w mode or the full color mode. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the total number of sheets when detecting the toner end for the b/w mode or
G160/G161

Displays the information number for each category.

SM

5-137

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

the full color mode. [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step] 7934 019 7934 020 7934 021 Near End Install Date Toner End Date *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the toner near end record. [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the date of the install the toner bottle. Displays the date of the toner end.

7935 7935 004 7935 005 7935 006

[PM Interval] Preventive Maintenance Interval (Sheets or Rotations, Unit) R: Trans. Belt S: Fusing R: Fusing *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 500.00 / P2a: 104.82, P2b: 106.32 / 0.01 Km/step] [0 to 255 / 100 / 1 K/step] [0 to 200.00 / P2a: 168.92, P2b: 170.54 / 0.01 Km/step]

7936

[PM Count. Reset] Preventive Maintenance Counter Reset Resets the following SP counters. SP3251-001 to -004 SP3303-001 to -004 SP3821-001 to -010 SP7931-001 to -021 SP7932-001 to -021 SP7933-001 to -021 SP7934-001 to -021 SP9001-001 to -024 SP9001-029 to -032 SP9001-059 to -061 SP9001-075 to -077 SP9901-001, 002 SP9914-005 to -006

7936 001

All

7941 7941 001

[TonerLog1 [K]] Toner Bottle Log Data 1 [K] (R: Replacement or E: End) S/N *EGB Displays the serial number of the previous

G160/G161

5-138

SM

Service Mode Table

bottle. 7941 002 7941 003 Installed Date Total Count [TonerLog2 [K]] 7941 004 7941 005 7941 006 S/N Installed Date Total Count [TonerLog3 [K]] 7941 007 7941 008 7941 009 S/N Installed Date Total Count [TonerLog4 [K]] 7941 010 7941 011 7941 012 S/N Installed Date Total Count [TonerLog5 [K]] 7941 013 7941 014 7941 015 S/N Installed Date Total Count *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the serial number of the fourth previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the fourth previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the fourth previous bottle.
G160/G161 G160/G161

*EGB *EGB

Displays the installed date of the previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the previous bottle.

*EGB *EGB *EGB

Displays the serial number of the one before the previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the one before the previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the one before the previous bottle.

*EGB *EGB *EGB

Displays the serial number of the one before the second previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the one before the second previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the one before the second previous bottle.

*EGB *EGB *EGB

Displays the serial number of the third previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the third previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the third previous bottle.

7942

[TonerLog1 [M]] Toner Bottle Log Data 1 [K]

SM

5-139

Service Mode Table

(R: Replacement or E: End) 7942 001 7942 002 7942 003 S/N Installed Date Total Counter [TonerLog2 [M]] 7942 004 7942 005 7942 006 S/N Installed Date Total Counter [TonerLog3 [M]] 7942 007 7942 008 7942 009 S/N Installed Date Total Counter [TonerLog4 [M]] 7942 010 7942 011 7942 012 S/N Installed Date Total Counter [TonerLog5 [M]] 7942 013 7942 014 7942 015 S/N Installed Date Total Count *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the serial number of the fourth previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the fourth previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the fourth previous bottle. *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the serial number of the third previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the third previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the third previous bottle. *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the serial number of the one before the second previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the one before the second previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the one before the second previous bottle. *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the serial number of the one before the previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the one before the previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the one before the previous bottle. *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the serial number of the previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the previous bottle.

G160/G161

5-140

SM

Service Mode Table

7943 7943 001 7943 002 7943 003

[TonerLog1 [C]] Toner Bottle Log Data 1 [K] (R: Replacement or E: End) S/N Installed Date Total Counter [TonerLog2 [C]] *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the serial number of the previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the previous bottle.

7943 004 7943 005 7943 006

S/N Installed Date Total Counter [TonerLog3 [C]]

*EGB *EGB *EGB

Displays the serial number of the one before the previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the one before the previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the one before the previous bottle.

7943 007 7943 008 7943 009

S/N Installed Date Total Counter [TonerLog4 [C]]

*EGB *EGB *EGB

Displays the serial number of the one before the second previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the one before the second previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the one before the second previous bottle.

7943 010 7943 011 7943 012

S/N Installed Date Total Counter [TonerLog5 [C]]

*EGB *EGB *EGB

Displays the serial number of the third previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the third previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the third previous bottle.

previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the fourth previous bottle.

7943 014

Installed Date

*EGB

SM

5-141

G160/G161

G160/G161

7943 013

S/N

*EGB

Displays the serial number of the fourth

Service Mode Table

7943 015

Total Count

*EGB

Displays the total counter of the fourth previous bottle.

7944 7944 001 7944 002 7944 003

[TonerLog1 [Y]] Toner Bottle Log Data 1 [K] (R: Replacement or E: End) S/N Installed Date Total Counter [TonerLog2 [Y]] *EGB *EGB *EGB Displays the serial number of the previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the previous bottle.

7944 004 7944 005 7944 006

S/N Installed Date Total Counter [TonerLog3 [Y]]

*EGB *EGB *EGB

Displays the serial number of the one before the previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the one before the previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the one before the previous bottle.

7944 007 7944 008 7944 009

S/N Installed Date Total Counter [TonerLog4 [Y]]

*EGB *EGB *EGB

Displays the serial number of the one before the second previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the one before the second previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the one before the second previous bottle.

7944 010 7944 011 7944 012

S/N Installed Date Total Counter [TonerLog5 [Y]]

*EGB *EGB *EGB

Displays the serial number of the third previous bottle. Displays the installed date of the third previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the third previous bottle.

7944 013

S/N

*EGB

Displays the serial number of the fourth previous bottle.

G160/G161

5-142

SM

Service Mode Table

7944 014 7944 015

Installed Date Total Count

*EGB *EGB

Displays the installed date of the fourth previous bottle. Displays the total counter of the fourth previous bottle.

SP8-XXX (Data Log 2)


The counters in Data Log 2 are commonly used in multiple machines. Data Log 2 includes the counters of the functions or units that are not supported by Model G-P1a and P1b. The counters in Data Log 2 are cleared by SP5-801 (Memory Clear) or SP7-808 (Counter Reset). Keys and abbreviations in Data Log 2 Program-related keys and abbreviations T: P: O: The grand total of the counters of all application programs The counter of the printer application program excluding the events related to the document server The counter of other application programs including remote application programs

8001 8004

[T: Total Jobs] [P: Total Jobs] [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL *CTL

Total jobs

The number of times the application program starts a job

The jobs interrupted by paper jams or some other errors are also counted. The jobs executed by SPs are not counted. 8021 8024 8027 [T: Pjob/LS] [P: Pjob/LS] [O: Pjob/LS] server [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] *CTL *CTL *CTL

Print job / Local storage; document server

The number of times the application program stores data on the document
G160/G161 5-143 G160/G161

SM

Service Mode Table

When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments. 8031 8034 8037 [T: Pjob/DesApl] [P: Pjob/DesApl [O: Pjob/DesApl] server [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the counter of the application program that executes the print job increases. 8061 8064 8067 [T: FIN Jobs] [P: FIN Jobs] [O: FIN Jobs] [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 001 002 003 Sort Stack Staple The number of times the application program starts the sort mode The number of times the application program starts the stack mode The number of times the application program starts the staple mode The number of times the application program starts the booklet mode 004 Booklet The counter of the staple mode (003) can also increase. The number of times the application program 005 Z-Fold starts the Z-fold mode The booklet mode is not included. 006 Punch The number of times the application program starts the punch mode *CTL *CTL *CTL Finish, post-print processing jobs *CTL *CTL *CTL Print job/ Designated application program

The number of times the application program retrieves data from the document

The number of times the application program uses the finisher

G160/G161

5-144

SM

Service Mode Table

The counter of the printer application program (P:) can also increase. 007 Other (Reserved)

8071 8074 8077

[T: Jobs/PGS] [P: Jobs/PGS] [O: Jobs/PGS] [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL *CTL *CTL Jobs/ Pages

The number of jobs that try to output a specific number of pages -001 -002 -003 -004 -005 -006 -007 1 Page 2 Pages 3 Pages 4 Pages 5 Pages 6 to 10 Pages 11 to 20 Pages -008 -009 -010 -011 -012 -013 -014 21 to 50 Pages 51 to 100 Pages 101 to 300 Pages 301 to 500 Pages 501 to 700 Pages 701 to 1000 Pages 1001 to Pages

The jobs interrupted by paper jams or some other errors are also counted. If a job is suspended and restarted later, the job is seen as one job. 8381 8384 8387 [T: Total PrtPGS] [P: Total PrtPGS] [O: Total PrtPGS] *CTL *CTL *CTL Total print pages

The number of sheets that the application program tries to print (excluding the pages printed in the SP mode) [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] The following pages are not counted as printed pages: Blank pages in a duplex printing job Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets Reports printed to confirm counts All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.) Test prints for machine image adjustment Error notification reports Partially printed pages as the result of a printer jam
G160/G161 G160/G161

SM

5-145

Service Mode Table

8391

[LSize PrtPGS] The number of sheets printed on A3/DLT and Large size print pages *CTL larger sizes [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8411

[Prints/Duplex] Prints/Duplex *CTL The number of sheets used in duplex printing [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

The counter increases by +1 when both sides (front/back) are printed. The counter does not increase when one of the two sides is not printed (e.g., the last page of the documents that have three pages, five pages, seven pages, and so on). 8421 8424 8427 [T: PrtPGS/Dup Comb] *CTL [P: PrtPGS/Dup Comb] *CTL [O: PrtPGS/Dup Comb] *CTL The number of sheets used in binding and combining [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 001 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 saved. Partially printed sheets are also counted as 1 page (e.g, the last page in the 4-Up mode is only partially printed when the documents have 5, 6, or 7 pages, 9, 10, or 11 pages, 13, 14, or 15 pages, and so on.). Here is a summary of how the counters work in the booklet and magazine modes. Simplex> Duplex Simplex Combine Duplex Combine 2> 4> 6> 8> 9> 16> Booklet Magazine *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up) 4 pages on 1 side (4-Up) 6 pages on 1 side (6-Up) 8 pages on 1 side (8-Up) 9 pages on 1 side (9-Up) 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up) Print pages/ Duplex printing combine

These counters are useful for the users who want to know how much paper they have

G160/G161

5-146

SM

Service Mode Table

Booklet Original Pages 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Count 1 2 2 2 3 4 4 4

Magazine Original Pages 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Count 1 2 2 2 4 4 4 4

8431 8434 8437

[T: PrtPGS/ImgEdt] [P: PrtPGS/ImgEdt] [O: PrtPGS/ImgEdt] [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL *CTL *CTL

Print pages/ Image editing performed on the original with the copier GUI

The number of pages that the application program handles in a specific way The number of cover sheets or slip sheets inserted 001 Cover/Slip Sheet *CTL A duplex-printed cover is counted as two. 002 Series/Book *CTL The number of pages printed in series (one side) or in the booklet mode The number of pages where stamps were 003 User Stamp *CTL applied (including page numbering and date stamping)

8441 8444 8447

[T: PrtPGS/Ppr Size] [P: PrtPGS/Ppr Size] [O: PrtPGS/Ppr Size] [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL *CTL *CTL


G160/G161 G160/G161

Print pages/ Paper size

The number of sheets of a specific paper size that the application program uses 001 002 A3 A4 007 008 LG LT

SM

5-147

Service Mode Table

003 004 005 006

A5 B4 B5 DLT

009 010 254 255

HLT Full Bleed Other (Standard) Other (Custom)

These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF. 8451 [PrtPGS/Ppr Tray] [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8451 001 8451 002 8451 003 8451 004 8451 005 8451 006 8451 007 8451 008 8451 009 8451 010 Bypass Tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Tray 5 Tray 6 Tray 7 Tray 8 Tray 9 *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL By-pass Tray Printer Paper Tray Unit/LCT (Optional) Paper Tray Unit (Optional) (Not used) (Not used) (Not used) (Not used) (Not used) (Not used) *CTL Print pages/ Paper tray

The number of sheets fed from a specific tray

8461 8464

[T: PrtPGS/Ppr Type] [P: PrtPGS/Ppr Type] [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL *CTL

Print pages/ Paper type

The number of sheets of specific paper types 001 002 003 004 Normal Recycled Special Thick 005 006 007 008 Normal (Back) Thick (Back) OHP Other

These counters increase when the paper is output. On the other hand, the PM counter increases (to measure the service life of each feed roller) when the paper is fed. Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted. During duplex printing, a sheet printed on two sides and a sheet printed on one side are both counted as 1.

G160/G161

5-148

SM

Service Mode Table

8471

[PrtPGS/Mag] [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL

Print pages/ Magnification

The number of pages magnified or reduced 8471 001 8471 002 8471 003 to 49% 50% to 99% 100% 8471 004 8471 005 101% to 200% 201% to

Some application programs (on the computer) can specify the magnification setting of the printer driver (e.g., MS Excel). In a case like this, SP8-471 recognizes the setting and increases the corresponding counter. Other application programs can magnify or reduce the print images on their own. In a case like this, SP8-471 does not recognize the magnification setting of the application programs and increase the counter of 100%. Magnification adjustment conducted on the document server is not counted. Blank cover sheets and slip sheets are regarded as 100%. 8481 8484 [T: PrtPGS/TonSave] [P: PrtPGS/TonSave] [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These counters display the same result. 8501 8504 8507 [T: PrtPGS/Col Mode] *CTL *CTL *CTL

Print pages/ Toner save

The number of pages printed with the toner save feature activated

[P: PrtPGS/Col Mode] *CTL [O: PrtPGS/Col Mode]

Print pages/ Color mode

The number of pages printed in a specific color mode [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 001 002 003 B/W Single Color Full Color 004 005 Single Color Two Color

8511 8514

[T: PrtPGS/Emul] [P: PrtPGS/Emul] [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL *CTL

Print pages/ Emulation


G160/G161 G160/G161

The number of pages printed by the printer emulation mode 001 RPCS 008 RTIFF

SM

5-149

Service Mode Table

002 003 004 005 006 007

RPDL PS3 R98 R16 GL/GL2 R55

009 010 011 012 013 014

PDF PCL5e/5c PCL XL IPDL-C BM-Links (for local models only) Other

These counters display the same result. 8521 8524 [T: PrtPGS/FIN] [P: PrtPGS/FIN] [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 001 002 003 004 Sort Stack Staple Booklet Even if the pages are too many for the finisher to staple, all pages are counted (including unstapled pages). The counter of stapling (003) increases by +1 when the paper is transported from the printer to the tray of the finisher. Even if a paper jam occurs on this path, the counter (003) increases. If the same job is retried, the counter (003) increases once again. 8531 [Staples] The number of staples [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] *CTL Staples 005 006 007 Z-Fold Punch Other *CTL *CTL

Print pages/ Finish post-print processing

The number of pages processed by the finisher

8581

[T: Counter] [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL

Total counter

The number of outputs in a specific color mode 001 002 003 004 005 008 Total Total: Full Colo B&W/Single Color Development: CMY Development: K Print: Color 010 011 012 013 014 015 Total: Color Total: B/W Full Colour: A3 Full Colour: B4 Full Colour Print Mono Colour Print

G160/G161

5-150

SM

Service Mode Table

009

Print: B/W

8584

[P: Counter] [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL

Print counter

The number of outputs in a specific color mode 8584 001 8584 002 8584 003 B/W Mono Color Full Color 8584 004 8584 005 Single Color Two Color

8591

[O: Counter] [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL

Other counter

The number of A3/DLT, duplex printing, or staples 8591 001 A3/DLT 8591 002 Duplex

Note that these counters are not for the printer application program. 8601 [CvgCounter] *CTL

The coverage rate of B/W printing or Color printing/ The number of prints out in B/W printing or Color printing [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8601 001 8601 002 Cvg: BW % Cvg: FC % 8601 011 8601 012 Cvg: BW Pages Cvg: FC Pages

8771

[Dev Counter] [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL

Development counter

The number of rotations of the development rollers 8771 001 8771 002 8771 003 Total K Y 8771 004 8771 005 M C

8781 8781 001 8781 002 8781 003 8781 004

[TonerBotolInfo] Toner Bottle Information Last [BK] Last [Y] Last [M] Last [C] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB The number of toner bottles (bottles) already [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
G160/G161 G160/G161

replaced

SM

5-151

Service Mode Table

8801 8801 001 8801 001 8801 001 8801 001

[Toner Remain] K Y M C

*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL

Toner remain

The percentage of the remaining toner [0 to 100/ 0 / 1]

8851

[Cvr Cnt: 0-10%] Coverage Counter (Sheets, [Color]) S: Sheets [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] (*EGB)

8851 011 8851 012 8851 013 8851 014 8851 021 8851 022 8851 023 8851 024

0 - 2%: BK 0 - 2%: Y 0 - 2%: M 0 - 2%: C 3 - 4%: BK 3 - 4%: Y 3 - 4%: M 3 - 4%: C

8851 031 8851 032 8851 033 8851 034 8851 041 8851 042 8851 043 8851 044

5 - 7%: Bk 5 - 7%: Y 5 - 7%: M 5 - 7%: C 8 - 10%: Bk 8 - 10%: Y 8 - 10%: M 8 - 10%: C

8861 8871 8881 001 002 003 004

[Cvr Cnt: 11-20%] Coverage Counter (Sheets, [Color]) S: Sheets [Cvr Cnt: 21-30%] Coverage Counter (Sheets, [Color]) S: Sheets [Cvr Cnt: 31%-] Coverage Counter (Sheets, [Color]) S: Sheets [K] [Y] [M] [C] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB The number of printed sheets of a specific coverage ratio [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

For example, SP8-851-001 displays the number of printed sheets whose black-coverage ratio is 0 percent through 10 percent. SP8-881-004 displays the number of scanned sheets whose cyan-coverage ratio is 31 percent or higher. [Page/Toner Bottle] (Sheets, [Color]) S: Sheets

8891

G160/G161

5-152

SM

Service Mode Table

8891 001 8891 002 8891 003 8891 004

[K] [Y] [M] [C]

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB The number of printed sheets [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8901 8901 001 8901 002 8901 003 8901 004

[Page/Ink Prev1] [K] [Y] [M] [C] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB The number of printed sheets with the previously replaced units [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8911 8911 001 8911 002 8911 003 8911 004

[Page/Ink Prev2] [K] [Y] [M] [C] *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB The number of printed sheets with the units that was replaced before the previous unit. [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8921 8921 001 8921 002 8921 003 8921 004 8921 011 8921 012 8921 013 8921 014

[Cvr Cnt/Total] Coverage (%): Bk Coverage (%): Y Coverage (%): M Coverage (%): C Coverage/P: Bk Coverage/P: Y Coverage/P: M Coverage/P: C

*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL

Coverage Counter Total

The amount of total coverage rate and printouts in each coverage rate [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

[Machine Status] 8941 [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

*CTL

Machine status

The amount of time the machine spends in a specific mode The engine is operating. The counter does

8941 001

Operation Time

*CTL

saved in the HDD (while engine is not operating).

SM

5-153

G160/G161

G160/G161

not include the time when the data is being

Service Mode Table

The engine is not operating. The counter includes the time when the data is being 8941 002 Standby Time *CTL saved in the HDD. The counter does not include the time when the machine is n the Energy Saver Mode, the Low Power Mode, or the Off Mode. The machine is in the Energy Saver Mode. 8941 003 Energy Save Time *CTL The counter includes the time when the background printing is being executed. The machine is in the Low Power Mode. The counter includes the time when the engine is 8941 004 Low Power Time *CTL on in the Energy Saver Mode. The counter also includes the time when the background printing is being executed. The machine is in the Off Mode. The counter includes the time when the background 8941 005 Off Mode Time *CTL printing is being executed. The counter does not include the time when the main power switch is off. 8941 006 8941 007 8941 008 8941 009 SC PrtJam OrgJam Supply PM Unit E *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL The total downtime caused by SC codes The total downtime caused by paper jams The total downtime caused by original jams The total downtime caused by toner ends

8999 8999 001 8999 006 8999 007 8999 008 8999 009 8999 013 8999 014 8999 015 8999 016 8999 017

[AdminCounter] Total Printer: FC Printer: FC Printer: OneC Printer: TwoC Duplex Cvg:FC % Cvg:BW % Cvg:FC Pges Cvg:BW Pages

*CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL *CTL

Coverage Counter Total

Displays the administrator counter in the UP mode. [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

G160/G161

5-154

SM

Service Mode Table

SP9-XXX
9001 [Shutter Motor] 9001 064 9001 065 Open Time Close Time *EGB *EGB Adjusts the open shutter time. [0 to 990 / 210 / 10 ms/step] Adjusts the closed shutter time. [0 to 990 / 100 / 10 ms/step] Adjusts the threshold for filming removal. This 9001 074 Interval: [k] *EGB SP is executed even the print job is proceeding. [0 to 65535 / 150 / 1/step] [Vb: LS] Vb at Low Process Speed 9001 083 Vb Shift *EGB [0 to 65535 / 10 / 1/step]

[Filming Remov.] Filming Removal

[Vc: LS] Vc at Low Process Speed 9001 084 Vc Shift *EGB [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the counter that counts the number 9001 099 Interval (E): [K] *EGB of sheets in black and white printing mode from previous filming removal. [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] Displays the counter that counts the number 9001 100 Interval (E): [FC] *EGB of sheets in full color printing mode from previous filming removal. [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step] Adjusts the threshold for job end filming 9001 101 Interval: [end] *EGB removal. This SP is not executed until the print job has ended. [0 to 65535 / 75 / 1/step] 9001 102 9001 103 9001 104 Fusing JAM Cnt Vk Coef. [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.00 / 0.01 /step] [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step] Displays the paper jam counter of the fusing unit. [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
G160/G161

[Filming Remov.] Filming Removal: Job end

SM

5-155

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

9003 9003 001 9003 002 9003 003 9003 004 9003 005

[Time Adjust.] Time Adjustment Adjusts the current year, month, date, hour, and minute. Year Month Date Hour Minute [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 y/step] [1 to 12 / 1 / 1 m/step] [1 to 31 / 1 / 1 d/step] [0 to 23 / 0 / 1 hour/step] [0 to 59 / 0 / 1 m/step]

[Gamma] Gamma Table 9903 9903 028 9903 031 9903 034 9903 037 (Process Speed, [Color]) RS: Regular Speed, LS: Low Speed Adjusts the gamma table lists for each mode. OHP: K3 OHP: M3 OHP: C3 OHP: Y3 *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 31 / 7 / 1/step]

9906 9906 001 9906 002 9906 003 9906 004 9906 005 9906 006 9906 007 9906 008 9906 009 9906 010

[Vpp] Adjusts the AC charge bias correction for each environment. Vpp1: LL Vpp2: LL Vpp1: ML Vpp2: ML Vpp1: MM Vpp2: MM Vpp1: MH Vpp2: MH Vpp1: HH Vpp2: HH *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 3000 / 1950 / 1 V/step] [0 to 3000 / 2200 / 1 V/step] [0 to 3000 / 1780 / 1 V/step] [0 to 3000 / 2030 / 1 V/step] [0 to 3000 / 1770 / 1 V/step] [0 to 3000 / 2020 / 1 V/step] [0 to 3000 / 1810 / 1 V/step] [0 to 3000 / 2060 / 1 V/step] [0 to 3000 / 1770 / 1 V/step] [0 to 3000 / 2020 / 1 V/step]

9908 9908 001 9908 002

[Background Po.] Background Potential Adjusts the upper or lower threshold for disabling the charge bias. Upper Limit Lower Limit *EGB *EGB [0 to 300 / 130 / 1/step]

G160/G161

5-156

SM

Service Mode Table

9910 9910 001 9910 003 9910 004 9910 005 9910 006 9910 007 9910 008 9910 010 9910 011 9910 012 9910 013

[Factory Adj.] Charge Output [All] TC Initial [All] TC Initial [K] TC Initial [M] TC Initial [C] TC Initial [Y] TC Initial [K] Toner FillUP [M] Toner FillUP [C] Toner FillUP [Y] Toner FillUP *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB Performs the charge output. Performs the toner supply for all colors. Performs the developer initializing for all colors. Performs the developer initializing for black. Performs the developer initializing for magenta. Performs the developer initializing for cyan. Performs the developer initializing for yellow. Fills up the black toner. Fills up the magenta toner. Fills up the cyan toner. Fills up the yellow toner. Specifies the threshold for completing the toner filled up. When the toner is detected three times, the filling up the toner ends. [0 to 5/ 3 / 1 /step] Selects the Vsg adjustment execution when the line position adjustment is manually done. [1 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]

9910 020

Upper Limit

*EGB

9910 021

MUSIC Vsg Adj.

*EGB

1: Normal (ON except the line position adjustment at printout interval) 2: Always ON 3: Always OFF

9911 9911 001

[TC Initial] Adjusts the maximum toner cartridge Maximum Repeat *EGB initializing time. [1 to 30 / 15 / 1 /step] Adjusts the threshold for toner cartridge

9911 002

Threshold

*EGB

initializing. [1 to 100 / 20 / 0.01 V/step]

SM

5-157

G160/G161

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

9912 9912 001

[ST Sensor] read *EGB Adjusts the Vcnt. DFU

9914 9914 001 9914 002 9914 003 9914 004

[Waste Toner NF] Waste Toner Near Full Specifies the number of sheets to be printed after waste toner near full. Print 1 Print 2 Print 3 Print 4 *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB [0 to 5000 / 1250 / 1/step] [0 to 5000 / 250 / 1/step] [0 to 5000 / 125 / 1/step] Specifies the number of sheets to be printed after replacing the waste toner bottle. [0 to 5000 / 2500 / 1/step] Displays the times of waste toner near full. [0 to 50 / 0 / 1 /step] Displays the total counter for waste toner near full. [0 to 100000 / 0 / 1 /step]

9914 005

Detection Times

*EGB

9914 006

Near Full Count.

*EGB

9918 9918 001

[LD Pow. Change] LDB Power Change *EGB [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric 0: Not execute, 1: Execute

9923 9923 001 9923 002 9923 003 9923 004 9923 005 9923 006 9923 007 9923 008 9923 009 9923 010 9923 011

[Vt ShiftAdj Mode] These SP's measure the Vt values at regular speed or low speed. DFU Vt ShiftAdj Mode [K]Vt Shift [M]Vt Shift [C]Vt Shift [Y]Vt Shift [K]Vt Normal Speed [M]Vt Normal Speed [C]Vt Normal Speed [Y]Vt Normal Speed [K]Vt Half Speed [M]Vt Half Speed *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

G160/G161

5-158

SM

Service Mode Table

9923 012 9923 013 9923 014 9923 015

[C]Vt Half Speed [Y]Vt Half Speed Agitate Time: STD Agitate Time: HALF

*EGB *EGB *EGB *EGB

9924 9923 001

[ACS Setting] Turns on or off the ASC. ON/OFF *EGB [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: OFF, 1: ON Specifies the threshold of changing mode from color to BW when ACS is set to "0: OFF" with SP9923-001. [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 sheet/step:

9923 002

Switching

*EGB

5.2.3 INPUT CHECK TABLE


When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table. Bit No. Result 7 0 or 1 6 0 or 1 5 0 or 1 4 0 or 1 3 0 or 1 2 0 or 1 1 0 or 1 0 0 or 1

SP5-803 -XXX 001

Bit Input Check 1 Not used Input Check 2 0 1 2

Description

Reading 0 1

Color OPC Motor

Locked

Not locked Not locked Not locked Not locked Paper not detected

Black OPC/ Development Motor Locked Color Development Motor Paper Feed/ Fusing Motor Registration Sensor Paper Exit Sensor Interlock Switch 5V Top Cover Sensor Locked Locked Paper detected

002

3 4 5 6 7

Paper not detected Paper detected


G160/G161 G160/G161

Open Close

Close Open

003

Input Check 3

SM

5-159

Service Mode Table

SP5-803 -XXX

Bit Not used Input Check 4 0-3 4 5 Not used

Description

Reading 0 1

Locked Activated (Actuator inside sensor) Activated (Actuator inside sensor) Opened

Not locked Deactivated

Polygon Motor Fan Color Drum Gear Position Sensor Black Drum Gear Position Sensor Interlock Switch 24V

004

6 7 005

Deactivated Closed

Input Check 5 Not used Input Check 6 Not used Input Check 11 0 1 2 Paper Size Sensor 1 Paper Size Sensor 2 Paper Size Sensor 3 Paper Size Sensor 4 Paper Width Sensor Paper Height Sensor 1 Paper Height Sensor 2 Paper End Sensor Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed Not End Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed End

006

011

3 4 5 6 7

012

Input Check 12 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Transfer Belt Contact Sensor Transfer Roller Contact Sensor Duplex Jam Sensor 1 Duplex Jam Sensor 1 Fusing New Unit Sensor Fusing Unit Set Sensor P1 Fusing Unit Set Sensor P2 Not Contact Not Contact Paper detected Paper detected New Set Set Contact Contact Paper not detected Paper not detected Old Not Set Not Set

G160/G161

5-160

SM

Service Mode Table

SP5-803 -XXX 7

Bit Not Used

Description -

Reading 0 1

Input Check 13 0 1 2 013 3 4 5 6 7 Paper Overflow Sensor Fusing Exit Sensor Inverter Sensor Fusing Unit Fan PSU Fan Drive Unit Fan Paper Exit Fan Not used Overflow Paper detected Paper detected Locked Locked Locked Locked Not overflow Paper not detected Paper not detected Not locked Not locked Not locked Not locked

Input Check 14 0 1 2 014 3 4 5 6 7 Toner End Sensor [Y] Toner End Sensor [C] Toner End Sensor [M] Toner End Sensor [K] New PCU Detection [Y] New PCU Detection [C] New PCU Detection [M] New PCU Detection [K] End End End End New New New New Not end Not end Not end Not end Old Old Old Old

Input Check 15 0 1 2 015 3 4 5 6 7 016 LDU Shutter Sensor Left Cover Sensor Waste Toner Overflow Sensor Close Close Not overflow Open Open Overflow Paper not detected

By-pass Paper Detection Sensor Paper detected By-pass Paper Size Sensor 1 By-pass Paper Size Sensor 2 By-pass Paper Size Sensor 3 By-pass Paper Size Sensor 4 Not used Not used Not used Not used

Input Check 16 3 4 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected Old
G160/G161

0-2

Not used

Transfer Belt New Unit Detection New

SM

5-161

G160/G161

Service Mode Table

SP5-803 -XXX

Bit 5-7 Not used

Description -

Reading 0 1

Input Check 17 017 0-4 5 6-7 Not used Front Door Sensor Not used Close Open -

Input Check 20 0 1 2 020 3 4 5 6 7 Tray 2 Paper Near End Sensor 1 Pushed Tray 2 Paper Near End Sensor 2 Pushed Tray 2 Paper End Sensor Tray 2 Paper Feed Sensor Tray 2 Paper Size 4 Tray 2 Paper Size 3 Tray 2 Paper Size 2 Tray 2 Paper Size 1 End Paper detected Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not end Paper not detected Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed

Input Check 21 0 1 2 021 3 4 5 6 7 Tray 3 Paper Near End Sensor 1 Pushed Tray 3 Paper Near End Sensor 2 Pushed Tray 3 Paper End Sensor Tray 3 Paper Feed Sensor Tray 3 Paper Size 4 Tray 3 Paper Size 3 Tray 3 Paper Size 2 Tray 3 Paper Size 1 End Paper detected Pushed Pushed Pushed Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not end Paper not detected Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed Not Pushed

5.2.4 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE


5804 5804 001 5804 002 5804 003 5804 005 5804 007 5804 008 [Output Check] Fusing Fan H Fusing Fan L PSU Fan Polygon Fan PSU Inner Fan Drive Fan Fusing Unit Fan: High speed Fusing Unit Fan: Low speed PSU Fan Polygon Motor Fan PSU Inner Fan Drive Unit Fan

G160/G161

5-162

SM

Service Mode Table

5804 009 5804 010 5804 011 5804 012 5804 020 5804 022 5804 024 5804 026 5804 030 5804 031 5804 032 5804 033 5804 034 5804 035 5804 036 5804 040 5804 042 5804 044 5804 060 5804 061 5804 062 5804 063 5804 064 5804 065 5804 100 5804 102 5804 104 5804 106 5804 110 5804 112 5804 114 5804 116 5804 118 5804 120

Exit Paper Fan H Polyg. Mir. Motor Exit Paper Fan L Duplex Fan Paper Feed Motor Mono. PCU Motor Color PCU Motor Color Dev. Motor [Y] Toner Motor [C] Toner Motor [M] Toner Motor [K] Toner Motor T. Belt Contact M T. Roll 2 Contact M LDU Shutter Motor Trans. Belt Motor Duplex In Motor Duplex Exit Motor Paper Feed Clutch Relay Clutch Regist. Clutch Develop. Clutch By-pass Solenoid Duplex Solenoid [Y]: Charge DC [C]: Charge DC [M]: Charge DC [K]: Charge DC [Y]: Charge AC [C]: Charge AC [M]: Charge AC [K]: Charge AC Charge AC Trigger [Y]: Develop. DC

Paper Exit Fan: High speed Polygon Mirror Motor Paper Exit Fan: Low speed Duplex Motor Paper Feed/ Fusing Motor Black OPC/ Development Motor Color OPC Motor Color Development Motor Toner Supply Motor [Y] Toner Supply Motor [C] Toner Supply Motor [M] Toner Supply Motor [K] Transfer Belt Contact Motor Transfer Roller Contact Motor LDU Shutter Motor Transfer Belt Unit Motor Inverter Motor Duplex Motor Paper Feed Clutch Relay Transport Clutch Registration Clutch Development Clutch By-pass Solenoid Junction Gate Solenoid Charge Roller DC: Yellow PCU Charge Roller DC: Cyan PCU Charge Roller DC: Magenta PCU Charge Roller DC: Black PCU Charge Roller AC: Yellow PCU Charge Roller AC: Cyan PCU Charge Roller AC: Magenta PCU
G160/G161 G160/G161

Charge Roller AC: Black PCU Charge Roller AC Trigger Development DC: Yellow

SM

5-163

Service Mode Table

5804 122 5804 124 5804 126 5804 130 5804 132 5804 134 5804 136 5804 140 5804 142 5804 200 5804 201 5804 202 5804 203 5804 204 5804 205 5804 210 5804 211 5804 212 5804 220 5804 221 5804 230 5804 231 5804 240 5804 241

[C]: Develop. DC [M]: Develop. DC [K]: Develop. DC [Y]: Transfer Belt [C]: Transfer Belt [M]: Transfer Belt [K]: Transfer Belt T. Roll 2 Posi. T. Roll 2 Nega. [Y]: TD. Sensor Vcnt [C]: TD. Sensor Vcnt [M]: TD. Sensor Vcnt [K]: TD. Sensor Vcnt ID. Sensor LED Toner End Sensor ID. Sensor Left ID. Sensor Center ID. Sensor Right Color PCL Mono. PCL PFU 1 Motor PFU 1 Clutch PFU 2 Motor PFU 2 Clutch

Development DC: Cyan Development DC: Magenta Development DC: Black Transfer Belt Bias: Yellow Transfer Belt Bias: Cyan Transfer Belt Bias: Magenta Transfer Belt Bias: Black Transfer Roller: Positive Voltage Transfer Roller: Negative Voltage TD Sensor Vcnt: Yellow TD Sensor Vcnt: Cyan TD Sensor Vcnt: Magenta TD Sensor Vcnt: Black ID Sensor LED Toner End Sensor ID. Sensor Left ID. Sensor Center ID. Sensor Right Color PCL Monochrome PCL Optional paper tray unit 1 Motor Optional paper tray unit 1 Clutch Optional paper tray unit 2 Motor Optional paper tray unit 2 Clutch

G160/G161

5-164

SM

Firmware Update

5.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE


Firmware updating procedure is the same as G-P1 (G104/G105). For details, refer to the service manual for G-P1.

5.3.1 TYPES OF FIRMWARE


The table lists the programs used by Model G160/161. Location of firmware EGB flash ROM Controller flash ROM Message displayed Engine

Type of firmware 1 2 3 Engine Main System Printer Application NIB Web System

Function Printer engine control Printer system management Feature application NIB management Web service application

Onboard Sys

5.3.2 PRECAUTIONS
Handling SD Cards
Observe the following precautions when handling SD cards: Turn off the main power switch before you insert or remove an SD card. Data in the SD card can be corrupted if you insert or remove an SD card while the main power switch is on. Do not turn off the main power switch during downloading. Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked when you download an application to it. If not, downloading fails and a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs during a firmware upgrade. Keep SD cards in a safe location. Do not store SD cards in these locations: 1. 2. Locations exposed to high temperature, high humidity, direct sunlight, or strong vibration Locations where there are effects from magnetic forces
G160/G161 G160/G161

Do not bend or scratch SD cards. Do not drop SD cards or expose them to shock or vibration.

SM

5-165

SD Card Application Move

5.4 SD CARD APPLICATION MOVE


5.4.1 OVERVIEW
The service program SD Card Appli Move (SP 5873) enables you to copy application programs from an SD card to another SD card. There are two SD card slots (center slot is not used). Model G160/G161 can use slot 1 to store application programs. Slot 3 is for maintenance work and applications for a customer. Because of this, if the application programs are stored in an SD card or more, a) choose one SD card from these SD cards and b) store all the application programs on one card. Use extreme caution when using SD Card Appli Move: 1. The authentication data is transferred with the application program from an SD card to the other SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you copy the application program from this card to another SD card. 2. Do not use an SD card if it has been used for some other work, for example, on a computer. Normal operation is not guaranteed when such SD card is used. 3. Keep the SD card in the place (Note) after you copy the application program from the card to another card. This is because: a) The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program. b) You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future. See Keeping the SD card at the end of this chapter.

5.4.2 MOVE EXEC


The program Move Exec (SP 5873-1) enables you to copy application programs from the original SD card to another SD card. The application programs are copied from slot 3 to slot 1. Note that the authentication data is also copied with the application program (see Overview).

G160/G161

5-166

SM

SD Card Application Move

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Turn off the main power switch. Make sure that an SD card is in slot 1. The application program is copied to SD card in slot 1. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to slot 3. The application program is copied from this SD card. Turn on the main power switch. Start the SP mode. Select SP 5873-1 Move Exec. Follow the messages displayed on the operation panel. Go out of the SP mode. Turn off the main power switch.

10. Remove the SD card from slot 3. 11. Turn on the main power switch. 12. Check that the application programs run normally.

5.4.3 UNDO EXEC


The program Undo Exec (SP 5873-2) enables you to copy application programs from an SD card to the original SD card. You can use this program when, for example, you have mistakenly copied some programs with Move Exec (SP 5873-1). The application programs are copied from slot 1 to slot 3. Note that the authentication data is also copied with the application program (see Overview).

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Turn off the main power switch. Insert the original SD card in slot 3. The application program is copied back to this card. Make sure that the SD card (having stored the application program) is in slot 1. The application program is copied back from this SD card. Turn on the main power switch. Select SP 5873-2 Undo Exec. Follow the messages displayed on the operation panel. Go out of the SP mode.
G160/G161 G160/G161

Start the SP mode.

SM

5-167

SD Card Application Move

9.

Turn off the main power switch.

10. Remove the SD card from slot 3. 11. Turn on the main power switch. 12. Check that the application programs run normally.

5.4.4 KEEPING THE SD CARD

After moving or copying a program, the original SD card must be kept, as proof of purchase. Keep the SD card in the location [A] and secure it with a tape.

G160/G161

5-168

SM

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

Before YOU BEGIN

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS


6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN
This section shows the differences between G104 and G160/G161. For other items procedures, refer to the Service Manual for G104.

SM

6-1

G160/G161

G160/G161

Overview

6.2 OVERVIEW
6.2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. Toner bottle [Y] 2. Toner bottle [C] 3. Toner bottle [M] 4. Toner bottle [K] 5. Transfer Belt Unit 6. Fusing Unit 7. Duplex Unit 8. ID sensor 9. By-pass Feed Table

10. Transfer roller 11. PCU (Photo Conductor Unit) 12. Development Unit 13. Standard tray 14. PSU (Power Supply Unit) 15. Polygon Mirror Motor 16. LDU 17. Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit

The paper path and drive layout of G160/G161 is the same as for the G104.

G160/G161

6-2

SM

Overview

6.2.2 BOARD STRUCTURE

The EGB (Engine Board) controls machine functions along with the CTL (Controller). The IOB (In/Out Board) controls input/output, drivers and input/output connections. The IOB is part of the EGB expansion board. You can only install two of the optional interface boards (IEEE1284, IEEE802.11b, Bluetooth, USB Host and Gigabit Ethernet) at the same time. (You can not install IEEE802.11b and Bluetooth at the same time.) The controller connects to the EGB through the PCI Bus (Peripheral Component Interconnect Bus). 1. EGB (Engine Board): This controls the Engine, the controller interface, image processing, MUSIC (Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval Correction), and input/output. MUSIC is also called Automatic Line Position Adjustment). This controls input/output, and the interfaces with the optional units, and the operation panel. 3. Controller:
G160/G161

2. IOB (Input/Output Board):

SM

6-3

G160/G161

Overview

The controller board controls the following functions: SD card (Option/Service) Memory DIMM IEEE1284 IEEE1394 IEEE802.11b Bluetooth USB 2.0 USB Host Gigabit Ethernet NVRAM HDD PictBridge 4. LD Drive Board: This is the laser diode drive circuit board. 5. IEEE1394 Interface: This lets computers connect to the machine with an IEEE1394 interface. 6. HDD Unit (Option): The HDD unit stores data for the following. Additional software fonts Collation Locked print Sample print Downloaded forms for form overlay 7. Memory DIMM (Standard: 256MB DRAM, Option: 128/256MB DRAM): This increases printer processing memory, and is also used for collation and for soft fonts. 8. Operation Panel Board: Controls the display panel, the LED, and the keypad. 9. IEEE1284 Interface (Option): This is a parallel printer port. 10. USB 2.0: Lets you connect the machine to a computer. 11. Bluetooth (Option): Lets you connect the machine to a computer with a wireless connection. 12. IEEE802.11b wireless LAN (Option): Lets you connect the machine to a computer with a wireless connection.

G160/G161

6-4

SM

Overview

13. USB Host (Option): Lets you connect the machine to a PictBridge standard digital camera. 14. Gigabit Ethernet (Option): This lets computers connect to the machine with a Gigabit Ethernet interface.

SM

6-5

G160/G161

G160/G161

Process Control

6.3 PROCESS CONTROL


6.3.1 OVERVIEW

This machine has the following two forms of process control: Potential control Toner supply control Process control uses the following components: Three ID (image density) sensors (left [A], center [B], and right [C]). Only the center ID sensor is used for process control. The left, center, and right ID sensors are used for line positioning and other adjustments. TD (toner density) sensor in each development unit.

6.3.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL


Overview
Potential control controls development to keep the toner images on the drums at the same density. It does this by compensating for variations in drum chargeability and toner density. The machine uses the ID sensor to measure the reflectivity of the transfer belt and the density of a standard sensor pattern. This is done during the process control self-check. The machine measures these values from the ID sensor output and a reference table in memory. VD: Drum potential without exposure to adjust this, the machine adjusts the charge roller voltage. VB: Development bias VL: Drum potential at the strongest exposure to adjust this, the machine adjusts the laser power.
G160/G161 6-6 SM

Process Control

(Also, VREF is corrected. This is used for toner supply control.) This controls the development potential to make sure that the maximum quantity of toner applied to the drum is constant. If SP 3501 1 is set to "1" (Fixed), the machine does not do the potential control, but uses the following parameters: Development bias adjusted with SP 2212 1 to 8 Charge roller voltage adjusted with SP 2201 1 to 9 Laser power selected with SP 2105 1 to 12. These SPs are not normally adjusted in the field.

Process Control Self-check


This machine does potential control with a procedure that is known as the process control self-check. This procedure is done at these 9 times. 1. Initial This starts automatically at the following times: Immediately after the power is turned on When the machine comes back from energy saver mode 6 hours after the power was turned on (adjusted with SP 3554 1) If absolute humidity changes more than 6 g/m3 (e.g. changes from 23C/ 50% to 27C/ 70%). The humidity threshold can be changed with SP 3554 2. 2. Interval: Job End At the end of a job, process control is done after the interval of time that is set with SP 3555 1, if more than 450 prints were made after the previous process control (this number can be adjusted with SP 3551 1 and 2). At the end of a job, process control is done immediately, if more than 450 prints were made after the previous process control (this number can be adjusted with SP 3551 3 and 4). The default setting of SP 3555 1 is "0". Because of this, there is no difference between these two processes, and the 300-print setting is not used. After process control is done (except for forced process control), the counters are reset to 0. 3. Interval: Interrupt (default: 500) If the machine makes a sequence of 500 or more color prints in the same job, printing stops and process control is done. After it is completed, the machine continues to make prints. 4. Non-use Time (6 hours) This starts before the next print job if the machine has no job for 6 hours. If the non-use time process control is done (N) times after the user turns on the power, it will not be done.
G160/G161

The default value of 500 can be adjusted with SP 3551 5 to 6

SM

6-7

G160/G161

Process Control

N is adjusted with SP 3558. 5. Installation This starts only when this machine turns on at first installation. The machine does this if SP 5950 1 is set to "1" (set in the factory). 6. After Toner End Recovery This starts after recovery from a toner end condition. 7. After Developer Initialization This starts after a developer initialization is done. Developer initialization occurs automatically after a new PCU is installed. 8. After Transfer Belt Unit Initialization This starts after a transfer belt unit initialization is done. Transfer belt unit initialization occurs automatically after a new transfer belt unit is installed. 9. Forced This is done when SP 3820 1 is used.

Process Control Self-Check Procedure


Step 1: VSG Adjustment This machine uses three ID sensors (direct-reflection type). They are located at the left, center, and right of the transfer unit. Only the center ID sensor is used for process control. The ID sensor checks the bare transfer belt's reflectivity and the machine calibrates the ID sensor until its output (known as VSG) is as follows. VSG = 4.0 0.5 Volts This calibration adjusts for the transfer belt's condition and the ID sensor condition, for example, dirt on the belt or ID sensor. Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation The machine mixes the developer and then makes a gradation pattern on the transfer belt for each toner color. The pattern has one square (the sequence is as follows: one black square, one magenta square, one cyan square and one yellow square). Each of the squares is 15.03 mm x 12.23 mm, and is a solid-color square. To make the squares, the machine changes the development bias and charge roller voltage. The difference between development bias and charge roller voltage is always the same. Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection The ID sensor detects the densities of the one solid-color square for each color. This data goes to memory. Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation The quantity of toner on the transfer belt (M/A, mass per unit area, mg/cm2) is calculated for each of the 10 gradations of the sensor pattern. To do this, the machine uses the ID

G160/G161

6-8

SM

Process Control

sensor output value from each gradation of the pattern. Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment

The machine makes a plot of the 10 values of M/A against the development potential that was used to make each of the gradations. Then it makes a line through the 10 points. Then, it finds the development potential that is necessary to put the target M/A of toner on the OPC. This development potential is then used to find the best values of development bias, charge roller voltage and laser power for the machine in its current condition. To do this, it refers to a table in memory. The machine also adjusts VREF (toner density target) at the same time. As a result, the development gamma detected by process control will be the value stored in SP 3561 1 to 4 (do not adjust in the field unless told to do this). After that, the transfer belt cleaning unit cleans the transfer belt.

6.3.3 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL


Toner Supply Control Modes
This machine has four toner supply control modes. They are selected with SP 3301 1 to 4. 1. Fixed supply mode This mode is used when the TD sensor becomes defective. The amount of toner supply can be adjusted with SP 3302 1 -4 if the image density is incorrect (the default setting is 5%). This mode is used when the TD sensor becomes defective. Only the pixel count is used to control toner supply. The amount of toner supply can be adjusted with SP 3306 1 to 4. 3. Proportional control mode 2 (TD sensor)
SM 6-9 G160/G161 G160/G161

2. Proportional control mode 1 (Pixel)

Process Control

This mode is used when the ID sensor at the center becomes defective. Only the TD sensor is used to control toner supply. The amount of toner supply can be adjusted with SP 3306 5 to 8. 4. Hybrid control mode This is the default toner supply control mode. The TD sensor or the pixel count are used in this mode. If the image coverage ratio is less than the value of SP 3701 2 to 5, pixel count is used. If the image coverage ratio is more than the value of SP 3701 2 to 5, the TD sensor is used. But, if SP 3701 1 is "off", then the TD sensor is always used. The default setting for this SP is "off". Because of this, pixel count is not used. The amount of toner supply can be adjusted with SP 3306 9 to 20. The TD sensor is in the PCU. If the TD sensor becomes defective, the technician must replace the PCU. But if this is not possible, the technician can change the toner supply mode with SP 3301 1 to 4.

Low Image Coverage


After process control, toner refresh mode is done (this can be switched off with SP3721-1). It is only done if the percentage of pages (after the previous process control) that had low image coverage is more than the value of SP3721-2. SP 3701-2 to-5 control the limits that the machine uses to detect if the image coverage is low. Toner refresh mode supplies new toner, because there is old toner in the developer after printing many pages that have low image coverage. During toner refresh mode, the machine does the following: 1. 2. 3. Mixes the developer for 5 seconds. Performs an engine free run, which simulates printing of 10 sheets of A4 size paper with the image data (2 by 2) and normal toner supply. Mixes the developer for 10 seconds.

G160/G161

6-10

SM

Process Control

6.3.4 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION

Introduction
Toner Near End To detect toner near-end the machine uses: Pixel count (memory chip on the toner bottle) Toner End To detect toner end the machine uses: Output from the toner end sensor [A]

Toner Near End Detection


The machine uses the pixel count. 1. 2. 3. 4. The controller counts the printed pixels. Then, it calculates the remaining toner quantity from the record in the ID chip for each toner bottle. If the remaining toner quantity is less than 10% of a full bottle, the machine detects toner near-end. The remaining toner quantity and Toner near end are recorded in the ID chip. Toner near-end is displayed. Toner near-end detection uses the pixel counter in the ID chip. If new toner is added to the empty toner bottle, the contents of the ID chip are not reset, so the toner near-end or end condition is not reset. Also, near-end detection cannot be done.
G160/G161

Toner End Detection


The machine detects toner end when the toner end sensor detects toner end 3 times in a row 3.1 seconds after toner was supplied. At this time, Toner end is recorded in the ID

SM

6-11

G160/G161

Process Control

chip.

Toner End Recovery


The machine detects that the toner bottle was replaced if one of the following events occurs during a toner end condition: The top cover is opened and closed. The main switch is turned off and on. The machine then starts to supply toner to the development unit. After this, the machine resets the toner end condition. When Toner near end is detected, Toner end recovery is not done. If there is no Toner end information in the ID chip, the machine detects that there is toner in the toner bottle and Toner end recovery is done.

6.3.5 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION


When the machine detects that a new PCU was installed, it initializes the developer. To do this, the machine mixes the developer for a few seconds, and adjusts VCNT (control voltage for TD sensor) to make VT (TD sensor output) equal to 2.5 0.1 volts. The machine stores this VT as VREF. During PCU initialization, the machine automatically supplies toner because there is no toner in the toner supply pipe at installation. Then the machine does the process control self-check.

G160/G161

6-12

SM

Paper Feed

6.4 PAPER FEED


6.4.1 BY-PASS TRAY FEED AND SIZE DETECTION

Paper Feed Mechanism When the paper detection feeler [A] detects a sheet of paper, the by-pass solenoid [B] unlocks the feed shaft stopper at the left end of the by-pass feed shaft [C]. The by-pass feed shaft has the feed roller [D] and two cams [E]. These cams move the paper support plate [F] up and down and pushes the sheets of paper against the feed roller. Paper Size Detection Mechanism There is no paper size detection mechanism on the by-pass tray in this printer. Paper size on the by-pass tray can be adjusted with the operation panel or printer driver.

SM

6-13

G160/G161

G160/G161

Laser Exposure

6.5 LASER EXPOSURE


6.5.1 LD SAFETY SWITCH

A safety switch turns off when the front cover or the right door is opened. As a result, the relay on the PSU cuts off the power supply (+5V) to the four LD boards. (The electric circuits go through the EGB and IOB.) The LD safety switch system stops the laser beam when the cover is open.

G160/G161

6-14

SM

Laser Exposure

6.5.2 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT


Overview
YY, KK, CC, MM: Spaces between two lines of the same color KY, KC, KM: Spaces between a black line and a color line

During automatic line position adjustment, the line patterns above are made eight times on the transfer belt. The spaces between the lines (YY, KK, CC, MM, KY, KC, KM) are measured by the left, center, and right ID sensors. The controller reads the average of the spaces, and adjusts the following items: Sub scan line position for YCM Main scan line position for KYCM Magnification ratio for KYCM Skew for YCM (see the note below) In this procedure, only the skew for YCM is measured. If you want to adjust it, do the main skew adjustment procedure. (See Replacements and Adjustments Laser Optics LD Unit)
G160/G161

The transfer-belt-cleaning unit cleans the transfer belt after the patterns are measured.

Summary of Each Adjustment


Sub scan line position for YCM

SM

6-15

G160/G161

Laser Exposure

The adjustment of the sub-scan line position for YCM uses the line position for K (color registration). The machine measures the gaps between the lines of each color in the pattern on the transfer belt. If the gaps for a color are not correct, the machine moves the image of the color up or down the sub scan axis. To do this, it changes the laser write timing for that color. Main scan line position for KYCM If the machine detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, it changes the laser-write-start timing for each scan line. Magnification adjustment for KYCM If the machine detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes the LD clock frequency for the necessary color. Skew for YCM The adjustment of the skew for YCM uses the line position for K.

Adjustment Conditions
If SP 2153 1 is set to "1 (ON)", then automatic line position adjustment is done at the times shown below. After process control is done If SP 2153 2 is set to "1 (ON)", then the adjustment is done when the following types of process control are successfully done. Initial process control Interval process control No-use time process control Initialization If SP2153 3 is set to "1 (ON)", then the adjustment is done when the main power is turned on or the machine comes back from the standby mode, but only if one of the following conditions occurs. At a set time after the previous adjustment. The default value is 360 minutes. You can adjust the time with SP 2153 13. When the temperature changes after a previous adjustment by more than a set value. The default value is "5C ". You can adjust the temperature change value with SP 2153 12. Printing If SP 2153 4 is set to "1 (ON)", then the adjustment is done when the machine gets print job data, but only if one of the following conditions occurs. At a set time after the previous adjustment. The default value is 360 minutes. You can adjust the time with SP 2153 13.

G160/G161

6-16

SM

Laser Exposure

When the temperature changed after a previous adjustment by more than a set value. The default value is "5C". You can adjust the temperature change value with SP 2153 12. When the magnification changed after a previous adjustment by more than a set value. The default value is "1%". You can adjust the magnification change value with SP 2153 15. Interrupt If SP 2153 5 is set to "1 (Yes)", then the adjustment is done when the one of the following conditions occurs during a print job with many pages. When the number of printed pages after the previous adjustment becomes more than a set number. The number of pages includes black and color printing. The default value is 190 pages. (If this condition occurs, automatic line position adjustment after the next interval process control will not be cancelled.) You can adjust the default value with SP 2153 10. When the temperature changed after a previous adjustment by more than a set value. The default value is "5C". You can adjust the temperature change value with SP 2153 12. When the magnification changed after a previous adjustment by more than a set value. The default value is "1%". You can adjust the magnification change value with SP 2153 15. Summary Table The below table shows when the automatic line position adjustment is done. It also shows the main SPs that control the timing of the adjustment. If SP 2153 1 is "Off", then the automatic adjustment is never done. Note that the adjustments for the sub-scan line position, main scan line position, and magnification are done at the same time. Enabled/ Disabled (SP 2153 1) On After Process Control (SP 2153 2) ON On Off Off Initialization (SP 2153 3) Printing (SP 2153 4) ON Interrupt (SP 2153 5) On Off On Off On Off On
G160/G161 G160/G161

Remarks

Default

ON Off

SM

6-17

Laser Exposure

Enabled/ Disabled (SP 2153 1)

After Process Control (SP 2153 2)

Initialization (SP 2153 3)

Printing (SP 2153 4)

Interrupt (SP 2153 5) Off Remarks

ON On Off Off ON Off Off Off -

On Off On Off On Off On Off No Adjustment

You can also do the automatic line position adjustment manually with SP 2111 1.

G160/G161

6-18

SM

Fusing

6.6 FUSING
6.6.1 OVERVIEW

1. Fusing tension roller 2. Cleaning roller 3. Pressure lever 4. Pressure roller 5. Hot roller 6. Fusing belt pressure roller system.

7. Heating roller 8. Heating lamp 9. New fusing unit detection fuse 10. Thermistor 11. Thermostat

A belt fusing system is used. This has a faster warm-up time than a standard hot and The heating roller is made of aluminum to increase the temperature of the fusing belt quickly. The hot roller is made of sponge, which becomes a little flat, and this increases the fusing nip. This roller does not contain a heating lamp. The heating roller thermistor controls the temperature of the lamp. Each new fusing unit contains a fuse. A short time after a new fusing unit is installed, this fuse blows. When this occurs, the machine detects that a new fusing unit is
G160/G161

SM

6-19

G160/G161

Fusing

installed.

6.6.2 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL


Overall Procedure

The machine starts to warm up the fusing unit to get the print ready condition. When the heating roller temperature gets to the idling ready temperature [A], the idling procedure starts to warm up the heating roller. The temperature becomes higher than the machine ready temperature [B] and gets to the print ready temperature [C] after the heating roller completes the idling. The temperature increases to the target printing temperature. Then printing starts. If the temperature does not get to the target printing temperature before 30 seconds (SP 1104 22), printing starts. The temperature increases to the first print temperature [G] when the first sheet of paper is printed, but this is only for the first page. After the printing job, the machine turns the heating roller to prevent overheating [F]. You can adjust the fusing temperature settings.

Fusing Roller Idling


This is done at the following three times: 1. Immediately after the power is turned on, or when the machine comes back from energy saver mode, if the fusing unit temperature is less than 100C. This is [E] on the diagram. This idling keeps the heating roller warmed up equally while it is heated. This temperature is controlled with SP 1912 5, and the durations of fusing idling are controlled with SP 1912 6, and 8 to 14 You can also adjust this with SP 1912 2 and SP 1105 43

G160/G161

6-20

SM

Fusing

2.

At the end of a job: [F] This prevents the heating rollers overheating. After printing, the machine turns the heating roller with no heating. You can adjust the setting with SP 1912 7

3.

At intervals of 4 hours if the machine is not used for a long time This prevents the deformation of the hot roller and pressure roller. Controlled by SP 1912 3 (interval) and 4 (duration) Enable/disable this idling feature: SP 1912 1

For fusing idling at the start of a job, the duration and the fusing unit temperature during idling are also corrected for ambient temperature. SP 1917 controls all the corrections. The temperature/humidity sensor measures the room temperature. Corrections are made at the following times: Room temperature is below 18C (L threshold, controlled by SP 1917 8) Room temperature is above 30C (H threshold, controlled by SP 1917 7)

Idling Ready Temperature before First Print Job: [A]


This is the idling ready temperature for the heating roller before the first print job. You can adjust the setting with SP 1912 5. The default is 100C. If the heating roller temperature does not reach this temperature within 15 seconds after the heating lamp turns on, SC 542 occurs.

Machine Ready Temperature: [B]


You can adjust the setting with SP 1913 2. The default is 150C.

Print ready temperature: [C]


You can adjust the setting with SP 1105 22. The default is 160C.

Target Printing Temperature: [D]


This is adjusted by the value stored in SP 1104 23. This value is added to the print ready temperature. The default is "5C (G160)/ 10C (G161)".

First Print Temperature: [G]


When the machine prints the first page, the heating roller temperature can easily decrease. If necessary, you can increase the temperature for the first page. This is a good adjustment for cold environments. If fusing is not sufficient for the first page of a job, adjust these SPs: Temperature increase for the first page of a job: SP 1104 25 This value is added to the Duration for application of the temperature increase: SP 1104 26 The increase is applied if the interval between jobs is greater than these values: OHP, Thick paper, or 1200 x 1200 dpi: SP 1104 24
SM 6-21 G160/G161 G160/G161

target printing temperature. The default is "2C (G160)/ 8C (G161)".

Fusing

Other types of job: SP 1104 27

Corrections for Small Paper Sizes (less than A5)


These corrections prevent too much heating of the fusing unit when paper widths less than A5 are used. In multi-page printing with this size of paper, the heating rollers temperature is not the same in all areas because the small size paper does not go through the two ends of the heating roller. The temperature of locations that do not touch the paper becomes higher than other locations during multi-page printing. The following corrections decrease this problem. Print speed: This is decreased after 15 pages. Then, 30 seconds after this, the print speed increases to the standard temperature again. You can adjust this with SP 1911 1 to 3. Fusing temperature: This is decreased in three stages, as shown below. Decreased by 2C after 30 pages (G160)/ 25 pages (G161) are printed (controlled by SP 1911 4 and 14) Decreased by 5C again after 20 more pages (G160)/ 10 more pages (G161) are printed (controlled by SP 1911 6 and 16) Reduced by 5C again after 50 more pages (G160)/ 15 more pages (G161) are printed (controlled by SP 1911 8 and 18) There are also temperature reductions for one-sided printing and two-sided printing. One sided printing: The temperature is decreased in two steps as shown below After 100 pages, decreased by 2C (controlled by SP 1911 21 and 23) After 30 more pages (G160)/ 15 more pages (G161), decreased by 5C (controlled by SP 1911 22 and 24) Duplex printing: The temperature is decreased in two steps as shown below After 80 pages, decreased by 2C (controlled by SP 1911 25 and 27) After 20 more pages (G160)/ 10 more pages (G161), decreased by 5C (controlled by SP 1911 26 and 28)

Overheat Protection
If the heating roller temperature becomes higher than 230C, the CPU cuts off the power to the heating lamp and SC543 shows. If 250C is detected, the thermostat is opened, and then the heating lamp power is cut off. SC545 shows. If the thermistor output is less than 0C for six seconds, SC541 occurs. If the heating lamp gets full power for 8 seconds after the heating roller gets to the print ready temperature, SC545 occurs.
G160/G161 6-22 SM

Fusing

6.6.3 DRIVE

After the toner image is transferred to the paper [A], it goes through the fusing unit. The fusing unit contains the heating roller [B]. The heating lamp [C] applies heat to the heat roller. The heat roller applies heat to the fusing belt [D] to melt the toner on the paper. The paper receives pressure between the fusing belt and the pressure roller [E], and melted toner bonds to the paper. When the paper goes out of the fusing unit, it goes to the exit tray. The fusing exit sensor [F] detects paper jams.

SM

6-23

G160/G161

G160/G161

Controller

6.7 CONTROLLER
6.7.1 OVERVIEW

The controller uses GW (Ground Work) architecture. 1. 2. CPU: PMC RM7035C (598 MHz) TRUMPET: GW architecture ASIC. It controls the interface with the CPU and controls these functions: memory, local bus interrupts, PCI bus, video data, HDD, SD card for booting and image processing. 3. 4. QUENA: IO control ASIC. It controls the network, operation panel, USB port, SD cards. SDRAM DIMM (2 slots): Model G-P2a/P2b: 256 MB SDRAM (resident) Can be increased to 512 MB with the optional SDRAM (128/256 MB SDRAM). 5. Flash ROM: 32 MB flash ROM programmed for the boot system. This includes the program for system, network application, printer, PCL5c, PS3 and RPCS applications and internal printer fonts. 6. NVRAM: 32 KB FRAM for the printer parameters, logged data and a

G160/G161

6-24

SM

Controller

record of the number of pages printed for each User Code. 7. 8. 9. NVRAM board (option): 96KB NVRAM increases the number of User Codes form 100 to 500. Network Interface: 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T USB Interface: USB2.0

10. IEEE 1394 Interface: Supports a data transfer speed of up to 400 Mbps. 11. IEEE 1284 Interface (option): This is the parallel printer port. 12. IEEE 802.11b (option): This lets you connect the printer to a wireless network. 13. Bluetooth (option): This lets you connect the printer to a Bluetooth network. 14. HDD: A 2.5 HDD (40 GB) can be connected using the IDE interface. 15. SD Card slots: Slots #1 to #3, numbered from right to left.

Slot #1: Customers application (for example, PostScript 3) or Service use (for example, firmware upgrade), customers application Slot #2: This slot is not used in this printer. Slot #3: Service use only The system and application software for the following boards can be downloaded from SD cards connected to slot #3. Controller (Flash ROM and SD card for boot) EGB (Engine board) See the Service Tables Firmware Update Procedure for details on downloading software from the SD card. An SD Card programmed with an additional application can be installed in SD Card slot #3. If an additional application cannot be merged onto the card on slot #1, then use slot #3 for that additional application. If possible, keep slot #3 empty for the firmware update.
G160/G161 SM 6-25 G160/G161

Controller

6.7.2 BOARD LAYOUT

DIP Switches: Factory use only. Keep DIP SW 1 ON and the other switches OFF.

G160/G161

6-26

SM

SPECIFICATIONS

Specifications

7. SPECIFICATIONS
7.1 SPECIFICATIONS
7.1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G160/G161 Configuration: Print Process: Desktop Laser beam scanning & Electro photographic printing 4 drums tandem method PictBridge, RPCS (Refined Printing Printer Languages: Command Stream), PCL5c/e, PCL-XL, Adobe PostScript 3, PDF Resolution: RPCS: 1200 x 1200 dpi*, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi 1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi 600 x 600 dpi 300 x 300 dpi 1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi 1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi 1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream), PCL5c/e, PCL-XL, Adobe PostScript 3, PDF G104/G105

PCL5c/e: 600 x 600 dpi 300 x 300 dpi PCL-XL: Adobe PS 3: PDF: 1200 x 1200 dpi*, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi 1200 x 1200 dpi*, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi 1200 x 1200 dpi*, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi

PictBridge: 1200 x 1200 dpi*, 1200 x 600 dpi *For P2a (G160) machine, the optional memory must be installed to print in 1200 x 1200 dpi mode. Gradations: 1 bit, 256 gradations

G161

G160

G104/ G105

G161

G160

G104/ G105

SM

7-1

G160/G161

G160/G161

Specifications

G161 Printing Speeds [Monochrome] 600 x 600 dpi (ppm) 1200 x 600 dpi (ppm) 1200 x 1200 dpi (ppm) Printing Speeds [Color] 600 x 600 dpi (ppm) 1200 x 600 dpi (ppm) 1200 x 1200 dpi (ppm) 30 30 15 30 30 15

G160 Plain Paper 25 25 12.5 Plain Paper 25 25 12.5

G104/ G105

G161

G160 Thick/OHP

G104/ G105

25 25 12.5

15 15 15

12.5 12.5 12.5 Thick/OHP

25 25 12.5

25 25 12.5

15 15 15

12.5 12.5 12.5

25 25 12.5

G160/G161 PCL5c: 45 Manager Intelli fonts 13 TrueType fonts Resident Fonts: 1 Bitmap font Adobe PostScript 3: 136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts) Ethernet (10/100 Base-TX): Standard USB2.0: Standard IEEE1394 (SCSI print, IP over 1394): Standard Host Interfaces: IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN): Optional Parallel (IEEE1284: Optional): Optional Bluetooth (Wireless): Optional USB Host: Optional Gigabit Ethernet: Optional Network Protocols: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk PCL5c:

G104/G105 35 Manager Intelli fonts 10 TrueType fonts 1 Bitmap font Adobe PostScript 3: 136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts) Ethernet (10/100 Base-TX): Standard USB2.0: Standard IEEE1394 (SCSI print, IP over 1394): Optional IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN): Optional Parallel (IEEE1284: Optional): Optional Bluetooth (Wireless): Optional

G160/G161

7-2

SM

Specifications

G160/G161 Color: 15 seconds or less (from First Print Speed: tray 1) Black & White: 10 seconds or less (from tray 1) Warm-up Time Print Paper Capacity: (80 g/m , 20lb) Print Paper Size:
2

G104/G105

Less than 30 seconds (at 23C/50%) Standard tray: 550 sheets By-pass tray: 100 sheets Optional paper feed tray: 550 sheets (See "Supported Paper Sizes".)

Standard Tray A4 / B5 / 8.5" x 11" / 8.5" x 14" (SEF) By-pass: Minimum 90 x 148 mm By-pass: Maximum 216 x 356 mm Optional Tray A4 / B5 / 8.5" x 11" / 8.5" x 14" (SEF) Standard tray, Optional paper tray, and bypass tray: One-sided: 52-216 g/m2 (16-55 lb) Duplex: 60-157 g/m2 (16-43 lb) Paper weight settings at printer Printing Paper Weight: driver and operation panel: Thin: 52 60.2 g/m2 Plain paper 1 (Plain): 60.2 90.2 g/m2 Plain paper 2 (Plain & Recycled): 90.2 104.7 g/m2 Thick paper 1: 104.7 157 g/m2 Thick paper 2: 157 216 g/m2 Output Paper Capacity: Standard exit tray: 500 sheets (face down) Up to 512 MB with optional Memory 512 MB with optional Unit Memory Unit
G160/G161

Standard 256 MB. Memory:

Standard 128/256 MB. Up to

SM

7-3

G160/G161

Specifications

G160/G161 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 11 A (for Power Source: North America) 220 V - 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 6 A (for Europe/Asia) 120 V: 990 W or less Power Consumption: Noise Emission: (Sound Power Level, The measurements were ISO9296 at the operator position.) Dimensions (W x D x H): Weight: 220-240 V: 1200 W or less Energy Saver: 6 W or less Printing Mainframe Only: 63 dB or less Full System: 67 dB or less Mainframe Only: 40 dB or less Full System: 40 dB or less 446 x 589.5 x 487 mm (17.4" x 23.2" x 19.2") Less than 50 kg (110.3 lb.)

G104/G105

made in accordance with Stand-by

7.1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES


Main Tray NA N Y N Y# N Y# N Y# N Y# N Y E/A N Y N Y N Y N Y# N Y# N Y N Y N Y# N N N Y# N Y# N Y PFU NA E/A N Y N Y N N N Y# N Y# N Y N Y# N Y# N Y# N Y# N Y# N Y# By-pass Tray NA N Y# N Y# N Y# N Y# N Y# N Y# E/A

Paper A3 A4 SEF A4 LEF A5 SEF A5 LEF A6 SEF B4 SEF B5 SEF B5 LEF B6 SEF Ledger Letter SEF

Size (W x L) 297 x 420 mm 210 x 297 mm 297 x 210 mm 148 x 210 mm 210 x 148 mm 105 x 148 mm 257 x 364 mm 182 x 257 mm 257 x 182 mm 128 x 182 mm 11" x 17" 8.5" x 11"

Duplex N Y N Y N Y N Y N Y N Y

G160/G161

7-4

SM

Specifications

Paper Letter LEF Legal SEF Half Letter SEF Executive SEF Executive LEF F SEF Foolscap SEF Folio SEF 8K 16K SEF 16K LEF Custom (Width) Custom (Length) Postcard Double postal card Com10 Env. Monarch Env. C6 Env. C5 Env. DL Env.

Size (W x L) 11" x 8.5" 8.5" x 14" 5.5" x 8.5" 7.25" x 10.5" 10.5" x 7.25" 8" x 13" 8.5" x 13" 8.25" x 13" 267 x 390 mm 195 x 267 mm 267 x 195 mm 70 x 216 mm *1 5.5" x 14" *2 14" ~ 900 mm 100 x 148 mm 200 x 148 mm 4.125" x 9.5" 3.875" x 7.5" 114 x 162 mm 162 x 229 mm 110 x 220 mm

Main Tray NA N Y Y Y N Y# Y# Y# N Y# N Y# Y# N Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# E/A N Y Y# Y N Y# Y# Y# N Y# N Y# Y# N Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# N Y Y Y N Y# Y# Y# N Y# N Y# Y# N N Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y#

PFU NA E/A N Y Y# Y N Y# Y# Y# N Y# N Y# Y# N N Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# N

By-pass Tray NA N Y# Y# Y# N Y# Y# Y# N Y# N Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# E/A

Duplex N Y Y Y N Y Y Y N Y N N N N N N N N N N N

Y# Y# Y# N Y# Y# Y# N Y# N Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y# Y#

*1: This size is only for the by-pass tray. The size for the main tray and OPU is 98 mm. *2: This size is only for the main tray and by-pass tray. The size for OPU is 148 mm. Y: Supported: the sensor detects the paper size. Y#: Supported: the user specifies the paper size. N: Not supported

7.1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES


The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer
G160/G161 G160/G161

allows you to select which components to install.

SM

7-5

Specifications

Printer Drivers
Printer Language PCL 5c/6 PS3 RPCS Windows 95/98/ME Yes Yes Yes Windows NT4.0 Yes Yes Yes Windows 2000 Windows XP Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Macintosh No Yes No

The printer drivers for Windows NT 4.0 are only for the Intel x86 platform. There is no Windows NT 4.0 printer driver for the PowerPC, Alpha, or MIPS platforms. The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows 2000, which uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each operating system is provided with the driver. The PS3 driver for Macintosh supports Mac OS 7.6 or later versions.

Utility Software
Software Font Manager 2000 (Win95/98/Me, NT4.0, A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer 2000, XP, Server2003) Smart Device Monitor for Admin 2000, XP, Server2003) Smart Device Monitor for Client A printer management utility for client users. A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP/IP network. A printer management utility for network administrators. NIB setup (Win95/98/Me, NT4.0, utilities are also available. Description

(Win95/98/Me, NT4.0, A peer to peer print utility over a TCP/IP network. This provides the 2000, XP, Server2003) parallel printing and recovery printing features. Printer Utility for Mac (Mac) IEEE1394 Utility (Win2000, XP, Server2003) DeskTopBinder V2 Lite (Win95/98, 2000, NT4, XP, Server2003) DeskTopBinder V2 Lite itself can be used as personal document management software and can manage both image data converted from paper documents and application files saved in each clients PC. This utility solves problems with Windows 2000, XP, Server2003. This software provides several convenient functions for printing from Macintosh clients.

G160/G161

7-6

SM

Specifications

7.1.4 MACHINE CONFIGURATION


Item Main Unit Paper Feed Unit 128 MB DIMM Memory 256 MB DIMM Memory NVRAM Memory IEEE1284 I/F Board IEEE802.11b Board Bluetooth Board USB Host Gigabit Ethernet HDD Type 4000 Data Overwrite Security Unit PictBridge VM Card Data Storage Card Machine Code G160/G161 G392 B584 G818 G395-57 B679 EU/ASIA: G813-45 NA: G874-39 B826 B825 G874-01 G395-17 G874-21 G874-19 G874-08 G874-36 Common with model G-P1 Remarks G160: 25 ppm, G161: 30 ppm Up to two tray units can be installed. Common with model G-P1 Common with model G-P1 Common with model G-P1 Common with model G-P1

Of IEEE1284, IEEE802.11b, and Bluetooth, two can be installed at the same time.

SM

7-7

G160/G161

G160/G161

G392 PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 4000

PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 4000 G392


TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................1


1.1 PAPER FEED UNIT ..................................................................................... 1 1.2 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND DRIVE BOARD .............................................. 2 1.2.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR........................................................................ 2 1.2.2 DRIVE BOARD .................................................................................... 2 1.3 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ............................................................................... 3 1.4 SENSORS .................................................................................................... 4 1.4.1 PAPER END, PAPER NEAR END, AND PAPER FEED SENSORS........................................................................................... 4 Paper feed sensor.................................................................................... 4 Paper end and paper near end sensors................................................... 4 1.4.2 PAPER SIZE DETECTION SWITCH................................................... 4 1.5 PAPER FEED ROLLER ............................................................................... 5 1.6 FRICTION PAD ............................................................................................ 5

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ............................................................6


2.1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ......................................................... 6 2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.............................................. 6 2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ............................................... 7 2.2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS........................................................................ 8 2.2.1 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ..................................................... 8 2.2.2 PAPER LIFT ........................................................................................ 9 2.2.3 PAPER NEAR-END/END DETECTION............................................. 10 Paper near end detection....................................................................... 10 Paper end detection............................................................................... 10 2.2.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION................................................................ 11

SM

G392

PAPER FEED UNIT

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before attempting any of the procedures in this section. NOTE: This manual uses several symbols. The meanings of those symbols are as follows: : C ring : screw : connector/harness

1.1 PAPER FEED UNIT


[A]

[C]

[a]

[B]

G392R103.WMF

Remove the paper tray unit from the main unit. Pull out the paper tray. [A]: Upper plate ( x 5) NOTE: Screw [a] is blue. [B]: Right upper cover ( x 5, x 1) [C]: Paper feed unit ( x 7, x 2)
Paper Feed Unit Type 4000 1 G392

SM

PAPER FEED MOTOR AND DRIVE BOARD

1.2 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND DRIVE BOARD

[B]

[A]

G392R104.WMF

1.2.1 PAPER FEED MOTOR


Remove the paper feed unit. [A]: Paper feed motor ( x 2, x 1)

1.2.2 DRIVE BOARD


Remove the paper feed unit. [B]: Drive board ( x 2, x 3, Clip x 2)

G392

SM

PAPER FEED CLUTCH

1.3 PAPER FEED CLUTCH


[C] [B]

[A]

G392R105.WMF

Remove the paper feed unit. [A]: Disconnect the clutch harness. [B]: Side plate ( x 4) [C]: Paper feed clutch NOTE: Make sure to properly secure the clutch before completing installation.

SM

G392

Paper Feed Unit Type 4000

SENSORS

1.4 SENSORS
1.4.1 PAPER END, PAPER NEAR END, AND PAPER FEED SENSORS
Remove the paper tray unit from the main unit. [C] Pull out the paper tray. [B] [D]

Paper feed sensor [A]: Paper feed sensor Paper end and paper near end sensors [B]: Sensor holder ( x 1) [C]: Paper near end sensors ( x 1 each) [D]: Paper end sensor ( x 1)

[A]

G392R101.WMF

1.4.2 PAPER SIZE DETECTION SWITCH


NOTE: When you remove the rear cover, it is not necessary to remove the paper tray unit from the main unit. [E]: Rear cover ( x 4) [F]: Paper size detection switch ( x 1) [E]

[F]
G392R102.WMF

G392

SM

PAPER FEED ROLLER

1.5 PAPER FEED ROLLER

[B] [A]
G392R106.WMF

Pull out the paper tray [A]: Paper feed roller (move the lever [B] to the right)

1.6 FRICTION PAD

[A]

G392R107.WMF

Pull out the paper tray [A]: Friction pad

SM

G392

Paper Feed Unit Type 4000

OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
2.1 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

G392D100.WMF

5 1. Side fence 2. Paper pickup roller 3. Friction pad 4. Bottom plate 5. End fence

G392

SM

OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

7 6 5 4 3

G392D101.WMF

1. Paper size detection switch 2. Drive board 3. Paper feed clutch 4. Paper feed motor

5. Paper feed sensor 6. Paper end sensor 7. Paper near end sensor 1 8. Paper near end sensor 2

SM

G392

Paper Feed Unit Type 4000

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

2.2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS


2.2.1 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION
[D]

[C]

[A]

[B]

G392D103.WMF

The paper tray holds 550 sheets of paper. The paper feed unit uses a friction pad system. The paper feed motor [A] drives the paper feed roller [B] and paper transfer rollers [C]. The paper feed clutch [D] transfers drive from the motor to the paper feed roller.

G392

SM

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

2.2.2 PAPER LIFT


[B]

[C]

[E]

[A]

[D] [A] [F]


G105D128.WMF

The tray arm [A] moves up on the guide slopes [B] of the machine when the tray is set in the machine. The springs [C] lift the bottom plate [D] and the paper stack [E] on the plate. The stack of paper contacts the paper feed roller, and this keeps the top sheet of the stack at the correct paper height. The paper pressure lever [F] adjusts the bottom plate pressure. When you load thin paper (52 ~ 74 g/m2, 14 ~ 19 lb), slide this lever to the right. The default position is to the left.

SM

G392

Paper Feed Unit Type 4000

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

2.2.3 PAPER NEAR-END/END DETECTION

[B]

[F]

[D]

[C]
G392D104.WMF

[A]

[E]

Paper near end detection Two paper near-end sensors [A], [B] detect the quantity of remaining paper in the tray. When the quantity of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever [C] moves up and the actuator [D] turns. The machine detects the quantity of remaining paper with the outputs from the paper near-end sensors, as shown in the table below.
Remaining paper Full ~ 450 450 ~ 250 250 ~ 50 50 ~ 0 Near end sensor 1 [A] ON ON OFF OFF Near end sensor 2 [B] OFF ON ON OFF

OFF: No actuator

Paper end detection When the paper tray is empty, the paper end feeler [E] falls into the hole in the bottom plate and the paper end sensor [F] turns on.

G392

10

SM

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

2.2.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION

1 2 3 4
[A]

[D]

[B] [C]
G392D106.WMF

The paper size detection switch [A] is at the rear of the machine. The machine disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected (if the paper size actuator is broken or no tray is installed) The actuator [B] is on the slide plate [C] that engages with the end fence [D]. When the end fence moves, the actuator moves from side to side. The machine detects the paper size with the outputs from the paper size detection switch, as shown in this table.
Paper Size LG SEF A4 SEF LT SEF US. EXE SEF B5 SEF A5 SEF/ HLT SEF A5 LEF/ HLT LEF Switch Location 2 3 Push Push Push Push Push Push Push Push

SM

11

G392

Paper Feed Unit Type 4000

1 Push Push Push Push -

4 Push Push Push